JP6841564B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Patent Document 1) has been proposed. The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effect by such a light emitting means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a new embodiment in which a light-emitting effect suppresses a decline in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object , the present invention
While proceeding with the game based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A decorative board on which multiple electronic components are mounted,
It is a game machine equipped with
Among the decorative substrates, a multicolor light emitter capable of emitting light in multiple colors is mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific decorative substrate.
The surface mounting surface of the specific decorative substrate has a specific notation portion in which a white coating film is formed on substantially the entire surface and is formed in yellow on the white coating film so that the multicolor light emitter can be specified. However, only electronic components with a white exterior are mounted.
A specific electronic component having an exterior color different from white is mounted on the back mounting surface of the specific decorative substrate on which the multicolor light emitter is not mounted.
The multicolor light emitter associated with the specific notation portion formed in yellow increases the emission brightness of the multicolor light emitter by operating an operation unit arranged on the front side of the game machine. The emission brightness can be adjusted by using the means or the emission brightness lowering means for lowering the emission brightness of the multicolor light emitter.
It is characterized by that.
Further, as an invention different from the present invention, the following means will be disclosed for reference.
(Solution 1)
An opening / closing part that constitutes the front side of the game machine and has a window part for making a predetermined game area visible.
It is provided with a front decorative portion that is located on the front side of a predetermined portion of the opening / closing portion and is arranged so as to project forward from the window portion.
The front decorative portion is configured to be changeable between a gameable state in which an operation for directing is possible and a maintenance state in which an operation for directing is not possible.
Further, a specific detection unit for detecting that the front decorative portion is incompletely attached is provided.
Further, a specific notification unit for notifying that the front decorative portion is incompletely attached is provided.
Further, the game machine is characterized in that the power supply path used for electrical connection to the front decorative portion is configured by using a drawer connector without using a harness.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of further improving the interest as compared with the conventional one.

(Solution 2)
The game machine of the solution 1 characterized in that the maintenance state of the front decorative portion is a state in which the front decorative portion moves to a position where it does not overlap with the opening / closing trajectory of the opening / closing portion and stands by.
According to such a game machine, the front decorative portion in the maintenance state stands by at a position that does not overlap with the opening / closing trajectory of the opening / closing portion, that is, is separated from the opening / closing of the opening / closing portion. There is almost no risk of contact with a person, and the opening / closing part can be opened / closed lightly without the risk of interference with an adjacent game machine or the like.

(Solution 3)
The maintenance state of the front decorative portion 1 or 2 is characterized in that the surface of the front decorative portion in the playable state on the side facing the front portion is exposed to the outside. Game machine.
According to such a game machine, it is possible to easily check for defects and repair from the surface where the front decorative portion is playable and is not exposed to the outside.

(Solution 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3, wherein the front decorative portion changes to the maintenance state by moving in a direction different from the opening / closing of the opening / closing portion.
According to such a game machine, since the maintenance state is changed by a conspicuous movement in a direction different from the opening / closing of the opening / closing part, it is easy to understand that the front decorative part is in the maintenance state even from a distance. Therefore, it is easy to detect fraudulent acts that are carried out with the front decorative portion in a maintenance state, which also serves as a deterrent to fraud.

(Solution 5)
The opening / closing portion is a gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein the opening / closing portion can be opened on condition that the front decorative portion is changed to the maintenance state by a predetermined release operation.
According to such a game machine, when an attempt is made to cheat by opening the opening / closing part, it is necessary to release the front decorative part as a premise, so that fraud is difficult to be performed and it takes time to perform fraudulent work. It will be easier to find.

(Solution 6)
The opening / closing part can be opened by a toolless opening operation part that does not require any tool including a key, and when the front decorative part changes to the maintenance state by a predetermined release operation, the opening operation part The gaming machine of the solution 5, characterized in that is exposed to the outside and can be opened.
According to such a game machine, when an attempt is made to perform an illegal work with the opening / closing part open, it is necessary to release the front decorative part as a premise, so that the illegal work is difficult to be performed and the illegal work takes time. It will be easier to find.
On the other hand, since the opening / closing part does not require a tool to open the opening operation part, the employee or the like only needs to carry a key, for example, necessary for the opening operation of the front decoration part. There is no need for it, and there is no need for employees to carry around multiple tools together or to extract a specific tool from multiple tools.

By the way, since the front decorative portion of the conventional game machine is attached to the front side of the opening / closing portion with a plurality of screws, it takes time to attach / detach the front decorative portion. Therefore, once a problem occurs in the front decorative portion, it takes time to remove the front decorative portion and repair or replace it with a new one, so that there is a problem that the game machine cannot be used for a long time.
Therefore, effective solution means A to D for solving such a problem are shown below.
(Solution A)
An openable / closable opening / closing part that constitutes the front side and has a window part for making the game area visible.
It is provided with a front decorative portion provided in an arrangement region formed in at least a part around the window portion, located on the front side of the opening / closing portion, and arranged so as to project forward from the window portion. It ’s a game machine,
The front decorative portion is formed to be detachably attached to the arrangement area and is locked to the arrangement area by a toolless locking portion that does not require a tool for the attachment / detachment operation.
The feature is that the locking portion is changed to a state in which the locking portion can be attached / detached by a predetermined release operation, and the locking portion is operated in that state to enable attachment / detachment of the front decorative portion to the arrangement area. A game machine to play.

According to such a game machine, since the front decorative portion is locked by a toolless locking portion that does not require a tool for attachment / detachment operation, for example, only the defective front decorative portion is removed from the arrangement area and placed on the spot. You can replace it with a substitute and restart the game quickly. Of course, it is easy to change the front decoration part to a new model.
On the other hand, the toolless locking portion that locks the front decorative portion can be attached / detached on the premise of a predetermined release operation such as the opening / closing portion or the front decorative portion itself, so that even if the locking portion is a tool. Even if it is less, there is almost no risk that it will be removed by anyone other than a specific person, such as an employee of the amusement park.

(Solution B)
The gaming machine of the solution A, characterized in that the locking portion can be attached / detached from the back side of the opening / closing portion only when the opening / closing portion that can be opened by a predetermined release operation is in the open state.
According to such a game machine, the locking portion can be attached / detached from the back side of the opening / closing portion only when the opening / closing portion that can be opened by a predetermined release operation is in the open state. There is almost no risk of being removed by anyone other than a specific person who can perform the release operation.

(Solution C)
The locking portion is characterized in that a plurality of types having different locking structures are mixed with respect to one front decorative portion, and the operation order for each type at the time of attachment / detachment can be identified by a mark portion. Solution A or B gaming machine.
According to such a game machine, for example, a plurality of types of locking portions having different locking structures, such as a locking structure having excellent reliability and a locking structure having excellent workability by one-touch operation, are provided. By mixing them, it is possible to achieve both the certainty of locking and the workability of attachment / detachment.
Further, in such a case, the operation order for each type at the time of preferable attachment / detachment, for example, the locking structure having excellent workability is removed at once and it is difficult to take measures to prevent the front decorative portion from falling, so it is removed first and the engagement is excellent in reliability. It is possible to recognize from the display of the mark portion that the stopper structure will be removed later because there is time to take measures to prevent the front decorative portion from falling while being removed.

(Solution D)
In the arrangement area, a reference effect portion is formed toward the front side.
On the other hand, in the front decorative portion, a storage space is formed at a position where the front decorative portion overlaps with the reference effect portion in a state of being attached to the arrangement region.
One of the solutions A to C, wherein the reference effect unit constitutes at least a part of the effect means of the front surface decoration unit in a state where the front surface decoration unit is attached to the arrangement area. Amusement machine.
According to such a game machine, even if the front decorative portion is changed due to a specification change or the like, the reference effect portion can be reused as it is, so that the cost of replacing the front decorative portion and the cost of changing the effect control can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in gaming.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It shows another form, and is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. FIG. 9 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line nullification member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member, and (b) is a sectional plan view of the foul cover unit. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the main part of FIG. 45 showing the normal flow of the game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. .. It is a top view of the foul cover unit. It is a top view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the foul ball passes. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A) and (b) show the state in which the operation line invalidation member is electrified, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing the state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the right side. It is the upper right side view of the pachinko machine which shows the door frame top unit. It is the upper right side view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which the door frame top unit changed to the maintenance state. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd locking unit. It is the upper right side view of the pachinko machine which shows the door frame top unit of another form. It is the upper right side view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which the door frame top unit of another form has changed to the maintenance state. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is a rear view of the payout device for demonstrating the rotation position of a payout vane. It is a rear view of the payout device for demonstrating the prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. This is a modified example of the payout device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 120 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 120 (a) viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view cut along line CC of FIG. 118 (a). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the third embodiment). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board of FIG. 131. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board which shows another form. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board which shows another form. (A) and (b) are enlarged front views of the main part of the game board showing other forms. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board which shows another form. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board which shows another form. It is a partially enlarged front view of the game board of FIG. 137. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board which shows the modification of FIG. 132. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. Is a schematic view of a function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a perspective view of the main control unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit. It is a front view of the main part enlarged part of a main control unit. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ of FIG. 144F. FIG. 144F is a front view of an enlarged portion of a main part of the main control unit showing a state in which the change suppressing means has changed to the second state. It is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of a main control unit. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of a main control unit. It is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decorative body and the like. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of XX line of FIG. 148. It is a view of arrow A of FIG. 148. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the structure of the frame grounding board. It is a schematic diagram of the handling of a conductor floating with respect to the earth provided in various production units provided in a game board. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a power supply board. It is a B arrow view of FIG. 155. This is silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board (No. 1). This is silk printing (No. 2) of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of the discontinued electronic component. This is a configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of wiring to a substrate treated as a main substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in a door frame. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D part of FIG. 167. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D'part of FIG. 169 or the D'part of FIG. 170. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ″ section of FIG. 172. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 175. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 181. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a central vertical sectional view of a game board including a partially enlarged view. It is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 195 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 195 is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion shown by the arrow. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. It is an enlarged view of the Z3 part of FIG. 198. It is an end face front view of the game board which cut the middle in the thickness direction of a light guide plate. It is the front view which disassembled and arranged with the front view of the game panel and the center member which omitted the back decoration member. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the base panel and the front enclosure member of a game panel. It is a perspective view which shows the base panel and the back decorative member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the base panel and the back decorative member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the production support frame and the drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the rear cover of an effect unit. It is a central vertical sectional view of the main part explaining the moving state of a drum. It is an enlarged view of the Z4 part of FIG. 191. It is a partially enlarged front view of a door frame showing a handle unit. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 212. It is an exploded sectional view which shows the handle unit. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of the door frame which shows other form of a handle unit. It is a front view of a pachinko machine equipped with two handle units. It is a perspective view of the door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is an enlarged view of the Z5 part of FIG. 217. It is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame which shows the handle unit on the right side when facing FIG. 216. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT of FIG. 220. It is sectional drawing of the handle unit which shows the state which linearly moved from FIG. 221. It is an exploded sectional view which shows the handle unit. It is sectional drawing which corresponds to the TT line of FIG. 220 which shows the handle unit on the left side when facing FIG. 216. It is sectional drawing of the handle unit which shows the state which linearly moved from FIG. 224. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of FIG. 225. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of the door frame which shows other form of a handle unit. It is the enlarged perspective view of the main part which looked at the upper part of a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the enlarged perspective view of the main part which looked at the upper part of a pachinko machine from the back. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is the enlarged right side view of the main part of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is the enlarged right side view of the main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine which shows the deformation example of the front top top plate. It is the enlarged right side view of the main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine which shows another form of the front top top plate. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a partially enlarged front view which shows the lower half part of the game board of FIG. 234. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the rear on the opposite side of FIG. 239. It is a central vertical sectional view including a partially enlarged view. It is a combination plan cross-sectional view in which the cutting position is changed around the lower game zone of the game board. It is a perspective view of the 3rd display device. It is a front view of the 3rd display device. It is a front view of the 3rd display device which shows the changed state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the 3rd display device. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear surface side of the 3rd display device. It is a perspective view which shows by disassembling the lower game zone of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the lower-layer game zone of the game board viewed from the direction different from FIG. 247 by disassembling. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a sorting device of a third sorting unit, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a sorting device showing a state of a game ball subjected to vibration by an external force. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of the ball rolling member which shows the other form of the ball guide part. It is a perspective view of a right-handed game zone including a partially enlarged view. It is a cross-sectional view which was cut by bending a part of the back box in the vertical direction along the vertical direction, and is the schematic view (a) which shows the attachment method of a vibration detection switch and a back gutter member for a game ball, and is a modification thereof. (B). It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the D cut angle position formed on the rotation axis of the 1st and 2nd distribution stepping motors. It is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the arrangement of a polyswitch. It is a table explaining the drive management block of the 1st distribution stepping motor. It is a table explaining the drive management block of the 2nd distribution stepping motor. It is the schematic of the mounting method of a field effect transistor. It is a circuit diagram which shows the vibration detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the vibration detection effective timer processing for a sorting device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for a sorting device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the vibration discrimination processing. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. (A) is a perspective view of the lower portion of the main body frame viewed from the left side, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower portion of the main body frame viewed from the right side. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower part of a door frame from the rear surface side. It is an enlarged perspective view of the main part which shows the upper left corner of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. For convenience of explanation, the side of the pachinko machine facing the player is referred to as "front" or "front", and the opposite side is referred to as "rear" or "back".

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 supports a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The main body frame 4 which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which (see FIG. 106) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 which is an operation medium operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. It has a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power supply switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. A locking unit 650 that locks between the board unit 620, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. And have.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. On the rear side of the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310X, and the game panel 1100. Peripheral control unit 1500 arranged, effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and It includes a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007, which are planted in front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement and change the movement of the game ball B, and a game by accepting the game ball B Entrances and exits for general winning openings 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, etc., which give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a person, and a game. A gate portion 2003 that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, a prize to the second starting port 2004 is possible for a predetermined time) to the player by passing the ball B, and a game ball B that can enter the ball. It is equipped with a disadvantageous first entrance 2006 (details will be described later) that does not bring any benefit. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the first receiving port 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the handle unit 180 for the player operation and inputs the game force to adjust the striking force, so that the game ball B is driven with an arbitrary strength. be able to. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a, which is disadvantageous for the first receiving. It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182, such as not allowing the ball to enter the entrance 2006.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or a movable effect is performed by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emitting effect.

When the player rotates the handle 182 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, which will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 (the amount of operation of the handle 182) by the ball launcher 540. The game ball is launched at, and the game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. To. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received by the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened for balls by the payout device 580 described later according to the received winning openings. Is paid out to the upper plate 201.

If the strength of the game ball that cannot reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, that is, the game ball launched with a weak firing force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, the ball falls into the foul ball drop port 1013 provided between the end (end) of the launch rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, which is returned later. It is received by the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling them. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the outlet 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and the game can be played between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 22 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached at a position to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 with a weak firing force and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, and at the same time. This is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is something to drive into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. 32 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the front and rear and is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 99). And a part of (see FIG. 100) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and stays on the partition portion 143a (a state of staying in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the weight of the iron plate 146a acts due to the disappearance of the magnetic force, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) that projects downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). The state) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 151) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. There is. Here, disabling the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting or pinching (pinching and stopping), entwining (winding), or adhering with hot melt or the like. It means to put it in a state.

The operation line nullification member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. Inclined portions 703 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the portions 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line nullification member 700 is bent so that the right end in the front view projects rearward with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line nullification member 700. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same surface as the flat plate surface of the operation line nullification member 700. As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

When the operation line nullification member 700 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is formed in the ball striking supply port 142a. It will be in a state of communication with.

According to the operation line invalidation member 700, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having a diameter substantially the same as that of the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and is projected to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as causing an illegal ball to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the ball launching device 540 plays a game. The operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the fraudulent ball launched (struck) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Then, the narrowed portion of the sheared portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 can be cut like a scissors, thereby invalidating the operation line and using an illegal ball. It is possible to deter the fraudulent activity that was being carried out.

The first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraudulent activity, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above, or the bent operation line nullifying member 700 may be formed. It may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.

When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the above-mentioned standby position (on the above-mentioned partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ) Is detected, and the detection signal is added to the driving conditions of the ball feeding solenoid 145, which is an electric feeding means, to prevent the firing of an illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is launched by the ball launching device 540 with a force weaker than a predetermined force (launching force that can reach the game area 5a) (launching force that cannot reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is launched. The purpose is to guide the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside to the lower plate 202, and to guide the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. ..

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is possible to communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a that communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the penetrating ball passage 150a in the front view. It is equipped with a full tank ball receiving port 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and although it is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, the momentum is insufficient. The foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into the foul ball falling port 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and the front view right. The game ball B, which is open toward the front near the lower corner and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the rail ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward, and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the ball discharge port 150d, and a communication passage 150h that connects the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, the storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. The connecting passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i arranged below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i ( It consists of a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel with an interval of 1 ball), and the starting end opens upward to the downward tilting end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ending portion is stored. It opens downward with respect to the passage 150e.

A series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the connecting passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned. It is a passage, and the return passage portion 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud caused by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and similarly, the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The foul ball drop port 1013 opened between the two is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as a third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, which is enlarged in FIG. 40. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 cover and accommodate the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.

The specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece portion 701 of FIG. 36. A V-shape that opens in the direction facing the flow direction of the ball in the connecting passage 150h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702. The sheared portion 7000v is formed.

In the foul cover unit 150 of the present embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 is the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. A tapered guide portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width required for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is directed toward the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width narrows toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side and the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second inclined portion 150 kb having a narrowed tip shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a tapered guide portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, slides into the guide portion 150k in a winding shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to the second. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 by sliding the inclined portion 150 kb of the above. As a result, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul ball and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In addition, in order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150 ka and the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guide portion 150 k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is provided by using the space communicating from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is allowed to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L protruding from the lower plate ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or to be illegal. It is possible to deter fraudulent acts such as moving the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.

For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the fraudulent ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate, causing it to flow backward, and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). When "A") is performed, when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and heads for the launch position of the launch rail 544, Pulled by it (tension is applied), the operation line L wraps around in a U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally. Since the operation line L cannot be operated as a result of being disconnected, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the ball is intentionally made into a foul ball to be a ball opening, the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (tension is applied) by the subsequent firing of the illegal ball Q and is operated. L is pressed against the folded-back portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. It will be possible. It should be noted that FIGS. 39 and 40 are explanatory views assuming a case where a fraudulent act B is performed. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, it becomes a foul ball). Even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention means. It also has an effect. Therefore, when targeting fraudulent activity B, the operation line nullifying member 700, 7000, which is the first and second fraud prevention means, and the operation line nullifying member 7000H, which is the third fraud prevention means described later. , 7000S is preferably used in combination as appropriate, and one unit of the first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or the third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. It is advisable to install it together with the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, so that they are inconspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble of, the fraud countermeasure information is hard to leak. Further, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 are affected by the decrease in sharpness and the like, the crime prevention performance can be easily maintained by replacing the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 together with the door frame 3.

By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v to invalidate the operation line L, but sandwich the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022, and the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled or is difficult to push or pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. It may be invalidated as follows.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by the shaded portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 are formed. The first half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the non-joint portion is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joint portion is used as a holding portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, the unit main body 151 is made so as to be difficult to touch the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And it is covered and accommodated from the outside by the lid member 152.

According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q, and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c are pulled. When wrapping around the folded part in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded part, and the holding portion of the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.

As a result, the fraudulent ball Q that has flowed back from the lower plate ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act A reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the fraudulent ball Q that is intentionally made into a foul ball by the fraudulent act B. It becomes possible to suppress the arrival of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidation member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of extension of the operation line L cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.

In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tips of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as the sandwiching portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the tip portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). The sandwiching width portion of both plate surfaces may be the sandwiching portion 7044. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrent effect.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 that sandwiches the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 42, or an adhesive having a property of not hardening is filled. Then, the adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion to be immobile.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is changed from the above-mentioned one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 43, and this coil spring is replaced with a coil spring. It may be formed by installing so that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and its own central axis are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and is sandwiched.

The coil spring has a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as a tension coil spring or a torsion coil spring, but it is necessary to install the coil spring in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. Compared to this, it is advantageous in terms of installation work.

Further, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coil spring is installed by being curved in a direction in which the coils on the approach side of the operation line L are slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly. As described above, when the operation line nullification member 7000 is formed by the coil spring, it can be manufactured at low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidation member 7000 described above through the opening for the ball (lower plate ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000. Further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in the above-mentioned form, in order to deal with this, the course change part of the return passage portion 1014 of the foul ball (in this form, the part corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) is A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is possible to prevent further illicit work in which a foreign object is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k. As a countermeasure against illegal work in which a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted as in the slit 1015 described above. Not limited to the one that forms the intake port, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 39, a configuration is provided in which a protruding obstacle portion 1016 is provided to prevent foreign matter such as a cell plate from colliding with the guide portion 150k. As a result, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operation line L and invalidates the members. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). It is swingably attached to the course change portion (corner portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c).

That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line invalidation member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped invalidating portion 2646 projecting vertically to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. It has a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation portion 2646 and the invalidation portion 2646 intersect, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 projecting to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646. The support shaft 2649 planted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated by about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a). Can swing to release position. Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646 sandwiching the shaft hole 2647, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is urged by the balance weight 2660. The ball receiving posture shown in FIG. 50 (a) was maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) was applied to the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball was applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When it swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b).

Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014), and is an operation line. When the invalidating member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b), the intersection side portion 2651 is fitted into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward at the course changing section, the ball is placed on the ball receiving section 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is released to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached with the balance weight 2660. It returns to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

In rare cases, a plurality of foul spheres may be generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the first foul sphere is processed by the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the latter foul sphere is as shown in FIG. 50 (b). It is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stop 2648, and the operation line nullification member 7000D is reactivated before being continuously processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the hit ball supply port 142a) to the foul cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D. By intentionally firing the illegal ball weakly, it is made into a foul ball and taken out from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball, and further, the operation line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped and the subsequent illegal ball is performed. When the fraudulent ball Q (a fraudulent act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the fraudulent ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, it is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the end edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side, but the intersection side portion 2651 When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the passage naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.

If the operation line L is meandered between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult for the operation line L to reverse, it is in a state of being captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hit ball supply port 142a side. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a evidence ball.

The above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but even if the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by an electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

That is, in the operation line invalidation member 7000D of FIG. 52, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 as an electric drive means is connected to the portion provided with the balance weight 2660 described above, and the ball detector is connected to the invalidation unit 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and it is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line invalidating member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving unit 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence of the game ball to the absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered to operate the operation line. The nullifying member 7000D is adapted to return from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.

When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball are detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives the change. In order to operate appropriately, foul spheres are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line nullification member 7000D using its own weight.

On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the emission signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the ascending position. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, fraudulent ball Q can be prevented.

The above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the present embodiment has a function of preventing the illegal ball Q from entering from the opening side of the ball while the ball receiving portion 2645 is blocking the return passage portion 104, the illegal ball described later will be described. It can also be used as a measure to prevent reverse movement. Therefore, it exhibits a higher fraud prevention function.

Further, in the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, in addition to the above-described configuration, for example, the invalidation portion is formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is formed. Is a crossing side that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the crossing side, and passes through the movable area of the crossing side. The illegal ball Q is detected by this ball detector to activate the invalidation unit, and the operation line L is pinched or cut at the intersection crossing the connecting passage 150h. May be good.

Further, the above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D can also be applied to the first operation line invalidation member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be surely enhanced.

Further, FIG. 53 is a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, which winds up and invalidates the operation line L.

That is, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a square ring-shaped invalidation portion 2646 mounted in the connecting passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate about a rotation shaft 2656 in a direction orthogonal to this passage. The motor 2657, which is an electric drive means for rotating the disabling portion 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the connecting passage 150h of the disabling portion 2646 are provided as the crossing side portion 2651 downstream from the movable (rotation) region of the crossing side portion 2651. It is composed of a ball detector 2655 and a ball detector 2655, and each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the connecting passage 150h and passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. The invalidation unit 2646 spins once when it is detected by the vessel 2655, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the opening for the ball.

On the other hand, when the fraudulent ball Q due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the fraudulent ball Q goes under the invalidation unit 2646. Since the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation in order to pass through the conversion unit 2646, the operation line L winds around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q stops in the connecting passage 150h, there is no possibility that the fraudulent ball Q will fall into the hands of the fraudulent person.

The ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q, and in such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidation member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

As described above, the description of the dynamic operation line nullification member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where you play with a game ball, and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball,
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage that communicates with the game area from the launch position of the ball launcher.
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop port opened in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside in front of the machine.
Equipped with fraud prevention means that can prevent the operation of the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from the front of the machine.
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that clamps, cuts, or winds the operation line to invalidate the operation line.
The operation line nullification member includes an intersection side portion of the game ball that crosses the foul ball return passage, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball has passed through the movable region of the intersection side portion to operate the foul ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is designed to cross a return passage, and thus the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the intersection to invalidate the operation line. "

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third fraud prevention means provided at the foul ball drop port 1013 described above is the end (termination) of the launch rail 544. The operation line invalidation member 7000H provided on the part) and the operation line invalidation member 7000S provided on the end portion (specifically, the resin rail base 1001x) of the outer rail 1001.

The operation line nullification member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is combed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. It is covered with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

Therefore, as described above, an illegal act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the return passage portion 1014 using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause the illegal ball Q to flow backward and send it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the launch rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the launch position, it is pulled by it (tension is applied) and the operation line L becomes the operation line invalidation member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the ball is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. Even when a fraudulent act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is used. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, the operation line invalidation member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47. It's a rush.

According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower plate ball supply port which is an opening for a ball. Even if an illegal person is grasping through 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension between the wires of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. After that, even if the force of the hand operating the operation line L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is hard to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, as a result, fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q can be suppressed.

As described above, as the third fraud prevention means, the operation line nullification member 7000H on the launch rail 544 side is effective at the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullification member 7000S on the side exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and 7000S alone, and both the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The forms may be exchanged with each other, or the same invalidating member may be adopted.

Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts as in this embodiment and attached to the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001, for example, the metal plate constituting the launch rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The chemical member 7000H is integrally formed, or the wire is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or the corner of the rail base 1001x is V-grooved as shown in FIG. 8B. The pinching portion 7000Sv of the above may be engraved and the operation line L may be attracted to the depth of the groove of the pinching portion 7000Sv to be pinched.

Furthermore, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 may be provided with a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150 ka and a second inclined portion 150 kb.

As described above, regarding the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is also provided as a foul ball. Although the form provided in the drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form, of course.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. An invalidating member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the connecting passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 39), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 38 (a), or is an outer rail constituting the foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a part where the operation line L abuts on a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at the start end of 1001 and the end of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is illegal with the weight of the illegal ball Q or the like. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it tries to be stretched straight by receiving a tension due to a pulling force by a person. The operation line invalidation member 7000 of the present embodiment is installed at a position where the player cannot touch even if the player inserts a fingertip through the opening for the ball, and this position is the safety aspect of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of the crime prevention aspect that makes it difficult to illegally work on the chemical member 7000 itself.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided so as to be offset to one side of the connecting passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to fill the passage width. The cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the connecting passage 150h are made into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. It is designed not to touch. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000 uses a well-known folding blade structure or a chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and with the unit main body 151. If the loading port 1019 and the discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in a tokoroten manner so that the old and new can be replaced, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44A and 44B, reference numeral 1021 is a pinching secant line portion for the operation line L cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L can bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021. It has become like. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150 g, so that the certainty of fraud prevention is ensured. improves.

Further, in the above-described form, an example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown, but there is also a game machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, the fraudulent act of invading the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached into the game area 5a by using the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port (opening for the ball) to the game area 5a (the above-mentioned fraudulent acts A and B). There is a risk of fraudulent activity similar to. In the case of such a game machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described form are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second bent portion as described above. Fraud prevention measures may be provided. This makes it possible to further enhance the deterrent effect of fraudulent activity using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as a second fraud prevention means, but a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, but instead, a tapered shape provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A slit-shaped catching portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured in the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guiding portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q may be sandwiched by the catching portion which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same fraud deterrent effect as the above-mentioned form.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In FIGS. 46 and 49, the illegal ball Q is prevented from entering through the opening for the ball (preventing the reverse / reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. By providing advance prevention means, fraud due to fraudulent ball Q is prevented.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the course change portion (the portion directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. Not only that, it can be exemplified that the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the fraudulent ball Q itself to another passage and blocking the movement is provided (first fraudulent ball reversal prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A in which the fraudulent ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. In addition, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction in which the backflowing illegal ball Q enters the attracting portion 1022 at the inlet portion of the attracting portion 1022 (allows the intrusion into the attracting portion 1022 and from the attracting portion 1022). A one-sided valve that makes it impossible to leave (not shown) may be provided, whereby a trace of using the fraudulent ball Q and evidence of cheating can be left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the backflow (backflow) of the illegal ball Q. Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A in which the fraudulent ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. The operation line invalidation member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

Further, the static operation line invalidation member and the dynamic operation line invalidation member described above may of course have both.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but the operation line invalidation member is provided, for example, with the foul ball drop port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position or between the foul ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

Further, in the above-described form, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 116). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 116).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 (see FIGS. 30, 32 to 34) of the door frame base unit 100, and is operated by the player to move the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to the game board 5. It can be driven into the game area 5a of.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. The handle cap 185, which is attached to the cover pedestal 183, is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (the start end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 projects outward from the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and an inward direction from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. It is provided with three groove portions 181c which are recessed in the same direction and extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and counterclockwise on the opposite side. The side surface in the direction is recessed (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cap 185 is rounded and bulges forward, and has translucency. The handle cap 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cap 185 is light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, the strength input by the player.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, it detects static electricity acting on the handle 182 or the like of the player and applies the static electricity to the handle 182 or the like of the player. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is largely rotated in the front view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is strongly driven into the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the position of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. By changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and capable of being operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a cage rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring transmission for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300. As is clear from the explanations so far, the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like are projected toward the player side in the intermediate region in the left-right direction of the lower half of the front surface of the door frame 3. Consists of a forward bulging structure.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) to play a game. The static electricity charged on the sphere B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the operation unit relay board 392. It is for doing. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine The purpose is to deduct the amount of the lent game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

After removing the upper plate ball, the unit 240 has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the part where the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces thereof. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4d. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the plate upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70 and the like. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 68A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the upper surface with light toward the front (outside). Is implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the upper surface with light toward the front (outside). Is implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape, the plate When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the lower center decorative substrate 316 of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b, which is arranged in a plurality of positions. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged so as to be spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which the annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and the front decorative substrate 352a formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape on the front side and the semicircle on the rear side. It is composed of a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 trembles. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with a wider variety of effects.

The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency should be input. In that case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweep) 8 times per second in 1 Hz units for each cycle. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then input again after 1 second.

In the assembly work of the game machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is supposed to be done based on. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the game machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the power of the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board The 1310X transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operation confirmation) the vibration speaker. By this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music by the vibration speaker 354, and can also confirm the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. ..

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 78 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 78 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. It is attached to the upper base 363, the upper base 363, and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and the elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in the center of which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative substrate 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular substrate portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and a tubular portion 378 that extends upward from the inner circumference of the substrate portion 378a. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 78A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 78A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height that substantially coincides with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 78 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 78B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 81 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force lower than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 81C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 79, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. .. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. No pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 81 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. There is. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative substrate 404, and is composed of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically and the door frame right side base 411 and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the decorative member 412 in the side window, and the decorative member 412 in the side window is formed on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame. It is attached to the portion behind the connecting base 412a of. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative substrate 419, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. Has been done. In the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decorations 410b are turned off, so that the side window 410a The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the above. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, the light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and FIG. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the arrangement area 420 on the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is provided with a door frame top bottom plate 454 that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs in the front-rear direction.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91A and the like. FIG. 91A is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate. 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[3-10. Measures to increase the size of door frame decoration]
In recent pachinko machines 1, in order to increase the interest of the game, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which are decorations on the front surface of the door frame 3, have become larger, and the game The amount of protrusion that sticks out toward the person is increasing. As a result, when the employee opens and closes the door frame 3 during business hours, the employee himself or the player may come into contact with the door frame top unit 450 or the like. Further, since it is necessary to prevent interference with the adjacent pachinko machine 1 and the inter-vehicle ball lending machine, the opening angle of the door frame 3 may be greatly restricted.

An embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 capable of coping with such a problem will be described with reference to FIGS. 91B to 91G.
As is clear from the above description, the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment has an openable door frame 3 having a door window 101a that constitutes the front side and makes the game area 5a visible, and a closed door. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which are front decorative parts arranged so as to be located on the front side of a predetermined portion of the frame 3 and project forward from the door window 101a. It has. In the embodiment, the door frame top unit 450 is provided with a means for solving the above-mentioned problems among these three units, and the door frame top unit 450 will be described as the front decorative portion 450. Of course, the following description of the front decorative portion 450 can also be applied to the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

[3-10-1. Front decoration part]
The front decorative portion 450 is rotatably and detachably provided in the arrangement region 420 formed on the upper part of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame 3, and is the three-way locking unit 6500 shown in FIG. 91E. It is possible to switch between a playable state locked in the arrangement area 420 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 91C and a maintenance state outside the arrangement area 420 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 91D.

[3-10-1-1. Placement area]
The main body frame 4 is such that the arrangement area 420 substantially abuts on the front surface of the door side arrangement portion 421 in a form in which the upper portion of the door frame base 101 is bulged forward and the upper end surface of the door side arrangement portion 421. It is formed by the front surface of the main body side arrangement portion 422 projecting in a cross shape from the upper front surface of the door.
The door side arrangement portion 421 is integrated with the door frame 3, while the main body side arrangement portion 422 is integrated with the main body frame 4, so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed independently of the main body frame 4. An appropriate gap (clearance) is provided at the facing portion where the upper end surface of the door side arrangement portion 421 and the lower end surface of the main body side arrangement portion 422 face each other. Therefore, since there is a possibility that a foreign object is inserted through the gap, a fraudulent act may be performed. A foreign matter insertion prevention portion 425 is formed in which the gap is meandered by being intricately formed, thereby making it difficult for foreign matter to pass through.

Further, in the arrangement area 420, the top center speaker 462 provided in the door frame top unit 450 in FIG. 88 (c) is left and right depending on the design and mechanism of the reference effect portion (front decoration portion 450) on the door frame 3 side. It is provided on the front side of the main body side arrangement portion 422 as a reference element that can be commonly used for all effects), and therefore, on the rear surface of the front decoration portion 450 of the embodiment, although not shown, the top center speaker 462 A storage space in which the top center speaker 462 can be accommodated is formed at a position corresponding to (reference effect unit).
By doing so, even if the front decorative portion 450 is changed due to a specification change or the like, the reference effect portion can be reused as it is, so that the cost of replacing the front decorative portion 450 and the cost of changing the effect control can be suppressed.

[3-10-1-2. Decorative hinges]
The front decorative portion 450 is rotatably and detachably attached to the arrangement region 420, specifically to the main body side arranging portion 422, via a decorative hinge 450a rotatably attached to the upper rear side of the self. It is attached.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 91B, the decorative hinge 450a is a connecting member made of resin or metal having a T-shape in a plan view, and has a hinge shaft 450b horizontally provided inside the front decorative portion 450. A bearing piece 450d rotatably attached to the front decorative portion 450 through its own shaft hole 450c, and a mounting piece 450e provided in a direction orthogonal to the bearing piece 450d from the rear end of the bearing piece 450d. And consists of.
On the other hand, in the main body side arranging portion 422 of the arranging area 420, a T groove 422t having a shape in which the entire mounting piece 450e of the decorative hinge 450a and the base of the bearing piece 450d can be inserted and removed from above is formed. A decorative hinge 450a is attached to the 422t so that it can be inserted and removed.

[3-10-1--3. Locking part]
Further, the decorative hinge 450a is locked by a toolless locking portion 426 that does not require a tool such as a screwdriver for attachment / detachment operation while being mounted on the T groove 422t. The tool-less locking portion 426 includes a screw with a hand-cranked knob on the head (see FIG. 91B), a well-known snap lock that can be attached and detached by one-touch operation of moving the lever up or down (not shown), or a lever. There is a well-known crescent lock that can be attached and detached by rotating.

It is better to provide a plurality of locking portions 426 (two in the embodiment) with respect to one front decorative portion 450 at appropriate intervals. In that case, as shown in FIG. 91B. The same type may be unified, or a plurality of types having different locking structures may be mixed. Preferably, a plurality of types having different locking structures may be mixed with respect to one front decorative portion 450. For example, a screw having a hand-cranked knob on the head and a snap lock or a crescent lock may be mixed. It is possible to make up for the other drawback while taking advantage of the respective features of certainty of fixing and ease of attachment / detachment operation.

Further, when a plurality of types having different locking structures are mixed for one front decorative portion 450, the operation order for each type (by locking structure) at the time of attachment / detachment, for example, locking with excellent workability. As for the structure, the clamp is released at once by one-touch operation and it is difficult to take measures to prevent the front decoration part 450 from falling (temporarily pressing it by hand, etc.), so remove it first. The operation order for each type, such as removing the front decorative part 450 at the end because there is time to take measures to prevent it from falling (temporarily holding it by hand, etc.), is indicated on the lever of the snap lock, for example, as a mark (not shown). It is good to form and make the worker recognize it. Examples of the mark portion include means for drawing strong attention, such as painting the lever with an expansion color such as red or attaching a sticker such as red.

As the locking portion 426 of the embodiment, a toolless one is used as a preferable example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a locking portion 426 that is locked by using a tool such as a screwdriver may be used. Of course it is possible.

[3-10-1-4. Three-way locking unit]
The three-way locking unit 6500 shown in FIG. 91E will be described later [4-10. Locking unit] and a part of the locking unit 650 shown in FIG. 117 are modified to form a combination of three elements, that is, a door frame 3 and a front decorative portion 450, a main body frame 4 and a door frame 3, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4. For each combination, it is supposed to be responsible for locking and unlocking.
The three-way locking unit 6500 includes a unit base 651 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501, a decorative hook 6520 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and engaging with the front decorative portion 450, and a unit base 651. A plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the door frame 3 and engage with the door frame 3, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and engage with the outer frame 2, and a unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 that projects forward from the lower part of the front end of the door to move the decorative hook 6520 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction depending on the direction of rotation, and a door that projects forward from the unit base 651, for example, by manually operating the operation rod 427a. It is provided with a toolless opening operation unit 427 that moves the frame hook 652 in the vertical direction.

Further, the three-way locking unit 6500 is provided by a lock spring 655 that urges the decorative hook 6520 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. Also includes an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

The three-way locking unit 6500 is assembled to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and has an operation rod 427a of the opening operation unit 427, a hook for the decorative part 6520, a hook for the door frame 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an unlocking lever for the outer frame. 656 protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the three-way locking unit 6500, the decorative hook 6520 is locked to a hook member (not shown) provided on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 450, and the door frame hook 652 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the outer frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

[3-10-1--5. Other elements]
In addition, in FIGS. 91B to 91E, reference numeral 428 is an urging means (specifically, front decoration) provided between the front decoration portion 450 and the arrangement area 420 so as to urge the front decoration portion 450 in the direction of pushing forward. Although it is a leaf spring attached to the rear surface of the portion 450, such a leaf spring or a coil spring may be attached to the arrangement area 420 side), and the unlocked front decorative portion 450 is at least for the decorative portion. It is designed to be rotated to a position where it is not relocked by the hook portion 6520.
Further, the code 429 is a drawer connector for directly connecting the electric system of the front decorative portion 450 and the electric system of the game board 5. This drawer connector 429 is a well-known one that inserts the insertion side 429A into the receiving side 429B. In the embodiment, the insertion side 429A is attached to the rear surface of the front decorative portion 450, and the receiving side 429B is above the game board 5. It is attached to the outside of the game area 5a. Of course, on the contrary, the insertion side 429A of the drawer connector 429 may be provided outside the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the receiving side 429B may be provided on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 450. The drawer connector 429 has a horizontally long shape, and its longitudinal side and the axis of the hinge shaft 450b of the front decorative portion 450 are aligned in parallel. Since the door frame 3 (door side arrangement portion 421) is interposed between the front decorative portion 450 and the game board 5, a connector through hole for passing the drawer connector 429 is provided there. The insertion side 429A or the receiving side 429B of the drawer connector 429 may be provided on the door frame 3 (door side arrangement portion 421) so that the front decorative portion 450 and the door frame 3 are directly connected electrically.
Further, the code 430 is a detection means for detecting that the front decorative portion 450 is in a playable state. When the front decorative portion 450 changes from the playable state to the maintenance state, the detection means 430 detects the change before the drawer connector 429 is disconnected, and conversely, when the front decorative portion 450 changes from the maintenance state to the playable state. The change should be set at a position or structure that can be detected after the drawer connector 429 is coupled. By doing so, it is easy to take measures to protect each control unit from electrical changes due to the insertion and removal of the drawer connector 429.
Further, the code 4681 is a movable top top plate having the same structure as the swingable front top top plate 4680 of the front top unit 4500 described later, and the closed posture and the standing posture of the movable top top plate 4681 are peripheral control boards 1510. By coordinating with, a summon button is provided at a predetermined timing determined according to the progress of the game or separately from the progress of the game (for example, a summon button is provided at an appropriate position of the plate unit 200, and the summon button forces the posture from the standing posture to the closed posture. It is possible to switch back as appropriate with (). As a result, a movable decorative part such as a movable top top plate 4681 is incorporated in the front decorative part 450, and even when the movable decorative part is operating, the summon button can be used to safely change the front decorative part 450 to the maintenance state. Can be done.

[3-10-2. Actions and effects of measures against upsizing]
The pachinko machines 1 shown in FIGS. 91B to 91E are configured as described above. In a normal gaming state, the main body frame 4 is locked to the outer frame 2 by the hook 653 for the outer frame of the three-way locking unit 6500, and the door frame 3 Is locked to the main body frame 4 by the door frame hook 652 of the three-way locking unit 6500, and the front decorative portion 450 is locked to the door frame 3 by the decorative part hook 6520 of the three-way locking unit 6500. The state in which the front decorative portion 450 is locked by the decorative hook 6520 is detected by the detection means 430 as a playable state locked on the front side of the arrangement area 420, and the detection signal is transmitted to the main control unit 1310. It is transmitted and the game can be controlled.

Next, when opening the door frame 3 to open the game area 5a in order to deal with troubles such as ball clogging, first, insert the key into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and turn it counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Rotate in the direction. As a result, the decorative hook 6520 moves upward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the front decorative portion 450, which is located on the front side of the arrangement area 420 and is locked in a playable state, is unlocked, and at the same time, the urging means 428 is unlocked. The front decorative portion 450 rotates slightly due to the urging of. A slight rotation of the front decorative portion 450 is detected by the detecting means 430 (the detecting means 430 is turned OFF), and the front decorative portion 450 is not in the playable state by receiving the detection signal (OFF signal). Is determined, and the main control unit 1310 and the peripheral control unit 1511 execute necessary processing (for example, execute a program that protects the circuit before the drawer connector 429 is disconnected, or execute a warning program against fraudulent activity. (The fact that the door frame 3 is open is appealed in a flying manner at an appropriate volume from the top center speaker 462 or the like) is executed. Specifically, whether the detection means 430 detects a slight rotation of the front decorative portion 450 and the detection means 430 is turned off, or the drawer connector 429 is disconnected (including the case where the detection means 430 is not provided). When the detection means 430 is turned off and the drawer connector 429 is disconnected, the signal is received from the top center speaker 462 or the like as a warning program. A message notification for advance warning that "is likely to be opened" (a notification different from the "door is open" message notification that is output when the door frame 3 is actually opened) is sent for a predetermined time (20 seconds). And the process of causing various lamps to emit light in a manner for prior warning is started. The advance warning message notification ends after a predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed, but the advance warning lamp light emission is until the detection means 430 is turned on (until the front decorative portion 450 is normally connected). ) Continued. As a warning program against fraudulent activity, as soon as the front decorative portion 450 is removed from the playable state (the detection means 430 is turned off), or as soon as the drawer connector 429 is disconnected, or the detection means 430 is released. As soon as the condition that the door frame 3 is turned off and the condition that the drawer connector 429 is disconnected are met, the message notification regarding the door frame 3 is started in a flying manner (when the door frame 3 is not actually opened), and then after that. It is possible to prevent the actual damage that would occur when the door frame 3 is actually opened.

In the above description, the message notification for advance warning and the message notification output when the door frame 3 is actually opened are different from each other, but the notification is not limited to this, and the message notification for advance warning is not limited to this. And, the message notification output when the door frame 3 is actually opened may be the same content notification. For example, when the drawer connector 429 is disconnected and a slight rotation of the front decorative portion 450 is detected by the detection means 430, the detection means 430 is turned off, and the detection signal (OFF signal) is received, the door frame Various lamps are output for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) when 3 is actually opened, and a message notification with the content "door is open" and a mode when the door frame 3 is actually opened. When the door frame 3 is actually opened after that, the same process as the process when the door is opened is newly started. You may. According to such a form, when the detection means 430 is turned off and the door frame 3 is actually opened after a predetermined time has elapsed, the processing at the time of opening the door is performed twice, which is predetermined. It is possible to start the message notification that ends in time a plurality of times to sufficiently notify the outside regarding the opening of the door frame 3. Further, even if the detection means 430 is turned off and the door frame 3 is actually opened before the predetermined time elapses, the processing at the time of opening the door is overwritten and extended. It is possible to extend the message notification that ends in time to provide sufficient notification to the outside regarding the opening of the door frame 3.

Next, in this state, the front decorative portion 450 is manually rotated around the hinge shaft 450b of the decorative hinge tool 450 in the flip-up direction to change to a maintenance state that is not located on the front side of the arrangement area 420 as shown in FIG. 91E. Let me. Specifically, the front decorative portion 450 is made to stand by at a position that does not overlap with the opening / closing track of the door frame 3.
It should be noted that this maintenance state is maintained even without manual support by a stopper or the like that can be engaged and detached (not shown). Further, in this maintenance state, since the bottom surface and the rear surface of the front decorative portion 450 hidden in the playable state are exposed to the outside, defects and repairs of the front decorative portion 450 can be easily performed.
Further, since the change of the front decorative portion 450 to the maintenance state is conspicuous due to the movement in a direction different from the opening and closing of the door frame 3, the employee who is far away from the front decorative portion 450 being in the maintenance state. Easy to understand even from the door. Therefore, it is easy to detect fraudulent acts that are executed after the front decorative portion 450 is in the maintenance state, and this also serves as a deterrent to fraud.

When the front decorative portion 450 is changed to the maintenance state, the operating rod 427a of the opening operation portion 427 of the three-way locking unit 6500 is exposed to the outside as shown in FIG. 91D. Then, when the operating rod 427a is pushed by hand against the urging of the coil spring 427b, the linear motion of the operating rod 427a in the pushing direction is converted into a rotary motion by a spiral mechanism (not shown) in the cylinder 427d. The rotary motion is converted into a linear motion that pulls up the door frame hook 652, and the door frame 3 is unlocked by the door frame hook 652.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91D, the door frame 3 can be opened so as to dive under the front decorative portion 450 in the maintenance state.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment, since the front decorative portion 450 in the maintenance state stands by at a position that does not overlap with the opening / closing track of the door frame 3, that is, is separated from the opening / closing of the door frame 3, the door frame 3 There is almost no risk that the front decorative portion 450 will come into contact with a person even if the door frame 3 is opened and closed, and there is almost no risk that the door frame 3 will open and close and interfere with an adjacent pachinko machine or the like.
If the door frame 3 is opened to perform fraudulent activity, the release operation of the front decorative portion 450 is indispensable as a premise, so that fraud is difficult to be performed and it takes time for fraudulent work. It will be easier to find.
Further, since no tool is required to open the door frame 3, workability is good, and employees and the like do not have to carry around a large bundle of keys and tools.

In the embodiment, the front decorative portion 450 is provided on the main body side arranging portion 422 of the main body frame 4, but the front decorative portion 450 can also be provided on the door side arranging portion 421 of the door frame 3. Although the front decorative portion 450 moves together with the door frame 3, if the design is such that the amount of protrusion of the front decorative portion 450 to the front is large in the playable state and small in the maintenance state, contact with people It is possible to reduce the risk sufficiently, and it is also possible to avoid interference with adjacent pachinko machines, inter-door ball rental machines, and the like.
Further, by attaching the decorative hinge 450a to the outer frame 2, the front decorative portion 450 can be supported by the outer frame 2. In such a case, the front decorative portion 450 in the maintenance state can be opened and closed of the door frame 3. Of course, since it can be separated from the opening and closing of the main body frame 4, the risk of contact with a person can be further reduced, or interference with an adjacent pachinko machine, a platform ball lending machine, or the like can be avoided.

Next, when the door frame 3 is closed after completing necessary work such as solving problems such as ball clogging, the door frame hook 652 is automatically locked and the door frame 3 is locked, and the front surface is in that state. When the decorative portion 450 is returned from the maintenance state to the playable state, the drawer connector 429 is first connected, and the front decorative portion 450 is firmly placed in the arrangement area 420 against the urging of the urging means 428 (leaf spring). When pushed in, the decorative hook 6520 is automatically locked and the front decorative portion 450 is locked in a playable state, and the playable state is detected by the detection means 430 and the warning program described above by the main control unit 1310. Etc. are finished, and the game returns to a state in which the game is possible.

The center of rotation of the front decorative portion 450 described above was fixed to the hinge shaft 450b of the decorative hinge 450a, but if the front decorative portion 450 changed to the maintenance state, the data display on the curtain plate side of the island equipment If there is a risk of interference with the body (a display device provided on the curtain plate above the pachinko machine 1 that indicates the progress of the game (the number of times a big hit game has occurred, etc.)), a decorative hinge as shown in FIGS. 91F and G The shaft hole 450c through which the hinge shaft 450b of the tool 450a passes may be elongated so that the center of rotation of the front decorative portion 450 can be changed to the player side. Further, in addition to the case where the front decorative portion 450 is rotated around the hinge shaft 450b of the decorative hinge tool 450a, a guide arm is projected from the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 so as to follow the guide arm. May be good.

[3-11. Detachable structure for door frame decoration]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment, as described above, the front decorative portion 450 is detachably formed with respect to the arrangement area 420 via the decorative hinge 450a, and the decorative hinge 450a requires a tool such as a screwdriver. It is locked by a plurality of toolless locking portions 426.
Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the front decorative portion 450, the front decorative portion 450 is first changed to the maintenance state as shown in FIG. 91D as described above, and the locking portion that holds the decorative hinge 450a in that state is stopped. The 426 is manually removed, and as shown in Fig. 91C imaginary line, the front decorative part 450 is pulled up together with the decorative hinge 450a to be removed from the arrangement area 420, replaced with a substitute on the spot, and then the front is replaced in the reverse order. The game can be restarted by returning the decorative portion 450 to the playable state. Of course, it is possible to easily and quickly change the front decorative portion 450 to another model corresponding to the new model.
On the other hand, the toolless locking portion 426 that locks the front decorative portion 450 can be attached / detached on the premise that the front decorative portion 450 is released by the key, for example. Even if it is toolless, there is almost no risk that it will be removed by anyone other than a specific person, such as an employee of the amusement park.
By the way, the above series of operations is performed by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, but if the front decorative portion 450 is not sufficiently locked by the locking portion 426, the drawer connector 429 becomes poorly coupled. Or, since there is a high possibility that the detection means 430 does not switch to the ON state, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a signal of poor coupling of the drawer connector 429 alone, including the case where the detection means 430 is not provided. , Detection of either a signal in the OFF state of the detection means 430 alone, a signal of poor coupling of the drawer connector 429, or a signal of the OFF state of the detection means 430, including the case where the drawer connector 429 is not provided. Therefore, it is advisable to determine that the locking portion 426 is poorly locked, and to notify, for example, "the front decorative portion is not sufficiently attached" by the top center speaker 462 or the like. Of course, instead of using the signal of the drawer connector 429 or the signal of the detecting means 430, a dedicated sensor for detecting the locking of the locking portion 426 may be provided to perform the same notification.

In the embodiment, the front decorative portion 450 is changed to a state in which the locking portion 426 can be attached / detached by the unlocking operation with the key. However, the operating portion of the locking portion 426 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame 3. The door frame 3 is released (in this case, the front decorative portion 450 may be fixed to the door frame 3, and [4-10. Locking unit] described later and the locking unit 650 shown in FIG. 117 are provided. It may be used) so that the locking portion 426 can be attached / detached.

[3-12. Relationship between claims and embodiments]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. 91B to 91G is the implementation of the invention described in the claims of the claims or the invention described in each of the solving means of [means for solving the problem]. Corresponds to the form. In this case, the "opening / closing part" in the claims corresponds to the "door frame 3" of the embodiment, the "predetermined part" corresponds to the "arrangement area 420", and the "window part" corresponds to the "door window". It corresponds to "101a".

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the rear side and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and an outer frame 2 and the main body that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view It includes a frame 4 and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. A 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, and a second attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. Between one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided at the position of.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a gaming ball guided by the one guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 100 and the like. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is for holding the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front while the rear portion is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted in the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4a is released from the pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is attached with a main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. Has been done. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4b releases the pressing force and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. It is located at (see FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). It is formed (see FIG. 100 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in this embodiment, the door frame passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is configured to be. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position at the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while being supplied, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B struck by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch ball passage (see FIG. 39) of the launch passage portion 1012 composed of the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game area 5a. Driven in.

If the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 39, between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001. It falls from the foul ball drop port 1013 opened in the above to the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and passes from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a whose front-rear direction extends to the left and right with a substantially constant width, and a top plate portion whose width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is the top plate portion. The left plate portion 551b having substantially the same width and extending downward long, and the right plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a extending downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a. , The upper part 551d of the back plate extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b are substantially constant to the right. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and a left plate portion 551b. A connecting plate portion 551h that connects the bottom plate portion 551g extending from the front portion of the lower side to the right to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. And have. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, an eaves portion 551da protruding rearward is formed at a portion separated by a predetermined length from the lower side thereof in the left-right direction.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in an opaque black color, and is formed in the left-right direction to be approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is low, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a single guide passage. Has been done. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the one guide passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is bent downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in an opaque white color, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. .. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color, and is formed at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. (1) The end of the rail cover on the 554 side is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 111). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidably attached to the left side in the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding to, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged decreases downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape with multiple bends. A part of the plurality of bent stepped portions is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has a mounting surface thereof and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back). The board is housed so that the payout base 551 is viewed from the front and its mounting surface is perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551 so that 10 external terminals called XCN10 are exposed.)) It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground board 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5) are mounted facing downward. When the payout base 551 is viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is in a state of being accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 housed in the space formed by the board accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). In a state where the frame grounding board 559 is housed and mounted inside the board housing part 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the board housing part 551aa, the frame grounding board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal board 558 and difficult to see, but among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 are in a state of protruding from the lower side of the external terminal board 558, and the pachinko machine. It can be visually recognized from the back surface of No. 1 (see, for example, FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to see. The height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is as low as 7 mm as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding board 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earth grounding) to the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the guidance passage of one of the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes one payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the one guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and one payout passage 580a branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. It has a passage 580b, and in a normal state, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball removal lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 111).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 106 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 106 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of a payout device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In addition, in order to explain the rotation position of the payout blade, FIG. 107 is a visible description of a payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be seen from the back surface of the payout device, and is the subject of the description. A small circle is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. Here, the configuration of the payout device 580 will be described first, and then the rotation position of the payout blade, the prevention of ball clogging, and the prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Disposal device configuration]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear. The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing. The payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in an opaque black color. The rear lid 582 of the dispensing device is made of polycarbonate resin and is transparently molded. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent back lid 582 of the payout device.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) that is attached and the spur gear-shaped that is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583 that mesh with the drive gear 585. A spur gear-shaped second gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20) and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A plurality of transmission gears 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped payout gears 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587, and a plurality of payout gears 588a extending outward. The payout gear member 588 which has the detection piece 588b and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the payout gear between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. Detects the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the member 588 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is step-driven under the control of the payout control board 633. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the payout motor 584 steps-rotates the rotation shaft at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in an opaque black color. The payout blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded into an opaque white color.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded into an opaque white color. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the payout detection sensor 591.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end. At this branching portion, a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball ejection passage 580b with a part of the passage inner wall forming the payout passage 580a having a predetermined distance dimension, and the ball clogging prevention portion is provided. The upper surface of the 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b having an arc shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending concentrically outward from the rotation axis in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed in the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical shape with an arc. By forming the ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589a forming a peak and three ball accommodating portions 589b forming a valley are formed alternately. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 106). In this way, the ball can be pulled out by opening the ball pulling passage 580b using the ball pulling lever 593.

When the ball is pulled out by raising the ball pulling lever 593 to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592. However, it will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since it is possible to move to the outside of the inner surface of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out due to the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of payout blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585. Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a that meshes with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) It is provided with a payout gear member 588 having Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted so as to rotate the payout blade 589 via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. Will be done.

Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is such that the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 is reduced by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. .. The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation by mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotation shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps and 360 degrees ( The payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), it rotates 4.5 degrees. It will rotate extra degrees.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the payout blade 589 is rotated by 364.5 degrees. It is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 in steps of 53.333 ... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and step drive to the payout motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the payout blade 589. The number of steps, which is the number of times of, is not an integer.

That is, in the present embodiment, three ball accommodating portions 589b are formed on the payout blade 589 at equal intervals, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is step-driven and rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle. The payout blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 (that is, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (rotation by 18 degrees), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every 120 degree rotation, and payout. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 in steps of 17.777 ... (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up after the decimal point, is set as the number of step drives to the payout motor 584, which is commensurate with the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589. By rotating the 589 over 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 steps rotation x 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B for each rotation (360 degree rotation), but there are cases where only one ball B is paid out, for example, tobacco tar and dust. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotation position of the payout blade 589 due to such reasons, the process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is performed every time one game ball B is paid out. Is preferable. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is set to 18 steps, which is an integer rounded up to the nearest whole number. The payout blade 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (actually, it is rotated by 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and it is paid out every time one game ball B is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the payout blade 589.

Further, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that every time one game ball is paid out. Even if the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that one game ball can be played. The accumulated error can be reset each time it is paid out. As a result, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is paid out due to the influence of cigarette tar or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

Further, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that every time one game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is By detecting with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, the cumulative error is reset when it accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feed rotating portion that receives and sends out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is discharged to disperse the position where the tar and dust adhere to the sling and dust. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong payout device 580. As described above, the payout device 580 has one payout passage 580a. Therefore, when the payout speed of the game ball is the same as that of the payout device having the payout blades in the payout passages of Article 2, the payout blades 589 of the payout device 580 having the payout passage 580a of Article 1 in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, in the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the payout passage 580a of Article 1 in the present embodiment, the game ball and the payout blade 589 collide with each other as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the payout passages of Article 2. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high possibility that tobacco tar and dust will adhere to the payout blade 589.

In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation as described above. Therefore, one rotation of the payout blade 589 is regarded as 54 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. If the control is performed to determine and manage the set, an angle difference of 4.5 degrees will occur with respect to one rotation of the payout blade 589 every 54 steps of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. For example, 80 sets. In the case of, the angle difference is finally accumulated up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to be paid out of the game ball B is increased by 3.

As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. .. As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-mentioned angle difference does not occur. As a result, one game ball B is set as one management range by setting a 120-degree region having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

Specifically, first, of the 120-degree region of the payout gear member 588 in the circumferential direction, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. Since it is in a light-shielding state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated in 9 steps (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588). Since the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed, the light receiving range is the 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. (It corresponds to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588.)

That is, in the present embodiment, the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is set as the light-shielding range of the region of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is formed, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated in 9 steps. It is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, with the region of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range, with respect to the payout of one ball of the game ball B. This is done by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps.

When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 9 steps, the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps), which is a light-shielding range of 60 degrees. Since the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, the 60 degree region (shading range) where the detection piece 588b is formed It is possible to reliably discriminate the region (light receiving range) of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is not formed.

Here, a method of setting the origin of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107A, the payout control board 633 is in a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state (“first edge” The "detection state") is set with the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as point A. At this point A, the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 restricts the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the point A, as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 from the origin by 4 steps, as point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as “second edge detection state”). In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the payout gear described above). Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, the 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed).

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 9 steps from the point B, as the above-mentioned point A again. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), a light-shielding range (that is, the above-mentioned payout gear member 588) Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the above, the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed).

Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on processing at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). .. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady-state process when the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting are executed in the payout control side power-on processing. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting is set, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as payout motor control process, history creation process, and origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the history creation process to confirm whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms. The payout control board 633 of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time, that is, every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is excited and switched. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b blocks or does not block the optical axis is the result of checking from the least significant bit to the most significant bit of the history information having an 8-bit width. After shifting the bits one by one toward the bits, if the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are both in a state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or when the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are different (for example, this time and the previous time). One of the confirmation results is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. If there is), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

As described above, in the history creation process, the payout control board 633 updates and creates the history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is excited and switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process for setting the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. When the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above, Since the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the region of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. The 588b is in a non-blocking state.

Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b is the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A. Since the optical axis of the above is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (first edge detection state), 00000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same shall apply hereinafter) is set. .. Then, when the rotation position of the payout blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 extracts the data from 8 times before to 5 times before as the calculation result by performing the first mask processing on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first mask processing), the second determination value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second mask processing on the extracted data, so that the history information is five times before. The data is taken out as the calculation result (here, the calculation result becomes 00010000B by the second mask processing), and when the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is not at the origin, and the payout blade is determined. While the current rotation position of the 589 is not set as the origin, if the value is not 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is at the origin and the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

When the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin in the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to point B, and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at point B (that is, the light-shielding range is exceeded). This process is terminated as it is in a total of 13 steps of rotation in which the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 excites and switches the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at point A, and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin. The time is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin, and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to B. The time to be a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the shading range is set. The time to set the rotation position of the payout blade 589 (which exceeds the light receiving range again) to point A is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one ball of the game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time required for paying out one ball of the game ball B is paid out. The rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584 is performed by 18-step rotation, so that 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18-step rotation) is obtained.

Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor has been proposed (for example, special feature). Kai 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052], and FIG. 4)). In the game machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for four steps to pay out one game ball. ing. In pachinko machines installed in pachinko parlors, it is inevitable that cigarette tar and dust adhering to the game balls will adhere to the inside of the payout device. Further, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensing device that is strong against tobacco tar and dust is required. By the way, in the game machine of this document, since the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by driving four steps of the payout motor and pay out one game ball, accurate operation can be expected, but the game It can be seen that the contact position between the sphere and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where tobacco tar and dust adhere is fixed and easily accumulated.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, prevention of ball clogging and prevention of ball omission will be described with reference to FIG. 108. Here, the prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then the prevention of ball removal due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end as described above, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. You can do it. When the ball is pulled out, the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable. At this time, in a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the passage inner wall forming the payout passage 580a from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. A total of four game balls B are parked up to the rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r, which has a predetermined distance dimension and protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b. As for this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B anchored on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and is on the downstream side (that is, the payout blade 589 exists). It has a length located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a). As a result, a rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a is projected from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 toward the ball ejection passage 580b having a predetermined distance dimension. When a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be stopped is in a state of protruding toward the ball removal passage 580b in the ball clogging prevention unit 581r. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a described above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, it has a length that allows it to flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. In this way, by stopping in a state where a part of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The width of the ball-extracting passage 580b is restricted to the width at which one game ball B can flow down (depending on the length at which a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball-extracting passage 580b). You can do it.

Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is formed so that the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane so as to be a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view.

That is, when the ball is pulled out while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if the ball collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) that stays on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the rearmost game ball B) anchored on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is located on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and on the downstream side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from popping due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from causing ball clogging in the vicinity of the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r.

As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is passed along the ball removal path (main body side guide wall 581a and rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the side) is restricted to the width at which one game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 108 (a). This makes it possible to prevent ball clogging. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ball clogging when the ball is pulled out. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball ejection passage 580b is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although it varies depending on the rotation position of the payout blade 589, and the rotation of the payout blade 589. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in a place where the width of various passages is narrowed from a place wider than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to a little narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, 21 mm).

Next, prevention of ball dropout due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the game ball B is connected to the game ball B in a state where the subsequent game ball B is in contact with the game ball B and is stopped in the payout passage 580a. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end toward the bottom, and slightly to the right from there. After bending diagonally downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589.

Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B in contact with the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 (the center of gravity). The position is slightly shifted to the left side of the position of the center of gravity), and in a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is followed. Due to the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B, a rightward force (that is, a force that rotates clockwise) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589.

In such a state, when the payout motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589, and is housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. The game ball B will flow down (delivered) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will come off.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is the payout blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout van 589. The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout blade 589 is formed in the rear view so that it can be stopped by rotating 6 steps from the origin.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 108 (c), when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops. The outer circumference of the blade piece 589a having an arc shape of the payout blade 589 and the S1 point where the game ball B abutting on the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 abuts on the side wall of the payout passage 580a. Of the surface, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated is closer to the side (that is, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated, and the ball accommodating portion 589b and the following ball accommodating ball B are not accommodated. Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a connecting the portion 589b, the S2 point that comes into contact with the ball accommodating portion 589b (closer to the ball accommodating portion 589b side in which the game ball B is accommodated) is leaned against the center of the outer peripheral surface. The shape of the payout passage 580a is formed. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 can be generated, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can be stopped by rotating 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops, it rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Therefore, it is in a state of being rotated by 2 steps in the shading range (9 steps) beyond the point B which is rotated by 4 steps from the origin and advanced as shown in FIG. However, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps (the remaining 7 steps rotate + 5 steps from point A because it rotates 2 steps out of 9 steps shown in FIG. 107 (d)), the payout blade 589 rotates. The game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (delivered) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and is reliably detected by the payout detection sensor 591. ing. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and advances) and stops, the number of balls to which the game ball B is paid out does not become excessive.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 can be used for pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, or for a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202), so that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or has a power failure. (Including a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure.) When the power is restored when the power is restored after that, the payout motor 584 is first controlled so that the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is not returned to the origin. ing. This causes an excessive number of balls to be paid out by the game ball B in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and advances) and is stopped. This is to prevent this.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 109 is a modified example of the payout device, and is a cut rear sectional view of the payout device provided with the payout blade 589 provided with four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 109 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit corresponding to the above-mentioned FIG. 105 cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade, and has the same reference numerals as those in FIG. When the payout blade 589 includes four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 109, the above-mentioned payout gear member 588 is a flat plate-shaped detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90 degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is set as the light shielding range in the 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and 9 steps of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the region of 45 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. As described above, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps with respect to the payout of one ball of the game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the payout gear 588 and the payout gear 588 of the gear 587 and the payout gear member 588, respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect the passage of the game ball B, but when affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes through. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the game ball B has not passed due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed, and the payout motor By controlling the excessive rotation of the rotation axis of 584, a large amount of the game ball B is paid out. In order to detect such a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B (referred to as "radio wave goto"), as shown in FIG. 109, a radio wave sensor 594 is provided in the vicinity of the upper side of the payout detection sensor 591. Can be provided and configured in. When the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is being emitted based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310X. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310X receives the 8-bit wide radio wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310X sets the radio goto notification command to an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width and sets the radio goto warning sound to the maximum volume. While flowing from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.), various LEDs are set to the warning notification light emission mode (for example, the light emission mode blinking red) to set the radio wave goto. It is shaped so that it can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "An abnormality has occurred" and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emitting mode. To do.

Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594', which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch, may be used. The detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 is divided into a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls paid out from the game ball B does not match, it can be configured so that it can be determined that some kind of fraud has been performed. When the payout control board 633 determines that some kind of fraud has been performed, it urgently stops the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310X. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310X receives the 8-bit width goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310X sets the goto notification command to an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width and sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume from various speakers. Along with the flow, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and the LED is shaped so that the goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "An abnormality has occurred" and controls various LEDs in a warning notification light emitting mode. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but it may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is configured to step-rotate at 18 degrees as a predetermined angle accordingly. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is passed through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmission member. , The payout blade 589 was configured to be able to decelerate and rotate, but the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 was rotated at a low speed to rotate a rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586',, The speed may be increased and the payout blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587'and the payout gear 588a')) of the payout gear member 588. In this way, the speed-up ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584, which is commensurate with the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589, is not an integer. The positioning position is different each time one ball is paid out. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Further, of course, if the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmission member described above is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increase ratio of such a rotation transmission member is determined in advance, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the tar and dust are changed. It is possible to have a payout device 580 that is strong against tar and dust by dispersing the positions where the deposits adhere.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full-filled ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly from the payout device 580 to the lower full-filled ball path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view extending downward from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball pulling passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 111).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 111. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

A predetermined number of ball tanks 552 opened upward are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the upper ball storage passage 600b which is connected to the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside (game hole) of the pachinko machine 1. It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116 and the like. FIG. 112 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 112 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 116 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and vertically, and a circular speaker mounting portion 621a and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the water is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and. The power supply board cover 631 is shaped with a transparent synthetic resin so that the power supply board 630 can be visually observed through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. There is. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island equipment of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volt (AC100 V) is stepped down to the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply voltage for the game machine. AC24V, which is stepped down in the island equipment of the game hall, is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from AC24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall and supplies them to various boards. Further, although the power supply board 630 originally has to be supplied with a power supply voltage for a game machine of AC24V, a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V may be supplied and destroyed due to an erroneous connection of a power cord (not shown). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c can be replaced by using a Phillips screwdriver, which is a general tool (note that the fastener is not used as a general tool such as a Phillips screwdriver. Can also be configured so that it can be attached and detached by manually operating.)

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. (See 116) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from the polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not it has been tampered with or the illicit IC is mounted). Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the payout control board box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the payout control board box 632 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the payout control board box 632 is then paid out. In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent force against fraudulent acts on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the contact portion 640a which is lowered one step forward is formed on the upper side. In the state of being assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same surface as the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the eaves portion 551da formed on the back plate upper portion 551d described above). There is. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551, and the contact portion is in contact with the rear surface. , It is covered with an eaves portion 551da formed so as to project from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically, except for the contact portion 640a. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 125. FIG. 118 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 119 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view viewed from the rear. FIG. 120 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 120 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. ..

In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction with respect to the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a in the front view at the portion where the upper side is closed. Three rectangular notch portions 553aa having (30 mm) are formed with a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in this embodiment). Due to the rectangular notch 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a is added with the thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a to the front, and is about 7 mm. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the main guide portion 553a upward from the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a (in the present embodiment). , About 2.5 mm) is added to form a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

In the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, the metal powder is peeled off from the game ball B and falls due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B to the payout device 580, and the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton rod is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall, which is caused by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. By performing the work of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in various production units, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the above-mentioned phases can be confirmed. It can produce the same effect as the effect.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It includes a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, and outside the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the detour passage 552 g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in a plan view. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outward and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g have the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g lower at the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 122. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 123). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 124, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 123) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 123, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

Further, while the ball tank 552 is molded from a conductive resin, the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded from a non-conductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the tank rail 553 has the same polarity as the peripheral control board box. It repels and is not drawn to the peripheral control board box.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. However, one notch, a hole, or a groove may be formed in the ball passage through which the game ball B rolls, as in the case of the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guidance unit 570 having one guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. 111, the metal of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a. A notch, a hole, or a groove capable of removing powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. 104. As shown in FIG. 111, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 has a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 112, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, an eaves-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear lid 582 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 103, and is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571. The position of the notch, the hole, or the groove to be formed and the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are mounted can be misaligned, and both can be adopted. Can also be configured. Further, a box-shaped member is moved rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 112. It can be formed so as to project, and the positions of notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636. It can be configured by shifting the position of, or it can be configured by adopting both. By not forming ventilation holes in the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 112, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, and the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635. Also, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310X arranged below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310X is arranged at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 serves as an eave, or the main control unit. It is also possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering by arranging the eaves-shaped member corresponding to the 1300 or by not forming a ventilation hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300.

[4-12. Composition of metal powder measures]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553a formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Can be avoided with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view cut along the line CC of FIG. 118 (a), and is a schematic view of the configuration of measures against metal powder. In FIG. 126, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

When metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the cutouts 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur and the peripheral control unit 1500 may malfunction or malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with ICs such as peripheral control ICs, ROMs, and SDRAMs, which will be described later, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, is provided with ICs such as peripheral data ROMs. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so that the spacing of various connectors becomes narrower. As a result, the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrowed, so it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 126, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the deviation toward the rear (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). It is arranged so that it is offset by the distance dimension of.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 551 is arranged is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that bends downward in accordance with the direction). The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially on the same surface. It is designed to be placed. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a is received and adhered by the top plate portion 551a, or is received and adhered by the convex portion 551da. You can do it. Further, the contacted portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are in surface contact is projected rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since it is covered by the convex portion 551da formed, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a comes into contact with the metal powder of the game ball B. To prevent the peripheral control unit 1500 from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are made of metal of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is functioning as an eaves that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 (rear side) is misaligned (in this embodiment, the distance dimension is about half the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement (that is, the structure is such that the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly under the notch 553aa), there is an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553. It is effective as a measure against metal powder that can prevent.

Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later). Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B temporarily adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to invade the inside of the cover body 1501.

Further, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed with a square-shaped FAN mounting recess described later having a square shape for mounting the air-cooled fan FAN on the central side thereof, and is formed on a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the line. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side thereof, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch. The volume control holes are formed respectively, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where the liquid crystal output board described later is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 allow air from the outside of the unit 1500 to pass through. , The gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover. Through the volume control hole formed in the body 1501, the gap formed in, and the gap formed in the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). , Will be taken in.

The sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess of the cover body 1501 is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the above-mentioned. Gap (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510, seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), a gap formed in the gap, a volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a volume control switch formed in the cover body 1501. From the sum of the volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board, and the area in the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 and the gap formed in). It's getting smaller. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small when the air is taken in. As a result, it is possible to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from invading the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation hole 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

Incidentally, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the air-cooled fan FAN sucks the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wings due to this rotation. Since the air flow velocity increases due to the rotation of the wings of the game ball B, it is highly probable that heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B will be sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 due to the influence of the air flow. Due to electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by metal powder, defects (failures) occur in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 mounted inside the cover body 1501 and various electronic components provided in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, a heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protruding portion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, the game ball. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of B from being sucked into the air-cooled fan FAN, and the air-cooled fan FAN has a thin distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction. (That is, the air-cooled fan FAN having a distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction that is shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess) is selected and formed on the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is housed in the FAN mounting recess, the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess has a function as a shelter to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from being sucked into the air-cooled fan FAN. can do. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a metal powder countermeasure is taken that an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter, "metal powder countermeasure according to the second to fifth embodiments"). (Structure) will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. 127 is a configuration of a metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 128 is a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 127 to 130, the same reference numerals are given to the members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (hereinafter, referred to as “the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment”). The outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 353 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in the direction from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper part of the back plate 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and is directed upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same surface. The rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 arranged on substantially the same surface as the tank rail 553 is formed by branching from a portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and extending rearward.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d in surface contact, and the contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. It is in a state of contact with the mounting recess 3010da formed in the above surface, and the contacted portion is covered with an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. In a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box in the back unit 3000. It differs from the rear surface 3010d of 3010 in that it is arranged on substantially the same surface. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. It is different in that it is in a state of contact with the surface of 3010da, and the contacted portion is covered with an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It is designed to be able to adhere. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact is formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a abuts on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

In this way, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 fell from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notches 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B is directed toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in the direction from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper part of the back plate 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is closer to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to project below the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d in surface contact, and the contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged in the above. Are arranged on the same surface.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. , The bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are substantially on the same surface. It differs in that it is placed in. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is bent so as to be arranged below the tank rail 553. The top surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a, and the upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are arranged on the same surface. It differs in that it is done.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553. And on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640, it can be received and adhered. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, since a gap is not formed, the game panel of the game board 5 is exposed to the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become like.

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder may fall toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

The front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553. The back cover 640 also has a positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is closely submerged under the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. Since no gap is formed between the contact portion 640a to be formed and the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 so that a gap is not formed, the main guide portion is passed through the notch portion 553aa. From the close portion of the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from 553a to the outside, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (after the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the side) cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in the direction from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper part of the back plate 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is directed from the rear surface to the rear of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to project by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-third of the diameter of the game ball B).

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d in surface contact, and the contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. On the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged in the above, the convex portion 551ab formed by projecting downward is in contact with the convex portion 551ab, and the contacted portion is in contact with the tank rail 553. It is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, which is arranged below the.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The point that the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to project slightly rearward with respect to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is arranged below the tank rail 553 and is bent. On the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, the convex portion 551ab formed so as to project downward is in contact with the convex portion 551ab, and the contacted portion is arranged below the tank rail 553. , The difference is that it is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached at 551a. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and projected downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a. Since the contacted portion where the metal is in surface contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B abuts. It is designed so that it cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As well as functioning as an eaves that can prevent the above, it also functions as a saucer for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a that functions as an eaves arranged below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component) of the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to be mounted on.

Further, when the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), it may be a mechanism that can be detached or moved from the mounting position and returned to the mounting position for the purpose of removing the adhered metal powder. In this case, by making the top plate portion 551a a different color from the surrounding members, it is possible to clarify the mechanism portion that can be detached or moved from the mounting position and returned to the mounting position, improving the ease of work of removing the adhering metal powder. Let me.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. And are arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 353 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in the direction from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper part of the back plate 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and is directed downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to project downward with respect to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d in surface contact, and the contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward to form a contact portion. The front surface of the 640a is arranged in parallel with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a arranged so as to project downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d in surface contact, and the contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is a gutter-shaped main guide. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and is arranged so as to project downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. The contacted portions are arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. , The bent top plate portion 551a is not arranged below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is greatly bent forward in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged in parallel and is arranged so as to project downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a, and this contacted portion is the main. The difference is that they are arranged with a large deviation in front of the notch portions 553aa formed in the guide portion 553a.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by being greatly bent toward the front. Further, it is arranged parallel to the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, and is arranged so as to project downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. The contacted portions that come into surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a are arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and are in contact with each other, so that there is a gap. Is not formed. Therefore, from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a abuts, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the 3010 cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

In this way, the abutting portion 640a formed by the upper side of the back cover 640 being largely bent forward is from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via a plurality of notched portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The dropped metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling toward it, and also functions as a saucer for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter that falls from the holes provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board placed below the tank rail, electrical troubles may occur and the control board may malfunction or malfunction. It was. In recent control boards, as the number of control targets increases, the pin spacing of the connectors becomes narrower, and as the number of connectors increases, the connector spacing becomes narrower, and the IC pin spacing becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. 131 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and FIGS. 132 to 139 are enlarged front views of a main part of the game board. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Is a schematic view of a function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind, and FIG. 144A is from the function display unit on the main control board. It is the schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring routing of.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is a first game area 5a1 in which a game ball launched with a predetermined firing force (when the amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player is small) can flow down, and a specific firing stronger than the predetermined firing force. A second game area 5a2 in which a game ball launched by a force (a firing force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1 / a large amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player) can flow down, and this second game area 5a2. It can be divided into a third game area 5a3 downstream where the game area 5a2 and the first game area 5a1 meet.

In the left half of the first game area 5a1 of the game area 5a and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side thereof, a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B) is given to the player by accepting the game ball B. A plurality of general winning openings 2001 for granting payouts) are provided, and in the right half of the second game area 5a2 and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side thereof, the game ball B is accepted to the player. Detects the passage of the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the game ball B to give a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player. A gate portion 2003 that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, the opening / closing piece 850 of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time to be changed so as to be able to win a prize) is provided, and the center of the third gaming area 5a3 is provided. Is provided with a first starting port 2002 that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting the game ball B.

Further, in the second game area 5a2, as a peculiar entrance that can accept the game ball B, the game ball B can be accepted, but the game ball B is collected, which is disadvantageous and does not give a profit to the player. One entrance 2006 is provided. In the second game area 5a2, the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 that accept the game ball B and give the player a predetermined privilege are the second, which is more advantageous than the first entrance 2006. Also called a reception. The second inlet may be relatively more advantageous than the first inlet 2006, so that the setting of the first inlet 2006 does not give any game balls to the incoming ball. For example, one game ball may be given by entering the ball. Further, if the setting of the first entrance 2006 is to give one game ball to the incoming ball, it may be to give two or more game balls by entering the ball.

Further, in the game area 5a, by connecting the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 upward, the game ball B launched with a specific strong firing force enters the second game area 5a2. It has a connecting passage portion 5a4 through which it can pass.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 in contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) that controls the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. It is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. It includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 and the outer circumference of the base panel 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached to the center of the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and one general winning opening 2001, and a first game. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning openings 2001 near the intermediate region between the regions 5a1 and the third gaming region 5a3, and the second gaming region 5a2 and the third gaming region. Attacker unit 2400, which is installed near the middle area of the above and has a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second entrance), second starting port 2004 (second entrance), and a gate portion. It has 2003 and the first entrance 2006, and is slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a (the first game area 5a1, the second game area 5a2, and the third game area 5a3 are surrounded on both sides and the lower side. It is provided with a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the (state).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a2 on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 mounted below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of drive board units 1700 mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with a back production unit 3100.

The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) and various sensors and switches provided on the game board 5, and the peripheral control board 1510 included in the peripheral control unit 1500. A panel drive board 1720 for driving various decorative boards and various electrical drive sources (various motors and various solenoids) in response to a command from, a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and a panel drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730. It has.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005, which extends from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part of which is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the game ball B of the outer rail 1001. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 such as rubber provided at an intersection of the end point with respect to the hitting direction and the upper end of the right rail 1005.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out ball opening 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball mouth 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the base panel 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this base panel 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The base panel plate 1110 has a decorative pattern formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right diagonal lines rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, and a horizontal line and an upper right diagonal line. It is a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of upper left diagonal lines rotated 60 degrees clockwise at the same intervals as a plurality of horizontal lines passing through the intersection of the above. In other words, the decorative pattern is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangle contours formed by horizontal lines, upper right diagonal lines, and upper left diagonal lines are arranged in a constant pattern. This decorative pattern includes two equilateral triangle contour parts on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three equilateral triangle contour parts near the upper end of the inner rail 1002 when assembled on the game board 5. Inside each of the above, a pattern consisting of the outlines of two equilateral triangles of different sizes is further provided.

The decorative pattern has a V-shaped cross section. The decorative pattern 1150 is visible from the front player side even when a plurality of panel decorative LEDs that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 mounted on the panel decorative substrate are not emitted. The inside of the game area 5a is decorated. Further, the base panel plate 1110 was formed into a geometric pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles when the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration substrate was made to emit light and the light was incident on the inside of the base panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern can be luminescently decorated.

The decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 consists of a radiation portion that mainly reflects the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside and a light radiated from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside. It is composed of a radiating light guide unit that reflects light and guides light along a line. The radiating light guide section satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer peripheral length in cross section as compared with the radiating section. The radiated light guide portion is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiating portions, and the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside is diffusely reflected in the base panel plate 1110. , Can guide light in the direction of the groove extension. That is, the radiating light guide portion plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating portions connected by itself to the other, thereby limiting the arrangement portion and the number of arrangement of the panel decoration LED. Among them, the emissivity of the entire decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 (the ratio of the amount of light radiated (reflected) forward) is increased. Specifically, the radiation light guide unit is arranged outside the range of the normal light guide region from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the panel decoration LED of the lower left panel decoration substrate, which will be described later. Light is guided to the part, and the radiating part is made to emit light, so that the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern is increased.

As a result, more light can reach the radiating light guide portion with respect to the radiating portion of the decorative pattern formed in the portion where the light from the panel decoration LED is difficult to reach (the portion outside the normal light guide region). Therefore, the radiating part can be decorated by emitting light with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration substrate is made to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the base panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion and the radiating light guide portion, and a geometry consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles The decorative pattern formed in the academic pattern can be radiated and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

The base panel 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the base panel 1110 is formed with a plurality of through holes 1112 penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the base panel 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the base panel 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the base panel 1110 detachably, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction 1121. It has.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper and front sides open, and is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. It can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140, 141, 143 and 144A to 144K. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control unit 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. There is.

[5-4-1. Main control board box]
The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and are molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The main control unit 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space 1320s formed by superimposing the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded from the synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not they have been tampered with or is illicit). Whether or not the IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1320z so as to correspond to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism 1320z, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy one of the sealing mechanisms 1320z, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing remaining in the sealing mechanism 1320z, it is possible to detect the illegal opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against the illegal act on the main control unit 1310 is enhanced.

[5-4-2. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 has a main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) that controls the progress of the game and the payout of the game ball B, a winning probability of a lottery described later, and a distribution rate to an area that is advantageous to the player. It is roughly composed of a setting change board 1310Y (see FIG. 151) capable of setting a game setting related to the above and the like to any one of a plurality of levels of setting values. The main control unit 1310 may use the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y as a single board.

[5-4-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. Further, the main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving / receiving sensor 2406, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening sensor. It is connected to 3001, the first start port sensor 3002, the magnetic sensor 3003, the out port left sensor 1008a, and the out port right sensor 1008b.

[5-4-2-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 has a setting switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value, and a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the set value. It is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X by a connector (connection between boards) (a harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X). May be electrically connected via). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. The vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y is almost the same as the vertical distance dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, and the horizontal distance dimension thereof is the left and right of the main control board 1310X. It is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y are It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y at the center of the vertical distance dimension on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is the main. Along the left side of the control board 1310X, a position at the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line. A setting switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder for which the setting key K1 is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1310Y, and has a pressing operation unit 1311p above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A setting change permission lamp on which the setting change button 1311b is arranged and capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1310Y and on the upper left side of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting change button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. A setting indicator 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is placed above the center line of the main control board 1310X and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310X. The base monitor 1310h, which is lower than the center and is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side, is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310X. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit similar to the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is arranged.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). In the initial position, the setting switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key K1 can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key K1 inserted in the insertion port, the main frame 4 is lined up opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension of the setting switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key K1 do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal changes the setting. Input is input from the board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Further, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and operating the second ON operation, and the signal of the determination key ON can be turned on. It is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Further, the setting key cylinder is counterclockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting switch 1311a 60 degrees in the direction and turning it off, and the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. (That is, the setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it back to the setting switch 1311a, which is the rotation position of the setting key cylinder). it can. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. In the present embodiment, two functions in which the function of setting key ON and the function of setting key ON are completely different can be realized by a single setting switch 1311a depending on the direction in which the setting key silin is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed collectively by using only the switch 1311a.

The front surface of the base of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are openings formed in the cover body 1301 of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although exposed to the outside via 1301h, the front surface of the base of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the corresponding openings 1301h, respectively. The portion and setting corresponding to these openings 1301h of the cover body 1301 so that the setting change substrate 1310Y and the main control substrate 1310X cannot be modified by invading foreign matter such as a wire through the "gap" formed in and. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v (for example, fitting of the cylinders 1301c shown in FIG. 144H) for preventing the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire is molded between the switch 1311a, the setting changeover button 1311b, and the RAM clear switch 1310f. ing. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, the cover body 1301 is transparently molded as described above. Therefore, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body 1301.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the setting switch 1311a are OFF. The wiring pattern in which the signal of the above is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are arranged so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted on the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring in which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted. The pattern) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted. The routing with the wiring pattern is also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other).

[5-4-2-3. Setting switch, setting switching button, setting indicator]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting changeover button 1311b, and the setting display 1 will be briefly described. Here, first, a case where the setting value of the game setting is changed will be briefly described, and a case where the confirmation display of the current setting value is performed will be briefly described. Since the setting key K1 is important for not only changing the set value but also confirming the current set value that has been set, a few people including the manager of the game hall Only a limited number of people have it.

When changing the setting of the set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a, and then turns off the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key K1 is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on by the first ON operation, and then the setting key 1311a is turned ON again. The power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, the person who changes the setting of the set value first performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a of FIG. 7, and then turns off the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the above, and the setting key K1 is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a is among the current set values 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on, which is stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

Next, when the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a starts from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. The value is increased by 1 and when the maximum value of the set value of 6 is reached, the value is returned to the initial value of the set value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

Next, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) to turn it off, and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise. By operating the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

Next, move the setting key cylinder clockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on. The setting switch 1311a is turned off by rotating it 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to the non-display state and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

Next, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the work of changing the setting of the set value is completed.

In addition, when confirming and displaying the currently set value, the power is restored after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (including a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure). In, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. By the first ON operation, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). , The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and then the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first operation. By turning on the setting switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

Therefore, the person who confirms the current set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (a state in which the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 is checked. The main body frame 4 is opened, and then the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. Turn on the setting switch 1311a. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a is among the current set values 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on, which is stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms the set value presses the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the set value is set in response to this pressing operation. It is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

Then, when the confirmation of the currently set setting value is completed, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return and turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the set value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

Finally, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the work of confirming and displaying the currently set setting value is completed. To do.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation, the predetermined set value display permission condition is, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when a power failure occurs. (Including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily.) After the power is restored after the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a is inserted. It is necessary that the setting key K1 is inserted into the machine, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is inserted. There is a common requirement that the setting key K1 is inserted, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the setting key is turned on by the first ON operation. The difference is that the set value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, the set value of the game setting will be described. The "set value" is the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and the probability from the time of probability change. Probability for determining lottery when shifting to normal time (the above are also collectively referred to as "probability of winning the lottery"), distribution rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. can be changed. Therefore, the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that the player can acquire can be increased) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values of a plurality of stages, and setting values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player toward the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, and a jackpot symbol. The big hit symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that specifies the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and the ratio of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in the unit. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. Among the game balls launched in the game area 5a, the base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 1008a or the out port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is detected on the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but this setting switch 1311a was set from the initial position, and the setting switch 1311a was turned on. The setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the cylinder may be used. In this case, the setting switch 1311a'is counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a'can be turned on by rotating the setting switch 1311a'by 60 degrees and turning it off, and the signal of turning the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be described as "variation example (1) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, although not shown, a pressing operation unit is attached to the setting change board 1310Y. A decision key button to have may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed to the outside through the opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button are exposed. Preventing foreign matter from entering the setting switching button 1311b so that foreign matter such as wire cannot enter through the corresponding opening and the "gap" formed in the setting change board 1310Y and main control board 1310X. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the unit 1301v is provided.
When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1310Y may be near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed is affixed to the enter key button and the setting change button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting change button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (to press the pressing operation portion) so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector SMCN terminal of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. In the main control board 1310X as well, the routing pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted should not be brought close to each other ( It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the setting change board 1310Y is provided with the enter key button, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (2)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the palm or finger touches the handle 182 in the handle unit 180. The detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the switch is on, and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. It may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 182. When not touching, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (even if the mode of the handle touch sensor (including the mode of the single-shot button operation sensor) is included. Good) may be described as "a modified example of the enter key (3)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 described later is provided. A firing reference pulse is branched from the firing timing control circuit on the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on these firing reference pulses. May be determined. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse in which 100 game balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "variation example (4) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the movement of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 can be detected. When the distance measuring sensor is provided on the game board 5 and the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input to the relay board. It may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the relay board, and whether or not the determination key is ON may be determined based on this detection signal. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted by the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the movement of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that there is an operation, the enter key is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "a modification of the determination key (5)"). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and operating the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting to turn off the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on is set. Setting to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off, and this OFF signal is the setting change board. It was supposed to be input from 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF can be serially output to the outside as serial information. The circuit may be provided in the setting switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved. The setting switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided on the main control board 1310X or the payout control board 633 instead. When the serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a uses the received serial information to set key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFFs is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (6)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and operating the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting to turn off the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on is set to be turned off. Setting to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off, and this OFF signal is the setting change board. Although it was supposed to be input from the 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, a pulse output circuit capable of outputting information for transmitting the setting key ON, the enter key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. May be provided in the setting switch 1311a. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved. The setting switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided on the main control board 1310X or the payout control board 633 instead. For the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit, for example, the pulse width is set to 1 ms when the information conveys the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys the enter key ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a sets key ON, enter key ON, from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the above and OFF is the information to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having the pulse output circuit may be described as "a modification of the determination key (7)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and operating the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal for turning on the decision key is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by the OFF operation, and the initial position (that is, the setting to turn off the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on is set to be turned off. Setting to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off, and this OFF signal is the setting change board. It was supposed to be input from 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the voltage level of the OFF signal were changed. An intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V) is used between the boards extending from the board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X, and a comparator circuit is provided on the main control board 1310X to provide a comparator circuit. When the comparison result is input to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a determines ON / OFF of the setting key ON signal, ON / OFF of the enter key ON signal, and ON / OFF of the OFF signal. May be good. Thereby, the security for the signal from the setting switch 1311a can be improved (the mode of the setting switch using the intermediate potential may be described as "variation example (8) of the determination key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the decision key button having the pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633. May be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and corresponds to the press operation portion of the enter key button. A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body with respect to the opening so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading the wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch 633d having the pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch 633d so that the enter key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused. It is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused, a button with a cover covering one of the enter key button and the error release switch 633d (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or the color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the error release switch 633d or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted should not be close to each other (mutually). Formed (separately). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the decision key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (9)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633. The signal from 633d may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on this signal. .. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (power supply of various control boards). When the time-on processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, while the error release switch 633d is used. When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is not operated based on the signal, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (10)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633. The logic of the signal from 633d is monitored by the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later to create a command, and the command transmission of the payout control unit power-on process described later is performed. The command created in the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, and the system of the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the power is restored (power supply of various control boards). When the time-on processing is completed and the interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation unit of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and determines that fact. When the command to be transmitted is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d and conveys that fact. Is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the mode 2 of the error release switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (11)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn off The second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) and then turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the setting switch 1311a, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to be branched on the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. Can be done. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON.

The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is performed. Foreign matter intrusion prevention similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v so that the payout control board 633 cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the portion and the opening corresponding thereto. The part is formed.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be near the error release switch 633d having the pressing operation unit described later. The name of each button is printed on the cover body of the payout control board 633 at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused. A sticker is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f with the error release switch 633d, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch 633d (pressing operation of the pressing operation unit) It is necessary to open the cover in order to do so.), The color of the pressing operation unit may be different, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d may be adopted. Alternatively, a switch having a different shape of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have the pressing operation unit may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and a wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are used. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. In the main control board 1310X as well, the wiring pattern in which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted should not be brought close to each other. It is formed (separated from each other). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The setting switch 1311a'may be used (the mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (12)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on is set. Set to turn off The second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position of the key cylinder) and then turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the setting switch 1311a, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is monitored by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. Then, the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that receives this command turns on the enter key. You may determine the presence or absence of. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the RAM clear switch 1310f. Can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a is a RAM clear switch 1310f based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 can be used. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of the above and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key ON (the aspect 2 of the RAM clear switch (the aspect of the setting switch 1311a' may be included)) is referred to as "a modification of the decision key (13)". May be described as).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. Turn 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) to turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees), and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633. The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signals from the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b, which are input and the main control MPU 1310a is input. As described above, the game balls launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port are out. Based on the detection signal from any one of the right sensors 1008b, it can be determined that the decision key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, while the door frame 3 has a door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is not open (that is, it is closed) and / or when the out port 1008 is not collecting the game ball based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'in which the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (14)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. Turn 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) to turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees), and the signal of this decision key ON is sent from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the logic of the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b is input by the payout control MPU633aa of the payout control board 633 to turn on the power of the payout control unit, which will be described later. The command is created by monitoring in the port input processing of the time processing, the command created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control board 1310X that receives this command is transmitted. The main control MPU 1310a of the above may determine whether or not the determination key is ON. As described above, the game balls launched into the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the game ball is collected by the out port 1008 based on the detection signals from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU633aa determines and receives a command to convey that fact, it can be determined that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU633aa determines that the game ball has not been collected by the out port 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (aspect 2 of the out port switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or The detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 is paid out control. The payout control MPU633aa of the board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is the main control board. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that transmits to 1310X and receives this command may determine whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (a mode (setting) of the payout unit. The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (16)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a detects from the main body frame release switch 4b. Based on the signal, it can be determined that the decision key is ON when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, while the state in which the main body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2 is maintained. When it is set, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (a mode of the main body frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, the outer frame 2 is closed. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, pull out the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a detects from the door frame opening switch 4a. Based on the signal, it can be determined that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, while the state in which the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the main body frame 4 is maintained. When it is set, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (a mode of the door frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and after turning on the decision key, with respect to the main body frame 4. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation of the setting key cylinder that is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). Turn the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it to the position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation to set the setting switch 1311a. It can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but this setting switch 1311a is provided in the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch may be described as "a modification of the decision key (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a) is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is turned on. Rotate the setting switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the position) to turn it off, and then rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it back to the second ON operation to set the setting switch 1311a. It can be turned ON, and the signal of this decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position and turning it off, and this OFF signal is the main control board 1310X. By inputting to the main control MPU 1310a of, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the OFF signal is input, but is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. Can be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'in which the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (19)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the decision key button having the pressing operation unit on the main control board 1310X. May be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and the pressing operation unit of the determination key button and the pressing operation unit thereof. Between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation portion so that the main control board 1310X cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like through the corresponding opening and the "gap" formed in the cover body 1301. A foreign matter intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 144H) is formed in the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 144H). When the pressing operation unit of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button, while the press operation unit of the enter key button is pressed. It can be determined that the enter key is not ON when the pressing operation is not performed.

The position where the decision key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this sticker). Further, so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused, a button with a cover that covers one of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (to press the push operation unit). It is necessary to open the cover), or a different color of the pressing operation unit may be adopted, or the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f or the pressing operation. A switch having a different shape of the portion may be adopted, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation unit as a decision key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, a touch switch, and the like. The switch can be mentioned. Further, when the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310X is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). Further, when the decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. The switch 1311a'may be used (aspect 2 of the decision key button (aspect of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as a "modification example (20) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal. As will be described later, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), When the setting is changed so that the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM) of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Be sure to clear the area excluding the specific area out of all the areas of.). Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be diverted as the decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. This makes it possible to improve security with respect to whether or not the decision key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (aspect 3 of the RAM clear switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (21)"). The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is a payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU 633aa, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also have the function of the error canceling switch 633d described later, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch 633d.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the gate sensor of the gate unit 2003 provided on the game board 5 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, large winning opening sensor 2403, first entrance sensor 2406, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002), out of out opening 1008 The main control MPU1310a to which the detection signals from the mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b are input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (aspects such as various sensors (various sensors and the like). The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (22)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, or various prizes, in order to turn on the decision key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth or to send the game ball B to the out door 1008.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is used for stepping motors, DC motors, solenoids, etc. The drive control of the electric drive source is performed to control the operation of the movable body (feature), and the original position of the movable body (feature) and the original position of the movable body (feature) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.) When determining the operating position or the like, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (of the optical accessory sensor). A mode (a mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, and the optical sensor is in the original position of the movable body (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the 3003 is input may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (the mode (setting) of the magnetic sensor). The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (24)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit to pachinko. A fraudulent act of vibrating the machine 1 to change the course of a game ball flowing down a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 and allowing the ball to enter various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5. When the vibration sensor for detecting the above is provided in the game board 5, the main control MPU1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and the decision key is turned on based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. The presence or absence may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (the mode of the vibration sensor (setting). The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (25)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 was irradiated with radio waves to the game board 5. When the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor that detects a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B by malfunctioning the various sensors of the various winning openings provided or the various sensors provided in the payout device 580. The main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the determination key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set to the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (a mode of the radio wave sensor (setting). The aspect of the switch 1311a'may be included)) may be described as “a modification of the decision key (26)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the determination key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF). , The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the above, and the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation button unit 360 are peripheral control boards. At the same time as being input to 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be set as the setting switch 1311a'which can rotate only the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on (aspect of the effect operation button unit). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a'may be included) may be described as "a modification of the decision key (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are housed in the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. The 1310Y may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of the caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Needs to destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. The setting change board 1310Y cannot be modified by invading a wire or the like through the "gap" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 144H) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation portion. When the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured so that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, the structure of the base body is changed. A setting change board cover body open / close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover may be directly input to the main control board 1310X, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y. It may be configured to be. The case where the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the open / close switch for the setting change board cover body can be included in the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition (setting change board box). The embodiment may be described as "a modified example of the determination key (28)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is formed. The wiring pattern in which the ON signal is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b. Is formed on the setting change board 1310Y so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) as a routing with and to the wiring pattern to be transmitted, and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (main control board 1310X). The connection to the connector MSCN terminal) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310X also transmits the wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted). Wiring pattern, the wiring pattern in which the OK signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. Although they were formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other), the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted and the decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a are transmitted. One of the wiring patterns is connected to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y separately. It may be separately connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310X (connection between boards), or another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y and another connector provided on the main control board 1310X. May be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as "a modification of the determination key (29)").

Further, the mode in which the determination key is appropriately selected and combined from the above-described modification keys (1) to (29) may be adopted. May be described).

Further, in the above-mentioned set values, in addition to the probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery and the probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, the lottery is determined when shifting from the probability change time to the normal time. It is possible to change the probability of the above, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to increase the number of game balls that the player can acquire). Probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, there are game specifications such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment in which the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of set values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, and the player is advantageous. There is a game specification in which only a single setting value has a probability (advantage) in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310X is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1310Y is changed or not used, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are used. Will depend on the game specifications, and therefore will have a main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y having similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is required that the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting value does not need to be changed at all, the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is the probability that the set value is advantageous to the player (degree of advantage). Since there is no need to use the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are assigned as the following contents by design change by software. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the RAM), a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared). It can be used as a set value (which can give variation to the starting method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, with respect to the operation of the movable body (accessory) controlled by the main control MPU1310a and the lighting of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable body (role)). Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "operation of object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "operation of movable body (accessory)" is assigned and set as setting value 2. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned as the value 3, and the "detailed operation of the movable body (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.) is assigned as the setting value 4. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "check for interference with the structure and other movable bodies (roles), operation order with other movable bodies (roles), etc.)" is assigned, and the set value 5 is " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 for designating "lighting of the light emitter in units of one light emitter (lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and " An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned (the mode of the change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "variation example (1) by common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a operates a movable body (accessory) and lights a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED by repeatedly performing an actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM and a timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a movable body that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. (Characteristics) can be operated and the light emitting body can be turned on. Depending on the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demo production performed in the player waiting state). In this case, the time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 1, the time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 3. The time setting pattern 3 that specifies "" is assigned, the time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5. A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as the setting value 6 is assigned (a modification of the time change setting in the state of waiting for the player after the end of the symbol change is set to "Modification example by common hardware configuration (2). ) ”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of setting the time change from the end of the symbol change to the player waiting state, the time from the end of the symbol change to the demonstration can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of the demonstration (demo effect performed in the player waiting state) performed after the end of the change of the symbol. In this case, the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the demo effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect, motion effect of the movable body (character)" is assigned as the setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect" as a setting value 3 is assigned, and a demo effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serial effect, motion effect of a movable body (character)" as a setting value 4 is assigned. 4 is assigned, and a demo production setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama-style production" as a setting value 5 is assigned, and a demo production setting that specifies "historical drama-style production, movable body (role)" as a setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the content of the demo effect may be described as "variation example (3) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the demo effect, it is possible to give variation to the content of the demo effect performed after the end of the change of the symbol.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By sliding the volume control switch 1510d, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, the volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the "volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3. The volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned, the volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. A volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of setting the change of the default volume may be described as "variation example (4) by common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the set value 1 to the set value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is set with a default volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Further, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the setting value 1 is such that the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d is moved in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the volume is minimized. When the movement to the end is completed and the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine stops in front of the machine. Further, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the set value 6 is such that the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the volume is maximized. When the movement to the end is completed and the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be the maximum volume or the volume may be a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. Depending on the mode of changing the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the slide-type volume adjusting switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, are not dependent) by operating the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and pachinko that emits an error notification sound when the maximum volume is set. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall to notice the machine, it may be jarring to a player playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds is also required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. , The error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, the error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and "error notification volume setting pattern 4" is assigned as the setting value 5. The error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and the error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (error notification volume volume). The mode of the change setting of the above may be described as "variation example (5) by common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the set value 1 (the volume that does not mute and the error notification sound can be recognized when the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is stopped) to the setting value 6 (the maximum volume and the maximum volume). The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward (the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the distance from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is several meters). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a controls to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value at which a plurality of default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be set. The brightness of the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 3. The default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and the default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned. 5 is assigned, and the default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the default brightness may be described as "variation example (6) by common hardware configuration". is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the default brightness, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body to light, blink, gradation point, and the like. Depending on the mode of changing the content of the default brightness, the default brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value capable of setting a plurality of brightness of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in error notification such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1 to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, and the error notification brightness setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification brightness 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, and the error notification that specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as the setting value 6 is assigned. The brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of setting the change of the brightness of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "variation example (7) by common hardware configuration"). From the set value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, although it does not turn off, and the brightness of the lamp that can recognize the error notification when stopped in front of the pachinko machine), the lamp is moved toward the set value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt process described later for changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, and lights, blinks, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is the target that the peripheral control board 1510 controls based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the light emitting body so that the light emitting body is turned on, blinks, and has a gradation point. Depending on the mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in the error notification, the brightness of the light emitting body such as a lamp or LED in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (7) by the common hardware configuration, the setting value display permission condition predetermined in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a is satisfied. Occasionally, it is displayed on the setting display 1310g, but it may always be displayed on the setting display 1310g from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off (setting value display). Aspect may be described as "variation example (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the above-described modified examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modified example (30) of the determination key.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It was necessary that the setting key was turned on by being operated. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a is subjected to a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. Clear except for, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. Further, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to perform the setting change processing of the main control built-in RAM. Clear all areas except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission and so on. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored to power, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then advances the game by setting interrupt permission and the like. It will be. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, the outer frame is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored during power recovery after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. In addition to the setting key being turned on by being operated, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (described as "a modification of a predetermined setting value change permission condition"). In some cases).

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined set value display permission condition is the outer frame after the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. It was necessary that the setting key was turned on by being operated. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Display on the vessel 1310 g. Further, as described above, in the RAM clear switch 1310f, the pressing operation unit needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the period of the pressing operation is limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, the outer frame is used when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (including a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the first ON. In addition to the setting key being turned on by being operated, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (described as "a modified example of a predetermined set value display permission condition"). May be). In this case, when the modified example of the preset value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but the main control side power supply described later. In the on-time processing, the game is advanced by performing the initial setting and the start setting of the built-in WDT before the initial setting and the start setting, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. Note that the main control MPU 1310a does not yet set the interrupt enable when the preset value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Instead, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initially set. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a) and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key 1311a. The setting key ON signal from 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch 4b and the setting key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or has a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). (Including the momentary power failure that occurs.) At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after that, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a. , The pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation. When the main control MPU 1310a is in operation, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs an interrupt permission setting and the like. When the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later. After that, the game proceeds by setting the interruption permission and the like. By adopting this aspect, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the set value confirmation display process is never performed. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by setting the interrupt permission or the like, the current set value that has been set is never displayed on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later. The number of game balls that are output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the out port 1008 in the port output processing of the main control side power-on processing described later is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modified example of how to use the base monitor"). .. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value set in the period from when the power is restored to when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission or the like using the base monitor 1310h. At the same time, when the progress of the game is started by setting the interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed. Therefore, the setting display 1310 g is used. It is not necessary to provide it, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification of the decision key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modified example of the predetermined set value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modified example of the usage method of the base monitor is appropriately selected. It may be selected and adopted in the above-mentioned modification examples (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

Incidentally, conventionally, a plurality of nails are planted in the game area of the game board, and a receiving port where the game ball launched by the launching device can enter is provided. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a gaming state that is advantageous to a player occurs when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the entrance and is won by a lottery means with a predetermined probability (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). Gazette (paragraph [0029], paragraph [0033], and FIG. 2)). In such a game machine, since the course of the game ball flowing down the game area changes depending on the posture of the nail, it is possible to enjoy the change in the movement of the game ball flowing down. However, since only a player who can understand the posture of the nail can select a table with abundant changes in the movement of the flowing game ball from a plurality of game machines installed in the game hall, the range of the game is wide. The number of people who could spread the word was limited.

Further, conventionally, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the main control board allows timer interruption in the main processing and executes the timer interrupt processing to advance the game (for example,). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-252306 (FIGS. 2 and 4). However, in the gaming machine described in this document, when the power is turned on, various processes proceed along the flow of the main process, so that various processes from the time when the power is turned on until the timer interrupt is permitted are performed. Since they are the same, it was not possible to select the activation method of the game machine in the game hall.

Further, conventionally, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the main control board allows timer interruption in the main processing and executes the timer interrupt processing to advance the game (for example,). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-252306 (FIGS. 2 and 4). However, in the game machine described in this document, when a staff member such as a game hall clerk initializes the RAM and erases the contents, it is necessary to operate the RAM clear switch, and the staff member such as the game hall clerk The erasing method was limited to one.

[5-4-3. Security structure of game settings]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention includes game settings related to the interests of the player as setting values of a plurality of stages, and the setting values are set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, and the like. It can be changed by the changing operation means, and a security structure is provided to prevent such an unauthorized change of the set value of the game setting. A specific example of the security structure will be described below.

[5-4-3-1. Security structure of change operation means (1)]
The first security structure (1) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is a specification for controlling the start of setting change of the change operation means, as described above for the embodiments of FIGS. 144A to 144C. It is composed of a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion portion on the front surface portion) for turning on the operation portion by the setting key K1. As a result, the set value of the game setting by the change operation means can be changed only by a specific person including the manager of the game hall having the setting key K1.

The change operation means is for changing the set value, and in the embodiment, it is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting changeover button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, of which the setting switch 1311a is the main. It is a specific operation unit provided in the control unit 1310 to control the start of setting change, and is another operation unit provided in the main control unit 1310 to perform a setting operation other than the start of setting change. .. No security measures have been taken for this separate operation unit other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the intrusion of foreign matter such as wires. Therefore, an external input operation (pressing operation of the setting switching button 1311b) The pressing operation of the unit 1311p) can be performed by anyone other than a specific person, but the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation unit, is turned on by the setting key K1 is satisfied. Since the input in the non-existing state is invalid in terms of control, there is almost no problem in crime prevention.

As shown in the figure, the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit of the change operation means, has an axis oriented in a direction orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip portion thereof is the outer surface of the cover body 1301. However, depending on the depth of the island equipment in the game hall, the protrusion may be an obstacle, and it may also be an obstacle during storage.

In such a case, as shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 144A and 144B, the axis of the changing operation means (for example, the setting switch 1311a having the key insertion portion) operated by the setting key K1 is the substrate of the main control unit 1310. For example, the orientation is set so as to be substantially parallel to the surface, and the tip surface (key insertion surface) thereof faces the side surface side of the main control board box 1320. Specifically, the key insertion portion is changed so as to protrude from the front left end (hinge portion side) of the board surface of the main control unit 1310 (so as to protrude from the board end). The operating means is changed to the board surface of the main control unit 1310. A semi-circular notch formed in the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320, which is an accommodating body, and a main control board so as to be arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the setting switch 1311a. It can be exemplified that the protruding portion of the changing operation means is accommodated in a state where the key insertion portion is exposed to the outside by both the notch portion formed in the cover body 1301 of the box 1320. When the key insertion portion is projected from the left end of the board surface of the main control unit 1310 when viewed from the front, the surface portion on which the key insertion portion is provided may be substantially the same surface as the side surface portion of the main control board box 1320, or the key. The surface portion on which the insertion portion is provided may be projected from the side surface portion of the main control board box 1320.

As a result, the protrusion of the changing operation means toward the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1) of the main control board box 1320 can be almost eliminated or reduced. Further, when arranging the substrate of the main control unit 1310 in the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the key insertion portion protruding from the end of the substrate is accommodated in the notch portion to form a main. It is also possible to facilitate the positioning (alignment) of the substrate of the control unit 1310 and reduce the burden of the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1.

[5-4-3-2. Security structure of change operation means (2)]
The second security structure (2) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means includes the change suppressing means 1312 that covers at least a part of the change operation means and the change suppressing means 1312, as shown in FIGS. 144D to 144I. It is composed of a first state holding means (hereinafter, also referred to as a lock portion) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312.

The changing operation means of the security structure (2) is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting changeover button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, as in the security structure (1), and is provided in the main control unit 1310. The changing operation means provided are a setting switch 1311a (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific operation unit 1311a") and a setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter, "separate operation"), excluding the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c. Part 1311b ”) and a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value. In this crime prevention structure (2), the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation unit, and the setting changeover button 1311b, which is a separate operation unit, are both small operation rod switches that can be turned ON / OFF by pressing the pressing operation unit 1311p. It does not have a security structure other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire.

The change suppressing means 1312 of the crime prevention structure (2) covers at least a part of the changing operation means in order to make the changing operation of the game setting difficult, and the specific configuration will be described later, but at least one of the changing operating means. It changes into a first state that covers the part and makes it difficult to change the game setting, and a second state that exposes the changing operation means covered in the first state and enables the changing operation of the game setting. obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that not only the whole case where the change operation means consists of a plurality of elements, but also one element related to the change operation which is indispensable for the game setting in the plurality of elements may be used. To do. It also means that even if one element of the changing operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gap if it is difficult to change the game setting. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the above-mentioned numerical ones and the above-mentioned qualitative ones.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the security structure (2) locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (holding), although the specific configuration will be described later. It is released by the release operation of the change suppressing means 1312, and the change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state are switched.

[5-4-3-2-1. Change suppression means and lock unit (first state holding means)]
The change suppressing means 1312 and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the specific crime prevention structure (2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 144D to 144I.
First, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 144D has a flat plate shape that covers substantially one half (that is, a part of the accommodating body) of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, and is attached to the main control unit 1310. The specific operation unit 1311a (setting switch 1311a) and another operation unit 1311b (setting changeover button 1311b) of the provided change operation means, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be collectively covered. The change suppressing means 1312 can rotate like a single door by axially attaching one end side to the bearing portion 1301a of the cover body 1301, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. 144D, the specific operation portion 1311a The first state that makes it difficult to change the game setting by covering the above, and the second state that exposes the specific operation unit 1311a etc. to enable the change operation of the game setting as shown by the imaginary line in the figure. Can change (rotate) to.

On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) of FIG. 144D is a cylinder lock 1313a integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (D), and the rotary lock of the cylinder lock 1313a. By engaging the lock member 1313c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313b with the lock receiving member 1301b projecting from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of the first state and the cover body 1301 And lock the change suppressing means 1312 (D) to the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) uses the unlock key K2 to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and thus the lock member 1301b from the lock member 1301 of the cover body 1301 to the lock member. A specific release operation of removing 1313c unlocks (holds) the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) to enable a change to the second state, and further changes from the second state to the first state. The change suppressing means 1312 (D) that has been made can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) of FIG. 144D has the set value of the game setting by the change operating means. Since the change can only be made by a specific person who has the unlock key K2, there is almost no problem in crime prevention as in the security structure (1) even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting. ..

The change suppressing means 1312 (D) is made of a transparent (for example, transparent) synthetic resin, and even if the change operating means is covered in the first state, the visibility of the changing operating means is not hindered. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301, each of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a control number and a predetermined description at positions where they do not overlap each other. It is provided with an information display unit 1314 in which a sentence is described. As a result, it is possible to easily find the replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) (collection of parts in good condition) performed for the purpose of concealing fraud, and further, the changing operation means, particularly the specific operation unit. It is easy to visually confirm the illegal work of 1311a.

Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size and shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301, but for example, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a size and shape that can completely cover the main control unit 1300. At the same time, the bearing portion 1301a and the lock portion 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) may be provided on the fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety of the main control unit 1300 as a whole can be enhanced.

Further, the crime prevention performance of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is tentatively obtained by providing the rotation center (bearing portion 1301a) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 144D. Even if the holding means) 1313 (D) is destroyed, further crime prevention is possible. That is, as shown by an imaginary line in the figure, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) becomes a tsuitate in an open state, and a wall is formed near the left side of the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b). The change suppressing means 1312 (D), which is configured to play a role of guarding in a shape, is in an open state when the act of illegally performing a change operation on the change operation means from the free end side of the main body frame 4 is opened. It can be blocked by itself. That is, by providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 in this way, it is possible to protect the change operating means in the first state, and of course, the tsuitate in the second state. It is possible to prevent an illegal change operation for the change operation means. Further, in order to maximize the effect, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 144D has a length (distance) protruding from the bearing portion 1301a toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when it is opened. ) Is larger than the length (distance) from the bearing unit 1301a to the location where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is arranged. The change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is located closest to the right side of D). Further, the place where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation unit 1311b) is arranged is set to a position close to the center of the vertical length of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, another operation) is set. Access from above and below of the portion 1311b) is made difficult, and the rotation of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is stopped (fixed) in an upright state. Although it is possible to improve the crime prevention performance by having a part of each of these configurations, it is most preferable to satisfy all of them.

On the contrary, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) may be reduced so that only the specific operation unit 1311a is covered, and the separate operation unit 1311b may not be covered in either the first state or the second state. In this way, by narrowing down the protection target of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements (specific operation unit and separate operation unit) to those with high security importance, those with low security importance are opened to the outside. By keeping it, the workability of changing the settings can be improved.

The axis of the changing operation means described in the crime prevention structure (1) is set so as to be substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the changing operating means faces the side surface of the housing. The technical idea to be removed can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D).

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (E) of FIG. 144E is substantially the same as the change suppressing means 1312 (D) of FIG. 144D, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) of FIG. 144E is provided on the perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and on the cover body 1301 side. It is a padlock 1313d in which the projecting perforated lock receiving member 1316 is connected by an inverted U-shaped lock member 1313c, and by engaging the both perforated lock receiving members 1315 and 1316 with the lock member 1313c. The change suppressing means 1312 (E) in one state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312 (E) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses the unlock key K2 to change the lock member 1313c of the padlock 1313d in the unlocking direction, thereby making a hole in the change suppressing means 1312 (E). The lock (holding) in the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) is released by a specific release operation of removing the lock member 1313c from the perforated lock receiving member 1315 of the lock receiving member 1315 and the cover body 1301. The change suppressing means 1312 (E) which enables the change to the two states and further changes from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the padlock 1313d.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d. Therefore, in the unlocked state, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) is separated from both the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301. .. Therefore, the lock portion (first state holding means) (E) is separated from the cover body 1301 (accommodating body) in the unlocked state by connecting to the cover body 1301 with, for example, a wire-shaped or chain-shaped support portion 1317. It is designed not to be done. As a result, there is no risk of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) being dropped into the island equipment in the unlocked state, and the removed lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E). You can eliminate the waste of time of forgetting where you put the item and looking for it at the lock stage.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) shown in FIGS. 144F to HH has a substantially horizontal fan shape, and a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan is pivotally attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 to make it swingable. The first state, which covers the specific operation unit 1311a of the change operation means as shown in FIG. 144F, and the second state, which exposes the specific operation unit 1311a to the outside as shown in FIG. 144H, can be changed. Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b when it is in the first state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a, while it is different when it changes to the second state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a. It covers the operation unit 1311b. By selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b with the change suppressing means 1312 (F) in this way, an erroneous operation of simultaneously operating the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b is unlikely to occur.

The change suppressing means 1312 (F) is constantly urged in a direction of covering the separate operation portion 1311b by a winding spring (not shown) provided at the center of the swing, and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (described later) When the lock (holding) of the first state by F) is released, the state changes to the second state due to the elasticity of the winding spring. By urging the change suppressing means 1312 (F) toward the second state in this way, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means 1312 (F) will stop at a halfway position, and the operability is improved. The urging direction of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) may be either the first state or the second state, but if the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged toward the second state, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is preferably used. When the lock (holding) of is released, the special operation unit 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so that the procedure of the change operation is easy to understand.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 144F to 144H includes a mounting base portion 1301d projecting from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313a fixed to the mounting base portion 1301d, and a cylinder lock 1313a thereof. The cam 1313e is attached to the tip of the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change suppressing means is formed by sliding the peripheral surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e with the upper side surface of the change suppressing means 1312 (F). The 1312 is pushed down against the urging of the winding spring to lock (hold) the 1312 in the first state covering the specific operation unit 1311a.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) uses the unlocking key K2 to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change suppressing means is caused by the change in the peripheral surface shape of the cam 1313e. By a specific release operation of unlocking the lock (holding) of the 1312 (F), the lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is released, and the change to the second state is possible (embodiment). Since the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged in the direction toward the second state by a winding spring (not shown), when the lock (holding) of the first state is released, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) slides on the peripheral surface of the cam 1313e. The change suppressing means 1312 (F) that has been changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

In the change operation of the set value, when the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the other operation unit 1311b, if it is necessary to operate the other operation unit 1311b, the change suppression means The operation projectile piece 1312 m projecting from the 1312 (F) may be manually pushed down by a finger or the like to expose another operation unit 1311b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 144F and 144H depends on the changing operating means. Since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the unlock key K2, even if the changing operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, the security structure is the same as the security structure (1). There is almost no above problem.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 144I has a form in which the portion corresponding to the setting change board 1310X of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is separated and made independent. By engaging its own key-type hinge portion 1312b with the key-type hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base body 1302, it is rotatable with respect to the base body 1302 and is provided on the setting change substrate 1310Y. It can be changed into a first state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are collectively covered, and a second state in which the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b are exposed to enable the change operation. The cover body 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to the partition wall 1302b raised from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) of FIG. 144I is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) on the cover body 1301 side, and the advancing / retreating shaft of the dial lock 1313f. By engaging the tip of 1313 g with the lock shaft thread 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are combined to form the change suppressing means 1312 ( I) is locked (held) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates a plurality of dials of the dial lock 1313f according to the unlocking number to retract the advance / retreat lock shaft 1313 g, thereby retracting the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is released by a specific release operation of removing the advance / retreat lock shaft 1313 g from the through 1301f to enable the change to the second state, and further, the second state. The change suppressing means 1312 (I) changed from the first state to the first state can be locked (held) by the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) of FIG. 144I has the set value of the game setting by the change operating means. Since the change can only be made by a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, there is a security problem as in the security structure (1). Is almost nonexistent. The first state holding means 1313 illustrated in the security structure (2) employs relatively high security performance such as a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, and a dial lock 1313f, but the security performance is tentatively lower than these. Anything may be used as long as it has a configuration in which the change suppressing means 1312 held in the first state can be released by a specific release operation.
Further, since the change suppressing means 1312 (I) of FIG. 144I is independent of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) can be reused as it is even if the cover body 1301 needs to be replaced. is there. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person destroys the sealing mechanism 1320z of the cover body 1301, the unauthorized operation cannot be performed unless the specific operation of the change suppressing means 1312 (I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) can improve the fraud prevention function of the cover body 1301.

[5-4-3-3. Security structure of change operation means (3)]
The third security structure (3) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is such that the security structure (2) puts the change suppression means 1312 in the second state and exposes the change operation means to the outside. While the change operation means is directly operated in the above, the change suppressing means 1312 is provided at a position covering the change operation means on the accommodating body (main control board box 1320) side, and the change operation means can be changed by itself. While making it difficult, the change suppressing means 1312 is made to act for the operation of the change operation means.
That is, as shown in FIG. 144J, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) of the crime prevention structure (3) is on the cover body 1301 side which is the accommodating body and is attached to the specific operation unit 1311a (may be another operation unit 1311b). It is provided with a cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided at a position to cover, that is, a position in a first state covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation unit 1311a, and is directly attached to the specific operation unit 1311a from the outside. Make the change operation difficult.
Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) presses the rotation of the end face cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a so that the switch input can be mediated by a specific operation from the outside. It is provided with a motion conversion mechanism that makes a linear motion of the mover 1313h, that is, a motion capable of a switch input operation.
Then, when a specific operation of inserting the unlocking key K2 into the change suppressing means 1312 (J) to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is performed, the specific operation unit 1311a is operated by the above-mentioned action of the motion conversion mechanism. The direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation unit 1311a is replaced by the pressing operation slider 1313h of the change suppression means 1312 (J), in other words, the direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation unit 1311a is the change suppression means. It is executed via the pressing operation slider 1313h of 1312 (J).

According to the change suppressing means 1312 (J), the change operation of the game setting from the outside by the change operation means is fixedly provided at the position of the cover body 1301 side so as to cover the change operation means. Since it is in a difficult state, there is almost no possibility that the game settings will be changed illegally.
On the other hand, when the game setting is normally changed by the change operation means, as a specific operation from the outside to the change suppression means 1312 (J), for example, an operation of inserting and twisting the unlock key K2 from the outside is performed. Then, the direct change operation for the change operation means is performed on behalf of (intermediary execution) by the operation for the change suppression means 1312 (J), and the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, by terminating the specific operation for the change suppressing means 1312 (J), it is possible to return to a state in which it is difficult to directly change the change operation means from the outside.

The change suppressing means 1312 (J) is not limited to the case where the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is rotated by the unlock key K2, for example, the dial lock 1313f of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is used to advance / retreat the lock shaft 1313g. The axis of the specific operation unit 1311a and the axis of the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a are arranged so as to coincide with each other. The pressing operation unit 1311p may be able to press.
Further, when the shutter plate 1319 covering the separate operation unit 1311b is integrally projected from the end face cam 1313i of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) as shown in FIG. 144K, and the end face cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose another operation unit 1311b. As a result, not only the unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b can be prevented, but also the intrusion of dust into the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with the security structure (3) of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) shown in FIGS. 144J and 144K, the change of the game setting set value by the change operation means has the unlock key K2. Or, since it can only be performed by a specific person who knows the unlocking number, even if the changing operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game settings, the security problem is the same as in the security structure (1). Almost none.

The axis of the changing operation means described in the crime prevention structure (1) is set so as to be substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the changing operating means faces the side surface of the housing. The technical idea to be removed can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change suppressing means 1312 (J).

[5-4-3-4. Technical Thought on Security Structure]
The security structure of the game setting described above corresponds to the embodiments of the solutions 1 to 8 for the background technology described below.
[Background technology]

Conventionally, in the game area of the game board, a plurality of nails are planted and a receiving port where a game ball can enter is provided. Then, when the game ball launched by the launcher hits the nail and flows down the game area while changing the course and enters a specific receiving port (for example, the starting winning opening), a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs when the result of the lottery is successful (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). In such a game machine, the course of the game ball flowing down the game area changes depending on the posture of the nail, and the probability of entering a specific receiving port also changes accordingly, so that the player checks the state of the nail. It was common to choose a game machine.

However, the difference in the posture of the nails is subtle, and only a small number of players can select an advantageous game machine from multiple machines installed in the game hall, so that the profit of the game is obtained. There was a problem that the people who could do it were unevenly distributed, and from a different point of view, there was a problem that the profits of the game hall were harmed by some professional players.
In order to solve such a problem, a lottery winning probability has been developed so that the winning probability can be changed to one of a plurality of stages, but then the winning probability is changed by some players or by some players. There is a possibility that it will be changed illegally by the employees on the game hall side who collude with these, and effective measures to prevent such fraud have been desired.

(Solution 1)
It is a gaming machine that draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and gives a predetermined profit to the player when the result of the lottery is a win.
A main control unit provided on the back side of the game machine and having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game,
A change operation means provided in the main control unit and capable of changing the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages.
The first state that covers at least a part of the changing operation means to make the changing operation of the game setting difficult, and the changing operation means covered in the first state are exposed to perform the changing operation of the game setting. A second state that enables it, a change suppression measure that can be changed to,
A gaming machine comprising: a first state holding means which holds the change suppressing means in the first state and can release the holding by a specific release operation.

According to such a game machine, the change operation of the game setting by the change operation means is in a difficult state by the change suppression means held (locked) in the first state, so that the game setting is illegally changed. It's almost nonexistent.
On the other hand, when the administrator or the like normally performs the operation of changing the game setting by the change operation means, the hold (lock) of the first state holding means is released and changed as a specific release operation, for example, by unlocking with a key. The suppressing means is changed to the second state, and the changing operation means exposed to the outside is operated to change the game setting.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, the change suppressing means is returned to the first state and the first state holding means is held (locked), so that the changing operation of the game setting can be returned to a difficult state. ..
In order to solve the same problem, it is possible to directly attach a key switch that can be turned ON / OFF with a dedicated key to the board of the main control unit as a change operation means, but the current main control unit is limited. Since the electronic components are arranged at high density in the space, if the key switch is directly attached to the main control unit, a drastic change in the board configuration is required. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the solution 1, the change operation means is blocked from the illegal setting change by the combination of the change suppressing means and the first state holding means, so that the change operation means is formed by a small operation rod switch. It is possible, and therefore, a drastic change in the board configuration of the main control unit is not required.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine of the above-mentioned solution 1 is
An accommodating body accommodating the main control unit and
It has an opening provided in the housing body for communicating the changing operation means of the main control unit housed in the housing body to the outside.
Further, a foreign matter intrusion prevention portion for preventing foreign matter from entering through the opening may be provided between the housing and the change operation means.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of invading a foreign substance such as a wire through the opening and attempting to perform an illegal operation on the main control unit.

(Solution 3)
Further, in the game machine of the above-mentioned solution 1 or 2,
The change operation means includes a specific operation unit that controls the start of setting change and another operation unit that performs other setting operations.
The change suppressing means may cover the specific operation unit so that the specific operation unit can be changed into the first state and the second state, while not covering the other operation unit.
In this way, by narrowing down the protection target of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements to those with high security importance, the degree of freedom in design such as making the shape of the change suppression means compact and reducing the range of motion accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to take more advanced anti-fraud measures, and on the other hand, it is possible to improve the workability of setting change by opening the ones with low security importance to the outside.

(Solution 4)
Further, in the game machine of the above-mentioned solution 1 or 2,
The change operation means includes a specific operation unit that controls the start of setting change and another operation unit that performs other setting operations.
The change suppressing means can change between the first state and the second state with respect to the specific operation unit, and can cover the other operation unit when the specific operation unit changes to the second state. In the state where the holding (lock) by the first state holding means is released, the urging may be made toward either the first state or the second state.
In such a game machine, by alternately covering the specific operation unit and the separate operation unit with the change suppressing means, erroneous operation of operating the specific operation unit and the separate operation unit at the same time is unlikely to occur. Further, by urging the change suppressing means toward either the first state or the second state, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means will stop at a halfway position, and the operability is improved. It should be noted that preferably, if the change suppressing means is urged toward the second state, the special operation unit is automatically exposed to the outside when the holding (lock) of the first state of the change suppressing means is released. Therefore, the procedure of the change operation is easy to understand.

(Solution 5)
Further, in any of the game machines of the above-mentioned solutions 1 to 4,
The first state holding means may connect the change suppressing means in the first state and the accommodating body with a lock member to lock the change suppressing means in the first state.
As a result, the change suppressing means can be easily and surely locked to the first state.

(Solution 6)
Further, in the game machine of the above-mentioned solution 5,
The first state holding means may be connected to the accommodating body by a support portion so as not to be separated from the accommodating body in the unlocked state.
By doing so, since the first state holding means does not separate from the housing even in the unlocked state, there is no risk of dropping the first state holding means into the island equipment, and the removed first state holding means is placed. You can avoid wasting time forgetting where you were and looking for it at the lock stage.

(Solution 7)
Further, the gaming machine according to any one of the above-mentioned solutions 1 to 6 is
A housing body for accommodating the main control unit is provided.
The change suppressing means covers a part or all of the housing when it is in the first state.
The accommodating body and the change suppressing means are each provided with an information display unit on which a control number and a predetermined explanatory text are described as well as having transparency.
Further, the information display units may be provided at positions that do not overlap each other when the change suppressing means are in the first state and do not interfere with the visibility of the specific operation unit.
By doing so, it is possible to easily find the replacement of the housing and the change suppressing means (collection of parts in good condition) for the purpose of concealing fraud, and further, visually confirm the fraudulent work on the specific operation part. Can be easily done.

(Solution 8)
In the above-mentioned solutions 1 to 7, the change suppressing means is set to the second state, the changing operating means is exposed to the outside, and the changing operating means is directly operated in that state. It may be provided at a position overlying the means to make the change operation of the change operation means difficult, while the change suppressing means may be made to act for the operation of the change operation means.
That is, the gaming machine of the solution 8 draws a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined profit to the player when the result of the lottery is a hit.
A main control unit provided on the back side of the game machine and having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game,
An accommodating body accommodating the main control unit and
A change operation means provided in the main control unit and capable of changing the game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages.
It is provided with a change suppressing means which is provided on the accommodating body side and covers the change operation means and makes it difficult to directly change the change operation means from the outside.
The change suppressing means can be operated by a specific operation from the outside.
When the specific operation is performed on the change suppressing means, the change suppressing means operates so as to perform a direct change operation on the change operating means.

According to such a game machine, it is difficult to change the game setting from the outside by the change operation means by the change suppressing means fixedly provided at the position of the accommodating body so as to cover the change operation means. , There is almost no risk that the game settings will be changed illegally.
On the other hand, when the administrator or the like normally changes the game setting by the change operation means, as a specific operation from the outside to the change suppression means, for example, an operation of inserting an unlock key from the outside and twisting is performed. Then, the direct change operation for the change operation means is performed on behalf of the operation for the change suppression means, and the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, by terminating the specific operation for the change suppressing means, it is possible to return to a state in which it is difficult to directly change the change operation means from the outside.
In addition, since the change operation means is blocked from fraud by the change suppressing means provided on the housing body side, the change operation means can be formed by a small operation rod switch, and therefore the main control unit 8 can be formed. There is no need to make major changes to the board configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 and 142 to 144A. Here, first, the function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a will be described, and then the function display attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a will be described. Unit 1400 will be described.

[5-5-1. When attached to the lower left corner of the front component outside the game area]
As shown in FIG. 131, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310X to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 131, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. The first special hold number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to 2002, and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004. The second special symbol display 1406 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result and the second special holding number display 1407 consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. And have.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display 1408.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. When mounted on the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area]
As shown in FIG. 142, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The arrangement of various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is obtained by rotating the arrangement of various indicators of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 131 clockwise by 90 degrees, and the functions of various displays are also shown in FIG. 131. Function It is the same as the function of various indicators of the display unit 1400.

Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, in particular, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are electrically connected to the main. A plurality of wirings for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310X to the function display unit 1400 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wiring”) will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144A, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is located on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When it is drawn to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is put together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the 1100 or which is directly attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. It is routed downward.

Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is bent along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower part of, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5, the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is the rear surface of the board holder 1200 which is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320. In this way, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Will be placed in.

The game panel 1100 includes a panel decorative substrate on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 are mounted, a substrate cover on which the panel decorative substrate is attached to the panel holder 1120, and the like. The panel decorative substrate is composed of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and the lower left panel decorative substrate arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in the front view. It is composed. The substrate cover is composed of an upper left substrate cover for attaching the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover for attaching the lower left panel decorative substrate to the panel holder 1120.

The upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, the front surface of the back box 3010 is bent. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL, it is below the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is bent toward the back box 3010 and is gathered by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and pulled to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. It is turned. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, and is bent toward the left side along the upper side side of the drive board unit 1700. It is routed, routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, and then electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, the upper right of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed from the corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and moves up and down along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the direction are grouped together and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Similar to the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It will be placed in front of the payout unit 560.

As described above, the payout unit 560 is composed of a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

Further, as described above, the game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to cause electromagnetic noise. Is released. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can retain the game ball B, and the surrounding area thereof.

Further, the main control board 1310X will be described in detail later, but is a main control MPU 1310a or the like (main control MPU 1310a) which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are built. (See FIG. 151). The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"), and such a built-in reset. The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by controlling it by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so that it is built in the main control MPU 1310a, as will be described later. The contents of the RAM will be completely erased (cleared). That is, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM is cleared when the main control MPU 1310a is started again.

Further, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the main control MPU 1310a package, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are released. It is in a state of protruding from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310X. That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

In this way, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are mounted. Therefore, when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. The wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X may be invaded, and the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 are electrically connected. Wiring may invade UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may pop out and invade the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may pop out and invade the wiring FCBL.

For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is assumed to be mainly in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about from the upper side of the main control board box 1320. Bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper or lower side of the main control board box 1320 where it has a quarter length), from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310X. After passing above the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to it, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display unit connector MFCN. When electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Then, when passing through the region in front of the main control board 1310X (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may invade various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the invading electromagnetic noise.

If a wiring accommodating groove is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL , The function is displayed after being accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310X (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of, electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a will invade various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward it, and the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the invading electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged from the center of the lower side of the 1310X toward the left side, and above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X. That is, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line of the main control MPU 1310a passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, whereas this center is provided. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310X.

As a result, the main control MPU1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is mainly controlled by the function display unit connector MFCN. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from invading various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separated from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. , The electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated on the main control board 1310X or in the space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310X. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged so that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310X by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic wave that has entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 without being routed (or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200). When it is routed downward along, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. Since it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and the wiring FCBL projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to secure a large distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension") from the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. The second wiring separation distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL invades the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. It can be prevented from doing so. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a targeted manner. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 is provided with an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL described above (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control board 1310X to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise in each of the wiring FCBLs). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is obtained. Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electricity is supplied to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. They are inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Further, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5, and the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. The large winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are detected. The two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and integrated. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wirings from various sensors, the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 is also electrically connected and integrated. The two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The two wires from the sensor 2402 are directly electrically connected to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310X without passing through the panel relay board 1710.

In the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the connector 1710a. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 can be configured to reduce electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. By providing an element that can be removed (that is, by providing an element that can reduce or remove electromagnetic noise for a plurality of wiring FCBLs that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310X to the function display unit 1400. ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, a game board. The wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Since a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the line in the vertical direction are grouped together and routed to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, the wiring UPCBL is routed in this way. Similar to the wiring FCBL described above, electromagnetic noise may enter the region. As described above, this wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic noise due to the wiring UPCBL extends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 148). Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with each other (arrangement straddling), so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL pops out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When it invades various electrically connected wirings, it is affected by the electromagnetic noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL, and for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is disturbed (for example, a pattern such as a black screen). Disturbance occurs).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. There is. As a result, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is not arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not come into contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Does not come into contact with some of the various wirings connected to. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310X intersect or come into contact with the wiring UPCBL. It is arranged so as not to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. As a positional relationship with the mounting position of the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 151 (described later), the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged. Are arranged so as to be separated from each other.

As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is possible to prevent invasion of various pins. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged apart from the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, even if electromagnetic noise invades the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected by the wiring UPCBL on the peripheral control board 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic noise that enters. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 are electrically connected via a wiring (not shown), and the wiring and the wiring UPCBL intersect or come into contact with each other. Since the arrangement is not such that it is arranged (a straddle arrangement), the electromagnetic noise that invades through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel drive board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted from the panel drive board 1720 via the wiring. It becomes extremely difficult to penetrate into the peripheral control board 1510, and the influence of electromagnetic noise does not reach the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the panel drive substrate 1720, the electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid earth), but it is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise (that is, that is, It is preferable to provide elements capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise for a plurality of wiring UPCBLs that transmit control signals from the panel drive board 1720 to the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400). .. Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is obtained. Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electricity is applied to a plurality of wiring UPCBLs. They are inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring UPCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring UPCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, the wiring UPCBL and the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720 are electrically connected as wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510. Of the wiring (not shown), the wiring UPCBL was adapted to pass near the ball supply means (near at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580). Of the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL is peripherally controlled with various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. on the door frame side except for the upper left panel decorative board 1131. It was arranged so as not to intersect or contact the wiring forming the transmission path with the substrate 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. For example, among various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310X, wirings that pass through an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and other wirings other than this wiring are arranged so as not to intersect or come into contact with each other. This makes it possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310X), which can be operated by the high frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator, from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 (a transmission path for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is formed). Wiring to be performed) is wiring UPCBL and wiring (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720, but the connection connector provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131. Wiring UPCBL', which is a connection cable electrically connected via 1131a, may be routed so as to be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the wiring UPCBL'is a wiring that forms another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decorative board 1131), and various decorative boards 184 on the door frame side as other production means. 273, etc. and the wiring forming the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the like) are arranged so as not to intersect or come into contact with each other. As a result, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. Wiring that invades UPCBL'and forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to prevent the wiring from invading the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of the peripheral control unit 1500, which are the wirings to be formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is arranged from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface and the back surface of the game panel 1100. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It was put together, but when it was routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it was bent from the upper side toward the left side, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. On the left side, it is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 mounted on the board holder 1200 and is routed downward along the left side side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200. Then, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. May be connected.

By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU1310a can be set to a distance dimension larger than the above-mentioned first wiring separation distance dimension. It is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from invading various pins protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By arranging the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X, which is arranged below, may be invaded.

When the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass a signal with a waveform width.

Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, etc., as described above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can be mentioned, and when a coil or beads are used, a plurality of wirings can be mentioned. It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is arranged from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface and the back surface of the game panel 1100. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Although they were put together, the wiring FCBLs put together by the wiring processing piece 3011 were bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500. The board holder 1200 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is gathered by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. When it is routed downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320. When the connector MFCN for the function display unit is electrically connected to the connector MFCN for the function display unit after being routed to the lower side of the connector MFCN for the function display unit, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL affects the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. Therefore, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL are arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with each other (arrangement straddling the wiring FCBL), so that electromagnetic noise invading the wiring FCBL is electrically transmitted to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When invading various wirings connected to the wiring FCBL, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is distorted due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise invading the wiring FCBL (for example, the pattern such as a black screen is distorted). Occurs).

Therefore, the wiring FCBL intersects or the wiring FCBL intersects with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 so as not to route the wiring FCBL along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500). It is preferable to configure it so that it does not come into contact with each other (a straddle arrangement). For example, as a method of routing the wiring FCBL in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or come into contact with each other (a straddling arrangement), the illustration provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400. The wiring FCBL, which is electrically connected via a connector that does not, is bent from the upper side to the left side when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. On the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, the game is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is put together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Down along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the panel 1100 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. When it is routed toward, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN, and then the function display. It may be electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN.

By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-mentioned first wiring separation distance dimension. It is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from invading various pins protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By arranging the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X, which is arranged below, may be invaded.

When the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass a signal with a waveform width.

Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, etc., as described above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can be mentioned, and when a coil or beads are used, a plurality of wirings can be mentioned. It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, whereas it is above the center line. The main control MPU 1310a was placed in the above, but this positional relationship is reversed and the main control MPU 1310a is placed below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is placed above the center line. The function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310X. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL can be generated for the function display unit. It is possible to prevent the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a from invading various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separated from each other in the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is arranged from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface and the back surface of the game panel 1100. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 that is collectively attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. It was routed downward along the line. In this way, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Was placed in. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the above one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. In other words, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full tank path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It was placed. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter, in addition to such wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 are used. It is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 so as not to be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through at least one of the vicinitys. (Do not be accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodating groove), routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the bottom of the function display unit connector MFCN, and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. May be connected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, but in this area, a plurality of full-color LEDs are used instead of the function display unit 1400. The decorative substrate to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wirings”) electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the decorative substrate are described, for example, with reference to FIG. 143. To explain, when the game board 5 is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side are gathered together and bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and the connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). A method of wiring the wiring that is electrically connected to this connector after being routed to the lower part of the game board 5 can be mentioned, or from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the back box 3010. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and again bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side are gathered together and bent toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and the connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). It can be mentioned that the wiring is routed to the lower part of the wire and then electrically connected to this connector.

In the area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring method, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 is attached to the payout base unit 550. Since it is arranged in front of the unit 560 or near (below) the ball tank 552, electromagnetic noise may enter the wiring as described above.

Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, whereas the connector is arranged below the center line. By arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. Therefore, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring causes the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a to be connected to the peripheral control board. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control IC 1510a from invading various pins through the space separated in the 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. The electromagnetic noise that invades through the wiring can be attenuated on the control board 1510 or in the space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other in the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 were directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 were electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a targeted manner. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 is provided with an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring described above (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). On the other hand, it is preferable to provide each element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is obtained. Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electrical wiring is applied to a plurality of wires. It is inserted so as to be connected in series to each of them, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wires. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wires, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131. When bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010, and is in close proximity (or in contact with) the wiring FCBL described above. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, it is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It was put together, but when it was routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it was bent from the upper side toward the left side, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. On the left side, it is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, respectively, below the peripheral control unit 1500. When it is routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, it is bent toward the right side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and the panel drive in the drive board unit 1700 is performed. After being routed above the predetermined connector of the board 1720, it may be electrically connected to the predetermined connector. In this case, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of the peripheral control unit 1500 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to drive the drive board. Separate from the upper side of the unit 1700. As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is not arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, the wiring UPCBL that is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and the peripheral control of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. As a positional relationship with the mounting position of the IC 1510a (see FIG. 151), the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. That is, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is possible to prevent invasion of various pins. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal figure fluctuation display game, a special figure fluctuation display game, a game state display, etc. is arranged on the surface of a game board has been proposed (for example, a special figure). Open 2016-154676 (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], FIG. 2, and FIG. 21). This display device (display unit) is displayed and controlled by the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise invades the wiring that electrically connects the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), it enters the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device via this wiring. There was a risk of affecting it.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 141. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 151) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X. There is. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310X, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board, liquid crystal output board described later) and the like. ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and insert the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110, and a part of the rear end penetrates the through hole 1112 to base. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel 1110.

As described above, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached to the center of the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. And the side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 near the intermediate region between the first game area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the second game area 5a2. The attacker unit 2400, which is installed near the middle area of the third game area and has a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second entrance), the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening 2004. (2nd entrance), has a disadvantageous 1st entrance 2006, and is slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a (1st game area 5a1, 2nd game area 5a2, and 3rd game area 5a3 on both sides. It is provided with a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the lower three sides), and further includes a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center member 2500.

[5-8-1. Center member]
The center member 2500 of the table unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B that has been received in the second start port 2004, and a second start port sensor 2402. 1 The first entrance sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received in the entrance 2006 is provided, and the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a large prize opening sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005. It is equipped with 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) (see FIG. 126). Further, the center member 2500 includes a start port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the attacker unit 2400 is the first. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

The center member 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is mounted on the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached via 830. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. ..

The frame-shaped center member 2500 has an enclosure frame 832 protruding forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 around the periphery excluding the lower side, and is driven into the game area 5a by the enclosure frame 832. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center member 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the first game area 5a1 is open to enter and a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosure frame 832 on the left side in the front view. A warp outlet 2502 that can be released and is open in the frame, and a stage shelf 2503 that can be released to the third game area 5a3 after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction. I have.

The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110). ) Is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage shelf 2503, the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides thereof are lowered toward the front. It is inclined, and the game ball B can be discharged from those parts to the third game area 5a3.

When the center member 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage shelf 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The center member 2500 has a region forming portion 2504 located on the front side of the second gaming region 5a2 projecting to the right side in the front view, and extends to the region forming portion 2504 in order from the top in FIG. 131. , Gate portion 2003, first entrance 2006, general winning opening 2001 (second entrance), second starting port 2004 (second entrance) with opening / closing piece 850, and these are provided in the second gaming area 5a2. It is mounted from the front in the formed mounting opening. Further, in the area forming portion 2504, an obstacle nail 2007 is planted in the base panel 1110 as in the first game area 5a1. In the present embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are integrally provided, but as another embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are separately provided. You may. When the area of the second game area 5a2 is small, the area forming portion 2504 is formed with a ball flow lower surface portion or an obstacle protrusion portion, and the area forming portion 2504 is equivalent to the second gaming area 5a2 described above. It may have a function.

In a state where the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, between the upper surface of the enclosure 832 (specifically, the upper surface on the right side from the center in the left-right direction) and the outer rail 1001 surrounding the upper side of the game area 5a. It is attached so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (11 mm in the present embodiment) (a gap having a width of a little over one game ball; 13 mm in the present embodiment). This gap is a connecting passage portion 5a4 that connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 described above upward.

The connecting passage portion 5a4 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 131 is an abutting portion provided at the intersection of the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005 described above from the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a substantially in the center of the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832. It has a lateral passage portion extending in the left-right direction up to 1006, and a vertical passage portion located on the downstream side of the lateral passage portion and extending in the vertical direction. The lateral passage portion is a substantially linear gap, and extends in a substantially tangential direction with respect to the apex of the arc along the outer rail 1001 drawn by the launched game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B launched with a specific strong firing force (the firing force having a strength that jumps over the first game area 5a1) rides on the upper surface of the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832. It may roll while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and move to the back of the lateral passage portion (near the entrance of the vertical passage portion).

As shown in FIG. 132, which is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 131, the vertical passage portion of the connecting passage portion 5a4 has a gutter-shaped discharge that opens an opening 848aH directly under the abutting portion 1006 and communicates downward. A partition having a predetermined width between the portion 848a and the vertical gutter-shaped discharge portion 848b having an opening 848bH opened on the front side of the release portion 848a by approximately one game ball with respect to the hitting direction of the game ball B and communicating downward. It is provided in a form partitioned by a portion 848e. The partition portion 848e plays a role of separating the opening portion 848aH and the opening portion 848bH, and the top portion (top surface) thereof is inclined so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the right. Further, the partition portion 848e has a reinforcing member (reinforcing resin 848e1) formed with a predetermined width in the left-right direction in consideration of a game ball collision, and an accommodating portion 848e2 for accommodating the reinforcing member. .. Further, from the surrounding wall portion forming the accommodating portion 848e2 to the lower side, a left and right partition wall 848e3 that divides the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b in the left-right direction is formed, and a game ball B flowing down the discharge portion 848a and a discharge portion. The game ball B flowing down the 848b is prevented from being mixed in the middle of the flow down. Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 132, the top portion (top surface) of the partition portion 848e between the opening portion 848bH and the opening portion 848aH virtualizes the bottom surface (upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500) of the connecting passage portion 5a4. It is formed at a height that is substantially flush with the extension line when extended to. As a result, among the game balls B launched with a specific strong firing force (launching force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 is pressed at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e. The rolling game ball B enters the opening 848bH in front of the partition 848e. Further, among the game balls B launched with a specific strong firing force (launching force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the top of the partition portion 848e is crossed while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force. The game ball B (the game ball B that has crossed the top of the partition portion 848e while floating from the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4) enters the opening 848aH by colliding with the abutting portion 1006 or the like. Further, the plurality of discharging portions 848a and 848b are arranged side by side at the top of the second gaming area 5a2, that is, the locations 5a2a and 5a2b entering the second gaming area 5a2 (the exit portion of the connecting passage portion 5a4 or the second The entrance portion of the game area 5a2) is connected in a different state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball B is launched with a specific strong launching force (a launching force having a strength that jumps over the first gaming area 5a1), but the specific strong launching force is achieved. Taking into account the strength of the handle adjustment within the range, the game has a new game property in which the whereabouts of the game ball after jumping over the first game area 5a1 are diversified.

As described above, the second gaming area 5a2 has a general winning opening 2001 (second entrance) and a second starting opening 2004 (second entrance) in which the game ball B is accepted or passed to give a predetermined privilege to the player. The second inlet), the gate portion 2003, etc., and the first inlet 2006 (in the embodiment, the entry = out) in which the handling of the entry (result by the entry) is disadvantageously set from these second entrances. The ball entry probability is appropriately set according to the type of the exit of the connecting passage portion 5a4 and the arrangement of the obstacle nails 2007.

For example, in the example of FIG. 132, the game ball B that enters (falls) into the second game area 5a2 from the portion 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a directly below the impact portion 1006 through the connecting passage portion 5a4 is the first. The probability of entering the first entrance 2006 is set to be larger than the probability of entering the second entrance or passing through the gate portion 2003.

On the other hand, the game ball B entering the second game area 5a2 from the portion 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a small probability of entering the first entrance 2006 and is relatively in the second entrance. It is set so that the probability of entering the ball and the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003 are large.

Therefore, the player collides with the impulsion portion 1006 in order to aim at the discharge portion 848b leading to the route on the left side, which is easy to enter the second inlet and difficult to enter the first inlet 2006 when driving into the second game area 5a2. The striking force of the handle 182 is carefully adjusted so that the game ball B is launched with a force that allows the game ball B to roll on the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e.

The discharge portions 848a and 848b are provided with deceleration means such as obstacle ridges 849 and bent portions 849s in the middle of the flow path, and the game ball B passes through either of the discharge portions 848a and 848b by the deceleration means. Time is secured to make the player recognize whether or not it is. This is because which of the discharging portions 848a and 848b the game ball B passes through has a great influence on the profit of the player. The deceleration means in the middle of the flow path is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the obstacle ridges 849 are provided on both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, and the bent portions 849s are provided on both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b. Alternatively, it may be realized by providing a transparent cover body having a width enough to cover the front of both the discharge portions 848a and 848b and providing an obstacle ridge on the back surface side of the transparent cover body. Good.

Further, the effect display device 1600 is enlarged so that the image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at a position corresponding to the back side of the release units 848a and 848b, and the passage surface of the release units 848a and 848b is transparently formed. The image of the effect display device 1600 may be visually recognized through the transparent passage surface, and the emission units 848a and 848b may be decorated with the image of the effect display device 1600. For example, in a gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which it is necessary to use the second gaming area 5a2, a specific image (for example, a flame image) is displayed behind the emitting unit 848b, and the emitting unit 848a is displayed. The player may be informed that the release unit 848b is advantageous in comparison.

Further, prior to the start of a gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which it is necessary to use the second gaming area 5a2, an announcement is made in advance to inform the player that the releasing unit 848b is more advantageous than the releasing unit 848a. An image (for example, a message image of "Aim at the passage on the left side and hit right!") Is displayed in a predetermined display area, or "Aim at this and hit right" behind the emission unit 848b. The message image of "Tene!" May be displayed, and a more detailed explanation about "right-handed" may be performed so that the player does not get confused at the start of the time saving state.

Further, in these cases, preferably, an effect sensor (release type detecting means) for detecting the game ball B is provided in each of the release units 848a, 848b, for example, the openings 848aH, 848bH, and the release unit through which the game ball B has passed. Depending on which of the 848a and 848b is, a predetermined notification may be performed by using a voice or an image display or a light emission of a light emitting body provided in the emitting unit 848a or 848b. For example, each effect sensor counts the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848a and the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848b, and the notification type (notification pattern) depends on the status of the counted values. Can be exemplified. Specifically, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848a in the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), a voice notification saying "Do your best!" Or a specific image display a, "Congratulations" when all or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern a is performed, or when the count value of the number of game balls passing through the emission unit 848b reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) in the time-saving game state. For example, the voice notification of "!", The specific image display b, and all or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern b can be performed. In addition, when the count value of the number of game balls that continuously pass only the release unit 848a without passing through the release unit 848b reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), "Be careful!" A game in which all or part of the light emission in the voice notification, the specific image display c, and the specific light emission pattern c is performed, or only the emission unit 848b is continuously passed without the game ball passing through the emission unit 848a. When the count value of the number of spheres reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), voice notification of "good! Good!", Specific image display d, and all or part of light emission in the specific light emission pattern d are performed. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

FIGS. 133 to 139 show other forms of the connecting passage portion 5a4 or the discharging portion 848a, 848b or the second gaming region 5a2.

In FIG. 133, the width of the connecting passage portion 5a4 in the height direction is widened to approximately two game balls, and this height is used to partition the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH. The top of the portion 848e is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500). As a result, the game ball B that rolls on the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 hits the left side of the top of the partition portion 848e and enters the opening 848bH. Can be facilitated.

Further, since the connecting passage portion 5a4 has a wide width in the height direction and the height of the launched game ball B can be seen at a glance, it can be predicted at an early stage which of the discharging portions 848a and 848b will be entered. Therefore, the firing force can be adjusted in a short time.
Further, even if the so-called "twisting" of firing a plurality of game balls B at once is performed, when the plurality of game balls move side by side as shown in FIG. 133, the lower part is displayed. The game ball B hits the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848b, and the upper game ball B jumps over the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848a, so that damage due to "twisting" or the like is unlikely to occur.

By the way, in the form as shown in FIG. 133, as described above, the launched game ball B repeatedly collides with the partition portion 848e, and the game ball B that bounces off the abutting portion 1006 also collides with the partition portion 848e. It is advisable to reinforce the ribs, insert metal plates, etc., which can withstand the impact of. Further, since the game balls B repeatedly come into contact with each other, it is preferable to cover the surface of the partition portion 848e with a material having wear resistance such as a metal plate.

Further, unlike FIG. 132 and FIG. 133, the one shown in FIG. 134 is an embodiment in which the branch portion 848c is extended to the upstream side of the reinforcing resin 848e1. Specifically, in FIG. 134, a vertical partition extending in the left-right direction separating the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in the vertical direction on the upstream side of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b in the connecting passage portion 5a4. A branch portion 848c having a wall 848c1 is provided, and the first ball passage 5a4a among the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion 848c is the discharge portion 848a among the plurality of discharge portions 848a, 848b (the first The second ball passage 5a4b of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion 848c communicates with the discharge portion 848b (second discharge portion) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. It is configured to do so.

The branch portion 848c is provided with a metal buffer pin 848d at its tip, and the buffer pin 848d receives the impact of the game ball B to prevent the branch portion 848c from being damaged. Of course, the buffer pin 848d may not be provided if the tip of the upper and lower partition walls 848c1 of the branch portion 848c is covered with a metal cover or the like to reinforce it.

In this case as well, the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball B with the handle 182 to aim at either the first ball passage 5a4a or the second ball passage 5a4b, but the first ball is at a stage where the momentum of the hit ball is strong. Since it is necessary to separate the passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b, the difficulty of adjusting the handle 182 is high, and the difference in technique depending on the player is easily reflected. Therefore, the sense of accomplishment and satisfaction when the intended result is obtained is increased.

In the one shown in FIG. 134, a space portion is formed on the left side of the accommodating portion 848e2 of the reinforcing resin 848e1, and the reinforcing resin 848e1 can be inserted into this space portion, or the reinforcing resin 848e1 can be inserted. It is also possible to further improve the strength by attaching another reinforcing member different from the above. In addition, in consideration of the appearance when this space portion is enlarged, the surface side of the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member to be attached to the space portion may be provided with a predetermined decoration, or the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member may be used. Instead of the members, some kind of effect device (for example, a fourth symbol display device, a sub liquid crystal, etc.) may be provided to have both a reinforcing surface and an effect surface.

In the ones shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), a drop port 5a4c connecting the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b is provided in a part of the branch portion 848c of the connecting passage portion 5a4 in FIG. 134. A part of the game ball flowing through the one-ball passage 5a4a can fall into the second ball passage 5a4b and fall from the second release unit 848b to a specific portion 5a2b in the second game area 5a2. In this case, a variation of the adjustment of the handle 182 that separates the release portions 848a and 848b (for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the game ball B is hit against the buffer pin 848d of the branch portion 848c to change the traveling direction upward. Then, the game ball B is hit against the outer rail 1001 so that the bounced ball enters the drop opening 5a4c.) Therefore, the interest of the game is also increased.

In the one shown in FIG. 136, the tip of the branch portion 848c of the one shown in FIG. 134 is set in the vicinity of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, and thereby hits the tip of the branch portion 848c. Since the game ball B is likely to be bounced back to the first game area 5a1, the difficulty of striking the first ball passages 5a4a and 5a4b is further improved. Incidentally, in the examples of FIGS. 134, 135 (a), and (b), since the bounce space 832c is provided between the tip of the branch portion 848c and the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, the branch is branched. Most of the game balls B that bounce off the portion 848c enter the second ball passage 5a4b while being placed on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 and rolling.

FIGS. 137 and 138 are examples in which the emission portions 848a and 848b of FIG. 132 are lengthened and the second game area 5a2 is shortened in the vertical direction. In this case, the discharge portions 848a and 848b pass through. Since the residence time of the game ball B can be lengthened, there is an effect that the visibility of the game ball B passing through the discharging portions 848a and 848b can be improved.

Further, those shown in FIGS. 137 and 138 are examples in which the risk of entering the first inlet 2006 is increased by arranging the first inlet 2006 above and below the gate portion 2003, and by doing so, the gate portion is increased. Since the thrill of aiming for 2003 can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

As described above, in the example of FIGS. 131 to 138, the advantageous / disadvantageous profit difference is provided between the portions 5a2a and 5a2b that enter the second gaming area 5a2 in the subsequent fall path, and thus the advantageous portion 5a2b is always provided. I tried to aim, but the points 5a2a and 5a2b that enter each other provide different kinds of benefits in the subsequent fall path, and then one of the places 5a2a and 5a2b is appropriately selected and aimed according to the game state. You may.

That is, in the example of FIG. 139, the game ball B entering from the portion 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a directly below the impact portion 1006 through the connecting passage portion 5a4 has a probability of entering the first receiving port 2006. However, although it is larger than the probability of entering the second entrance, it is set so that it may pass through the gate portion 2003.

On the other hand, the game ball B entering from the portion 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has an extremely small probability of entering the first entrance 2006 and a large probability of entering the second entrance. Is set to.

Therefore, when the player hits the second gaming area 5a2, he / she aims at the gate portion 2003 and collides with the abutting portion 1006 even if he / she bears the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 depending on the gaming state, and thus the releasing portion. Aim at 848a, for example, when in a big hit state, it is difficult to enter the first entrance 2006 and it is easy to enter the second entrance, and aim at the discharge part 848b which is easy to reach the big winning opening 2005 with low risk, and so on. The force will be adjusted.

Although not shown, the above-mentioned center member 2500 is a part common to different models and a part for each model, such as a part corresponding to the second gaming area 5a2 of the center member 2500 and a other part. It may be divided into a plurality of (at least two) blocks to be changed, and the blocks may be combined to form one center member 2500. By doing so, mass production of parts common to each model becomes possible, so that the cost of the center member 2500 can be suppressed.

Further, the member between the discharge unit 848a and the discharge unit 848b may be movable so that the distance between the openings 848aH or 848bH of one of the discharge units 848a or 848b is widened when a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, a deceleration means such as an obstacle ridge 849 provided on the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be provided on the inner surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 so as to be technically easy to enter the discharge portion 848b.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the lower board holder 1200. It is discharged.

Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower board holder 1200. Will be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first reception port 2006 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first reception sensor 2406, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

The first start port sensor 3002 includes a first start port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as “first start port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first start port sensor slave side (hereinafter, “first start”). It is described as "mouth sensor slave side 3002b"), and the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b have at least a false detection prevention distance dimension (14 mm in this embodiment). It has a large distance dimension as compared with the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball.) Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port When the sensor slave side 3002b is arranged so as to be equal to or less than the false detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a is moved to the first start port together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a. It may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b, and the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b is detected by the first start port sensor slave side 3002b together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a. Because there are cases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b are arranged apart by a dimensional distance (43 mm in the present embodiment) larger than the false detection prevention distance dimension. As a result, when the first start port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection extends to the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. As a result, the physical structure allows the first start port sensor slave side 3002b to erroneously detect that the game ball B has not yet passed through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. When the first start port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B that can be prevented and passes through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the electrical effect of the detection. Is extended to the first start port sensor main side 3002a, so that the first start port sensor main side 3002a is in a state where the game ball B has already passed through the first start port sensor main side 3002a. The physical structure can prevent erroneous detection. In this way, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor main side 3002a by first passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, and then the first start port sensor slave. After passing through the side 3002b and being detected by the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the sensor is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

In the present embodiment, the first start is started by adopting the first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors), the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is detected and notified by the first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors), and a detailed description of the fraud detection process will be described later.

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
Although not shown in detail, the front effect unit 2600 depends on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , It is equipped with a plurality of effect decorative bodies that can move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light emission effects. The front effect unit 2600 can perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorative bodies, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center member 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center member 2500, and is decorated by emitting light from a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate that closes the frame of the center member 2500 and light incident from the upper surface of the light guide plate. A decorative substrate for the first pattern on which multiple LEDs for the first pattern are mounted, and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that are decorated by emitting light from the right side of the light guide plate are mounted. A plurality of diffusing lenses provided between the decorative substrate for the second pattern and the right side surface of the light guide plate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern to diffuse the light from the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern. , Is equipped. The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern are full-color LEDs.

The light guide plate has a first pattern formed by a myriad of concave-convex upper-reflecting parts that reflect only light from above and an innumerable right-convex that reflects only light from the right. It has a second pattern formed by the reflective part. That is, the front effect unit 2600 can emit the first pattern by emitting light when the LED of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is emitted, and emits the second pattern when the LED of the decorative substrate for the second pattern is emitted. It can be displayed.

The light guide plate has innumerable upper reflection parts forming the first pattern and innumerable right reflection parts forming the second pattern, each of which has fine irregularities formed, and is a decoration for the first pattern. When the multiple LEDs for the first pattern of the board and the multiple LEDs for the second pattern of the decorative board for the second pattern are not emitted, they look transparent and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. Various decorative objects, effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The plurality of upper reflection parts forming the first pattern and the right reflection part forming the second pattern correspond to a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern. It has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the LED and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part are recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part make the light incident from the corresponding multiple LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Reflect in the direction. On the other hand, the light incident from the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern, which do not correspond to each other, is reflected in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate.

The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern mounted on the lower surface of the decorative substrate for the first pattern are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDc are arranged in a row. It is divided into four groups of LEDd. The first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are arranged so as to make two rounds of a predetermined number (here, three) from the left.

The first pattern is a pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles whose boundaries are the horizontal lines forming the decorative pattern, the upper right diagonal line, and the extension lines of the upper left diagonal line. The first pattern is a pattern of six large triangles that are approximately the same size as an equilateral triangle formed by gathering four outlines of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern, and inside the outline of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern. It is composed of multiple small triangle patterns that fit. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circular shape centered near the center of the game area 5a so that the entire pattern is a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangle patterns surround the six large triangle patterns. Have been placed.

The large triangle pattern of the first pattern is such that a plurality of equilateral triangles of different sizes are superposed so that the sizes become smaller in order while being eccentric toward the apex side near the center of the game area 5a. It is formed in a pattern. The small triangle pattern of the first pattern is formed into a pattern in which the contour lines of equilateral triangles are arranged concentrically.

The first pattern includes a first pattern portion composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the first LEDa, a second pattern portion composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the second LEDb, and a first pattern. It is composed of a third pattern portion composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the three LEDc, and a fourth pattern portion composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LEDd.

The large triangle pattern in which multiple equilateral triangles of different sizes are superimposed in the first pattern has the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern so that the sizes become smaller in order. The portion, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, and the third pattern portion are eccentrically overlapped with each other toward the center side of the game area 5a. In addition, the small triangle pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern has the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, so that the size becomes smaller in order. They are arranged concentrically in the order of.

The second pattern is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player consisting of the characters "CHANGE!".

Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 will be briefly described. When the first LEDa of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the first pattern portion, and the remaining second pattern portion, third pattern portion, and fourth pattern are reflected. Since the part and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the first pattern part appears to shine from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the second LEDb of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front at the second pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, third pattern portion, and first pattern portion are emitted. Since the four patterns and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, when the third LEDc of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front at the third pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, second pattern portion, and first pattern portion are emitted. Since the four patterns and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the third pattern appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LEDd of the decorative substrate for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front at the fourth pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, second pattern portion, and first pattern portion are emitted. Since the three patterns and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth pattern appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

And in the first pattern, in the part of the large triangle pattern, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, Are eccentrically overlapped toward the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern part are concentric in this order. Since it is arranged toward the center, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are made to emit light in this order, the first pattern part, the second picture part, and the third picture part, The light is emitted in the order of the fourth pattern portion, and it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that moves from the outside to the center.

On the other hand, when the fourth LEDd, the third LEDc, the second LEDb, and the first LEDa are made to emit light in this order, the fourth pattern part, the third picture part, the second picture part, and the first picture part are made to emit light in this order. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that moves from the center side to the outside.

Further, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are made to emit light in different colors, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, the third pattern portion, and the fourth pattern portion are made to emit different colors. Can be made to emit light.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern of the decorative substrate for the second pattern are made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the second pattern, and the remaining first pattern portion, Since the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to emit the second pattern composed of the characters "CHANGE!" By the plurality of LEDs for the plurality of second patterns.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern section, second pattern section, third pattern section, fourth pattern section) are provided by one light guide plate. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to easily secure a large space behind the light guide plate, another production unit can be arranged in that space, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted to the player. It can be entertained and can suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, since the light guide plate can show a light emitting decoration in which a semi-transparent first pattern emerges and moves like an animation in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600, light emission using the conventional light guide plate It can give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the production, can surprise and entertain the player, and can make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the first pattern and the second pattern, by making the pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the base panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center member 2500 are continuous. The decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

In addition, only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the first pattern and the second pattern by the light guide plate well, so that other players who are away from the front can see the light emission display. The light emitting display of the first pattern and the second pattern becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate is being performed, and other players are paying attention. In addition to being able to suppress playing, it is possible to play the game without worrying about other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decline in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 151).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a2 on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 mounted below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back effect mounted inside the back box 3010. It is equipped with a unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening with an open front and a flat plate frame-like opening 3010a2 that penetrates the rear wall in a square shape and a flat plate frame that protrudes rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a2. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c. A notch 3010d is provided at the center of the left side of the rear view of the portion 3010b in the vertical direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a2 of the back box 3010 is formed to be slightly smaller than the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

The back effect unit 3100 moves or emits light according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a plurality of effect decorations, and can perform movable effects and light emission effects. The back effect unit 3100 can perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorative bodies, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present various patterns of effect to the player. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Here, an example of an effect decorative body capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the effect decorative body. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, which is an effect decorative body, is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a2 in the back box 3010.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape with its tip directed to the right, and is moved in the left-right direction or in the up-down direction by a drive motor (not shown) via a mechanism (not shown). You can do it. The rear left upper left movable decorative body 3310 has an equilateral triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is inclined so that the tip is positioned forward with respect to the left-right direction.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3311 whose front view shape is narrowed to the right and the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3311, and the tip is directed to the right. The triangular pyramid-shaped front decorative portion 3312, the back upper left rotation drive motor for rotating the front decorative portion 3312, which is attached to the inside of the base decorative portion 3311, and the inside of the base decorative portion 3311. The back upper left base decorative substrate for luminescent decoration of the base decoration part 3311 and the back upper left front stage for luminescent decoration of the front decoration part 3312 attached to the right side surface of the base decoration part 3311. It includes a decorative substrate 3311a. The base decoration portion 3311 and the front decoration portion 3312 are formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3311 to which the base decoration board is attached are mounted on the back upper left base decoration substrate. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left front-stage decorative substrate 3311a. ing.

The rotation of the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the upper left rotary drive motor on the back is to the main gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the upper left rotary drive motor on the back and the rotary shaft of the front decoration part 3312. The rotation of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 is performed via a back upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed. On the left side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311, a magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is located near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 and on the left side surface of the front decoration portion 3312 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312. It is arranged vertically to the front, and is housed in the internal space of the pre-decorative portion 3312 so that its left surface does not protrude from the left surface of the pre-decorative portion 3312 toward the right surface of the base decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312, which causes the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 to resonate due to the rotation of the front decoration portion 3312 by the back upper left rotation drive motor. It is a position where it does not occur.

Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front-stage decorative portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back-upper left rotation drive motor passes through the back-upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) described above. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the decorative portion 3312 and the first-stage decorative portion 3312 starts rotating, its locus becomes a circular orbit.

Therefore, on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposing the magnetic surface of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape), a Hall element and A back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, which is composed of peripheral circuits and can detect changes in magnetic poles, is mounted. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a circuit used to specify the rotation position of the front decoration portion 3312 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the front decoration portion 3312. The detailed description thereof will be described later. As the original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the first-stage decorative portion 3312, for example, the vertices of the respective triangles of the base-stage decorative portion 3311 and the first-stage decorative portion 3312 match to form one triangular pyramid. The forming state can be mentioned.

In the above-described embodiment, the shape of the front upper left movable decorative body 3310 is an equilateral triangle, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "quadrangle", "hexagon", and the like. It may be "octagonal", "fan", "star", or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a movable body is formed by using a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3312. It is adopted as a sensor to detect the standby position (original position) of a certain first-stage decoration unit 3312, and by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312 of the first-stage decoration unit 3312, the rotation position of the first-stage decoration unit 3312 is specified and the standby position is specified. Although the (original position) was set, it can also be used as a sensor to detect the approach of a magnet by a magnet goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called the back left upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab intermittently has a magnet 3312 of the front decoration part 3312 in a situation where the front decoration part 3312 is continuously rotated. This is because magnetism should be detected, but when magnetism is continuously detected, an illegal magnet approach can be detected as a magnet goto.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various drive motors provided in the various effect units are stepping motors, but a motor (servo motor) including a rotation detector such as an encoder may be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the servomotor is detected by the rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. As a result, the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the servomotor can be set to a predetermined rotation speed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are the ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. With the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first receiving port 2006, and the large winning opening 2005, which are the entrances provided in the game area 5a formed in the section 5. A ball collecting device having a collecting port for collecting the collected game balls together with the game balls collected in the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided, and the game collected by the ball collecting device is provided. A game area having a ball transport device for transporting a ball toward the ball launcher 540, which is partitioned between the ball launcher 540 and the game board 5 without supplying the payout of the game ball to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. It is also possible to form a circulation path for the game balls by the 5a, the ball collecting device, and the ball conveying device so that a predetermined number of game balls are closedly circulated to play the game.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration of the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150. 146 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 147 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 148 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 149 is an X-ray line of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a view taken along the line A of FIG. 148. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a transparent cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310X of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise invading the liquid crystal output board 1530. , A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of the metal shield plate 1540, and a transparent base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to a predetermined position together with a metal shield plate 1540 to form a shield plate 1540. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501 On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113 and electricity. Is connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting each of the side walls 1501b to 1501e toward the rear (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501ab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the opening side and the opposite side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ac is the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed, almost horizontally long rectangular regions (to be exact, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom). It is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). There is. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 have connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 is exposed. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the plug is hidden even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted. It is designed so that it cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

The cover flat plate 1501a is a horizontally long rectangular region with one closed position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to project toward the side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. .. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the plug is hidden even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted. It is designed so that it cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It has become like.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). The protruding portion 1501afa having the dimensions) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin and is transparently molded.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project upward and downward at predetermined intervals in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control. Copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540, and the through holes 1540c1a and the shield plate 1540 are L-shaped. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In addition to being in contact with each other, the land 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is electrically connected. The 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are electrically connected to each other. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are surrounded by soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520 rf1 to 1520 rf4 and 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 are respectively formed. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 are in contact with each other. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is placed on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are liquid crystal output substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the 1530.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the boss hole 1501 am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1, 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501am2 are in contact with each other. In addition to this, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same as the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are electrically connected to each other. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board are connected. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1520. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. A gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa in a state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates. (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 become A gap is formed, and a gap is formed between the volume adjusting switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gaps formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in) is smaller than the sum of. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , A plurality of air is formed from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small when the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparently, and is formed on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a when viewed from the front. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having openings by projecting them toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front of the base flat plate 1502a, wiring is provided to the connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when the connector for connection is inserted, and the vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected. The force for inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 and the force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at positions that do not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped, and an elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

Further, the base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, at a position corresponding to the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is one size larger than the back surface shape of the connecting piece 1540d.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state where the hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf are in contact with the hinge hook portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd L-shaped hook portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf are hooked on the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
The metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) on the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has predetermined distance dimensions (in the present embodiment, on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer peripheral circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel surfaces. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one of the mounting boss holes of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in the above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Two of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed so as to be projected.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, a predetermined height distance dimension between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this implementation). In the form, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having (12 mm in the present embodiment) and a second space between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, which will be described later. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height.

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply creation circuit (not shown), etc. Resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, LEDs ML1 to ML4 described later, special connectors SCN1, SCN2 described later, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a described later, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown), The second space 1505b is accommodated while the special connector SCN3, etc. described later) and various electronic components (resistors (not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) described later are accommodated in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Does not contain various electronic components at all. By accommodating various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the above. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat radiating plate in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

In the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes the conductive coating portion 1545a and the conductive coating portion 1545a. It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape having a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attainment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I /. Peripheral control IC1510a in which O-interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and productions that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player). SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic) that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b that stores various specified schedule data in advance and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520.
Random Access Memory) SDRAM 1510c consisting of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power supply that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off. It includes a 1510e, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) for creating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control ICs 1510a, ROM 1510b, SSD 1510c provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have smaller IC pin spacings and various connectors CN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. ~ CN7, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 pin spacing becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so the spacing between connectors CN1 and CN7 becomes narrower, and the spacing between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 also becomes narrower. ing.

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. Examples of various serial I / O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310X (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. Some of them employ SPI communication or I2C communication as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various production units, and communicating via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). An electric drive source (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the effect operation unit 300, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc.) provided on the door frame 3 side, and communicate with each other via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various production units, which communicate via the connector CN6). The signal from is received as detection data, or the signal from various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 and communicating via the connector CN3) is detected. Receive as data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / Os, there are GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are input from the GPIO (connector CN6). It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Further, in this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from the GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from the GPIO based on this clock signal. Can produce serial data. By using such a GPIO so as to function as serial communication, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)), for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side. (Communicating via the connector CN1), the light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side can be output. The light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer to SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) system, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) system, and a clockless system. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that uses, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, with one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 35V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 35V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having the distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height of 2.

As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they are provided with a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction at all when they are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving in a predetermined distance range (in the direction of). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (direction between the back surface and the front surface of the pachinko machine 1) when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. ), The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Special so that the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is the control target of the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise invading the board-to-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during this operation, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to provide a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect progresses to the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state will not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing an image (such as an image that conveys that it is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, it is possible to prevent damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to ensure the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared with the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large effect unit (movable effect body) is operated on the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position).

[6-6. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to be aligned with the hole 1501ah2, and the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged as they are or finely adjusted because they are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and penetrated. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. It is in a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting bosses formed on the back surface side are inserted into the protruding portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by covering the peripheral control substrate 1510. Absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed in the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are in contact with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The base body 1502 wraps around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert the metal one-way screw and screw it toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and are inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state in this way, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502 The distance dimension (protruding length) extending to the back surface of is 6.8 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against illegal acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of screws from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector of the above is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c of 1545.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into the mounting groove that constitutes the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By being connected to, it becomes the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 150, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box via the conductive elastic member 1545. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapses in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 collapses by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in a dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated. Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND), an environment resistant to electromagnetic noise should be constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can be done.

In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed. Arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface). After fixing to (located on the lower right side of 1501), the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is pushed into the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 has a cover body 1501). It can also be fixed to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when pushing the board is absorbed, so that the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to surely form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its peripherals. It is possible to reliably form a transmission line between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a substrate that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a for storing the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as a production display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plurality of types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, and the peripheral control substrate is contained in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as the 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Is connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed. Can be done. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). Can be done.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 148, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC and the part number). , Pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple directions. The regions are distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the control ROM 1510b can be formed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state in which it is being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1520 and the 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 35V is originally set. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are distributed and arranged on the 1530 so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. Improved visibility of silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but by further having a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is provided. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mounted type having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity type are adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having the distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height of 2. As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and is a region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. It also has a function as a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and are discharged to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island equipment in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin as described above, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. In addition, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. By fixing the shield plate 1540 made of metal, a configuration was adopted in which the shield plate 1540 was electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, in the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the grounds of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) was adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to and removed from the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be done. In other words, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is arranged. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data The inter-board connector with the special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520 and the inter-board connector with the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By doing so, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is capable of dropping the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a, and thus the above-described substrate. By arranging the inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the inter-board connector described above.

Further, the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The inter-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the above, as shown in FIG. 148, since the arrangement can be long in the vertical direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres can be minimized. When the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. The area to which the powder or the like is attached is extremely increased. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a cover flat plate 1501a, which is a protruding wall of the connector. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden so that they cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a is provided. Even if dust adhering to the connector, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. In this way, the orientation in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the orientation in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or socket). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal methods to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector to be a socket) as a plug, and correspondingly, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) to be a socket. Special connector) can be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, but the polycarbonate contains carbon and is conductive. It may be made of resin and may be molded in opaque black, or if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, it may be molded in a translucent colored color. It may have been done. Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control board described above is placed on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with metal pan screws, they are configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates as described above. be able to. As a result, the noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be passed to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and the noise can be removed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, a predetermined space is formed between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. One space is a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 (the present embodiment). Then, a distance dimension of a second predetermined height between the first space 1505a having (12 mm) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (in the present embodiment). It was composed of a second space 1505b having (1.6 mm). In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large effect unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating the various electronic components and the like that emit the above, the heat generated from the various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540d is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The model (or control number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. The part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, (Part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a. And the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. .. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area (a shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or to provide a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in any one or in combination of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, so that the peripheral control board box 1505 falls onto various boards. This is because there is a high possibility that an electrical trouble will occur due to a foreign substance.

By the way, conventionally, a game machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, characters, a production control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, etc. is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal methods input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify and manufacture the effect control board according to the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

Further, conventionally, a production control board (effect control means) or the like on which a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters, a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, and the like are mounted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the island.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310X and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and the respective controls are shared. Has been done. The main control board 1310X can control the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect based on the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the commands from the main control board 1310X and the various commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is a thing. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X capable of controlling the progress of the game is a main control program that controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and controls the game operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and a main control input circuit 1310b for inputting detection signals from various sensors. The main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage are monitored. A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and an error, and a game. It is provided with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the board 5. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided in the main control board 1310X.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310X (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are transmitted from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, a main control output circuit without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal, and a main control output circuit that does not have a reset function. It is composed of. The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, in the main control output circuit with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the main control system reset, and the signal based on the information is reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no output is made from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is generated. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 3002 (described above, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b) for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004 The second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the above, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the gate that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003. In the sensor 2401, the first entrance sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the first entrance 2006, the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005, and the game area 5a. Out port left sensor 1008a and out port right that detect one of the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism, the game ball B that is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned on the game board 5. Each detection signal from the sensor 1008b, etc. is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, each detection signal from the setting key 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit 633ab, which will be described later, and the payout control. When they are input to the main control board 1310X as they are without going through the output circuit 633ac), they are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310X without passing through another board, and the main control input circuit 1310b is input. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the first entrance sensor 2406, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 3003, the out opening left sensor 1008a, and the out opening right sensor 1008b, respectively. Is input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on these detection signals, so that the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with a reset function By outputting the control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, each drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Alternatively, by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status indicator 1401 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control output circuit with a reset function. , Ordinary hold indicator 1403, first special symbol indicator 1404, first special hold number indicator 1405, second special symbol indicator 1406, second special hold number indicator 1407, round indicator 1408, respectively. Is output without going through another board, that is, directly.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is set from the main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on these detection signals. A drive signal is output to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the change board 1310Y.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, so that the payout control board 633 is output from the main control output circuit with a reset function. Main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to the game and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the output terminal of the predetermined output port informs the main control output circuit with a reset function that the game ball B is allowed to be fired. By outputting the permission signal, the main control output circuit with the reset function outputs a firing permission signal informing the payout control board 633 that the game ball B is allowed to be fired. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys that the launch is permitted is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is reversed when the launch is not permitted Is set to. As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 (first start port sensor main side 3002a and first start port sensor slave side 3002b), second start port sensor 2402, gate sensor 2401, and grand prize opening sensor The non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the 2403, the out-port left sensor 1008a, and the out-port right sensor 1008b, while the contact-type ON / OFF operation is used for the general winning port sensor 3001. The type of mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the large winning opening sensor 2403. Further, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, the game ball B is detected by the out port left sensor 1008a. , And the detection of the game ball B by the out-mouth right sensor 1008b also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 and the first entrance sensor 2406 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first entrance sensor 2406 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first inlet / outlet sensor 2406. Regardless of whether the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001 or the first entrance sensor 2406, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without a reset function as serial data, so that the payout control board 633 does not have a reset function. Various commands are sent as serial data to. When the payout control board 633 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310X as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310X. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function. No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310X is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310X for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. Described.) BC0 (see FIG. 160 and the like) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM) is stored in the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310X within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. When the 1310f is operated, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The control MPU 1310a completely erases (clears) the main control built-in RAM. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without the reset function, and is also output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without the reset function.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these DC + 12V and DC + 35V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is from a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Along with being input to the input terminal, the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control board 1310X (output via the main control output times 1310c) and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. Is entered in. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310X. The power failure warning signal may be configured to be input to the board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines, a power supply line to which DC + 12V is supplied (+ 12V power supply line) and a power supply line to which DC + 35V is supplied (+ 35V power supply line). By monitoring each voltage, the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be grasped more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 35V power supply line. Can be done.

[7-2. Payout control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 that controls the launch of the game ball B, the ball feed control, etc., performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to the payout, and the launch control by the launch solenoid 542. , The launch control unit 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145, the error LED display 633c that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and the error LED display 633c for canceling the error. It includes an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633, controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and also performs the game medium payout operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. The payout control MPU633aa, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs including a payout control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input. The payout control input circuit 633ab, the payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board, and the payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. It has.

The payout control MPU633aa includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and its operation (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") that monitors the system) and a function to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are transmitted from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function. It is composed of. The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the payout control system reset, and the signal based on the information is reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no output is made from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the payout control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is generated. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the various output terminals.

Detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580, payout detection of the payout device 580. The detection signal from the sensor 591, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X, and the error release signal from the error release switch 633d are sent to the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. It is input to the input terminal of.

Further, as described above, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is transmitted via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit 633ab, Then, it is input to the main control board 1310X as it is without going through the payout control output circuit 633ac). Further, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is input to the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633 as described above. ing.

Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310X are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310X is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU633aa normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310X as serial data, a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with a reset function to the main control board 1310X.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without the reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby payout control output without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310X. When the main control board 1310X normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310X outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED display 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with the reset function to the error LED display 633c.

The error LED display 633d is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310X). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball gummy" (specifically). Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other to indicate that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has a problem based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". Notifies that it is "tan" (specifically, that the lower plate 202 is full in the game ball B stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , When the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). Has been reached) is notified.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a prize ball to the payout control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby payout control with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal plate 558 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310X to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photoIC) (not shown), and the amusement park (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball B and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of the game ball, or an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. It is designed so that the computer does not malfunction or break down, and it is possible to control the main control board 1310X, the payout, etc., which allows the game to proceed from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be made and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect so as to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer grasps the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, so that the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called). , Ball launch information) and the player's game are monitored.

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. .. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is transmitted to the payout control board 633 via a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown) of the payout control MPU633aa. It is designed to be input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is a ball. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the rental operation unit 220.

Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor BC0 (FIG. 160, etc.) as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310X for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. See). By the capacitor BC0, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the built-in payout control RAM is converted into the payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633aa completely erases (clears) the RAM of the payout control built-in RAM.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b is based on a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various sensors related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and an oscillation circuit based on the clock signal. A launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch reference. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects this is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310X that conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In the launch timing control circuit, the launch condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 is satisfied based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are formed based on the CR connection signal. If the launch condition 2 that is electrically connected is satisfied and the launch condition 3 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310X is not satisfied, the game ball B is not satisfied. Since the firing reference pulse for launching the game toward the game area 5a is not output, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be launched.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

In the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 is provided with the launch control unit 633b, which controls the launch by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, but the power supply board 630 is provided. It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control board 1310X may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and is shown in the figure. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310X, and is a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / O. Peripheral control IC 1510a in which interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects in advance, and peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Various control information (peripheral data) can be transferred and stored in the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and the real-time clock IC (not shown). It includes a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of the various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has various control information (peripheral) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one of the initial setting processes when the power is turned on (including the case where the power is restored from a power failure). Data) is controlled to be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the peripheral data ROM 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games. It is drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information or delete the information during processing. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system, the CPU reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 from the main control board 1310X based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. ..

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310X, the CPU reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by controlling the system so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various effects flow.

Based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generates drawing data for drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the output to the liquid crystal output board 1530 is controlled. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where it can accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convey that fact.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like by reading sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, generating and outputting the sound data based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310X, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and the read schedule data. From SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color color LED, or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is obtained. It is read out and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or driven to various drive motors provided in various production units provided on the game board 5. The game board side drive data for outputting a signal is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720, or the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 is provided. , And the door side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and the lighting signal and blinking signal to the full-color LED, single-color LED, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Alternatively, the door-side light emission data for outputting the gradation lighting signal and the door-side drive light emission data composed of the data are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. .. When the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a), the panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, a command). A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting a drive signal to various drive motors provided in the various effect units is provided.

The detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are the panel drive board 1720 and the panel drive board 1720. It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevating detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348. The detection signal from is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, signals from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. ..

Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[7-4. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. Here, the relationship with each decorative substrate of the game board 5 will be described, and then the relationship with various drive motors of various production units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be described.

[7-4-1. Relationship with each decorative board of the game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the full-color LED, the monochromatic color LED, or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The light emitting data on the game board side is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative substrate of the game board 5 includes one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits capable of passing a predetermined constant current through the LEDs.

As each decorative substrate of the game board 5, for example, a decorative substrate for the first pattern on which a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern, which are decorated by emitting light by incident light from the upper surface of the light guide plate in the front effect unit 2600, are mounted. There is a second pattern decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern are mounted, which are decorated by emitting light from the right side surface of the light guide plate in the front effect unit 2600.

Further, as each decorative substrate of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 are mounted. An upper left panel decorative board 1131, a lower left panel decorative board on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 are mounted. There is.

Further, as each decorative substrate of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for light-emitting decoration of the front upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted on the back upper left front stage. There is a decorative substrate 3311a and the like.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the game board side drive data for outputting the drive signals to the various drive motors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2. As a command, it is transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) receives the game. Based on the board-side drive data (that is, commands), drive signals are output to various drive motors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5.

As various drive motors provided in the various production units, for example, there is a back upper left rotary drive motor that rotates the front upper left decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310.

[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are panel-driven. It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510.

As various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in various production units, for example, the standby position (original) of the rotation position of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. There is a magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the like mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a for detecting the position).

The standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on the detection signal from the magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame grounding board 559 shown in FIG. 102 can temporarily aggregate electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (ground ground) to the island equipment of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. 152 (a) is a side view of the frame grounding board 559, and FIG. 152 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame grounding board 559. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground board 559, and FIG. 152 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground board 559. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the frame ground board 559 is in a state where its mounting surface is facing downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward). It is housed and mounted inside the substrate accommodating portion 551a formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 102 (b).

As shown in FIG. 152 (b), the frame ground board 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a row from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side thereof. The lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly explaining the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 152 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided as an interface ground on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115. It is electrically connected to the connection terminal via the interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected as the island equipment ground via the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire. The ground terminal ECN3 is shown on the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa) as the ball tank ground. One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that does not, and the other end of the ball tank ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN4 is shown in FIG. 97 as the main body frame metal ground. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 by a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN5 is provided as a power supply ground on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 114. It is electrically connected to the terminal via the power supply ground wire.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, as shown in FIG. 152 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is used as the power supply ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. At the same time, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as resistors ER1 and ER2.

The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed as the ball tank ground. The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN3 is removed by being guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground is removed by being guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is removed. , The ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire are guided to the ground ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed.

As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can retain the game ball B, and the surrounding area thereof.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame grounding substrate 559 is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, and as a result, the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 552, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as a result of the static electricity tend to accumulate. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 which is in the vicinity of the unit 560, in the frame grounding board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 as the ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the ground are gradually passed through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, and attenuated to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage. It is possible to lead to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic noise that has invaded from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, where static electricity tends to accumulate, is sent from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called the frame ground. By guiding to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise invading from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed.

In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are in a region strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as described above. Since it corresponds to (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground uses the electromagnetic noise that has flowed into the frame ground board 559 as described above in the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it is guided to the ground ground of the island facility and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 that employ this large ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on each side, rated current: 7A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (earth terminal ECN2 to 2). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than that of the above-mentioned ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. , A small ground terminal is adopted for the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 that employ this small ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on each side, rated current: 3A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height will be 9.8 mm).

In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is larger than each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (ground wire, main body frame ground wire) is thicker than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), 1.6 mm is adopted as the plate thickness of the frame grounding substrate 559.

In this way, the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed. The ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action.

Further, since the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed, the pachinko machine 1 The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side of the is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic noise is temporarily collected on the power supply board 630 to collect the electromagnetic noise once and the island equipment of the game hall. Compared to the configuration in which the ground wire is guided to the ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) is extremely easy to route.

Further, since the external terminal board 558 and the frame ground board 559 are configured to be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a close state, a plurality of electric wires connected to the external terminal board 558 are connected. Terminal 558a (A plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, the payout base unit 550 is provided with 10 external terminals called external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when viewed from the back). ) And the hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, with wiring, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground on the frame ground board 559, and the ground connection terminal provided in the island equipment in the game hall. , Can be performed as a series of work, such as electrically connecting the island equipment with a ground wire (wiring), which can contribute to the improvement of workability.

Further, since the frame ground board 559 is configured so that it can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island equipment of the game hall can be used. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game) provided with the island equipment ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the provided ground connection terminal to the game board 5. Since it can be arranged so as to be separated from the peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc.), various control boards It is possible to eliminate an adverse effect on the electronic components (including the connector) provided in the above.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560. The metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, respectively. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main body frame metal ground wire) is made extremely short, and electromagnetic noise is removed by guiding it from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment in the game hall. be able to.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the dispensing unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame grounding board 559 which exerts a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the board 630 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the interface that electrically connects the interface board 635 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination action. It can be configured to be the shortest compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560 In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire.

By the way, conventionally, each ground is once integrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that the power supply AC24V of the CR unit can be easily supplied, and connected to the ground ground of the island equipment via the power supply board. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120595 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)) has been proposed. Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged downward in the game machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank on the upper part of the game machine, the prize ball device, or the like toward the lower power supply board. By routing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing in the middle, which may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, the current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the ground grounding point of the island equipment is above the game machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to route the ground wire integrated on the power supply board from the bottom to the top again.

[9. Conductor floating on the ground]
Next, a member provided in the game board as a treatment of the conductor floating with respect to the ground will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a schematic view of the handling of a conductor floating with respect to the ground provided in various production units provided in the game board.

As described above, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so that the game board 5 is composed of these. The game balls rub against each other in the rail path, are charged, and are electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island equipment in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

In the game board 5, various production units are provided on the back unit 3000. Various production units include structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings for electrical parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and A plurality of conductors such as a structure molded from a conductive resin (including a decorative structure) are used. Further, various boards are provided on the game board 5, and these various boards and various effect units are arranged close to each other. Further, these conductors have different effects on the electric circuit when electrostatically discharged depending on the size of the surface area. When the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of electric charge that can be stored is small and the influence of electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit can be ignored, and it is not necessary to remove electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the surface area of the conductor is large, the amount of electric charge that can be stored is large and the influence of electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit cannot be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge. ..

When these conductors are floating on the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-mentioned electromagnetic noise, so that the conductor is electrostatically induced under the influence of the electromagnetic noise. Then, if electrostatic discharge is performed from the conductor floating on the ground, various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors in the various production units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, the various substrates provided in the game board 5 are affected and malfunctions occur. We adopted a configuration that does not float on the ground for items that may be damaged or damaged.

[9-1. Example of handling the conductor of the production unit (1)]
Of the various production units, one production unit is provided with a metal reinforcing plate (not shown) so as to cover the back surface side thereof in order to increase its rigidity, and among both ends of the reinforcing plate in the left-right direction in the left-right direction. One placed near the drive motor 3151 is attached to a metal slide rail 3151ns that can slide in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, and the other not placed near the drive motor 3151 is made of metal (not shown). Sliding parts (which may be molded from a conductive resin) that slides along the columnar rod (moves while sliding the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) (may be molded with a conductive resin). It may be molded from a non-conductive resin.) Is attached.

In the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors provided in the various production units, at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing malfunction or damage. A state in which the surface area of a single conductor is larger than a predetermined surface area, but it is selected as an object that does not float on the ground, and each conductor is structurally contacted, fixed, and conductive. It is supposed to be. For example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151ns are attached and structurally brought into contact with each other so as to be electrically connected and conductive.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the metal slide rail 3151ns for the lower back moving arm, which is arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 and can slide in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance dimension, is made of metal. Of the housing and the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, the mounting holes 3151n closer to the slide rail 3151ns are provided via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc. In addition to being electrically connected, the mounting hole 3151f farther from the slide rail 3151ns and the panel drive substrate 1720 are electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc.

The wiring terminals of the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc are crimped to both ends, and the wiring terminals at one end thereof are screwed and fixed to the metal housing of the slide rail 3151ns, and the wiring at the other ends. The terminal is screwed and fixed to the mounting hole 3151n provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151n is fixed to the effect unit.

The second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped at one end, a connector is provided at the other end, and the wiring terminal at one end is provided in a metal housing of the drive motor 3151. The other end of the connector is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0. The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is the ground of various boards such as power supply board 630, main control board 1310X, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards and various decorative boards. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

The plurality of electrical wirings (harnesses) that drive the drive motor 3151 are inserted into the corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720 that are different from the connectors into which the connectors of the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc are inserted.

As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various production units, at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing malfunction or damage. As a conductor, the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, but the conductors are structurally contacted and fixed to conduct electricity. For example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail are used. 3151ns are attached to make structural contact to make them electrically connected, and these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, and the second conductor. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720.

As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various production units, at least those that may affect the various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction or may be damaged when electrostatically discharged. As a result, the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, but these conductors are configured so as not to float from the ground. Therefore, electromagnetic noise has entered these conductors. Even so, the invading electromagnetic noise can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage of various substrates provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

Further, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades these conductors, the invaded electromagnetic wave noise is prevented from being affected by malfunctions, failures, etc. of the electric circuit parts of various boards provided in the game board 5. Since it can be safely removed, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and at the same time, the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

[9-2. Example of handling the conductor of the production unit (Part 2)]
In the other production units, one of the upper and lower ends of the moving arm base, which is arranged near the drive motor 3151, can slide in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance. Attached to the rail 3151ns and not located near the drive motor 3151, the other slides along a metal columnar rod (not shown) (slides the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod). A sliding portion (which may be molded from a conductive resin or a non-conductive resin) which moves while moving) is attached.

In the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors provided in the various production units, at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing malfunction or damage. As a certain thing, the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, but it is selected as an object that does not float on the ground. For example, a metal slide rail 3151ns.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), a metal housing of a metal slide rail 3151ns, which is arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 and can slide and move in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance dimension, and a drive. Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the motor 3151, the mounting holes 3151n (3452n) closer to the slide rail 3151ns are electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc. The mounting hole 3151f farther from the slide rail 3151ns and the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit are electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc.

The wiring terminals of the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc are crimped to both ends, and the wiring terminals at one end thereof are screwed and fixed to the metal housing of the slide rail 3151ns, and the wiring at the other ends. The terminal is screwed and fixed to the mounting hole 3151n provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151n is fixed to the effect unit.

The second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped at one end, a connector is provided at the other end, and the wiring terminal at one end is provided in a metal housing of the drive motor 3151. At the same time, the connector at the other end is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector in the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2. The ground (GND) line of the relay board 3151a provided in the production unit includes a panel drive board 1720, a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310X, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, and the like. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of various substrates such as various decorative substrates.

The plurality of electrical wirings (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and the connectors of the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc are inserted into the corresponding connectors on the relay board 3151a provided in the production unit different from the connector. Will be inserted. The relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via an electric wiring (harness). The electrical wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends thereof, and is inserted and fixed to the corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720.

As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various production units, at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting the various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing malfunction or damage. Whereas the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, for example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151ns has a first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc and a metal housing of the drive motor 3151. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the body, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs2 of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the effect unit.

As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various production units, at least those that may affect the various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction or may be damaged when electrostatically discharged. As a result, the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, but these conductors are configured so as not to float from the ground. Therefore, electromagnetic noise has entered these conductors. Even so, the invading electromagnetic noise can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage of various substrates provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

Further, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades these conductors, the invaded electromagnetic wave noise is prevented from being affected by malfunctions, failures, etc. of the electric circuit parts of various boards provided in the game board 5. Since it can be safely removed, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and at the same time, the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

As described above, electromagnetic noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed. The frame grounding board 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action because it is configured so as to be capable of removing electricity. That is, a path is formed in which electromagnetic noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall and safely removed. On the other hand, of the plurality of conductors in the various production units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, the various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction may occur. It can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) so that it does not float on the ground for something that is or may be damaged. That is, among a plurality of conductors in various production units provided on the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least those that may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction when electrostatically discharged. A path is formed in which electromagnetic noise can be safely removed by guiding it to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) for something that may be damaged. In this way, independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic noise are formed in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the game board 5, and are not affected by each other. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

As described above, the influence of a conductor on an electric circuit when electrostatically discharged depends on the size of its surface area. Further, the ease of electrostatic discharge of the conductor changes depending on the distance dimension from the electric circuit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance dimension between the conductor and the electric circuit are taken into consideration, and among the plurality of conductors, the electromagnetic noise is guided to the ground ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety. The conductors that need to be removed are individually selected (whether or not they are conductors that drop to the ground ground are individually distinguished), and electromagnetic noise is guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The conductors that need to be safely removed are individually selected.

In the above-described embodiment, of the plurality of conductors in the various production units provided on the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, it affects various substrates provided in the game board 5 and is erroneous. For example, a conductor whose surface area is larger than a predetermined surface area because it may operate or be damaged is structurally contacted with each other to be fixed and conductive. , A metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151ns are attached to make structural contact to make them electrically connected, and these conductors are driven by the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc. The path was electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the metal housing of the motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720, but the drive motor 3151 Instead of the metal housing of the above, a metal screw may be provided and the metal screw may be used alone, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is fixed to an insulating substrate). It is also possible to provide a thing) and perform it through this lug plate. That is, these conductors are grounded (GND) via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 fc, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. It may be a path electrically connected to. Similarly, a plurality of conductors in various effect units provided on the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 can be configured in the same manner.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151ns is electrically connected to the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 via a crossover wiring called the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc. , Conductors of metal slide rails 3151ns and other conductive members (eg, structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings of electrical parts), decorative (One conductor out of a plurality of conductors such as a conductive plating applied to the structure of the above and a structure molded by a conductive resin (including a decorative structure)) and another cross wiring. It may be electrically connected with. That is, it may be configured to be electrically connected by two or more stages of crossover wiring. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected to each other by a crossover wiring, or a plurality of conductors may be connected in series or in parallel by a crossover wiring, respectively, or a metal screw is provided. The crossover wiring that electrically connects one conductor and the other conductor may be relayed through this metal screw alone, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is an insulating substrate). It may be done through this lug plate by providing what is fixed to. It is preferable to configure the plurality of crossover wires so that the length of each is shortened.

[10. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159. FIG. 154 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a B arrow view of FIG. 155, and FIG. 157 is a power supply board. Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of (No. 1), FIG. 158 is silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (Part 2), and FIG. 159 shows discontinued electronic components. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, and then the method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, confirmation of blown fuse, capacitor capacity, and countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described.

As described above, the island equipment of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC100V to the power supply voltage of AC24V for the game machine. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of an island facility in a game hall, AC24V is supplied to a power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V) from AC24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and supplies the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[10-1. Power supply board circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 154, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power supply switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and the input is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via the class B fuse specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Specifically, the AC24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1" (hereinafter, may be described as "L side")) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and the power switch. A 24V AC line 2 (hereinafter, referred to as "AC24V2" (may be referred to as "N side")) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the 630a. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise suppression circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically conductive, and the AC24V1 goes to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically conductive, and the AC24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically non-conducting, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. The supply is cut off, and the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically non-conducting, so that the AC24V 2 is cut off from the supply to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

With the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall turned on, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can turn on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the breakers in the game hall may be turned off to shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b is composed of a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise suppression circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and the varistor voltages are the same. The varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is electrically connected to the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 152 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

The normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes the normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a.

The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24V. .. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit that does not supply AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and peripheral circuits 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

The AC24V1 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminals of the power supply creation circuit 630f, respectively.

AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to direct current by switching by FET Q1 and Q2 and peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. It is output from 2 and respectively. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to the heat radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 155). ing. The heat radiation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

As described above, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and also to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Is output from the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor improving circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and peripheral circuits 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

The direct current in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and the anode terminals 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly input without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Is entered in each. At the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4, the gate signal for the power factor improving circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply making circuit is input via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminal and drain terminal of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

For direct current with reduced common mode noise in the choke coil L2, the generation of harmonics is suppressed by switching by FET Q3 and Q4 and peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 2 Is output from each. The types of packages of FET Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the types of packages of FET Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above), and heat is dissipated. It is fixed to fin HS2 (see FIG. 155). The heat radiation fin HS2 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these plurality of electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals are input with direct current having a power factor improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating flow from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and also fuses FUSE3 (this implementation). In terms of form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, via a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a class B fuse specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Then, it is supplied as DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE 3 is the + 35V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply creation circuit 630f creates direct current + 12V and direct current + 5V from the input direct current, respectively. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to the pachinko machine from the power supply board 630. 1 Supply to each internal board. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a power line.

The power supply creation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor improvement circuit 630d by controlling the power factor improvement gate signal to be output from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. It suppresses the generation of harmonics.

In the power supply creation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power supply creation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

A power cord plug (not shown) is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistakenly plugged into the AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than DC + 35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

In the power supply creation circuit 630f, the magnitude of the power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value: the present embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. Then, when it reaches about 50 V), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit can be output to the power supply destruction circuit 630 g.

When the power supply creation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destroys to enter the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g to supply power. When the current flows into the CGND terminal of the created circuit 630f at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

The GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply making circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end on the opposite side of the resistor R25, which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the above.

In the power supply destruction circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates and the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. When a large current flows toward (the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5 become overcurrent), the FETQ5 is destroyed, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5 are conductive is maintained. Will be done. Although the FET Q5 has the same package type as the FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 (TO-220F described above), the FET Q1 , Q2, Q3, Q4, and unlike the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, they are arranged at positions where they do not come into contact with the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged while the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 are arranged, and is not fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 155 and 156). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat through the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

That is, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of AC24V for the game machine. When plugged in, the power supply creation circuit 630f is based on a power supply voltage in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal, and the magnitude of this power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value). : In the present embodiment, it is set to about 50V.) When the power supply destruction circuit gate signal is output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the FET Q5 is controlled to self-destruct. As a result, the state of the short mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, so that the power switch 630a is operated. When the fuse is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETQ5 in the power supply destruction circuit 630g in the short mode, so that the power supply creation circuit 630f By flowing into the CGND terminal at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and the plug of the power supply cord is commercialized. Even if it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the game machine, AC24V. When the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being plugged in, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 with unfused ones, and replace the power cord plug with AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the rectifier circuit 630c Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 which is in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, so that a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the fuse. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will be blown again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is used in the island equipment of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, the game cannot be started.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the positive (+) terminal. The negative (-) terminal of capacitor BC0 is grounded to ground (GND). The main control power supply line from between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151. A circuit in which a wiring pattern for taking out the VBB and the payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 is formed. There is.

That is, the negative (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to ground (GND). From between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, the main VBB that serves as the backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X and the payout control. The circuit is divided into two systems: a payout VBB that serves as a backup power line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the board 633.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line (that is, + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is the Schottky barrier diode D20. It is supplied to the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Then, as a payout VBB, it is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, and various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, the DC + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is provided in the main control board 1310X as the main VBB, while the Schottky barrier diode D20 prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. And holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

That is, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, even if the DC + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the discharge of the capacitor BC0 causes the main control board 1310X as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided is held, and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. Various information to be used is retained.

[10-2. How to identify electronic components that have the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky of the power factor improvement circuit 630d. The types of packages in the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g are the same type (TO-220F), and the shapes of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are also the same (diameter: 5 mm, length). S: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

Although FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and FETQ5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are the only electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, they are destroyed. In order to make it easy to identify the components, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of other parts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the white outer shape of the FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, is obtained. The line and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are used as silk printing for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white wire is on the side fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 155, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to be fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the silk printing of the white outline on which the HS2 is arranged and the thick white lines of the silk printing TSLKs 1 to 8 are connected to each other.

On the other hand, for FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white diagonal lines arranged at equal intervals within the outline. The ad1 and the thick white line indicating the orientation of the electronic components are printed as silk printing, and the silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

In this way, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are electronic components having the same shape, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among TSLKs 1 to 9, which of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is gazed at in comparison with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. Thereby, it is possible to very easily identify which of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is the only electronic component to be destroyed.

Further, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to instruct FETQ5 by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the staff of the game hall, etc. can accurately grasp the position of FETQ5, so that it is easy to communicate between the person in charge of the service center and the staff of the game hall, etc. Become.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall, etc. to FETQ5 by telephone, the staff of the game hall, etc., follow the instructions of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, a noteworthy FET Q5 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components, FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

As described above, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Fuse. That is, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, it becomes an electronic component in which one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE2 are destroyed after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so as to easily identify the electronic component to be destroyed as an electronic component having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630. The silk printing that is done is adopted that has different characteristics from others.

Specifically, for fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), it is white. The outline of the above is silk-printed, and silk-printed FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630.

On the other hand, for fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces of the power cord plug being accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, FIG. 158 (b) is shown. As described above, the white outline and the region ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly painted in white are printed as silk printing, and the silk printing FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although support brackets (not shown) are soldered to the power supply board 630 at both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the inner region of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket are solidly painted white. The area ad2 can be visually recognized, and the white solid area ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the inner area of the white outline, is transparent. It can be reliably seen through a simple glass tube.

As described above, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the solid-painted area ad2, it is possible to identify which of the same types of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the same types of electronic components have the same shape and that show traces of the power cord plug being accidentally plugged into a commercial power outlet of AC100V. It can be specified to.

In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to instruct the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the area painted in solid white, which is represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2, 3 having ad2, the staff of the game hall, etc. can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, so that the person in charge of the service center and the game hall It becomes easier to communicate with staff such as clerk.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall, etc., to instruct Hughes FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the staff of the game hall, etc. Of the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be specified as instructed in the above. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be identified from the other electronic components, the fuse FUSE3.

[10-3. Check the blown fuse]
Next, confirmation of blowing of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape and having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and when the fuses are blown, the fuse wire contained in the transparent glass tube is broken and the transparent glass tube is used. Soot adheres to the inside of the glass. Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show traces of the power cord plug being accidentally plugged into the AC100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will blow. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned silk printing FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse wire can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the white solid area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is broken.

As a result, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 is turned on by mistakenly plugging it into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are traced. Of these, the fuse wire housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes is broken and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if you plug it into a power outlet, you can't turn on the power, so it's an initial failure. ”Even if you insist, you can't cheat your own work mistake (wiring mistake) (no excuse).

On the other hand, as silk printing on the fuse FUSE3, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In this embodiment, green is adopted as the resist of the power supply board 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk-screened FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of Fuse FUSE3 (ie, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of Fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the region of, no wiring pattern is formed in this region). This is a fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of is improved, and it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a blown fuse wire.

Further, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the transparency of the fuse FUSE3 is the same as the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out at all even when all the wiring patterns are laid out. By visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the solid glass tube through the transparent glass tube, the visibility of the state of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is improved. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the power supply line for the interface board (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and the power supply line for the CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for relaying various signals and also as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). The interface board 635 is provided with a fuse FUSE (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a class B blown specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). The silk printing shown in FIG. 158 (a) on the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above is printed on the mounting surface thereof. The area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to silk printing on the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (ie, the clear glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown) and the corresponding solid color. Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of the green resist, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse wire, it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 on the power supply board 630, or is configured to be provided on both of them. You can also do it.

Further, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), the wiring pattern is not shown even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, as in the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out at all. By visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE through the transparent glass tube, the state of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE. The visibility can be improved and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

[10-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored. DC + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20 to charge the capacitor, while the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (breaker in the game hall). By turning off the power, the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be shut off all at once.) In the event of a power outage or momentary power failure, the power supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power creation circuit 630f. Discharge is started in response to the DC + 5V from the line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) being no longer supplied to the capacitor BC0.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by the discharge of the capacitor BC0 (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), or a power failure occurs. In a state where a momentary power failure occurs, the backup power supply is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X as the main VBB so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained. In addition, the backup power supply is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so that various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is retained. It has become like.

When the business of the game hall is closed, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall to shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once. Then, when the next business is started (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is left in the ON-operated state), a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall breaks the game hall. By turning on, the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on all at once. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the main control board 1310X is provided with the main control board 1310X by completing the discharge of the capacitor BC0 during the period from the end of the game hall business to the start of the next business. Various information of the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, when the business starts, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the breaker in the game hall to turn on the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once, the RAM clear switch is activated. Regardless of whether or not it has been operated, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines the check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM during power-on processing and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines will simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification that tells that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound that flows from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will reverberate in the game hall. In this case, in all pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM in the power-on processing, and completely completes the contents of the payout control built-in RAM. Erase (clear).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the business of the game hall is closed and the next business is started. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X is used as the main VBB for about 3 days (about 72 hours) after the game hall is closed. Various information that can be supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held, and as a payout VBB, it is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 and has a built-in payout control. A capacitor having a capacity that can hold various information stored in the RAM is selected. In this capacity selection, the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X is the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. It is also taken into consideration that the power consumption of the paid VBB supplied to the circuit board may be about 10 times larger than that of the power consumption of the VBB. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Compared to the power consumption of

[10-5. Countermeasures for discontinued electronic components]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface on the front side thereof, and the back surface is mounted. It is necessary to solder on the soldering surface on the side. However, although reed-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, other general electrical equipment manufacturers offer surface mount type (miniaturization possible). So-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, production may be discontinued due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. Even if a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued and a replacement is sought, it is highly probable that other electronic component manufacturers will also be discontinued. Lead-type electronic components will be used for a limited time, and it will be difficult to mount the lead-type electronic components on a board that will eventually be treated as the main board.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a board treated as a main board. .. Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at positions corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cc which are the terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are formed in the land pattern D20fa and D20db for SMD, and the land patterns D20fa and D20fb for lead are formed at the positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are arranged. , D20db and the wiring patterns D20ga and D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed.

Soldered on the land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cc which are the terminals of the SMD type shotkey barrier diode D20b. , The anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cc and the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb, respectively. Then, the front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by wrapping them with an epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h that covers one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb project from the electronic component main body D20h. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), the symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component main body D20h. Further, although not shown, the manufacturer name and product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component main body D20h.

In this way, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if the production of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is discontinued and it becomes difficult to obtain the component, it is general. This can be done by using SMD type electronic components used by electrical equipment manufacturers.

Although the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described in the above-described embodiment, it can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Further, it is also possible to arrange a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components in a row in an array to form a lead type electronic component.

Next, measures against the commercial power supply voltage are taken when the plug of the power cord for supplying the AC power supply from the island equipment of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 shows the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 160, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of measures for commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of the FETQ5, the resistors R25, R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply is destroyed from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via the resistor R25, FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of FETQ5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5 are overcurrent). By destroying the FET Q5 due to the current), the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure and a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. It is composed of a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and a choke coil L1, and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and the diodes D5 and D5. It is input to the anode terminal of D6, output from the cathode terminal of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown) as described above, the fuse FUSE1 , It is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via FUSE2. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. It is printed on the surface. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 have support metal fittings (not shown) soldered to the power supply board 630, but the areas inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings are white. The solid-painted area ad2 can be visually recognized, and the white solid-painted area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the inner area of the white outline. The ad2 can be reliably seen through the transparent glass tube.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. Will be done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly painted in white are printed as silk printing, and the silk printing FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 have support metal fittings (not shown) soldered to the power supply board 630, but the area inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings are painted solid white. The area ad2 that has been soldered can be visually recognized, and the area ad2 that is the inner area of the white outline and is solidly painted in white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1 is transparent. It can be reliably seen through the glass tube.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Briefly explaining this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall has the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 on both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (L side (AC24V1), N side ( This is because the input was input to AC24V2)), but according to the test conducted by the applicant, no problem occurred even if one (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted. As a result, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, one of the AC24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Cost reduction is realized by inputting as it is in.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same power switch 630a as in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment is adopted. To briefly explain this, it is necessary to reliably disconnect / connect both the L side and the N side of the AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall with respect to the power switch 630a. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall, similarly to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / contacted at the same time.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power supply switch 630a. It is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1 between them. The other end of this microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The micro-gap type arrester AL1 surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") invades AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall due to a lightning strike. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a, or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a is applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a surge current through the frame ground FG2 so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. Further, in the microgap type arrester AL1, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, an operator mistakenly makes a mistake, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b). If you forget to electrically connect the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire of the island equipment, electromagnetic noise is used as a guarantee on the N side of AC24V (AC24V2) from the island equipment in the game hall. ), The noise resistance can be improved.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and a choke coil In addition to L1, it is composed of a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power supply destruction circuit 630g', and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit. It is input to 630 g'and the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630 g'has a faster reaction speed than the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned.), One end of which is electrically connected to the L side (AC24V1) of AC24V via a power switch 630a, and the other end is N side of AC24V (AC24V1) via a power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, short-circuited and short-circuited.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also referred to as a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a steep rise as compared with a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has features that it has a very fast response to a surge, has a very good control voltage characteristic, and has a very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type may be used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , Is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the No. 3 (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor improving circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to the relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). The thermistor TH1 is a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, if the vertical axis is the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis is the AC voltage, the AC voltage value increases. Therefore, a capacitor that has a curve that the value of the allowable capacitor capacity becomes smaller and is not destroyed even when AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is applied is selected.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power supply making circuit 630f, and input to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

The rectified DC output from the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, respectively, is due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit). Since the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating (the power supply by + 24V from the 630i is insufficient), the relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, the relay RL1 remains OFF). , The 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 are input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 in a non-conducting state. To. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the shotkey barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows only toward the thermistor TH1, and when this DC begins to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value. Although a weak current is passed through the load following the thermistor TH1, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually rises due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, so that the thermistor TH1 succeeds. Pass a strong current through the load.

On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned ON and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (by the power supply by + 24V from the relay drive circuit 630i) switches from the non-operating state to the operating state of the relay RL1 coil, the relay RL1 By turning on, the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 are made conductive, and the rectified DC output from the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, respectively, is generated. In addition to the thermista TH1, the relay RL1 is diverted between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal (that is, between the contacts), passes through each of them, and is input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Will be done. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, so that the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) will increase.

As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is the thermistor. When flowing through TH1, the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 becomes stronger as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and the power supply of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into an outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermista TH1 rises, and a large current will flow through the surge absorber SA1 to cause a surge. The absorber SA1 can be destroyed to enter the short mode.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 which is in the short mode state in the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is blown. It will be blown. Further, when the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1, so that the elements of the surge absorber SA1 are scattered and the surge absorber SA1 becomes It can be prevented from being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 is destroyed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit and the CGND terminal for passing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When the surge absorber SA1 that is plugged in and constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g'is destroyed, replace the fuse FUSE1 with one that has not been blown, and replace the plug of the power cord with the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the AC24V power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g'has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1. A large current flows through FUSE1 and the fuse FUSE1 is blown again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g'is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed. Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, the game cannot be started.

In the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g are mounted on one board called the power supply board 630. , Various electronic parts and the like were provided, but it can also be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, so that the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. 154. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifying circuit 630c, the force factor improving circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply making circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. 154. , Fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply creation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. To.

Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 160 can be divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A is the power supply line connector DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B, which is mainly composed of the connector A, includes a rectifying circuit 630c, a force factor improving circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply making circuit 630f, a relay drive circuit 630i, and a relay RL1 as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. To.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the drive power supply lines to the various drive motors provided in the various production units of the game board 5 (for example, the + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or the + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630) are various. In the substrate to which the wiring from the drive motor is directly connected (for example, the panel drive substrate 1720 shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the relay substrate 3151a shown in FIG. 153 (b)), the fuse (may be a chip fuse). ) Or as a resettable fuse, or a power supply board 630 supplied as a drive power supply line (for example, a + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or a power supply board 630). A poly switch may be provided as a fuse (which may be a chip fuse) or a resettable fuse for the + 12V power supply line).

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a power supply means capable of creating various power sources required for a game device based on an external power source supplied from outside the game machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). Gazette (Fig. 2). By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall by telephone to specify a specific part of the power supply means, follow the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a power source means for creating various power sources based on the power source from the game island equipment and supplying the power source to the substrate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The game island equipment converts the commercial AC power supply (AC100V) into a step-down AC power supply for game machines (AC24V). However, when the power cord for supplying power from the island equipment to the game machine is plugged into the power outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the power outlet of the game machine AC power supply, the commercial AC power supply is connected to the game machine AC power supply. Since it has a high voltage, there is a risk that an abnormal power source will be output from the power supply means and various boards inside the game machine will be destroyed.

[11. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 162. FIG. 161 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board, and FIG. 163 is a perspective for explaining an outline of wiring to a board treated as a main board. It is a figure. First, the power supply and the input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310X will be described, and the power supply and the input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[11-1. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310X, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The backup power supply to be supplied is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

The DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h as shown in FIG. 161. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Direct current + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). DC + 5V with the noise component removed is output from the 3rd terminal. The direct current + 5V applied to the first terminal is first rippled (AC component overlapped with voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Has been removed and smoothed.

The DC + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by being electrically connected to each of the above. This smoothed DC + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. When a momentary power failure occurs in the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and also via the resistor MR0. Therefore, it is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310X, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detecting signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the first entrance sensor 2406. The detection signal, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a, the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b, etc. are relayed on the panel. The detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the board 1710, without going through the panel relay board 1710. , The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are input to the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively, via the payout control board 633 (via, that is, the payout control input circuit). (As it is, without going through the payout control output circuit 633ac), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting changeover button 1311b are input to the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively) Each is input to the input circuit 1310b.

Detection signal from gate sensor 2401, detection signal from general winning opening sensor 3001, detection signal from first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from second starting opening sensor 2402, detection signal from large winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the first inlet / outlet sensor 2406 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first start port sensor 3002 is composed of two sensors (double sensors), the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. There is. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly electrically connected), whereas the first start port sensor is electrically connected. The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected (that is, indirectly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Like the input port PA, the input port PB is composed of 8 bits. Further, although the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and the detection signals from other sensors are input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. The input terminals that are input to the predetermined input terminals and become empty terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a, the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b, the signal from the setting switch 1311a, and Although not shown, the signals from the setting switching button 1311b are input to the predetermined input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

[11-2. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The backup power supply to be supplied is supplied as a pay VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 162, the DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly comprises a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. Direct current + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). DC + 5V with the noise component removed is output from the 3rd terminal. The direct current + 5V applied to the first terminal is first rippled (AC component overlapped with voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Has been removed and smoothed.

The DC + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by being electrically connected to each of the above. This smoothed DC + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa. When a momentary power failure occurs in the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Since the power consumption of the main control board 1310X is large, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310X (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the form, a larger one is selected as compared with the capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF). As a result, the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310X and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged charge is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and also via the resistor PR0. Therefore, it is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, via the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310X are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively.

Detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, detection signal from ball cut detection sensor 194, detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, RAM clear signal from main control board 1310X, error The error release signals from the release switch 633d are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and detection signals from other sensors are also transmitted. As with the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA, the input terminals that are input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become empty terminals are grounded as empty terminal processing (as in the case of the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA). It is electrically connected to GND).

[11-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
Examples of the board treated as the main board include a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310X, and a payout control board 633. When a fraudulent act is performed in which the wiring to the board treated as the main board is illegally modified, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls due to anxiety about the operation of the board treated as the main board, and the fraudulent game balls are fraudulent. Since there is a risk of being acquired by the actor, it is necessary to detect the modified wiring at an early stage when the wiring to each of these boards is tampered with.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), regarding the wiring to the power supply board 630, the connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG includes the manufacturer name and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as fraudulent identifiers on the covering portion of each wiring connected to)). Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin, and the manufacturing company name: XXX, as an invalid identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 on the 1st pin. And product number: ABC123 (number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the manufacturer name: XXX and product number: ABC123 (number published in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as an invalid identifier SLAB on the covering part of the wiring SCBL2. Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 is at least the covering part of the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: XXX and the part number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the invalid identifier SLAB on the covering part of the wiring. The fraudulent identifier SLAB has a length printed twice repeatedly.

The covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion as an invalid identifier SLAB. ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering part of the wiring SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be in another color different from white (for example, red or gray), or a plurality of colors. (For example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors may be used. ), The manufacturing company name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier SLAB.

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the wiring to the main control board 1310X is connected to the connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG is connected to the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog)). The wiring manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an invalid identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the 1st pin to the 30th pin, and the manufacturing company name: YYYY, as an invalid identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 on the 1st pin. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the manufacturing company name: YYYYY and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as an invalid identifier MLAB on the covering part of the wiring MCBL2. The number to be printed) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310X is at least the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: YYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the invalid identifier MLAB on the wiring covering part. It has a length in which the fraudulent identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion of the above.

The covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, black) as an invalid identifier MLAB. DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering part of the wiring MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be in another color (for example, red or gray) different from white. Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) may be used. The manufacturing company name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB.

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the wiring to the payout control board 633 is connected to the connector HHG (not shown, but the connector HHG has the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog)). The wiring manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an invalid identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the 1st pin to the 30th pin, and the manufacturing company name: YYYY, as an invalid identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 on the 1st pin. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the manufacturing company name: YYYYY and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as an invalid identifier HLAB on the covering part of the wiring HCBL2. The number to be printed) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: YYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the invalid identifier HLAB on the wiring covering part. The cover has a length in which the fraudulent identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

The covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, black) as an invalid identifier HLAB. DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering part of the wiring HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be in another color (for example, red or gray) different from white. Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) may be used. The manufacturing company name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier HLAB.

In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it can contribute to the early detection of modified wiring. As the wiring to the board treated as the main board, even if it is listed in the catalog, the wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable.

In this embodiment, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. The wiring and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided on the game board 5 are connected to the main control board via a connector (not shown). It is directly electrically connected to the 1310X. On the other hand, the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the game board 5 that constitute the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received by the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5 are provided. The gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, the large prize opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B that is received in the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5, and the general winning opening provided in the game board 5. The general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the mouth 2001, the first entrance sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the first entrance 2006 provided in the game board 5, and the game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided are electrically connected and aggregated on the panel relay board 1710 via their respective connectors. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via one connector.

Therefore, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 constituting the first start port sensor 3002 are mistakenly connected to the main control board 1310X. May be electrically connected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 are yellow on one side and pink on the other side, and the covering parts of the wiring are wired as an invalid identifier. The manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are printed repeatedly. As the color of the covering part of the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and the covering part of each wiring has the wiring manufacturer name and part number (catalog) as an invalid identifier. The numbers listed in) are printed repeatedly. This allows the line operator to identify the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively, at the manufacturer. At the same time, in the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall distinguishes the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X. Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310X. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 constituting the first start port sensor 3002 correspond to themselves. Since the physical structure can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the line operator can perform the first start port sensor main side constituting the first start port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from 3002a and the two wirings from the second start port sensor 2402, and in the game hall. , The staff of the game hall, etc., when confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402.

In the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the general winning opening 2001 is individually or divided into a plurality of groups, and a plurality of general winning opening sensors are provided. Can also be configured to use. In this case, the connectors that electrically connect the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710 are selected to have the same shape. This is because, although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, only a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls with the entry. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change in the production. Further, even in the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wires from the general winning opening sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X directly without passing through the panel relay board 1710, the general winning opening sensor can be used. The connectors that electrically connect the two wires to the main control board 1310X are selected to have the same shape. As described above, although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received by the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 to lower the substrate holder 1200. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged so as to be separated by at least the false detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensor). In this way, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 is composed of two sensors (double sensor), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting the above, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, so that the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can irradiate the radio wave at an early stage. It can contribute to being able to discover.

In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by first passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor slave side. After passing through 2402b and being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the sensor is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly electrically connected), whereas the second start is performed. The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected (that is, indirectly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above. (1) The first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and the large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the accepted game ball B, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the accepted game ball B in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the first receiver provided in the game board 5. Two sensors from various sensors such as the first inlet sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received at the inlet 2006 and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the magnetism acting near the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. The wiring is electrically connected and aggregated via the respective connectors, and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via one connector.

Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second start port sensor slave side. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to the ones corresponding to themselves. Since the physical structure can be such that the wiring can be made, in the manufacturer, the operator of the line has two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the second start port sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes) of two wirings from 2402b and incorrect wiring, and in the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall will check for fraud. When checking, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original, two wirings from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two wirings from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001, but these general winning openings 2001 may be individually configured to use the general winning opening sensors. it can. In this case, the shape of the connector that electrically connects each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710 may be selected to be different. For example, in the case of contributing to the progress of the game or the change of the effect as the ball enters each general winning opening 2001, the shape of the connector of each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 is made different. You may. By doing so, it is possible to have a physical structure in which each of the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can surely prevent the work error of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 (wiring error of insertion error), and at the game hall. When a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall confirms the presence or absence of fraud, or when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, there is an error in each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes). In the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 are directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310X without passing through the panel relay board 1710, the shape of the connector is used. Different ones are selected. As described above, this can be a physical structure in which each of the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. At the manufacturer, the line operator can surely prevent the work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 in the manufacturing process. , In the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall confirms the presence or absence of fraud, and when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original, two of each from each general winning opening sensor 3001. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401, but similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor slave side 2401b It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors) in which the sensors are arranged so as to be separated by at least the false detection prevention distance dimension. In this way, by adopting the gate sensor 2401 composed of two sensors (double sensor), the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor slave side 2401b, as in the case of the first start port sensor 3002, the gate portion 2003 The game ball B that has passed through the above can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, so that the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can irradiate the radio wave at an early stage. It can contribute to being able to discover.

In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2401a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2401a, and then detected by the gate sensor slave side 2401b by passing through the gate sensor slave side 2401b. Will be done. Further, the detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor slave side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). Has been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2401b is input to the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the same panel relay board 1710. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a to the panel relay board 1710, and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm has been selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring of the above to the panel relay board 1710. As a result, the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b can be electrically connected to the ones corresponding to themselves. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line operator erroneously wires the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent such work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes), in the game hall, staff members such as game hall clerk temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. When returning to the original position, the work error of incorrect wiring (wiring error of insertion error) between the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wirings from the gate sensor slave side 2401b is surely prevented. can do.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X. The one with 2.0 mm pitch is selected as the connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310X, but the first start A total of four wires, including two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, which constitute the mouth sensor 3002, are configured as one connector. , One connector composed of these four wirings may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X and two from the second start port sensor 2402. Since the connector that electrically connects the wiring of the book to the main control board 1310X can be made into one connector composed of four wirings without being separate, the manufacturer can use it. In the manufacturing process, the line operator has two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 that constitute the first start port sensor 3002. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion), in the game hall, staff such as the clerk of the game hall should perform wiring by maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of temporarily removing and returning to the original state, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, adopting this aspect, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 to lower the substrate holder 1200. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged so as to be separated by at least the false detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensor). In this way, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 is composed of two sensors (double sensor), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting the above, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, so that the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can irradiate the radio wave at an early stage. It can contribute to being able to discover.

In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by first passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor slave side. After passing through 2402b and being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the sensor is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor main side 2402a constituting the second start port sensor 2402. And, four wirings in total are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of these four wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected (that is, directly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310X, whereas the second start port sensor is electrically connected. The detection signal from the slave side 2402b is electrically connected (that is, indirectly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above. (1) The first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and the large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the accepted game ball B, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the accepted game ball B in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the first receiver provided in the game board 5. Two sensors from various sensors such as the first inlet sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received at the inlet 2006 and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the magnetism acting near the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. The wiring is electrically connected and aggregated via the respective connectors, and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via one connector.

Further, by adopting this aspect, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are transmitted to the main control board 1310X via the same panel relay board 1710. Since it is electrically connected to, two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, a total of four wires are connected. It may be configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wirings may be configured to be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second start port sensor 2402 are configured. The connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 and the connector that electrically connects the two wires to the panel relay board 1710 are physically made into one connector composed of four wires without being separate. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can use two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring of book wiring (wiring mistakes such as misinsertion), in the game hall, staff such as clerk of the game hall should check for fraud when checking for fraud. In the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are erroneously wired. It is possible to reliably prevent such work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001, but these general winning openings 2001 may be individually configured to use the general winning opening sensors. it can. In this case, it is also possible to configure one connector (single connector) as a connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710. For example, in the case of contributing to the progress of the game or the change of the production as the ball enters each general winning opening 2001, one wiring that combines the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 into one is used. It may be configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector composed of the wiring grouped together may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. By doing so, it is possible to form a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 is made into one connector composed of wirings that are combined into one rather than being separate. At the manufacturer, the line worker can surely prevent the work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 in the manufacturing process. At the same time, in the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall confirms the presence or absence of fraud, and when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, each 2 from each general winning opening sensor 3001. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring of book wiring (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion). It should be noted that the wiring combined into one is configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector composed of the wiring combined into one is directly connected to the main control board without going through the panel relay board 1710. A configuration that electrically connects to the 1310X can also be adopted. Even with this configuration, as described above, the physical configuration of each of the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 as one connector composed of wires that are combined into one rather than being separate. In the manufacturing process, the operator of the line can make a mistake in wiring each of the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001 (wiring mistake called misinsertion). ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, the staff of the game hall, etc., when checking for fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, are generally used. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the winning port sensor 3001.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which various entry ports are provided in an advantageous area of the game board, and each entry port is provided with each sensor (detection means) for detecting the passage of a game ball (detection means). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the entry port for similar purposes is mistakenly electrically connected, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage is avoided, but the detection signal of the entry port is erroneously received. It will affect the progress of the game. However, there is a problem that the wrong connection may not be noticed immediately in some cases because the uses are similar.

[12. Each decorative board provided for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. FIG. 164 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 166 is a block diagram showing an LED. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. It is an enlarged view as seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current The method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 has a plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, and a side so as to surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. The side window decoration portion 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate. Below the central upper decorative body 312a, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the lower central decorative body 312b of the plate are arranged, respectively.

The dish upper left decorative board 271 has a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271 and mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). Behind the dish upper right decorative board 276, a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 is arranged, and a plurality of dish upper right decorative boards 278 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). In the dish center upper decorative body 312a, a dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in a semicircular strip shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a is arranged behind the dish center upper decorative substrate 312a. It is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative substrate 404 behind the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a). 5 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b) and 10 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). A plurality of side window interior decorative members 410b are provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decorative members 412, and behind the side window interior decorative members 410b, side surfaces formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decorative members 412. A window decoration board 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the side window decoration board 413 emit light and decorate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative substrate 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A door frame right side decorative substrate 418 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a). 4 pieces, and 10 pieces on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b) are luminescently decorated.

In the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is arranged behind the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 455 are mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are luminescently decorated.

In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate, which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, is arranged behind the decorative substrate 281. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). In the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, a lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is arranged behind the decorative substrate 286 of the lower right of the plate. It is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on the above. In the dish center lower decorative body 312b, a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape is arranged behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the dish center lower decorative substrate 312b is arranged. It is luminescently decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

As described above, the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the annulus is divided into front and rear parts. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular shape on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the rear side. , Consists of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative substrate 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 352b (9 in this embodiment). In this embodiment, it is luminescently decorated with 9 pieces).

As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip. As a result, by increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board]
The decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, the decorative substrate 402b on the left side, and the side Interior decoration board 413, right side upper decorative board 418a, right side lower decorative board 418b, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board On the door frame side decorative substrate such as 283, the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the front decorative substrate 352a, and the rear decorative substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 33. The electrical connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 164.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is provided with the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 96. The light emitting data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the first serial system on the door frame side and the light emitting data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the second serial system on the door frame side are independently input from the door frame side. There is. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 154 via the interface board 635, and DC + 12V is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the door frame sub-relay board 105, are relayed to the dish unit 200 of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the substrate 214 and is also input to the handle decorative substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 54.

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the dish unit relay board 214, are the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the dish unit relay board 214. And, they are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 70, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, are input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish, respectively. That is, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish serves as a bridging board for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. The decorative substrate 283 and the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate are electrically connected to each other. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 283 on the lower left of the plate, which is the bridging board. No input connector is provided, and the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are not shown for outputting to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is shown on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish (that is, after the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and is the final stage). There is only an input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors, are input respectively. ..

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish, are input to the upper right decorative board 278 of the dish, respectively. That is, the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate serves as a bridging substrate for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate are electrically connected in a beaded state. The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 288 on the lower right of the plate, which is the bridging board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are shown to be output to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower right decorative board 278 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish (that is, the latter and final stage of the lower right decorative board 288), has the lower right decorative board of the dish. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288, are input is provided. ing.

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, are the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate and the plate. It is input to the front decorative substrate 352a of the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the front decorative substrate 352a, are input to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. That is, the front decorative substrate 352a serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the rear decorative substrate 352b, so that the front decorative substrate 352a And the rear decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a beaded state. The front decorative substrate 352a, which serves as the bridging substrate, contains the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the operation unit relay substrate 392 of the effect operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are output to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b, which is electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a), has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. Only an input connector (not shown) for inputting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from each of the above, is provided.

Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 on which the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (LED) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. Then, the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish, DC + 12V, and the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the dish to which the ground (LED) is input will be briefly described. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the dish, and is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of passing a constant current through the suLED1 to suLED6. , A maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6, and the like. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to pass a constant current through suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed by taking charge of a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat distribution circuit 273c.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the door frame sub-relay board 105, are decorated on the lower left side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. In addition to being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the decorative substrate 418b on the lower right side of the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Is entered in each.

The direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. It is input to 457.

The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top right decorative board 457, are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. Therefore, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a beaded state. The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is a bridging board, includes a second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) on the door frame side from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. An input connector (not shown) for inputting (GND) is provided, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the door frame top. Output connectors (not shown) for outputting to the decorative substrate 455 are provided. Further, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is shown on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, after the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There are input connectors (not shown) for inputting the second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors, respectively. , The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided with output connectors (not shown) for outputting to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ..

The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. Therefore, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, which is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455), has a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from output connectors (not shown) on the center decorative board 455 of the frame top. Only the connector for the door is provided.

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (LED) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input. Briefly explaining the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the lower left decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and a constant current is passed through hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly composed of a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bag that can be used, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of passing a constant current through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the side. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is a substrate (decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay substrate 105. Control is performed to pass a constant current through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax by taking charge of a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Further, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. ing.

As described above, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate (decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (decorative board 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the upper left side decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this work has his / her finger on the connector of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side and the decorative substrate 402a on the upper left side from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and static electricity. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to electric current.

As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is set to huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs, in addition to inputting direct current + 12V and ground (GND) from the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each line through which current flows is input. As described above, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and also having a function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[12-1--3. Luminous data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating a light emission mode, and are ID information and a floor. It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[12-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 165. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets the sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 283y that can be used.

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is relative to the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. Can be done.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is from the linear power supply 283xa, the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[12-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. It is supplied to 283xi respectively, and the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi Is ready to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 154, and + DC 5V is independently created as an internal power supply Vreg and used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. This is because when the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line that supplies DC + 5V becomes long and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and the DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 in the constant current drive circuit 283x, the noise resistance resistance of the + 12V power supply line to the constant current drive circuit 283x is extremely high as compared with the + 5V power supply line. The linear power supply 283xa has adopted a configuration in which DC + 5V is independently created as an internal power supply Vreg.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input and the electric wiring for external transmission to the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1b. Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it into the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are started to operate.

For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not input the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146, but independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line that transmits the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset and the LED may be turned off due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST. did.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other board, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to the prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flicker of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line for transmitting serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as "data line"). This circuit is capable of shaping the waveform of the signal from which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting it to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line that transmits a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”). This is a circuit in which a clock signal is input from the clock signal, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. Therefore, both the lengths of the data line and the clock line become long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. The waveform is shaped by the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise even when both the lengths of the data line and the clock line are long. As a result, it is possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise.

[12-2-1d. Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 different addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283x by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not the one that receives the data by the software and sets it appropriately.

[12-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg is used in the serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Occasionally, the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to capture the gradation information from this serial data and use the captured gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[12-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from turning off to turning on (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 steps from 0 (zero) to 127 gradation. The gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation degree is set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current drive unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation degree.

[12-2-1 g. Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation degree is set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi individually includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 have one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits green light (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and DC + 12V is input.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 9 to constant current driver 16) is electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element that constitutes the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that make up the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24) are electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can be dimmed and lit by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. As a result, it is possible to turn off the light, turn on the light with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-mentioned resistors Rr that set the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes the full-color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Consists of full-color LEDs in the eight output channels up to LG8 A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green light (G) and full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B).

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[12-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are shown by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 165 and 166 for convenience of explanation.

[12-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and heat. The distributed circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the first serial system on the door frame side are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635, and DC + 12V is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the dish unit 200 has the first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input via the dish unit relay board 214. DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 The gradation information is taken in, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the taken-in gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). Along with being input to the substrate 273, DC + 12V and ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 via the plate lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the subsequent substrate, the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the dish. , The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the captured gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

As a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish lower right decorative board 288, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[12-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. It is provided with ~ hdLED10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635, and DC + 12V is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. There is. DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs. , And the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emitting mode of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two For the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the light emitting mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate straddling the substrate on which the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are respectively opposed to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that constitute the LED elements are the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. ~ LB8 (constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 described above) are electrically connected.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively opposed to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10. The hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that constitute the LED elements are the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 10 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

Further, in contrast to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5) constituting the full-color LEDs The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to constant current drivers 7 described above) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1b to huRg5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1a to huRg5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the 11-constant current driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the thermal dispersion resistance huRb1b to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, respectively. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the huRb5b and the thermal dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. The output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT2, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is referred to from the light emitting data SDAT2. Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, 8 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and dimmed so as to capture the gradation information and obtain the captured gradation information. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emitting data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Based on SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emitting data LED2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is taken from the light emitting data LED2 so that the taken-in gradation information is used. Of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit, and the left side which is a subsequent board of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a, are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through 8 hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8 constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, so that the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked and left. Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate of the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is generated for two hdLED9s and hdLED10s out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, are used. The heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is dispersed by taking charge of the heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b constituting the heat distribution circuit 402ac. You can do it.

Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the electric current, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the decorative substrate 402b below the left side, the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, and the right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

Further, as a decorative substrate that does not have an LED constant current drive circuit at all, in addition to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, there is a decorative substrate 418a on the right side.

[12-4. How to arrange the LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, the constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of IC package for a constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) ), Which is the so-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In addition, in FIG. 168, various electronic parts are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of readability of the drawing.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. And there is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically and having two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape will be described.

[12-4-1. Decorative board on the lower left side]
As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs. The 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx. , It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decorative board 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LEDCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

A white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Can be increased.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the substrate control number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered on the LED mounting surface 402bx due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs.

Further, although the door frame left side decorative body 404 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a milky white color having translucency as described above, a game seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the person moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the player can see the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even if it is possible to do so, in the first place, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Since the area indicating the position and the area indicating the position are not printed as silk printing at all, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visible to the player. It is prevented from being done. Therefore, a number specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, a full-color LED). A region indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the connector LDLCN, the corresponding part number, and the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, which has nothing to do with the game for the player.

Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire body, are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Not done. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the substrate control number of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is a foil-free character (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a punched letter formed by making letters with a pattern and pulling out the copper foil around it), and the foil punched letters are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. The board control number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a foil removal character (that is, a wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b instead of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, characters may be formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form characters), or the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side may be formed. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a letter is made with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding area It may be formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as solid earth as described later. Therefore, the board control number of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side is a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the foil removal character (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around it is removed. It is formed as a character without characters on either one or both of the solid earth of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 402by, without forming as a character). You may be.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) respectively. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 168 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 168 (a)), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. The yellow solid line (or the black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 168 (a)). It is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 168 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively. There is.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, is a yellow chain line as silk printing. (Or, black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 168 (a), only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown), and these areas are also printed. Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and above or below (in FIG. 168 (a), LED4, LED5 are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4, hdLED5, which are full-color LEDs. Only shown) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged is a yellow chain line. (Or, a black chain line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity of this area.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example,). It is performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED). Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the connector that does not have white color are LEDs that emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface generated by the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) (not shown) as silk printing, and an electron is formed in the vicinity of this area. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are formed as so-called solid grounds in which areas other than land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors are grounded to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

As described above, the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so that the lower left decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, if the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, let's pull out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. Even so, since there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension for the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged at the end. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the right lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. By arranging the terminal on the left side closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the decorative substrate 402b on the left side so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by are input, and the lower left side, upper left end side, and upper right end side are mainly the terminal to output side of output side 1, respectively. The terminals 1 to 3 on the output side are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2) shown in FIG. , Clock signal SCLK2) and the like are output. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal on which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal on which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It can be arranged as a state, and the remaining two end sides can be arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Even, all wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the group 1 composed of the hdLED1 to hdLED4 which are four full-color LEDs and the four full-color LEDs among the hdLED1 to hdLED8 which are eight full-color LEDs are formed. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed between the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in the group 1 or the group 2 in a biased manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 167 (a)). The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged closer to the lower side than the portion to be arranged), and the central portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 167 (a)). It can be arranged above the hdLED8, which is a full-color LED configured in Group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, which is closer to the upper side than the portion where the hdLED6 which is the full-color LED of the above is arranged. .. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. The area for routing the wiring pattern to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided in the two full-color LEDs hdLED9, hdLED10 and the five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. 166 is the left-side lower decorative board. It can be secured at 402b.

In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are in the so-called EIA format at 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one end in the longitudinal direction on the left end side of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. A capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged like this. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, which are arranged so that the end side of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistor. Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side of a capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel to each other.

Further, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to 45 with respect to the left end edge and the right end edge of the decorative substrate. Although they are arranged in an inclined state and are almost the same, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are doors. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the decorative board has the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And the ones that become are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative substrate on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, which is not shown. Two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit,) (Second maximum current setting circuit))), illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, a second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Two thermal dispersion circuits provided for itself (the first constant current drive circuit is the first thermal dispersion circuit (thermal dispersion resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is the second thermal dispersion circuit (thermal dispersion resistance)) The door frame top left decorative board 456 controls the light emission directly via the above, and in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, the other left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted is not shown. Direct light emission control is performed by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in the above via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided in the self, which is not shown, and the door frame top right decorative substrate. The 457 is a single LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit) that includes, in addition to the six full-color LEDs that it has, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. , Maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself (not shown). The other central decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) on each of the other central decorative substrate, the other left decorative substrate, and the other right decorative substrate. As described above, the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) provided in the central decorative board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other central decoration board are the door frame top. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (to be exact, the second constant current drive circuit) provided in the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that can be used. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decorative board are LED constant current drive circuits provided in the door frame top left decoration board 456 itself (accurately). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decorative board are LED constant current drive circuits provided in the door frame top right decoration board 457 itself (accurately). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

Further, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs. The hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402b2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and are along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged at predetermined intervals, whereas the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. A configuration was adopted in which the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side was arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are sink (suction) type, and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx and the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs.

Further, the constant current drive circuit is arranged by arranging the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The edges of the land patterns of 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate is one in which the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of is shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[12-4-2. Decorative board on the center of the plate]
As shown in FIG. 167 (b), the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, hLED1 to hLED10 which are 10 full-color LEDs, and the like. The 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current drive circuit 314a is mounted. , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300. When the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate). On the right side of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish along the upper end side 314eg1, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay substrate 392 and the electrical wiring is mounted.

A white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. In the present embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is solid-painted with a white resist to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is possible to increase the reflectance of the LED.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 on the LED mounting surface 314x.

Further, as described above, the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91A provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a milky white color having translucency, but is in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player seated in the unit moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate provided in the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate of the unit front cover 312 is assumed. Even if the mounting surface 314x can be visually recognized by the player, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the full-color LED. Since the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed as silk printing at all, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the position where the full-color LED is arranged. The area indicating the above is prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, a number that identifies the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and an auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, a full-color LED). A region indicating a position where a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the connector HCN, the corresponding part number, and the position where the connector HCN is arranged, which has nothing to do with the game for the player.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers the entire hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Not done. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a foil-free character (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a punched letter formed by making letters with a pattern and pulling out the copper foil around it), and the foil punched letters are made by a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It is covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. The substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a foil-free character (that is, a wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, characters may be formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form characters), or the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may be formed. Letters are removed from the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are created with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surroundings thereof. It may be formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are formed as solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board control number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate is a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the foil removal character (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around it is removed. It is formed as a character without characters on either one or both of the solid earth of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 314y. You may be.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions are provided. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors are placed are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as a print.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, is not shown as silk printing. The chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 in yellow (or not shown) as silk printing. , Black) are printed respectively.

On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is arranged is a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing). (Or, a black chain line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity of this area.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspections for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, are individually performed (for example, It is performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED). Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed as so-called solid earth in which the area excluding the land pattern and the wiring pattern of electronic parts and connectors is grounded to the ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

In this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color are based on the light emission of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface generated by the light emission of the full-color LED is LED mounted. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) (not shown) as silk printing, and an electron is formed in the vicinity of this area. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

As described above, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape. Therefore, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate on the LED mounting surface 314x. The width dimension up to is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the end edge of the pattern and the upper end side 314eg1 or the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish becomes extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end edge. Even so, since there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension for the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged at the end. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower left side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. By arranging the terminal on the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, upper right end side, and right lower end side are mainly output side 1 terminal to output side, respectively. The terminals 1 on the output side to the terminals 3 on the output side are the above-mentioned output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal). SCLK1) etc. are output. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistors Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It can be arranged as a state, and the remaining two end sides can be arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Even, all wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the group 1 composed of the four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and the four full-color LEDs out of the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. Can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed between the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in the group 1 or the group 2 in a biased manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is on the center of the dish). A state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a) is a semi-arc-shaped central portion (full-color LED of FIG. 167 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be arranged on the right side as compared with the portion where the hLED6 is arranged, and the semi-arc-shaped central portion (FIG. 167 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. ), Which is closer to the left side than the part where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is arranged), and is arranged to the left of the hLED8 which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. A region for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are in the so-called EIA format at 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the upper end side of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The capacitor is arranged so as to be parallel to the lower end side 314egg1 and the lower end side 314egg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the upper end side 314egg1 and the lower end side 314egg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It is arranged like this. In other words, the end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and the resistor. Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side of a capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish so as to be non-parallel.

Further, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and 10 full-color LEDs. The hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged in a semi-arc shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, which is closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged along the plate with a predetermined interval, whereas the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. A configuration was adopted in which the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate was arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are sink (suction) type as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. It generates heat. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx and the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be less affected by the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, the constant current drive circuit is arranged by arranging the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The edge of the land pattern of 314ax and 314bx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of is shorter. As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to perform a light emission effect by 300.

[12-4-3. A pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the types of IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the dish are flat surfaces. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG. 168.

A metal pad FP is exposed in the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter, referred to as “EPad”) is formed. This IC package can be soldered to a substrate to improve heat dissipation and bondability.

In addition to each reed pad, the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square-shaped land pattern EP for EPad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Nine thermal via TVs are arranged in a forming grid in the region of the EPad land pattern EP. By these thermal via TVs, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each reed pad cannot be drawn out in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b via the land pattern EP for EPad. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated in the entire lower left side decorative substrate 402b.

To briefly explain the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal via TVs, the junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal via TVs are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the joint region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the generation of voids, and this joint region is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain the desired bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern, but even in this case, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current drive circuit The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP needs to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in contrast to the case where the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the end edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern EP for EPad is also left in the same manner. When arranging the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so that they are arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and are inclined by 45 degrees. The land pattern EP for EPad is also arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees. When the EPad land pattern EP end edge is arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP end edge and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b The fact that the distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 is shorter and the distance dimension to the substrate end edge is shorter means that there is less room for heat dissipation on the substrate. .. On the other hand, when the EPad land pattern EP end side is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension from the right end side 402beg2 is the part where the distance between the apex of the land pattern EP for EPad and the end side of the substrate is short, but the two sides in contact with the apex are not parallel to the end side of the substrate. Since there is a wide room for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the EP end edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge edge of the substrate are parallel to each other.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits and is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, and a semicircle. Each of the arc-shaped elongated strip-shaped decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is described, and the LED by the light emission of the full-color LED is described by the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed. It was explained in detail that measures such as a decrease in reflectance have been taken to prevent the LED from being damaged. Here, with respect to other configurations of the present invention in which measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”), FIGS. 169 to 169 to This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 169 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 170 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to a third embodiment, and FIG. 171 is a D'part of FIG. 169 or It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ″ part of FIG. 170, FIG. 172 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is a D ″ ″ of FIG. 172. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. In addition, in FIGS. 169 to 173, with respect to the one having the same function as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 167 and 168 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of measures for reducing reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment”). The same reference numerals are given. Further, in FIG. 171, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of readability of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 173, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) as a print. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened. As printing, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Has been done.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is silk-screened. The yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as prints, are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk screen printing, respectively. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk screen printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by the yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10, and these are also printed. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, are yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Each is printed.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing, and corresponds to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this area. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire body, are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed with. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. The yellow solid line (or the black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 171 (a)). It is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively. There is.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance forward (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed with hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk screen printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate by the yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. Areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, are printed in yellow on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate as silk printing. Has been done.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing, and corresponds to the connector HCN in the vicinity of this area. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers the entire hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed with. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistances, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a black resin package. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a component corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a part number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a position for arranging the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. (Solid yellow line) and are printed as silk printing, respectively, and the part numbers (yellow letters and yellow) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The difference is that the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is printed as silk printing, respectively.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91A. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a milky white color with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so that the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the door. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is set as silk printing. , An auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface by printing in yellow, which is a bright color unlike black. ), Or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) can be difficult to find.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, which is a bright color unlike black. By printing with, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). At the same time, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, which is bright color unlike black. When printing in yellow), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED.

Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. Although it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is printed in the vicinity of this area. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) as a print. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened. As printing, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Has been done.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is silk-screened. The yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as prints, are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it (that is, In FIG. 170 (c), only the foil-free character LED7 is shown as the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7)), and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is formed. A foil removal area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a region formed by removing copper foil except for each terminal and a wiring pattern (FIG. In 170 (c), only the foil removal area LSLK7 is represented as an area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED.))), And the white color is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The foil removal area and the foil removal character are covered by the resist of. Specifically, regions indicating positions for arranging hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and these foil removals are performed. LEDs 1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as blank characters in the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a solid white resist to cover the foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged. In the layer (copper plane), the area is formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire body, are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the character is formed by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the character is formed by removing the copper foil around the character). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. The yellow solid line (or the black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 171 (a)). It is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively. There is.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance forward (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it). In addition, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not shown for each terminal and the foil removal area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). And the area formed by removing the copper foil except for the wiring pattern), and the foil removal area and its foil are formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Each of the omitted characters is covered. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed as the foil removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and these foils are removed. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate as blank characters in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged. In the layer (copper plane), the area is formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers the entire hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the character is formed by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the character is formed by removing the copper foil around the character). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistances, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a black resin package. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a component corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are foil-free characters (that is, the wiring pattern in which the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is copper foil). Each terminal and wiring pattern (not shown) are excluded from the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged. It is formed as a foil removal region (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern), and is formed as the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are covered with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is covered with hLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The part number corresponding to LED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it) In addition, in the foil removal area (that is, the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed) excluding the terminals (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown) in which the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is formed. , Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil), and the foil removal area is formed by a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. And its foil-free characters It differs in that it is covered.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91A. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a milky white color with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so that the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the door. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and the player has no relation to the game. By forming an area indicating the position where the unrelated full-color LED is arranged as a foil-removing area and covering the foil-removing character and the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface, the full-color LED The LED wiring pattern, the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed), the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), and Is formed of copper foil to have the same color, and is covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface to indicate a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It can be difficult to find a number (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) that identifies the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and the player has no relation with the game. A full-color LED is formed by forming an area indicating a position where an unrelated full-color LED is arranged as a foil-removing area, and covering the foil-removing character and the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the LED.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). At the same time, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, since the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted, the substrate is reduced by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removing region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removing region). , The polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED.

Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. Although it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is not shown, and the foil removal area (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown). ), The area is formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this area. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the characters are formed by removing the copper foil around the characters).

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) as a print. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened. As printing, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Has been done.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is silk-screened. The yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as prints, are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with the part number corresponding to hdLED10 (FIG. 172 (c) shows only the white resist-free character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ), And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice (in FIG. 172 (c), hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. As a region corresponding to the above, only the white resist-free region LSLK7 is shown). Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coated white resists, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist. It is covered (that is, as the first of the two-coat white resists, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers). A region (notch portion) to be indicated is included. As a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED shown in FIG. 172 (c), the white resist removing region LSLK7 is provided with the arrangement of the 5th pin of the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the indicated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist punching regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and is in the vicinity of these white resist punching regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 to the left. Alternatively, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist while the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LEDs1 to LED10 are masked as white resist-free characters. It is covered. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is designated as the white resist removing area LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition to being formed, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LEDs1 to LED10 are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since it is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the white resist of the second layer is passed through the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Looking at the substrate (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the permeability of the white resist in the first layer and the permeability of the white resist in the second layer are the same, so that the first layer is used. The white resist in the first layer and the white resist in the second layer are shaded, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist in the second layer, the first layer The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It has become.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second The white resist of the layer and the refractive index of light will change. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire body, are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. Is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 173, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part number corresponding to the electronic component is formed in the vicinity of these areas as a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. .. Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. It is covered with a resist (that is, as the first of the two-coat white resists, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a region (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) indicating a position where, for example, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice. The white resist-free region LSLK as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 173 includes a region (notch portion) indicating the above. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as the white resist punching region LSLKa, and a constant current is applied upward in the vicinity of these white resist punching regions LSLKa. In a state where IC1 (see FIG. 173 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, is masked as white resist-free characters, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is white. It is covered with a resist. As a result, a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the first layer. The entire area is covered with the white resist, and the entire area is covered except for the area masked by the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is recessed as a recess and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. As a region to be removed, a white resist removing region LSLKa is formed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removing character.

The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which a region indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is not shown. White resist punching letters R1, R2, which are formed as a punching region and whose component numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as R3, and the part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as various resistances such as dispersion resistors and capacitors (not shown) are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown) showing a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a white resist-free character (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the 402-by substrate (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to being able to identify the white resist-removed area.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removing characters and the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist removing region, and the first layer. The refractive index of the light of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance forward (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the white resist coated twice. It is formed as a white resist removing region. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is first of the white resist coated twice, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is made of a white resist. It is covered (that is, as the first of the two-coat white resist, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a region (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice. A region (notch portion) to be instructed is included. For example, as an region corresponding to the hLED7 which is a full-color LED, the white resist removal region HSLK7 has a notch mark instructing the arrangement of the 5th pin of the hLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch is formed at a corresponding position) is masked as white resist removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 to the right. The entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is covered with the white resist in a state where the LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the hLED10, are masked as the characters without the white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is designated as the white resist-free area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition to being formed, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LEDs1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the hLED10, are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are the same. Since it is used, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the white resist of the second layer is passed through the white resist of the center of the dish to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314. Looking at the base, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the characters without the white resist in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the permeability of the white resist in the first layer and the permeability of the white resist in the second layer are the same, so that the first layer Light and shade are generated between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It has become.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second. The white resist of the layer and the refractive index of light will change. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers the entire hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. Is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors (not shown) The area indicating the position where the electronic components such as the above are arranged is formed as a white resist removing area using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and these areas are also formed. The part number corresponding to the electronic component is formed in the vicinity as a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are the same. Because the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to being able to identify the white resist-removed area.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist-removed region and the second layer. The refractive index of light with the white resist of the second layer will change. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is lowered.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a component corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-free characters using a white resist coated twice, and are full-color LEDs. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is formed as a white resist removing area using a white resist coated twice, and further, a full-color LED is used on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The part number corresponding to a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is formed as a white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is white painted twice. The difference is that it is formed as a white resist removal region using the LED of.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91A. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a milky white color with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so that the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the door. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player. The mounting position of the full-color LED is formed by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, as the white resist removing area using the white resist coated twice. It is difficult to find the white resist-free area (that is, the area where the full-color LED is placed) or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). Can be done.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player. By forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, is arranged as the white resist-removing area using the white resist coated twice, the full-color LED emits light. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, a white resist removal area using a double-coated white resist indicating a number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area (area showing), and it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the steps of silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface can be omitted, respectively, so that the silk printing plate allowance and the substrate can be manufactured. By reducing the number of processes, it is possible to contribute to reducing the substrate manufacturing cost.

In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from full-color LED. Although it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and a connector mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist removing region (not shown), and in the vicinity of this region. In addition, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and component numbers corresponding to connectors are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the first layer is covered. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is placed is formed as the white resist removal area. Although the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector is formed as a white resist-removed character, another method may be used to form the white resist-removed region and the white resist-removed character. .. For example, an area indicating a position where a full-color resist or a connector is placed after a white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of a decorative substrate only once or multiple times, and before the white resist dries. A method of forming as a white resist removing area by pressing the plate of the above, and forming as a white resist removing character by pressing the plate indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED or the connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate and After the white resist is solidly applied to the non-LED mounting surface only once or multiple times, and after the white resist is dried, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or the connector is placed is defined as the white resist removal area by laser irradiation. In addition to forming, a method of forming a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector as a white resist-free character can be mentioned.

In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is substantially the same, and as shown in FIG. 168, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402box is used. , The left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. , The configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, but it can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include decorative boards provided on various production units of the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 applies a constant current to eight full-color LEDs to control light emission, but the LED is not limited to the full-color LEDs and is white. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green or the like may be a single color LED. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the light emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the direct current + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply provided (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 165) is used for LED lighting within the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as the voltage of. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to one single color LED (for example, one color LED (for example,) within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel). When an LED (LED other than the red LED) is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the monochromatic LED, and the monochromatic LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to two single-color LEDs (for example, for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel). When the red LED) is electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. The decorative substrate configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative substrate provided in the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. Of ~ LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminals of the LED elements constituting one full-color LED for one output channel were electrically connected via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 is used as the voltage for lighting the LEDs instead of the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630. You may. The decorative substrate configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative substrate provided in the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative board is large, so that the constant current drive circuit The edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. The end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit for any one of the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, or any two decorative substrates. The sides may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative substrate. Then, in addition to the full-color LED provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457, for example, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted is directly controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may directly mount another left decorative board on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, in addition to the full-color LED provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. The light emission may be controlled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solidly coated with a white resist, but instead, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates by white silk printing, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is designated as silk printing. It will be printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates was printed as silk printing with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line), but the mounting position of the full-color LED (That is, when printing with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) with the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed as silk printing), the polarity mark of the full-color LED is added to the full-color LED. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including various boards supplied from a power source from a power supply board and capable of controlling illumination has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, a line for transmitting power to various boards and a line for transmitting control signals are routed, and the length of the line becomes long, so that various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a front frame configured to cover a window that opens the game board back and forth with a fluoroscopic protective plate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014]). , And Fig. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thin, and the decorative substrate accommodated in the left and right sides also becomes a strip-shaped one. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a strip-shaped one. However, when the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emitting control means to the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a movable accessory device that is arranged on standby below the front of the display screen of the effect display device and that operates during the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058064). Gazette (paragraph [0040], FIGS. 4, 8, and 9). Inside the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is mounted. However, there is a risk that the player may see a number for specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate which has nothing to do with the game for the player, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like through the light emitting unit.

Further, conventionally, a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effect by such a light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered by a number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like, and the decoration is made. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[13. Each decorative board prepared for the game board]
Next, among the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, the decorative board on which the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

First, among the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, as the decorative board provided on which the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted, as described above, the front-stage decorative portion of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back unit 3000. There is a back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a or the like on which a magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting a standby position (original position) of the rotation position of 3312 is mounted.

The light emitting data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1 which are the door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are input to the back upper left front decorative board 3311a via the panel drive board 1720, respectively. ing. Further, the upper left front decorative board 3311a on the back is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720, DC + 12V is input, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. ) It is electrically connected to the line. The back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be configured to be directly electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 154 so that DC + 12V is input, or the power supply board 630 may be configured. It may be configured to be directly and electrically connected to the ground (direct current) line.

The back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a includes a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is capable of detecting a change in the magnetic pole, and is mainly composed of a linear power supply 3311aba, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmidt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abbe, and an FET3311abf. It is configured as an open drain output.

The linear power supply 3311ab is a circuit in which DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input to create and supply an internal power supply to be used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. This internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmidt circuit 3311abd, respectively, and can operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmidt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

The Hall element 3311abb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abb and outputs it to the Schmidt circuit 3311abd. The Schmidt circuit 3311abd arranges the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf which is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from the drain terminal in response to the signal from the Schmidt circuit 3311abd input to the gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the Hall element 3311ab becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When this magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311ab and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged so that the Hall element 3311ab is located just below the trajectory of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. 145. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of IC package thereof is a rectangular plane shape (horizontal length: 2). It is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a .9 mm, vertical length: 1.6 mm), and is a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a (that is, the back upper left) of the front decorative portion 3312 attached to the right side of the base decorative portion 3311 shown in FIG. 145. The distance dimension (this distance dimension (clearance)) between the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the surface of the IC package) and the left surface side of the front stage decorative portion 3312 which is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped front stage decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. 145. ), In the present embodiment, it has about 1.5 mm.) Can be reduced.

Further, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a small movable decorative body, it is arranged as a sensor for detecting the front-stage decorative portion 3312 which is a movable body by using a large optical sensor such as a photocoupler, for example. It is structurally difficult to do.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is used as a sensor to detect the standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 which is a movable body. This magnetic sensor has a large variation in detection as compared with the above-mentioned optical sensor, but in the present embodiment, the standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3312, which is a movable body, varies. Even if there is a deviation, this deviation is small, and it is unlikely that the player will feel uncomfortable.

As described above, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves in the left-right direction, moves in the vertical direction, and the front-stage decorative portion 3312 rotates. Inside, light from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab from multiple directions.

Therefore, when the above-mentioned optical sensor is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the light from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided in the game board 5 is ambient light (a plurality of light emitting sources). There is a risk of false detection due to light pollution).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned magnetic sensor is adopted for this reason as well. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the pre-stage decorative portion 3312 due to the light emitted from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5.

In the present embodiment, in the optical sensor provided in the various effect units described above, the light from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided in the game board 5 is blocked (or ambient light) by other members. Since it is configured to be weakened to the extent that it does not cause (light pollution), there is no risk of erroneous detection due to the light.

The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165, and a constant current is passed through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Mainly from a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 3311acx that can be used, and a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165, and is a serial system (light emission) on the game board side from the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1), control is performed to pass a constant current through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 3311ac by the heat distribution circuit 3311ad, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 3311ac can be dispersed. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165.

The light emitting data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emitting data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the LED mounting surface of the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8), a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, and the like are mounted. , The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has the above-described configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to a second embodiment, and a reflectance according to a third embodiment. Any of the configuration of measures such as reduction and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

In the above-described embodiment, the back upper left base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which the back upper left base decorative substrate is attached. The 3311a was equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the front-stage decorative portion 3312, but a side-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base-stage decorative substrate was used. Along with the selection, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board 3311a may be selected. A view type may be selected and a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board 3311a may be selected. The top-view type full-color LED may be selected, and the top-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected, or the back upper left base decorative board 3311a may be selected. The top-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, and the side-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine in which the effect operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by an effect control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [paragraph [paragraph] 0071], FIG. 3 and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and due to the structure of the game board, the environment that is affected by electromagnetic noise among various wirings connected to the effect control device (control means) If electromagnetic wave noise invades another wiring through the routed wiring, there is a risk that the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise from the other wiring.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a movable body on a game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIG. 18, and FIG. 19)). This movable body has a detection piece that is projected, and the position of the movable body is specified by detecting the detection piece by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body. By the way, when an optical detection switch is provided on a movable body to detect a specific position of the movable body, this light is emitted by light emitted by a plurality of light emitting bodies provided on the game board while the movable body is operating. There was a risk that the detection switch would erroneously detect it as it became ambient light and was incident on the optical detection switch.

[14. Brightness setting for indirect light and direct light]
The light guide plates in the base panel plate 1110 and the front effect unit 2600 are a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row from their end faces (a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110. A plurality of LEDs for the first pattern that are decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601, and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that are decorated by emitting light from the right side surface of the light guide plate. (Hereinafter, there is a double description of "LED used as indirect light"), and the indirect light is emitted from the inner surface of the light guide plate.

For the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. 23, the various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units such as the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, and the game board 5. Other LEDs (hereinafter, may be referred to as "LEDs used as direct light"), which are various LEDs provided and are not used for the light guide plate, are irradiated as direct light. Therefore, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are the same, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to be dark when the current brightness is too bright, and to adjust the brightness to be bright when the current brightness is not too dark.

By the way, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits are mounted. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED from extinguishing to turning on (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 steps from 0 (zero) to 127 gradations. It is something that can be done.

Further, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are data for designating the light emission mode as described above, and are composed of ID information and gradation information. There is. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

Further, as described above, the light emitting data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emitting data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

The gradation degree specified in the gradation information described above is obtained in the lamp pallet setting processing in the effect operation unit monitoring processing and the reception command analysis processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a. Set. In this lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. , Are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310X, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Then, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the production ( For example, within a predetermined period in a specific effect), the lamp pallet setting process can be executed to update the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one brightness specified value can be set in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (off) to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness. It is a value that can be set, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum brightness. Along the tone curve (or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In this embodiment, there is a case in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the brightness during the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the production. At this time, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or effect, the first brightness specified value to the first brightness is specified. By displaying a rod-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 brightness specified value, the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk of a game hall, etc.) is visually shown as an image. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are defined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is used for a specific decorative board (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. When the brightness of the LED is set, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is controlled by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) adjusts the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights out)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguishing)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value is set up to the brightness designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark). The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value). The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a light emitting means is provided in an effect member provided on a game board and the light of the light emitting means can be used as direct light to perform light emitting decoration (for example, JP-A-2016-154676). Publication No. (paragraph [0021], FIG. 2, and FIG. 5)). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as indirect light, it is darker than the case where the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as direct light. There is a problem that it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the means and the light emitting means used as direct light.

[15. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. In the pachinko machine 1, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to input the striking force adjustment to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The stored game ball B is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the launch passage portion 1012 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the launch rail 544 and the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is played. It will be started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a is located in the first game area 5a1 on the left side of the center member 2500 or on the right side of the center member 2500 through the connecting passage portion 5a4 depending on the driving strength. It flows down either of a certain second game area 5a2. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the first to third game areas 5a1, 5a2, 5a3 of the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail 2007, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail 2007, a windmill 2008 that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

[15-1. Driving into the first game area]
The game ball B launched to the upper part of the center member 2500 with a predetermined firing force (the launching force of the game ball B jumping over the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and not reaching the connecting passage portion 5a4) is the center member 2500. It rolls on the left side of the stepped portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 and flows down from the first game area 5a1 to the third game area 5a3 while abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails 2007. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage shelf 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, from either the central top in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. It is released forward. When the game ball B is released into the third game area 5a3 from the central top of the stage shelf 2503, the top is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that the first start port 2002 Will be accepted by. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 is released into the third game area 5a3 from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the third game area 5a3 may be accepted by the first starting port 2002, the general winning port 2001, or the like.

If the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 moves it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the side unit 2200 has a general winning opening 2001 or a starting opening. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

[15-2. Winning the first starting point, lottery of special lottery results]
When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 (the same applies to the second starting port 2004), the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an advantageous gaming state (for example, “for example,” in the main control board 1310X, which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. The result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). A special lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002. The results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit". , "Probability change time reduction no hit", etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state, the special fluctuation time After the lapse of time, the big winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In order for the game ball B to enter the large winning opening 2005, it is essential to drive the game ball B into the second game area 5a2, and therefore, at this stage, the game ball B is driven into the second game area 5a2 (so-called "right-handed"). ) Is guided by voice announcements or images, but in this embodiment, which emission unit 848a or 848b should be aimed at and right-handed is called, for example, "right-handed left route" or "right-handed right route". You will be guided specifically. This is because the ball entry probabilities to the first entrance 2006 and the second entrance differ depending on which release units 848a and 848b release the game ball B to the second game area 5a2. The driving into the second game area 5a2 will be described later.

When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are received between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball B is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Will be done. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310X. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310X, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the combinations correspond to the special lottery results. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, back effect unit 3100, and the like are appropriately used to produce light emission. It is possible to perform a movable effect, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

[15-3. Driving into the second game area (right-handed)]
The game ball B launched to the upper part of the center member 2500 with a specific launch force stronger than a predetermined launch force (a launch force having a strength that jumps over the first game area 5a1) is a tapered corner of the stepped portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832. It rides on the upper surface behind the portion 832b or rolls while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and moves to the back of the connecting passage portion 5a4. When the game ball B rides on the upper surface behind the tapered corner portion 832b of the stepped portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 as it is and enters the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b. Or, even if the game ball B that has been rolling while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 stalls and falls in front of the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b, it still rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 and the discharge portion. Enter the opening 848bH of 848b. As shown in FIG. 132, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b is discharged to the left side portion 5a2b of the second game region 5a2 by descending the inside of the discharge portion 848b. The game ball B released to the left side portion 5a2b has a small probability of entering the first entrance 2006 and a large probability of entering the second entrance and passing through the gate portion 2003 as described above. It is relatively easy to win a prize in the big prize opening 2005.

On the other hand, most of the game balls B that roll while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 due to centrifugal force and collide with the abutting portion 1006 enter the opening 848aH of the discharging portion 848a. As shown in FIG. 132, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a is discharged to a portion 5a2a on the right side of the second game region 5a2 down the discharge portion 848a. As described above, the game ball B released to the right side portion 5a2a has a higher probability of entering the first entrance 2006 than the probability of entering the second entrance or passing through the gate portion 2003. It is set and can enter the first inlet 2006 at an early stage and be processed in the same manner as an out ball.

Therefore, in the gauge configuration of FIGS. 131 and 132, the handle 182 is adjusted slightly weaker than the strongest level so that the game ball B enters the discharge portion 848b from the connecting passage portion 5a4, and thus the second gaming region 5a2. It is possible to reach the grand prize opening 2005 efficiently and safely via the portion 5a2b on the left side of the above.

When the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310X, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is drawn at the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

[16. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 180. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the setting change processing, the setting value confirmation display processing, and the error. The display process will be described.

[16-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random numbers for reach determination to be used for determination, and variable display for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for patterns and random numbers for jackpot symbols to be used to determine the jackpot symbols that are derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot game state is generated. And, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the jackpot symbol, the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special of the function display unit 1400 when the small hit game state is generated. The small hit symbol random number to be used to determine the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the symbol display 1406, the small hit symbol initial value determination random number to be used to determine the initial value of this small hit symbol random number, etc. It is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece capable of accepting the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining the normal symbol hit, and the normal symbol hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for use, and the random number for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol which is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated when the power is turned on, or in the process when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information stored in is regarded as a numerical value and is the checksum value stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the (sum value) does not match, the main control MPU1310a has a built-in random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. The ID code is extracted from the non-volatile RAM, and the initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code is executed. The mechanism is such that this derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the main control internal RAM, and the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to move the game ball to the second starting port 2004. Cannot generate an acceptable gaming state.

[16-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is actually pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (an area excluding a specific area among all the areas of the main control built-in RAM), and is probabilistic fluctuation and unpaid. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete various information including game information related to a game such as a prize ball and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a counter for determining the number of main prize balls information output), and various information. Is set to a value of 1 when erasing, and a value of 0 when various information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, in the main control MPU 1310a, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a. , The setting switch 1311a is set by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) and performing the first ON operation. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting switch 1311a, based on the signal. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, while the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. It is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied by the determination and / or the determination that the setting key 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON.

In the determination in step S18, when it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, when it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set by the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to 1 when is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state in which various commands from the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) can be received when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a). ) Is ready to receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and a value 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted, the main control MPU1310a has a value of 0 for the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum considers various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control MPU1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a matches, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310X, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310X is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU 1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). After the first ON operation is performed by rotating the pachinko machine 60 degrees in the direction, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, so that the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination in step S18 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and sets by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key 1311a is ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG. In order to set, in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the set value is permitted, and the setting change process in step S37 described later is performed. Following the above, in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (hereinafter,). , "First RAM error clearing method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The routine main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination in step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is selected. By clearing the exception, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error clearing method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that there is something wrong with the contents stored in (or it is unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method by the RAM clear switch 1310f.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU1310a has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm The state in which the main control board 1310X is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. (Step S37). In this setting change process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y. Each time, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, so that the signal of the decision key ON from the setting switch 1311a is turned on. The changed set value is determined based on the above, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control built-in RAM Clear all areas except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the above (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is a count of the number of game balls collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting area where the results (total number) are stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting area is the ball of the game ball collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, in the main control MPU 1310a, the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f indicates RAM clear, and when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or on the main control side. When the power off processing is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to a random number for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “) is used to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT and start the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a game machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, the random number for determining the jackpot used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Create a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU1310a sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU1310a performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. That is, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so that the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power off processing is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent power recovery.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the set value is determined to be changed. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of a hit state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall should use the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of. In addition, when the setting value is decided to be changed, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is set in addition to the change of the set value. Since it is an important key for confirming the set value, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3. In this embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall or the like can delete (clear) the game backup information in the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the clear switch 1310f, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 161 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. The charged charge is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall It is possible to complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set.) Is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the charged charge is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power offage process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310X can be completed, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310X can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, it has been so far. It is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period at the time of momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above, the game cannot be advanced.

By making it impossible for the game to proceed by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt is enabled in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are determined by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process which is set and described later. We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the power outage processing on the main control side. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, the problem when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, the problem. , The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on of the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310X drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310X is mainly controlled in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The state of being closed by the member will be changed to the state of being open.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310X and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310X is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. Based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and time saving state, the jackpot game state It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005, is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and a large winning opening 1 count display command for transmitting the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the main control board. Even if the 1310X transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310X finishes the 4th round (4th round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. The large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the present state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100) is issued from the main control board 1310X to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310X starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. A command for displaying the fifth round of opening the large winning opening 2005 is transmitted from the main control board 1310X to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition to the above-mentioned state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open) to the second start port 2004 When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310X drives the start port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310X determines the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the start port solenoid 2404 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310X and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310X is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310X is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on time. A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310X. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310X, and the grand prize opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a screen telling that the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven in the big hit game state and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine to insert a game ball into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. (Ii) In a state where the game ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310X As a return destination, a screen telling that the start port solenoid 2404 is started to be driven to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is open (for example, "the movable piece is open." A screen that conveys a message to the player, "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port.") Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct the player seated in the game to insert the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310X side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310X, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310X is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310X is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310X is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310X. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is operated when the RAM clear switch 1310f is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information instructing that when clearing the RAM, and the above-mentioned when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information that indicates which of the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of the information shown. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, main control board 1310X). In addition to what kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310X is manufactured, the main control board 1310X for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). I don't know if the main control board 1310X is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310X, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D). Even though the main control board 1310X is flowing to the production line to manufacture 1310X, the main control board 1310X is used to manufacture the main control board 1310X for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310X is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310X for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the operator of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310X is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310X is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310X for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310X will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310X to the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310X, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310X is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310X in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310X. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310X belongs to, and which work has the same copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310X is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310X for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection step of the manufacturing line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310X, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker of the above can sort each of the main control boards 1310X for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310X corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310X to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[16-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time, the time when the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a). Time such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands transmitted by Manage. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured. If the subtraction result has a value of 0, no further subtraction is performed in the timer subtraction process even if the next routine is performed.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and detection from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002. Signal, detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, detection signal from the grand prize opening sensor 2403, first entrance sensor Detection signal from 2406, detection signal from magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal from RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, setting switch The signal from 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a, the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are paid out control board 633. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which conveys that the signal has been normally received, is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start is started. When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, the corresponding start mouth winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal processing) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to four times. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002, the first Detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, detection signal from the grand prize opening sensor 2403, detection from the first inlet sensor 2406 Signal, detection signal from magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal from RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, signal from setting switch 1311a , The signal from the setting switching button 1311b, the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a, the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are normally received by the payout control board 633. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys the fact.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. When it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the main control MPU 1310a is processed is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The malfunction command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

Following step S105, the main control MPU1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball count processing (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a is input and the game area 5a is partitioned on the game board 5. When the out port left sensor 1008a detects the game ball collected by the out port 1008 provided in, the value 1 is set to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008. The game ball collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by inputting the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b while performing the addition (increment) calculation is used as the out port. When the right sensor 1008b detects it, a calculation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is performed. That is, in the ball count processing, when the out port left sensor 1008a detects the game ball collected by the out port 1008 and the out port right sensor 1008b detects the game ball collected by the out port 1008, , The calculation of adding the value 2 to the value of the collection ball counter is performed. The main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 1008 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time as storing, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball collection command that notifies when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10. Then, it is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in the present embodiment) and further adds (increments) by a value of 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310X and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005, a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within the specified time, a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5. , Second start opening 2004, and various winning openings such as the large winning opening 2005 (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5") are paid as prize balls based on the game balls entered. It counts the number of game balls to be released, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. If the logic is different, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball with almost the same diameter as it or almost the same as it) with a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) attached. It is determined that fraudulent activity (hereinafter referred to as "radio irradiation goto") by radio irradiation using a synthetic resin ball with a diameter is being performed, and the value of the radio irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. To do. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initially set when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Here, to briefly explain the radio wave irradiation goto, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal having a diameter substantially the same as that of a game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. A ball or a synthetic resin ball having a diameter substantially the same as that of the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first starting port 2002 and the first starting. The radio wave is irradiated in the area where the game ball passing through the mouth sensor is detected (the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor) with the game ball stopped. As a result, when the radio wave irradiation is performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned on) while the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor, the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is changed. While it is the logic that the game ball is not detected, when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is the logic that the game ball is detected. .. That is, the ball passage detection of the first start port sensor is performed by repeating turning on the radio wave irradiation and turning off the radio wave irradiation while the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor. It is possible to generate a pseudo signal that a plurality of game balls have passed through the region and output the signal from the first start port sensor to the main control board 4100.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b are larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation goto can be found. They were arranged at a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball to which a flexible string-shaped operation line is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and invades the first starting port 2002. The game ball passing through the area for detecting the game ball passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a (ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor main side 3002a) or the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Even if it is possible to form a stopped state in the area for detecting (the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor slave side 3002b), the player who commits the fraudulent act may turn on the radio wave irradiation or irradiate the radio wave. By repeatedly turning it off and off, the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002b must be made different. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created, and the above-mentioned transmission information storage as transmission information is created. It can be stored in the area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the radio wave irradiation goto at an early stage. It has become like.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 is input, the fraud using a magnet (hereinafter, “magnet goto”” It is determined that the above is performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by the value 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (big winning opening). When a large winning opening abnormality winning is generated (when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display is created as an abnormal state and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. ..

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, a value 1 is set in the cheating detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the cheating, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value of 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU1310a determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, a fraudulent activity. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame opening switch 4a is detected, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input and the main body frame opening switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. In this case, the launch permission logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. Until it is started, it is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that inverts the launch permission logic.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and determine the probability variation hit that is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). The main control MPU 1310a will not be described in detail when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, but the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. It is determined whether or not the stored small hit determination value matches (determines whether or not to generate the small hit game state), and when they match, the small hit game state is generated while they match. When it is not, it is determined whether or not it is an outlier with a reach without generating a small hit game state, and it is an outlier with a reach or an outlier without a reach.

Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. It depends on whether or not it is done.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. In the case of, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display 1404 or the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. (Ii) The output of the lighting signal to the special symbol display 1406 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2405 for opening / closing the opening / closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the 2-round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is 15, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp so that the 15-round indicator lamp of 1408 is turned on, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and turn on the presence or absence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status display 1401 of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information for the gate of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the information storage area.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. Store in parcel.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the normal hold indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the hold ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned gate information, and is stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is opened, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-mentioned transmission information storage as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol. The output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 is set so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area as information and to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is displayed according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). The detailed description of the set value confirmation display process will be described later, but for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating 60 degrees clockwise from the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is applied to the outer frame 2. By determining that the main body frame 4 is open and determining that the setting switch 1311a is ON by the signal of setting key ON, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting value is not set, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g. Is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated as it is and the process returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main pay ACK signal when, for example, normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to doing, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening prize Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signals are output to the payout control board 633, and the launch permission signal set in the launch permission logic or the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. Output, output a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, or store it in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. A lighting signal for displaying the set value set on the setting display 1310g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display Various commands classified into commands, test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310X will be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball entered in the various winning openings provided in the game board 5. Every time the number of game balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Numerical information output command, etc.), various commands classified into a specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies each time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10, and a set value are set. A setting change command that tells that the change has been made, an error display command that tells that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting key ON operation command or the like that informs that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area, which will be described later, is to be confirmed is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter are classified as power-on. Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and responds to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command. The number of balls of the game ball collected at the out port 1008 is counted for each ball collection command, and the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (counted value (that is, at the out port 1008). Information that associates the total number of collected game balls) with the date and time of the update) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) The ball collection information in which the total number of balls is associated with the updated date and time is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 sells the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as the ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310X has the backup described above for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup processing is executed as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power-on, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, the main control board 1310X has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. The main control return destination command at power-on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination when the power is turned on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310X. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310X, when the main control board 1310X is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 175 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 176, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 178 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU1310a calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175. This is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 176. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a matches, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which describes various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc., which will be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the backup flag BK-FLG of the main control MPU 1310a is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value whose setting value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting. It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be performed, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination in step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to light the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, while the setting switching button when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311b is not operated.

In the determination in step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a updates by performing an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step). S222). In this determination, in the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on. Is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key 1311a is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (turned 60 degrees counterclockwise to return, turned OFF, and then rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise). Then, it is performed based on the decision key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated, while the decision key from the setting switch 1311a is determined. When the ON signal is not input, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is not operated, it returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is operated. When it is determined that there is no such value, the determination is returned to step S216 again, and when the setting switching button 1311b is operated until the enter key is operated, the setting value is added and updated by one value each time the setting is performed, and the setting display It is displayed on the device 1310g, and if the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the decision key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since it is updated with respect to the set value set in, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a and the setting key 1311a is turned on. The setting switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return to the OFF operation (rotation position of the setting key cylinder), and the OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, while when the OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a is not input, the setting key is turned off. Judge that it is not.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned off, it returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU1310a sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is the first ON operation). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time when the setting value is set, and the value when the setting change of the set value is permitted. 1. When the setting change of the set value is not permitted, the value is set to 0, respectively. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. In the determination in step S233, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the main control MPU 1310a has a normal set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination in step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is in the normal range, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 as the main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 177. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the set value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and the infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[16-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 179 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the rotation operation and the first ON operation, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the signal of the setting key ON from the setting switch 1311a. By determining that the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, while the main body frame is opened. By determining that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the switch 4b, and / or by determining that the setting switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal. , It is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting are set. The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is used. It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is in the normal range, and when it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

In the determination of step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a is in the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value is confirmed) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned ball collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and ON operation history information of the setting key are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing this, control is performed to switch from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, whether the main control MPU1310a has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed. Whether or not it is determined (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a to determine the setting switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that is turned on. By operating, the setting switch 1311a is turned off, and it is performed by the OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, while the setting switch 1311a When the OFF signal from is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination of step S362, the main control MPU1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , The OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 controls to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image by switching to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU1310a is not in the normal range, the interrupt disallow setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a enters an infinite loop that performs error display processing (step S372) and then continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control is mainly controlled by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[16-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 179), and is a process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. If the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the process at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. 176. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU1310a returns the power in step S400 and then displays an error, which is the present routine. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179. In the judgment, it is judged that there is an error in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176, it has already been shown in FIG. 179 before the error display processing of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 of the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is completed, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. 177. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU 1310a has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 176. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175 (FIG. 178). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 179) and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 179 are started and ended, respectively, and the infinite loop is entered as described above. , This infinite loop keeps the state where the error display process is completed, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication is initially installed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data as the peripheral control board. It is being transmitted to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the received date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sends a RAM error notification in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and a blue background image "A RAM error has occurred. A slide method provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 147, while controlling the display of a message image of white characters such as "Please call me." And announcing "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a staff member." Various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body) are forcibly set to the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d of. Control the flow from the frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command is the process having the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command for transmitting another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[17. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, and FIG. 183 is the payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 184 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[17-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183 under the control of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU633aa sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU633aa. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU633aa performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU633aa are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X as a power failure warning. To. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI. It is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, while it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated.

In the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU633aa is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU633aa.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU633aa is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM for payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU633aa sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU633aa calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum considers the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power off processing (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when it is determined that the payout control MPU633aa matches, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU633aa (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and the power is restored. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU633aa sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU633aa performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU633aa sets interrupt enable (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X as a power failure warning. Entered. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed, respectively. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU633aa returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU633aa receives a power failure warning signal. Judge whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310X have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c is stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310X are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU633aa, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310X or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually outputs 10 game balls). A prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is paid out.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the counter for determining the number of prize balls. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU633aa performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and the BRQ signal from the CR unit. , BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310X that conveys that the main control board 1310X has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc., as input information. Store in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU633aa performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU633aa momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU633aa) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU633aa) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU633aa) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of MPU633aa. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process is performed. As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal output is the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when the communication with the CR unit is not in progress. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU633aa. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logical state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU633aa with the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

The timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is also used to determine whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball breaks to that effect. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of balls of the game ball taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU633aa performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310X are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU633aa performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU633aa performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU633aa performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and the LED display information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, it corresponds. Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU633aa performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310X. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. Create a command and send it to the main control board 1310X.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU633aa sets a value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, set the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Do. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU633aa varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU633aa preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310X have been normally received to the main control board 1310X. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU633aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, the payout control MPU633aa sets the interrupt prohibition setting when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU633aa stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU633aa sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU633aa sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU633aa sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU633aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU633aa) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[17-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 181 to 183.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU633aa sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 184 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU633aa switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU633aa sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[18. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 187 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[18-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 185. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 185 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310X. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is used. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a indicating that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU first sets the stationary processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively. During the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) performs the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation). When one brightness specified value ranging from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, is set by operating the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), the set brightness is set. The above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so that the specified value is obtained.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the LCDs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates the image data on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later are performed. From various speakers such as speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions. Further, in this display data output process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the door frame 3 is set according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer. The data is output to various decorative boards provided and various decorative boards (including a panel drive board 1720) provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and from the set output channel to various speakers. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a reception command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310X are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310X are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyze the various commands that have been issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the various analyzed commands ( (Extract) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310X, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Then, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31 brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to be the set brightness specified value. It has become like.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the command from the main control board 1310X received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. Normal symbol memory command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, big prize It analyzes whether or not it is a large winning opening 1 count display command output every time a game ball is accepted in 2005, and recognizes which game state it is currently in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310X are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to synchronization production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as related to test, There are various other commands that are classified and various commands that are classified into a specific history.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this reception command analysis process, and is not shown when various commands classified in the specific history are included. The specific history information is updated in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC. Specifically, in this reception command analysis process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 becomes 10. When a ball collection command was included to notify that effect each time it was reached, the ball collection information described above was updated and the ball collection history information was stored in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown), or the set value was changed. When the setting change command to inform the effect is included, the above-mentioned setting value history information is updated and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), or there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM ( Or, when an error display command is included to inform that it is unreliable), the above-mentioned error display history information is updated and stored in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown), or in the main control built-in RAM. When the ON operation command of the setting key that tells to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area described later in the specific area is included, the ON operation history information of the setting key described above is updated in real time (not shown). It is stored in the built-in RAM of the clock IC.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this reception command analysis process and includes the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball recovery history described above is described. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of specific history information such as information, setting value history information, error display history information, and ON operation history information of the setting key can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied, a person who confirms the specific history information in the effect operation unit monitoring process in step S1014 rotates and presses the rotation operation unit 302. A display device that monitors whether or not the pressing operation of unit 303 is being performed, and if it is being operated, switches to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information from the images that have been displayed so far. The screen generation schedule data for display in the display area of 1600 is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this reception command analysis process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and when the OFF operation command of the setting key is included, the specific history information display image is displayed. When the image is displayed in the display area of the device 1600, the image is switched back to the screen generation schedule data of the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 until immediately before switching to the specific history information display image.

Further, in this reception command analysis process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and when an error display command is included, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The screen generation schedule data for displaying the message image of white characters "An error has occurred" on the blue background image is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , The announcement "An error has occurred" is set to the maximum volume, and the schedule data for sound generation to be played from various speakers is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is updated, and the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is transferred from the control ROM 1510b. It is read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. In addition to incorporating, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the volume adjustment switch 1510d is operated based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a surrounds the volume from the mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall slides the volume control switch 1510d to set the volume low, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a problem occurs in the machine or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or sound effect, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen (image) unfolded by the effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or that the game state will be favorable to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and backed up, and the contents stored in the DRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 are copied to the DRAM 1510c1, It is copied and backed up in the backup area for routine processing provided in 1510c2.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[18-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the regular processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in the determination of step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 185. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit is informing that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 185. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit stationary processing Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185 is performed. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 185. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing omission this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[18-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 185 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a states that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven according to the drive data to be performed, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the original) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied and backed up. The backup is performed by copying to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set in different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 , The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in 1510c2 and the steady processing backup area provided in the SRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185, various processes related to the effects of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[18-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310X will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310X are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sends the main peripheral serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the data is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is taken out from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is taken out from the receive buffer. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the CPU is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is followed by the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circuit serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer in order in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310X. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510. It can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. And, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[18-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X is input from the main control board 1310X will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates the 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 189, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310X, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command backup process (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear processing of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state occurs. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[19. Technical means, action and effect, etc.]
As described below, the above-described embodiment includes background techniques for which Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29741 is a prior patent document, and many technical means for solving problems.

[Background technology]
Gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game board that has a game area where games are played, and a door frame that has a door window that closes the front side of the game board so that the game area can be seen from the front. By playing a game in the game area that can be seen through the door window, the player can be entertained.

This type of gaming machine is equipped with a storage plate for storing a game medium for playing a game, and has a bulging portion on the front surface of the door frame that bulges from below the door window to the front, and a bulging portion. A decorative body attached to the upper surface and a body provided with the decorative body have been proposed (for example, prior patent documents). According to the technique of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, it is difficult to see the decorative body when the game machine is viewed from the front or the side. The decoration effect by the body was weak, and the appealing power to the player was insufficient. Further, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his / her hand on the storage plate, a part of the decorative body is hidden by the player's hand, so that, for example, the decorative body is luminescently decorated. At that time, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the luminescent decoration, and some players may feel lost because they did not notice the luminescent decoration, which may reduce the interest in the game.

[Solution]
In view of the above circumstances, the present invention provides a gaming machine that has a high appeal to the player and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game by the luminous decoration.

[Technical means to solve problems]
Means 1: In a game machine
"A game board that has a game area where games are played, and
A main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that opens and closes the front side of the main body frame so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion on the front surface of the door frame base that bulges forward from a portion below the door window and is provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area. ,
Attached to the bulge, the front end is in front of the front end of the storage dish, from the front surface of the door frame base to the front, to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base. With a protruding ornament
The decorative body is provided with a decorative body light emitting means that emits light and decorates the decorative body according to a game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. "

Here, as the "game", "a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium is driven to the specific entrance. When the special lottery result in which an advantageous game state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific reception for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game medium, so that the game medium is aimed at a specific reception. "Game to drive", "Game to drive the game medium aiming at the entrance where the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given", "Multiple symbols with multiple symbols after inputting the game medium" After rotating the rotating body, a game in which the rotation of each rotating body is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of a game medium is given ", and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "spherical ones (game balls)", "disk-shaped ones (medals)", and the like.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is performed, there are a plurality of entrances where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player and a privilege including the payout of the game medium is given according to the acceptance of the game medium. Each of the "area" and "each has a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the input of the game medium, and the combination of the symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. An area in which a plurality of rotating fuselage bodies are arranged to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given depending on the situation, etc.

In addition, the "main body frame" includes "a frame-shaped outer frame that can be attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the game machine is installed so that it can be opened and closed (hinge can be rotated)" and "the game machine". Examples include those that are directly attached to the island equipment of the game hall to be installed, and those that are equipped with a device for paying out game media for playing games.

Further, as the "bulging portion", in addition to the storage plate, "a storage plate having an operation unit operated by the player to play the game" and "a storage plate for storing the game medium for playing the game" are used. "Equipped", "Equipped with a production operation unit that can accept the player's operation when the player participation type production is executed", "Lending operation unit that rents out the game medium for playing the game" Those equipped with ", etc.

In addition, examples of the "storage dish" include "a plurality of dishes that are vertically separated from each other", "a dish that is provided with only one dish", and the like.

Further, as the "decorative body", "a model of a predetermined item in line with the concept of the game machine", "a model of a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine", and "a model of a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine" It imitates a given scene. " The reason why the distance from the front end of the door frame base to the front end of the decorative body is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base is that the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the total width. This is because the amount of protrusion to the front is about the same as that of the conventional game machine, and the appealing power to the player cannot be sufficiently enhanced. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the total width, the decorative body protrudes too much to the front. This is because there is a risk that it will interfere with the player and it will be difficult to be selected as a game machine to play.

In addition, "according to the game state" means "a game to a reception port (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area). According to the acceptance of the medium "," according to the game medium circulating in the game area passing through a specific area (for example, a gate, a warp passage, a stage shelf, etc.) "," arranged in the game area. "According to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium at the reception (for example, the start port)", "Lottery by accepting the game medium at the reception (for example, the start port) arranged in the game area" Depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect, big hit effect, loss effect, etc.) for suggesting the result of the special lottery, "a plurality of symbols are provided for each with the introduction of the game medium. "According to the rotation of the rotating body", "In response to the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotating body, the plurality of rotating bodies, each of which is provided with a plurality of symbols, are rotated and then stopped in sequence. , "According to the amount of the game medium driven into the game area", "Depending on the length of the driving blank of the game medium driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, as the "decorative body light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent sphere", "neon sphere", "cold cathode tube", etc. Can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the game machine can open and close the game board having the game area where the game is played, the main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front, and the front side of the main body frame. The door frame base has a door window that is closed to the front and the game area can be seen from the front, and the front of the door frame base bulges forward from the part below the door window. A bulge having a storage tray capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and a bulge attached to the bulge, in front of the front end of the storage tray, from the front to the front of the door frame base A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base, and a light emitting decoration according to a game state that changes as the decorative body is played in the game area. It is provided with a decorative body light emitting means for causing the door to emit light.

As a result, the bulging portion provided with the storage plate capable of storing the game medium bulges forward in the portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. At the same time, the bulging portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base and the front end projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when this game machine is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the decoration body protrudes forward greatly below the door window where the inside of the game area can be seen, so that the decoration body stands out more than other game machines. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, enhance the appeal to the player, and facilitate the selection of the game machine as the game machine to be played. Further, since the front end of the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage plate, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his / her hand on the storage plate, the part hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body. When the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. Can be made to.

In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, when the player sits in front of the game machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, when the decorative body is luminescent and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, the light irradiates the player from below, and the luminescent decoration of the decorative body directs the player's line of sight to the decorative body. By directing the player's line of sight to the decorative body below, it is possible to keep the inside of the game area provided in front from the player's field of view and make it difficult to see the inside of the game area. .. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., by illuminating the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, the player is made to pay attention to the decorative body below the game area, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area, By changing the production image and the movable body, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there is no such thing, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as described above, the decorative body can be noticed by emitting and decorating the decorative body according to the game state, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game domain in the gap. The luminous decoration of the above can indicate the arrival of a chance for the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the luminescent decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the decorative body is luminescent and decorated, and the player is entertained and enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, he / she looks away from the game machine, so that the entire game machine including the game area can be easily seen. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

The decorative body may be smoothly curved so as to project forward. As a result, the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is smoothly curved, so that even if it comes into contact with the player, there is no risk of damaging the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decorative body is not dangerous enough to cause injury just by looking at the decorative body, so that the player can select the game machine with confidence as the game machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game with this game machine and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, it is desirable to attach the decorative body to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. As a result, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced to facilitate the selection of the game machine as the game machine to be played. Further, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both hands of the player can be easily extended forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area can be used. It is possible to facilitate the operation, handle the game medium stored in the storage plate, and the like, making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the decorative body may be provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc shape. As a result, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body has a shape in which half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make a person play a game in a calm mood, to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decline in interest, and it is difficult for the player to get injured even if he / she makes contact at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe, and by reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game. Further, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, when the entire first decorative portion is luminescently decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, it looks like an annular fluorescent lamp. The luminescent decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the luminescent decoration is performed, for example, if the luminescent decoration is made so that light flows from one side, the inside of the donut can be decorated. Since it is possible to show the player a light emission effect as if the light is moving and rotating, it is possible to surprise the player and make them think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, the decorative body is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and has a semicircular arc-shaped cross section. A second decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward may be further provided. As a result, the first decoration part and the second decoration part can show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and the bulge part provided with the storage plate can be improved in appearance. At the same time, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part and the decorative body can be made to look larger. It can be a highly appealing game machine that strongly attracts the interest of. Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged one above the other, the light is emitted so that the light rotates by appropriately emitting and decorating each of them by the decorative body light emitting means. It is possible to show the player the effect and the light emission effect that the light moves up and down, to entertain the player, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emission effects, which makes the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult to make it difficult to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, an effect operation unit that can accept the operation of the player according to the game state may be provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body. As a result, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player operates the production operation unit, so that the player participation type It is possible to entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. At this time, by illuminating the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the effect operation unit is attached, so that the player who operates the effect operation unit can be attracted. When the participatory effect is executed, the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (effect operation unit) and the operation of the effect operation unit can be encouraged, and the player can perform the effect operation. By operating the club, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, or the like from coming into contact with the effect operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the effect operation unit, and it is possible to surely entertain the player-participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to make it easier to select a machine, and the progress of the game (for example, a game medium) so that the player-participatory production can be executed at an early stage by raising the expectation for the player-participatory production that operates the production operation unit. (Game ball) driving operation, start of rotation of the rotating body by inserting the game medium (medal), etc.) can be promoted, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player and the inside of the rotation operation unit. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform the pressing operation. As a result, since the rotation operation unit that can be rotated and the pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation is performed in the player participation type production that can accept the operation of the production operation unit. It is possible to let the player operate by appropriately combining the pressing operation and the pressing operation, and it is possible to correspond to the production requiring more complicated input (operation of the player), so that a more versatile player participation type production can be played. It can be presented to a person, can entertain the player, can make the player less bored, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this case, since the decorative body to which the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit are attached to the upper surface can be light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, the decorative body is displayed when the player participation type production is executed. By making the light emitting decoration, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the effect operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit) to encourage the player to operate the effect operation unit, and the player can operate the effect operation unit. By letting them enjoy the player-participation-type production, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. At this time, since it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body, the player can be urged to perform the rotation operation unit or pressing. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and the player-participatory production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the upper surface of the decorative body is provided with the annular rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit as the effect operation unit, the pressing operation is performed. Even if the portion is made movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position depending on the gaming state. good. As a result, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation unit is in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large together with the rotation operation unit. Since it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration look bigger and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and increasing the appeal to the player more than other game machines. At the same time, the pressing operation unit protrudes greatly upward, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit, which raises the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation unit and suppresses the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the pressing operation portion in the ring of the rotation operating portion attached to the upper surface of the decorative body can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player can move the pressing operating portion in the protruding position. A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that can be pressed, and a cylindrical center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. It may be configured by the pressing operation unit. As a result, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the player participation type production in which the player operates each operation unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be done. Further, in this case, by illuminating the decorative body, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and the operation thereof is promoted. It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to provide an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state. As a result, the effect operation unit can be light-emitting and decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state. Therefore, the light-emitting decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means can be executed at the same time. , The entire bulging portion below the door window that bulges forward can be luminescent, and the bulging portion can be made to stand out to strongly attract the player's attention, and the entire bulging portion can be luminescent. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Further, in this case, by decorating the effect operation unit with light emitting means by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit, so that the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit can be achieved. When executed, the effect operation unit is light-emitting and decorated to direct the player's attention to the effect operation unit and prompt the operation, and the player is allowed to operate the effect operation unit to participate in the player participation type effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the front surface of the door frame base may be further provided with a peripheral decorative body that is continuous with the decorative body attached to the bulging portion and extends so as to surround the outer periphery of the door frame. As a result, the entire outer circumference of the game area can be decorated, the appearance of the game machine can be improved, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is desirable to provide a peripheral decorative body light emitting means for luminescent decoration of the peripheral decorative body, and the peripheral decorative body of the bulging portion and the peripheral decorative body are each luminescent decorated to illuminate the outer periphery of the game area. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image may be provided in the center of the game area in the front view. As a result, in addition to the game performed in the game area, the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on the effect display means, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, during the display of the effect image by the effect display means, when the effect image is switched, the decorative body is made to emit light so that the player's line of sight is directed to the decorative body below the game area, so that it is difficult to notice the switching of the effect image. can do. Then, when the player turns his or her eyes to the effect display means after the effect image is switched, the effect image can be surprised by the change, and the effect image can be more enjoyed and the effect can be produced before you know it. By switching the images, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The decorative body is
It is characterized by being "smoothly curved and protruding forward".

According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved so as to project forward.

As a result, the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is smoothly curved, so that even if it comes into contact with the player, there is no risk of damaging the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decorative body is not dangerous enough to cause injury just by looking at the decorative body, so that the player can select the game machine with confidence as the game machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game with this game machine and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The decorative body is
It is characterized in that it is "attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction".

According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, which appeals to the player. It is possible to make it easier to select the main game machine as the game machine to play with increased power. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area. ), And the game medium stored in the storage plate can be easily handled, so that the player is less likely to be stressed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
"The decorative body is
It has a semicircular arcuate cross-sectional shape and is provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward. "

According to the configuration of the means 4, the decorative body is provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc shape.

As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body is formed so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward, so that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. It is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and the player can play the game in a calm mood, so that the player can concentrate on the game. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game, and at first glance, the player can recognize that it is a safe one that is not easily injured even if it comes into contact with it. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion has a semi-doughnut shape, when the entire first decorative portion is luminescent and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, light emission like an annular fluorescent lamp is emitted. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you to think that there is something good, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 5: In the configuration of means 4,
"The decorative body is
The front end is arranged below the first decorative portion so as to be located behind the first decorative portion, and has a semicircular arcuate cross-sectional shape and extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward. It is characterized by having a second decorative part.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the decorative body is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and bulges outward in a semicircular cross-sectional shape. The second decorative part extending in a semicircular ring is further provided.

As a result, the first decoration part and the second decoration part can show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and the bulge part provided with the storage plate can be improved in appearance. At the same time, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part and the decorative body can be made to look larger. It can be a highly appealing game machine that strongly attracts the interest of.

In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first and second decorative parts are arranged one above the other, the light emitting effect that the light rotates can be achieved by appropriately emitting and decorating each of them by the decorative body light emitting means. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that the light moves up and down, to entertain the player, and to show the player a variety of light emission effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 6: In any one of means 1 to 5,
"It is further provided with an effect operation unit that is attached to the rear of the upper surface of the decorative body and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state." To do.

Here, as the "directing operation unit", "rotation operation unit capable of rotation operation", "press operation unit capable of pressing operation", "touch operation unit capable of touch operation", and "slide operation unit capable of slide operation". , "Stick operation unit capable of stick operation", "Composite operation unit capable of rotation operation and pressing operation", and the like. Further, the "directing operation unit" may be one that is in contact with the upper surface of the decorative body, or may be one that protrudes from the upper surface of the decorative body.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the game machine is further provided with an effect operation unit which is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state. is there.

As a result, since the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the effect operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player By operating the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. At this time, by illuminating the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the effect operation unit is attached, so that the player who operates the effect operation unit can be attracted. When the participatory effect is executed, the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (effect operation unit) and the operation of the effect operation unit can be encouraged, and the player can perform the effect operation. By operating the club, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, etc. from coming into contact with the effect operation unit. It is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the production operation unit, and it is possible to surely entertain the player-participation-type production that operates the production operation unit and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player, and this game machine is selected as the game machine to be played. The progress of the game (for example, a game medium (game ball)) can be made easier, and the player-participatory effect for operating the effect operation unit can be raised so that the player-participatory effect can be executed at an early stage. ), The start of rotation of the rotating body by inserting the game medium (medal), etc.) can be promoted, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the decorative body decorates the outside of the effect operation unit, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit can be improved. , The production operation unit can be made to stand out, and it can be a game machine that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The production operation unit is
An annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player,
It is characterized in that it is provided with a pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform a pressing operation in the ring of the rotation operation unit. "

Here, examples of the "rotation operation unit" include "a unit that can be rotated by driving a motor in addition to the rotation operation of the player", "rotated only by the rotation operation of the player", and the like.

Further, the "pressing operation unit" includes a "cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit along the inner circumference of the rotation operation unit and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit provided in the outer peripheral pressing operation unit". , "One columnar thing", "One with a cross key and an arrow key", and the like. Further, examples of the "pressing operation unit" include "a unit that can move forward and backward in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the protruding position", "a unit that cannot move in the vertical direction", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit is provided with an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit. It was done.

As a result, since the rotation operation unit that can be rotated and the pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation is performed in the player participation type production that can accept the operation of the production operation unit. It is possible to let the player operate by appropriately combining the pressing operation and the pressing operation, and it is possible to correspond to the production requiring more complicated input (operation of the player), so that a more versatile player participation type production can be played. It can be presented to a person, can entertain the player, can make the player less bored, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the decorative body to which the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit are attached to the upper surface can be light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means, the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated when the player participation type production is executed. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the effect operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit) to encourage the operation of the effect operation unit, and the player can operate the effect operation unit. It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest. At this time, since it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body, the player can be urged to perform the rotation operation unit or pressing. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and the player-participatory production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

It is desirable that the diameter of the rotation operation unit be larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the storage pan. As a result, the front end side of the rotation operation unit is in a state of protruding greatly forward from the storage plate, so that the rotation operation unit can be made to stand out greatly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to recognize that the game machine is different from other game machines, and it is possible to easily select the game machine as the game machine to be played. Further, when the diameter of the rotation operation unit is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation unit is for the rotation operation, and the game is played when the player participation type production is executed. It is possible to make it easier for a person to participate in the production, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotation operation portion is increased, the inner diameter of the rotation operation portion can be increased to increase the pressing operation portion in the ring. Therefore, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion is performed. It can be facilitated, and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Means 8: In the configuration of means 7,
"The pressing operation unit is
It is possible to move between a retracted position that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position according to the gaming state. " It is characterized by being.

Here, as the "pressing operation unit" that can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, "a device that can move to the retracted position when the player presses the position in the protruding position" and "the player in the protruding position". Even if the pressing operation is performed, the object cannot be moved to the retracted position. "

According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation portion is placed between the retracted position slightly protruding upward from the upper surface of the rotating operating portion and the protruding position protruding upward from the retracted position depending on the gaming state. , It is made movable.

As a result, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation unit is in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large together with the rotation operation unit. Since it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration look bigger and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and increasing the appeal to the player more than other game machines. At the same time, the pressing operation unit protrudes greatly upward, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit, which raises the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation unit and suppresses the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, since the pressing operation unit can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player's attention can be directed to the rotation operating unit at the retracted position, and the player's interest can be directed at the protruding position. Since it can be directed to the pressing operation unit, by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation unit, and the game can be played. It is possible to allow a person to accurately operate the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit to enjoy the player participation type production.

Means 9: In the configuration of Means 8
"The pressing operation unit is
A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position,
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and is provided with a columnar central pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. " It is characterized by being.

According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation unit is arranged in a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform the pressing operation at the protruding position, and in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit. It is provided with a cylindrical central pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player at any position.

As a result, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the player participation type production in which the player operates each operation unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be done. Further, by illuminating the decorative body, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and their operations can be promoted. It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation are performed. When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit are in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions and to entertain the player with various operations. This makes it difficult for players to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen, so that the player can have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusion player tries to rotate the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit does not rotate, so that the game is played. The person can be impatient, and the player can be entertained by giving a feeling of tension to the flow of the production.

Means 10: In any one of means 6 to 9,
It is characterized in that "the operation unit light emitting means for making the effect operation unit emit light according to the game state is further provided".

Here, as the "operation unit light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent sphere", "neon sphere", "cold cathode tube", etc. Can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is further provided with an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the game state.

As a result, the effect operation unit can be light-emitting and decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state. Therefore, the light-emitting decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means can be executed at the same time. , The entire bulging portion below the door window that bulges forward can be luminescent, and the bulging portion can be made to stand out to strongly attract the player's attention, and the entire bulging portion can be luminescent. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit is light-emittingly decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit, so that the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit is executed. Occasionally, by illuminating the production operation unit, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the production operation unit and encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit, the player participation type production is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 11: In the game machine
"A game board that has a game area where games are played, and
A main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that opens and closes the front side of the main body frame so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion on the front surface of the door frame base that bulges forward from a portion below the door window and is provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area. ,
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, has a semicircular arcuate cross-sectional shape, and extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward, and the front end is in front of the front end of the storage tray and the door frame. The first decorative portion protruding from the front surface of the base to the front by a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base, and the front end thereof so as to be located behind the first decorative portion. A decorative body that is arranged below the first decorative portion and has a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape and a second decorative portion that extends outward in a semicircular ring shape.
A decorative body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decorative body according to a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area.
An annular rotation operation unit attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and capable of rotation operation by the player, and an upper surface of the rotation operation unit according to the game state in the ring of the rotation operation unit. A cylinder that can be moved between a retracted position that protrudes slightly upward and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and the player can perform a pressing operation at the projected position. It is composed of a shape-shaped outer peripheral pressing operation unit and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. A production operation unit that is equipped with a pressing operation unit and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state.
The effect operation unit is provided with an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the game state. "

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine can open and close the game board having the game area where the game is played, the main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front, and the front side of the main body frame. The door frame base has a door window that is closed to the front so that the game area can be seen from the front, and the front of the door frame base bulges forward from the part below the door window. A bulging part equipped with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and a bulging part attached to the center in the left-right direction of the bulging part, and bulging outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. It extends in a semi-circular shape so that the front end protrudes from the front of the door frame base to the front in front of the front end of the storage plate to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base. One decorative part and the front end are arranged below the first decorative part so as to be located behind the first decorative part, and have a semicircular arcuate cross-sectional shape and extend in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward. From the decorative body provided with the second decorative portion, the decorative body light emitting means for illuminating the decorative body according to the changing game state due to the game being performed in the game area, and the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body. Also attached to the rear, in the annular rotation operation unit that the player can rotate, and in the ring of the rotation operation unit, the retracted position that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit depending on the game state. And the protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform the pressing operation at the protruding position, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit. It is equipped with a pressing operation unit consisting of a columnar central pressing operation unit that is arranged in the cylinder and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. It is provided with an effect operation unit capable of accepting operations and an operation unit light emitting means for displaying the effect operation unit with light emission according to a game state.

As a result, the bulging portion provided with the storage plate capable of storing the game medium bulges forward in the portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. At the same time, the bulging portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base and the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. It is provided with a central pressing operation unit, an outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and a rotation operation unit arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the door. As a result, when the game machine is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the decorative body having the effect operation unit mounted on the upper surface protrudes forward greatly below the door window in which the inside of the game area can be visually recognized. The decoration can be made more conspicuous than other game machines, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and this game machine can be selected as the game machine to be played. It can be made easier. Further, since the front end of the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage plate, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his / her hand on the storage plate, the part hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body. When the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. Can be made to.

In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, when the player sits in front of the game machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, if the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means or the effect operation unit is light-emitting and decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state, the light irradiates the player from below. The light emitting decoration of the decorative body and the effect operation unit can direct the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body and the effect operation unit, and the player's line of sight can be directed downward to provide the game in front. It is possible to keep the inside of the area away from the player's field of view and make it difficult to see the inside of the game area. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., by illuminating the decorative body and the effect operation unit, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area, the effect image or the movable body By changing such things, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the decorative body can be noticed by emitting and decorating the decorative body according to the game state, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game domain in the gap. The luminous decoration of the above can indicate the arrival of a chance for the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the luminescent decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the decorative body is luminescent and decorated, and the player is entertained and enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, he / she looks away from the game machine, so that the entire game machine including the game area can be easily seen. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to make it easier to select the main game machine as the game machine to play by increasing the number of players. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area. ), And the game medium stored in the storage plate can be easily handled, so that the player is less likely to be stressed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below the decorative body are formed to extend in a semicircular ring shape so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward, the cylinder is formed. Since half of the tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and the player can play the game in a calm mood. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, it is possible for the player to recognize that it is a safe thing that is hard to be injured even if it comes into contact with it at first glance. By reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, by simultaneously illuminating the decorative body and the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body, the entire bulging portion that bulges forward below the door window can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the bulge can be made to stand out and the player's attention can be strongly attracted, and the overall luminescent decoration can make the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to direct the interest of the person to the production operation unit and encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion have a semi-doughnut shape, the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are luminescently decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state. , A luminous decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you to think that there is something good, and the direction in which the light of the first decoration part and the second decoration part is rotating with respect to the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the decoration. It is possible to encourage the player to rotate in the same direction as the player. Alternatively, by alternately illuminating the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged vertically, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light moves up and down, and at the same time, up and down. The moving light can urge the player to perform a pressing operation on the outer peripheral pressing operation unit or the central pressing operation unit. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion with light emission, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit. On the other hand, the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit can be operated accurately, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. , It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the player participation type production in which the player operates each operation unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. it can.

Further, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation are performed. When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit are in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions and to entertain the player with various operations. This makes it difficult for players to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen, so that the player can have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusion player tries to rotate the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit does not rotate, so that the game is played. The person can be impatient, and the player can be entertained by giving a feeling of tension to the flow of the production.

Means 12: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 11.
The game machine
A plurality of receptions arranged in the game area and capable of accepting game media, and
The pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game media into the reception port.

Here, as the "reception entrance", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate "", "By accepting the game medium at a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, the game medium Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, "ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can accept the game medium in a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, accessory winning opening, etc.), and a specific area (for example, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area. Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state that gives the player an advantage when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous include a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result and the advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state. When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It has an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting the game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 12, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area in which the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the receiving entrance where the gaming medium can be received, and the game to the receiving entrance. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It is desirable that the light emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the receiving port. As a result, when the game medium is accepted into the reception, a predetermined number of game media are paid out and the decorative body is luminescently decorated. Therefore, the game medium is driven into the reception by entertaining the player. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the drawn special lottery result is presented to the player when suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decorative body may be light-emittingly decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means. As a result, the decorative body emits and decorates, so that the player can be entertained by giving a strong impact to the player due to the above-mentioned action and effect. Therefore, the player can obtain the special lottery result drawn for the player. It is possible to make people think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "big hit"), raise expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, and suppress a decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect by emitting and decorating the decorative body, an effect for suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player (for example, It can be suitably used for (reach production), entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 11.
The game machine
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted, and a start operation unit.
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and
A slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating bodies". An internal lottery is executed when the rotation starts, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the lottery internal lottery is given. ”,“ The effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed. It has been done ”, etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 13, a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols and a starting operation unit for rotating the plurality of rotating bodies by the player operating the game machine after the game medium is loaded. And, according to the combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating cylinders and a stop symbol by all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It should be noted that the light emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means is when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of the winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorative bodies by the driving means may be rotated. As a result, the decorative body is light-emittingly decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, the lottery result of the internal lottery may be such that the decorative body emits light-decorates when the winning combination is won. As a result, the decorative body emits light-emitting decoration, which can give a strong impact to the player. When stopped at a specific combination of symbols, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "BB"), which raises the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect by emitting and decorating the decorative body, it is suitable for the effect of suggesting the drawn internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 14: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 11.
The game machine
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example). , Advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. As a result, in a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

In the light emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, when the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of the winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects to be presented to the player, the decorative body may be light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means, or the decorative body may be light-emitting and decorated when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination. However, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[effect]
As described above, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high appealing power to the player and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game by the light emitting decoration.

[Relationship between the above form and the above technical means]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is in the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are in the storage plate of the present invention, and the effect operation unit cover unit in the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of 310 are used as the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment is used as the first decorative portion of the present invention. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is used as the second decorative part of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 in the present embodiment are used as the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The substrate 352, the central button decorative substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention, respectively.

[Characteristic effects of this form]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed in a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 in which the main body frame 4 is openably closed. The plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that can be stored bulges forward, and the front end of the plate unit 200 is about 1/2 the total width of the door frame base 101. A central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit are provided concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, as well as having an effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101. It includes a 303b and a rotation operation unit 302. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 to which the effect operation unit 301 is attached to the upper surface is below the door window 101a that allows the inside of the game area 5a to be visually recognized. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the plate unit 200 (directing operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more prominent than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be appealed. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. Further, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly projected forward below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. At the same time, the length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his / her hand on the upper plate 201, the portion hidden by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emittingly decorated by the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the player is given a light-emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312. It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is light-emittingly decorated by the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the plate and the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate according to the gaming state. When the effect operation unit 301 is light-emitting and decorated by the ring decorative substrate 352, the center button decorative substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The light emitting decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front. Can be kept away from the player's view to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start port 2004 or the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. In addition, the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are light-emittingly decorated to direct the player to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area 5a, the effect image or movable By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as described above, the unit front cover 312 is light-emittingly decorated according to the game state to attract attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a in the gap. , The light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emitting decoration, and the player can be enjoyed. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the unit front cover 312 is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he / she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area is viewed. Is easier to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and it is possible to relax the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine that enhances the appeal to the player and plays the game. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 for the purpose, the handling of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201, and the like, making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semicircular ring shape, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, which makes it possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make a person play a game in a calm mood, to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decline in interest, and it is difficult for the player to get injured even if he / she makes contact at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe, and by reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, by simultaneously emitting and decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 protruding from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish unit 200 bulging forward below the door window 101a. Since the entire light-emitting decoration can be made to stand out, the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and there is nothing good for the player due to the light-emitting decoration of the whole. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the production operation unit 301 to encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit 301, the player participation type production can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are in the shape of a semi-doughnut, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 are used to upper the dish center depending on the game state. When the entire decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are luminescently decorated, the luminescent decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and think that there is something good, and the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body on the lower center of the plate. The player can be urged to rotate the 312b light in the same direction as it is rotating. Alternatively, by alternately illuminating the upper plate decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b arranged vertically, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light moves up and down. At the same time, the light moving up and down can urge the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the upper center decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the player is urged to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, it extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. On the right side unit 410 of the flat plate-shaped door frame, three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. The 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, so that the inside of the three side windows in the side window 410a is turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island facility) of the pachinko machine 1 through the space between the decoration portions 410b. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. , The game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

At this time, in the door frame 3 in which the left side side with respect to the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, of the two outer sides in the left-right direction of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the part of the door, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, as if it were seen by another player. By making it hard to feel, it is possible to let other players play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and the game changes to a predetermined game state, the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decorative substrate 413 cause the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window to emit light. By dazzling the inside of 410a, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be radiated in a band-like and radial manner, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled so that it is difficult to see the opposite side from between. In addition, the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b makes it possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration portion 410b, which diminishes the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a and the side window. The visibility through the 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, as a gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to have an advantage, the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light, and the side is caused by the glare. Visibility through the window 410a is reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1. Because it is possible to avoid the problem, it makes other players feel uncomfortable because they are worried about other players and cannot concentrate on the game, or it makes them feel lost due to the induction of mistakes. Can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, when a game state such as the arrival of a chance, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It can be more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. However, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window interior decoration portion 410b is not emitting light, the opposite side is passed between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the side window 410a. A player who can visually recognize (inside the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without doing so.

Further, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b having a certain height emit light, the portions having the same height in the game area 5a Can be made difficult for other players to see through the side window 410a. Therefore, by making a specific side window interior decoration portion 410b out of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light according to the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, when a game state such as the arrival of a chance, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It can be more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward long is provided with side windows 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off to turn off the side windows 410a. In the state where the visibility through the pachinko machine is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the island equipment does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily detect that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of the window, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side away from the left side side which is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened for maintenance or work such as replacement of the game board 5, the door frame 3 can be made less likely to get in the way by opening the door frame 3 widely, and deterioration of workability can be prevented. can do.

In addition, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light according to the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player may occur (so-called "big hit" game). Depending on the expected value), the decorative portion 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, etc., when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is made to emit light to make it difficult for other players to see, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state. When it is not done (when it is "lost"), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is not emitted or turned off, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even if it is easily seen by other players (a "big hit"). ) By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player without creating an awkward atmosphere, and at the same time, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, which enhances the interest of the player in the game. You can enjoy the game more.

Further, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming) that is advantageous to the player may occur (so-called "big hit" game). Depending on the expected value), the three side window interior decoration portions 410b may be made to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom sides, etc.), or among the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. The decoration portion 410b in the specific side window of the above may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, or the like, the higher the expected value, the more the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light in order from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game, suggest an expected value, increase the player's sense of expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition to light emission (lighting) and extinguishing, the light emitting modes of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above include a blinking pattern, a difference in emission color, and a change in emission color (for example, from a cold blue to hot). It may be a change to red in feeling, a change in blue-yellow-red that imitates a traffic signal, etc.), or a change in brightness (luminance), etc. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player can be obtained.

Therefore, on the contrary, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the gaming state is advantageous to the player depending on the presence / absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the above, the player is excited by how the three side window decoration portions 410b emit light during the execution of the effect. -It can be throbbing, raising the player's expectation and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the three side window interior decoration units 410b may be arbitrarily made to emit light or turn off. .. As a result, for example, when there is a low possibility (so-called expected value) of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player has an advantage during a reach effect or a reach development effect, the effect operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to make the decorative part 410b in the side window emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into it, so that when an advantageous gaming state does not occur (at the time of "loss"). In addition, it is possible to prevent an awkward atmosphere from being seen by other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when there is a high possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state will occur (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration unit 410b does not emit light. By doing so (or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), even if another player looks into it, an advantageous gaming state will occur, and the atmosphere will not be awkward and the interest will be reduced. In addition to being able to suppress it, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to set the timing and mode of light emission of the three side window interior decoration units 410b. As a result, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set, so that some players feel uncomfortable to be peeped and enjoy the game. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball pulling lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 non-rotatable and the ball pulling passage. Assuming that the 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream cannot be distributed to the ball removal passage 580b by the ball removal movable piece 592. It will continue to circulate to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and can be sent to the payout blade 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball pulling lever 593 is raised (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream moves into the payout passage. Instead of circulating to the downstream side of 580a, it will be distributed to the ball pulling passage 580b beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592, and may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment side via the ball pulling passage 580b. it can. Since the payout blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in the normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 makes the ball pulling movable piece 592 non-rotatable (first state). On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball pulling movable piece 592. The game balls B are paid out one by one at the payout blades 589, and the speed at which the game balls B on the upstream side of the payout blades 589 flow is relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball-extracting movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak and the opposite side of the portion of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 that comes into contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-extracting passage 580b, the ball-extracting movable piece 592 Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball pulling passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, since it is possible to reduce the damage of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a when the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) is replaced or maintained, the ball pulling lever 593 can be raised to rotate the ball pulling movable piece 592. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, flows over the ball pulling movable piece 592 to the ball pulling passage 580b side. Become. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon. In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since it is possible to move to the outside of the inner surface of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out due to the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592. For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame on the left side side with respect to the main body frame 4 and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame (axis core). When the door frame 3 attached to the door frame 3 that can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 extend in parallel facing each other and the main body. Connection connecting the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310X, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the frame 4 side with the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. The cable 503 extends toward the shaft core from a portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 toward the shaft core, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h to be mounted in the main body frame 4 After being held by the guide body 502a of the connecting cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the door is further extended to the vicinity of the shaft core, then folded back and extended in a direction away from the shaft core, and the door. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the frame 3. It is connected.

Then, when the door frame 3 whose front side of the main body frame 4 is closed (closed) is hinged around the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward so as to move away from the main body frame 4, so that the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the mounting shaft 502c away from the shaft core so that the connection cable guide member 502 tilts with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 as the connection cable 503 is deformed. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this way, the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, so that the connection cable guide The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to get in the way.

In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends the tip portion from the rotatably mounted mounting shaft 502c toward the shaft core side, the base end portion of the guide member can be extended like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded portion of the connection cable 503 can be positioned so as not to be in the way.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 which is open to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 Is moved in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is held without being sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, during maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be smoothly performed, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the connection cable 503 that extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side and then is folded back and extends in a direction away from the shaft core is placed at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connecting cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. Since the tangent line that is in contact and passes through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connecting cable guide member 502 is at an angle or less that intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the axis in the longitudinal direction extending the connecting cable guide member 502 is the door frame 3. The angle with respect to the rear surface can be prevented from being close to a right angle. Further, on the door frame 3 side, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, the door frame is held with respect to the main body frame 4. When closing 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axis side.

From these facts, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 does not close or the connection cable guide is provided. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the tip of the member 502 abuts on the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is broken. Therefore, when a problem occurs during the game in which the door frame 3 must be opened and closed for maintenance, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. It can be smoothly performed, the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the axis is closer than the cable holder 103a). It is provided at a position close to) and can press the connection cable 503 toward the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by contacting it (the shaft core of the speaker duct 103 rather than the cable holder 103a). A part that protrudes rearward on the side) is provided. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, a tangent line passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and tangent to a circle passing through the pressing portion centering on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member The 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the frame pieces 502b are provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate guide body 502a increases and it becomes difficult to bend, so that the connection cable 503 is firmly connected. The connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 composed of many electric wires. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, and the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good condition, and more electric wires can be guided. Since this is possible, the electrical connections between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be integrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, with the connection cable 503 attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 through the through hole 502d of the connecting cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502, and the connecting cable guide member 502 The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by disconnecting the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to avoid the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is under the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since it communicates with the space (internal space 40a of the curtain plate) between the port member 47 and the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the assembly 40, the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side provide the main body frame speaker. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently secured, the deep bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the deep bass sound can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. Can be done. Therefore, by providing the cable mounting recess 501h for mounting the connection cable guide member 502 on the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, the deep bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and a connection cable guide member 502 that exerts the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable mounting recess 501h, and the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. It can be avoided and the door frame 3 can be surely closed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame in the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion port 501b of the base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (player side), and below the door window 101a, the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed. The front end of the port member 47 is open near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member is opened in the lower part of the front surface of the door frame 3. The speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end portion on the opposite side in the left-right direction from 47. Then, the speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4, and the speaker unit 620a covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound such as the sound, music, and sound effect output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 is generated by the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through the speaker ports 211b of the door frame 3 and 621a. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate internal space 40a composed of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. Is transmitted and radiated from the port member 47 to the player side in front. At this time, since the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the enclosure 624 The volume can be increased as much as possible, and the sound extending in the low frequency range can be output forward from the main body frame speaker 622. Further, since the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) in the enclosure 624 are opened. ) Can be made wider in the depth direction (front-back direction) than before, so that the width of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c in the front-rear direction is increased, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a is increased. It is possible to reduce the attenuation of the sound from the space to the inner space 40a side of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a tubular shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the bass range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member can be inverted. It is possible to output a sound in which the bass is amplified from 47. Then, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined, so that the volume becomes louder. , It is possible to make the player hear a richer bass sound, and it is possible to entertain the player with sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates it forward (so-called a bass-ref type speaker). When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phases of the sound are the same as each other, so that the amplitude of the sound wave becomes large and the volume of the sound becomes loud. Compared to the case of using the passive radiator of, the sound output can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion port 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimensions thereof can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a where the game is played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the outer frame lower assembly 40 forming the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion port 501b in the main body frame 4. Since it is possible to make the vertical dimension of the side relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. , It is possible to output a sound with richer bass, and it is possible to entertain the sound to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c are inclined in the front-rear direction, the connection portion 621c comes into contact with the connection cylinder portion 43a and comes into contact with each other simply by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, the same effect as described above can be obtained, and since no sliding resistance is generated between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance and the like.

Further, since the sealing member 48 seals between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board can be relatively reduced. The insertion port 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 having a wider game area 5a, the wider game area 5a can make the player more entertaining, and the wide game area 5a can be provided through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by seeing, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the player.

Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end portion in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end portion on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are separated from each other in the outer frame. 2 (Pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position some distance forward, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and as described above, the player can hear the sound. On the other hand, you can hear rich bass sound.

Further, as described above, since the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is made to interfere with each other in the vicinity of the player and amplified, other pachinko machines 1 are separated from the pachinko machine 1. The player will receive the unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a loud volume and rich bass, which raises expectations for the game. Can be made to. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing on another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, so that it is difficult for the pachinko machine 1 to recognize that an opportunity has arrived. It is possible to reduce the number of other players looking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peep causes discomfort to the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set to the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c of the above is the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a with respect to the left-right direction can be set from the vicinity of the left end portion where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center, and the main body frame. In No. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, other members are arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction in between, or the other members are enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the pachinko machine from other pachinko machines by other members, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction in between, the game ball B is discharged to the outside in that space. Base unit 620b provided with a ball pulling-out guide unit 627, a discharge ball receiving unit 628, etc., and a ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , A power supply board 630 that controls the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game medium ball, and the like can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be surely provided with them. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation unit 303a projecting upward from the upper surface of the dish unit 200 protruding forward and downward in the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played. An annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b that surrounds the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and has a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an annular rotation operation unit that surrounds the outer circumference of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. Since the 302 is arranged so as to be inclined so that the front end side of the upper surface is lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The (face) faces in a certain direction, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily seen, and three large operation units (pressing operation) arranged concentrically. The unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can be operated in a form clearly different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is provided, and it is possible to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines and strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are operated by the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player-participation-type production, and the game is advanced so that the player-participation-type production is executed (here, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). ), And when the player participation type production is executed, it is possible to easily participate in the production, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 by the elevating mechanism including the operation button elevating drive motor 367 or the like according to the game state (lowering position). ) And the protruding position (rising position) protruding upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371. Since the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be accepted. Therefore, the central pressing operation unit 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be pressed in the retracted position, there is an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b that does not move between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a with the momentum of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the momentum of pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. Can be made less likely to occur, and the player-participatory production can be surely enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Then, by moving to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of being greatly projected upward on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, so that the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303a The 303b can be made to stand out, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making people think that it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type production in which the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In this protruding position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically, for example. , When the central pressing operation unit 303a must be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed. When the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b must be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed or rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated, or when the rotation operation unit 302 must be rotated, the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a It can be induced to press. As a result, the player can perform the pressing operation and the rotation operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation and the rotation operation. , It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the pressing operation and the rotation operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production in which the pressing operation and the rotation operation are performed. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

Further, it is equipped with a notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600, and in a player participation type effect, the player performs a central pressing operation in a protruding position where the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be pressed. If the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is mistakenly pressed when the unit 303a should be pressed, the center pressing operation unit 303a is notified by the notification means that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, so that the pressing operation is redone and the pressing operation is performed. The central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed can be reliably pressed, the player can enjoy the player participation type production, and the mistake in the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player loses by making a mistake. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable, to entertain the player-participatory production, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the player thinks that the central pressing operation unit 303a is being pressed correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type production despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion and the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the player's belief can be corrected, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is correctly pressed to participate in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game ball B for bulging forward and performing the game in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is performed. In the dish unit 200 provided with, an annular rotation operation unit 302 whose outer peripheral side surface, upper surface, and inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside and which can rotate around an axis extending vertically, and inside the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 including the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is arranged, and the rotation operation unit 302 is set according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation-type effect of rotating or pressing the pressing operation unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that the rotation operation or the pressing operation can be performed. Since the production is changed, the player can participate in the production, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside to operate the rotation operation unit 302, and the most from the rotation center of the rotation operation unit 302. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the rotation operation is performed by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface by rubbing it in one direction by the player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when the player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at high speed is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above, so that the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 at a high speed. However, it is possible to entertain the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired at an early stage, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. It is possible to continuously entertain the player-participatory production in which the operation unit 302 is rotated and operated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or with a light force, in the player participation type production, the player is required to perform various rotation operations. It is possible to request different rotation operations for each, and it is possible to present a wider variety of player participation type productions to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (composed of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) that the player touches and rotates is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) in an arc shape from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not get in the way even if the rotation operation is performed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than directly beside the rotation operation unit 302 (direction perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it is easy to touch the outer peripheral side surface, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type production. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle and a rotation operation as compared with a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since the movement of the player at the time of the above can be increased, the player can be made to feel that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit can be used in the player participation type production. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation of the 302 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the upper surface other than the outer peripheral side surface is exposed. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation such as the inner peripheral side surface, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved, and the game of rotating the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to make the participatory production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 302 is pressed. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are fully enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. Can be made to.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be grasped by the player. The appearance of the part 302 can be completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, and the like. As a result, for example, when the rotation operation unit is shaped like the steering wheel of an automobile, the player thinks that the rotation operation unit is gripped and operated at the moment when the player sees the rotation operation unit. When a player-participation-type production that requires a variety of rotation operations is executed, it is not possible to perform a rotation operation different from that of the handle-handling, and the player-participation-type production is performed. There is a risk that it will not be enjoyable and the interest in the game will be reduced. However, in this embodiment, since the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., the player is prejudiced about how to operate the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to wipe it off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as desired by the player, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, so that the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that store the game balls B for bulging forward and performing the game in front of and below the game area 5a in which the game is played on the game board 5. On the upper surface of the dish unit 200 provided with the above, an annular rotation operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically, a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged, and when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect the rotation. , The rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). The part that meshes with) is only a part of the entire circumference of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decorative substrate By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of 352, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 are sufficiently (uniformly) emitted and decorated. The rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. A plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted (turned on / off) in the same direction and at the same speed. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates while the specific parts of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are light-emittingly decorated. It is possible to make the illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to enjoy the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to the game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, the player can be prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. A plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated together with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotation operation unit 302 is emitting light. , It can give a strong impact to the player, it can give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the light emitting decoration, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by reminiscent of it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted to emit light, and the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the annular rotation operation unit 302 is for the rotation operation, and it is easy for the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. At the same time, it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotatably attached around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation is performed when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the plate unit 200 has a configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340). Since the above can be compactly put together, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, it is provided with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotationally drives the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, the rotation that can be light-emitting and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around and emits light according to the game state. By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out below and in front of the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be applied. Can be made heavier. Further, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the operation ring drive motor 342 stops the rotation at each predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated by reciprocating the rotation operation unit 302 within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342. In this way, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operation feelings to the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to support a wider variety of player-participation-type productions. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing a game.

Further, since the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. Since the operation feeling can be supported by the light by sequentially emitting light in the direction or sequentially emitting light in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it becomes easier to secure a space below the rotation operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be decorated with light emission more uniformly and brightly, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the central button decorative substrate 376 are used to illuminate and decorate the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in good condition. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from them, only the rotation operation unit 302 is luminescent and decorated, only the pressing operation unit 303 is luminescent and decorated, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is luminescent and decorated, and the outer peripheral pressing operation Only the unit 303b can be light-emitting and decorated, so that the player can easily recognize the operation unit to be operated, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed.

Further, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape on the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light turns by sequentially emitting light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 Effect operation The effect of the ring decorative substrate 352 and the effect of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when urging the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 are sequentially emitted. , The light emitting decoration that the light rotates in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 also rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, or the player can use it. On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emitting decoration such as rotating the light in the opposite direction. In this way, since it is possible to show the player the effect of various light emission, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

More Therefore, for example, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the center button decorative substrate 376 to emit light in this order, or in the reverse order, the rotation operation unit 302 is provided. It is possible to show an effect of light concentrated on the central pressing operation unit 303a and an effect of light diffused from the central pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, a wider variety of light emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to promote the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 provided with the game area 5a in which the game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. A door window 101a in which the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front is formed on the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is closed to the door frame 3, and a glass unit 160 provided with a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window 101a. The upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game ball B for playing a game are attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door frame base 101, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The provided dish unit 200 is attached.

Then, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the upper center of the dish 312a and the lower center of the dish 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 having the same shape. 453 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer peripheral pressing are performed. Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape as if a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is circular, and are provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the outer circumference of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved, and the appealing power can be enhanced by directing the player's attention to the inside (game area 5a, rotation operation unit 302, and pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. , The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine for playing by increasing the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape as if the cylindrical shape is an annular shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotation operation unit 302 can be compared with the case where the rotation operation unit 302 has a flat disk shape. Since it is easy for the fingers to be applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. Further, since the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, the player can put his arm or put his finger on the upper plate decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. In addition, the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation unit 302 makes it possible to prevent the player from getting too close to the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotation operation unit 302 for the arm and fingers to move for the player to operate, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed, the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type production is executed, and the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Participatory production can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between the retracted position (lowering position) and the protruding position (rising position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of protruding greatly upward from the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, raise the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's attention is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 becomes more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved between the descending position and the ascending position according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, thereby prompting the player to operate the effect operating unit 301. It is possible to allow the player to accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is set to the descending position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation is performed. The unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a become operable, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved from the lowering position to the ascending position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a project upward from the rotation operating unit 302. The rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative board 352, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate are provided. And the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are luminescently decorated to improve the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power by strongly attracting the interest of the player. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are appropriately emitted with light. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or can be guided from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. Depending on the state, the player can be made to operate the effect operation unit 301 or play the game in the game area 5a, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided in the gaming area 5a as a first starting port of FIG. 131. The main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 is provided as a game control means capable of advancing the game based on entering the ball in 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting changing board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as a selection means, and a setting switch provided on the setting changing board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as a determining means. It is equipped with 1311a. The setting switching button 1311b selects one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting values that are advantageous for the player, and uses the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b as the selection signal. As one transmission path, the signal can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern or the like in which a signal from the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A is transmitted. The setting switch 1311a determines the set value selected by the setting changeover button 1311b and uses the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a as the determination signal as the main control of FIG. 144A as the second transmission path different from the first transmission path. The signal from the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300 can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern in which a signal is transmitted. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are arranged so as to be separated from each other.

Specifically, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switch 1311a. The wiring pattern in which the OFF signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted on the main control board 1310X. The wiring pattern to be transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a are transmitted. The wiring pattern) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted. The routing with the wiring pattern to be performed is also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other).

In this way, when any one of the plurality of set values (setting values 1 to 6) that is advantageous to the player is selected and the set value is determined, the determined set value is used. By advancing the game based on the game, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, by arranging the first transmission path and the second transmission path so as to be separated from each other, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided in the gaming area 5a as a first starting port of FIG. 131. The game can proceed based on entering the ball in 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, a setting switching button 1311b provided on a setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as a selection means, and a main control of FIG. 151 as a storage means. Main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on board 1310X, setting change of main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as selection display setting means and determination means Setting switch 1311a provided on board 1310Y, main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as display means. The setting display 1310g provided for the main control board 1310X is provided. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b can select any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting switch 1311a can set the selection permission of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b or the display permission of the setting value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, and can determine the setting value. Is. The setting display 1310g can display the set value.

When the power switch 630a turns on the pachinko machine 1 after the setting value selection permission is set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is displayed on the setting display 1310g and the setting switch. It is determined by 1311a, and the determined set value is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. When the setting switch 1311a sets the display permission of the set value after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a, the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. It has become like.

Specifically, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key cylinder is clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating the setting switch by 60 degrees toward. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and the maximum When the set value 6 which is a value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. Subsequently, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off, and then 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM.

When confirming the currently set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key is inserted clockwise 60. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a to the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value (set value 1 to set when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM. The set value among the values 6) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

In this way, the set value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6) that is advantageous for the player is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, by proceeding with the game based on this set value, it is possible to provide the player with the game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, since the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g, the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM can be confirmed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided in the gaming area 5a as a first starting port of FIG. 131. The main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 is provided as a game control means capable of advancing the game based on entering the ball in 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, a setting switching button 1311b provided on a setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as a selection means, a selection permission setting means, and a determination means. A setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A is provided. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b mainly controls the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b as a selection signal by selecting one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. It can be output to the substrate 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can output a signal of turning on the setting key 1311a as a selection permission signal for permitting the selection of the set value by the setting changeover button 1311b to the main control board 1310X, and the setting changeover button 1311b. The setting value selected by is determined and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a can be output to the main control board 1310X as the determination signal.

The detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, is transmitted to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as another control means provided separately from the main control board 1310X. It is supposed to be entered.

The main control board 1310X is predetermined as a storage means in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151, and as a signal effective control means in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. A process of setting a value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A after determining that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, and a step in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 as a signal invalidation control means. In the determination of S18, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, and in step S20B, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 0, and the main control side of FIG. 175 is used as the setting change control means. The setting change process of step 37 in the power-on process is included. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the determination in step S18 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, which is the signal effective control means, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20A. The process of setting the value 1 can enable the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal. In the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the signal invalidation control means, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, and the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20B. The process of setting the value 0 can invalidate the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal. The setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the setting change control means, is predetermined in the determination of step S18 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 175, which is the signal effective control means. The process of determining that the set value change permission condition is satisfied and setting the value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A is a selection signal, that is, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and a determination signal. When the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is enabled, the set value can be stored and held in the main control built-in RAM.

Before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a, the pachinko machine 1 is preset by the power switch 630a so that the setting key ON signal, which is the selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, can be input. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (specifically, first, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) is confirmed, and then the main body with respect to the outer frame 2 The work of opening the frame 4 is performed, then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the following procedure, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1), and the setting key ON, which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, is turned on. When a signal is input, it is determined in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, which is a signal valid control means, that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and setting change permission is permitted in step S20A. By the process of setting the value 1 to the flag CS-FLG, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal, are enabled and set. When the set value selected by the changeover button 1311b is determined by the setting switch 1311a, the determined set value is determined by the setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the setting change control means. It is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a, the pachinko machine 1 is preset by the power switch 630a so that the setting key ON signal, which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, cannot be input. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (specifically, first, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) is confirmed, and then the main body with respect to the outer frame 2 The work of opening the frame 4 is performed, then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without performing the procedure of turning on the setting key 1311a at all.) Is not input, and it is determined in step S18 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the signal invalidation control means, that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, and the setting is made in step S20B. By the process of setting the value 0 to the change permission flag CS-FLG, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the decision key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal, are invalidated. It has become.

In this way, the set value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6) that is advantageous for the player is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, by proceeding with the game based on this set value, it is possible to provide the player with the game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided in the gaming area 5a as a first starting port of FIG. 131. A game based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Can proceed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A and a setting changeover button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as the first operation unit. The RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as the second operation unit, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 as the storage means, and the information storage control means. As a result, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 and the process of step S38 of the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 are provided as the information erasure control means. The setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b can accept the first operation capable of changing the setting of the set value. The RAM clear switch 1310f is separate from the setting switch 1311a and the setting changeover button 1311b, and can accept a second operation capable of clearing other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. .. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 can control to store and hold the set value which is the first information in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, it is possible to control to erase the game backup information which is the second information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It can be done.

When the setting switch 1311a and the setting changeover button 1311b receive the first operation during the period in which the first operation can be received, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 identifies the main control built-in RAM. After controlling to store and retain the set value which is the first information in the area, the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 stores and retains the set value in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is possible to control the deletion of the game backup information, which is the second information to be performed.

Specifically, when performing the first operation that can change the setting of the set value, first, before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is inserted into the setting key of the cylinder. Is inserted, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the processes of steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). That is, the "period during which the first operation can be accepted" is the steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. It is the period until the processing of. Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and is maximum. When the set value 6 which is the value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). ~ S222 is repeated). Subsequently, in order to determine the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned OFF, and then rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the game backup information is initialized).

When the RAM clear switch 1310f accepts the second operation during the period in which the second operation can be accepted, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is the first in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The second process in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is stored and retained in an area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, without performing control to store and retain the set value which is information. It is possible to control the deletion of the game backup information, which is information.

Specifically, when performing a second operation capable of clearing an area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, first, the power switch 630a is pressed while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the main control MPU 1310a (the processes of steps S14 and S16A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). That is, the “period during which the second operation can be accepted” is the steps S14 and S16A in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. It is the period until the processing of. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the game backup information is initialized).

In this way, the game backup information, which is the second information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, is received by the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, or by the RAM clear switch 1310f. Since it can be deleted by accepting the second operation, it is possible to give a variation to the method of erasing the game backup information which is the second information by the staff such as the clerk of the game hall. Therefore, it is possible to have variations in the erasing method.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided in the gaming area 5a as a first starting port of FIG. 131. A game based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Can proceed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as an operating means, a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, and a main control of FIG. 144A as a selection means. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 as the storage means, the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as the selection permission means and the determination means. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information storage control means, and the step in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information erasure control means. The main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is provided as the process of S38 and the start execution control means. The RAM clear switch 1310f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b is one of a set value 1 to a set value 6 in the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM as a plurality of start-up operation setting information that can be executed when the game machine is started. The set value can be selected.

As described as the mode of setting the change of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM (modification example (1) by the common hardware configuration described above), the movable body (accessory) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (operation of a movable body (role), lighting of a light emitting body)" is assigned as a setting value 1 to the operation and lighting of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. As the setting value 2, the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "the operation of the movable body (accessory)" is assigned, and as the setting value 3, the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned, and the set value. As 4, "Detailed movement of the movable body (feature) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, interference check with other structures and other movable bodies (features), other movable bodies (features)" ) Is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "operation order, etc.)", and as the setting value 5, "light emitter 1 port unit (main control MPU 1310a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port)" is assigned. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter according to)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned as the setting value 6.

The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting switch 1311a can allow the selection of the set value which is the start-up operation setting information by the setting changeover button 1311b, and can determine the set value which is the start-up operation setting information. .. The setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 controls to store and hold the set value, which is the start-up operation setting information determined by the setting switch 1311a, in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is something that can be done. The process of step S38 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side in FIG. 175 can control to erase the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The timer interrupt process on the main control side of FIG. 177 can control the start-up of the game machine based on the set value which is the start-up operation setting information stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. is there.

When the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after the setting switch 1311a allows the selection of the set value which is the start-up operation setting information, the start-up operation setting selected by the setting changeover button 1311b The set value which is the information is determined by the setting switch 1311a, and the set value which is the operation setting information at startup is stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM by the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. The information that is retained and stored in an area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 and stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The pachinko machine 1 is started by the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 based on the set value which is the held start-up operation setting information.

Specifically, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key cylinder is clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating the setting switch by 60 degrees toward. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the processes of steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and is maximum. When the set value 6 which is the value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). ~ S222 is repeated). Subsequently, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off, and then 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175), and the main control side power supply in FIG. 175. In the process of step S40 of the on-time processing, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the initial setting, and the game proceeds based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without allowing the setting value to be selected, which is the operation setting information at startup, by the setting switch 1311a, and the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period. When the unit is operated, the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, and the main control built-in RAM The pachinko machine 1 is started by the timer interrupt process on the main control side of FIG. 177 based on the set value which is the operation setting information at the time of starting which is stored in the specific area.

Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. When the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310a is in a predetermined period from the start of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175 to the processing of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, after that, in the process of step S38 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175. Clear the areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, set the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the initial setting in the process of step S40 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, and set the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of.

In this way, the setting value which is the startup operation setting information selected from any one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is the plurality of startup operation setting information that can be executed at the time of starting the pachinko machine 1. Is stored in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, so that the operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, the information is stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The pachinko machine 1 can be started based on the set value which is the operation setting information at the time of starting. Therefore, it is possible to have variations in the activation method.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided in the gaming area 5a as a first starting port of FIG. 131. A game based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Can proceed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as an operating means, a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, and a main control of FIG. 144A as a selection means. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151 as the storage means, the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as the selection permission means and the determination means. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information storage control means, and the step in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information erasure control means. It includes the processing of S38. The RAM clear switch 1310f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b can select any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting switch 1311a can allow the setting value to be selected by the setting switching button 1311b, and can determine the setting value. The setting change processing in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 can control the setting information determined by the setting switch 1311a to be stored and held in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The process of step S38 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side in FIG. 175 can control to erase the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the power switch 630a turns on the pachinko machine 1 after the setting switch 1311a allows the selection of the set value, the setting switch 1311a determines the set value selected by the setting changeover button 1311b. The determined set value is stored and held in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the information stored and held in a region other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 in step S38. It is designed to be erased by processing.

Specifically, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key cylinder is clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating the setting switch by 60 degrees toward. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the processes of steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and is maximum. When the set value 6 which is the value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). ~ S222 is repeated). Subsequently, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off, and then 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 is performed).

When the power switch 630a turns on the pachinko machine 1 without allowing the setting information to be selected by the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period, the main The information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175.

Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. When the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310a is in a predetermined period from the start of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175 to the processing of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, after that, in the process of step S38 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175. Clears areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this way, the set value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6) that is advantageous for the player is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, by proceeding with the game based on this set value, it is possible to provide the player with the game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, after the setting switch 1311a enables the selection of the setting information, the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting switch 1311a determines the setting information selected by the setting switching button 1311b. Based on the information stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 in step S38. The pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a without being allowed to select the setting information by the setting switch 1311a and the "information erasing due to the setting change" that is deleted by the process, and within a predetermined period. Based on the operation of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175. It is possible to erase the information of either one of the "information erasure accompanying the operation of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f" that is erased by the process of.

Although the pachinko machine 1 has been described above with reference to suitable forms, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its design can be changed in various ways.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end while the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is detected. Although not shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different production modes, or when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged. It is possible to perform a wider variety of player-participation-type productions, entertain the players, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 303 (center pressing operation unit 303a and outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the ascending position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the descending position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the ascending position, the downward movement may be restricted after the pressing operation unit 303 moves slightly downward from the ascending position.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit 200 having the rotation operation unit 302 provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 protruding forward is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is arranged inside the dish unit. At the same time, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to entertain the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a which is communicated with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting cylinder portion 43a is provided in the main body frame 4, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

The pachinko machines described so far include the following technical ideas.
"A game board in which a game area in which a launched game ball can flow down is formed, and as the game area, a first game area in which a game ball launched with a predetermined firing force can flow down, and the predetermined game area. In a gaming machine having a second gaming area in which a gaming ball launched with a specific firing force stronger than the firing force can flow down.
It is provided with a connecting passage portion through which a game ball launched with the specific firing force can pass before entering the second game area.
The connecting passage section is provided with a plurality of release sections for discharging the passed game balls to the second game area so that the passing game balls enter the second game area at different locations. A branch portion that separates the passages is provided so that a plurality of ball passages are formed in the vertical direction on the upstream side of the plurality of discharge portions.
The first ball passage of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion communicates with the first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions, and the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion. The second ball passage is a gaming machine configured to communicate with the second discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions. "

Such a game machine is provided with a plurality of ball passages in a connecting passage and a plurality of discharge parts communicating with each ball passage, and the entry point to the second game area differs depending on which ball passage is passed, and as a result, the first 2 The falling mode in the game area is different. If the falling mode in the second game area is different, the probability of entering the ball will also be different. Therefore, the player has to operate the steering wheel carefully, and many of them have caught the target ball passage. If the game ball can be acquired, a sufficient sense of accomplishment and satisfaction can be obtained. Therefore, since the consciousness is also concentrated on launching the game ball toward the second game area, the interest of the game is increased.

In the game machine, a drop port connecting the first ball passage and the second ball passage is provided in a part of the branch portion of the connecting passage portion, and a part of the game balls flowing through the first ball passage is a second ball passage. It may be possible to fall from the second release unit to a specific location in the second game area.
By doing so, in order to aim at the first emission portion connected to the first ball passage, both the launch direction and the launch force must be satisfied, so that the handle operation is performed more carefully and focused on the consciousness.

[20. Other forms of pachinko machines 1]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the other form 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 215. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the other embodiment 1 is mainly a modified version of the game board 5 and the handle unit 180 of the pachinko machine 1, the description thereof will be omitted except for those related to them in principle. Therefore, in FIGS. 190 to 215 and 1 to 189, the components having the same sign are, in principle, components having the same or the same function.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 202, the game board 5 of the other embodiment 1 has a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a on the front surface, a center member 2500 attached to the game panel 1100, and the game panel 1100. It consists of an effect unit 814 attached to the rear side.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 202, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 made of opaque plywood, a back decoration member 817 for applying decoration 816 for the background, a game area 5a, and a center member 2500. It is provided with a front component 1000 and a surrounding member 1000.

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of plywood as described above, and cells made of synthetic resin to be the first decorative surface 819 are attached to the entire front surface thereof, and the first decorative surface 819 is used as a background. The decoration 820a (random arrangement of the boy's face in this other form 1) is printed. Further, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is provided at a position substantially at the center of the base panel 1110.

[Back decoration member]
As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 204, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 205, and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 198 and 199, the back side decorative member 817 for applying the decoration 816 for the background is the effect of the effect unit 814 described later. It is arranged on the back surface of the base panel 1110 via the support frame 852 (specifically, since it is screwed to the front surface of the effect support frame 852, it is morphologically integrated with the effect support frame 852). With the decoration 816a for the background having the sameness as the decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 on the front surface (including not only the uniformity of appearance but also the conceptual unity) (for example, the decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819). A second decorative surface 822 is formed which is connected to complete one character.). The second decorative surface 822 is provided with a perspective three-dimensional effect on the decoration 816 itself by arranging several blocks of plate pieces 822p at different positions in the front-rear direction.
The back side decorative member 817 includes an upper decorative member 817a, a lower decorative member 817b, a right decorative member 817c, and a left decorative member so as to correspond to the four sides of the through hole 1112 for mounting the center member 2500 of the base panel 1110. It is formed of 817d, and the second decorative surfaces 822 of the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c are arranged so as to face the inside of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d. The second decorative surface 822 is arranged so as to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. 198. Since the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is arranged to face the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 in this way, it is not in the player's field of view under normal conditions, but is shown in FIG. When viewed from an angle, part of it can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the decoration 816 for the background extends to the invisible depth of the base panel 1110, so that the three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and not shown. A windmill, an obstacle nail, etc. that change the fall of the game ball are appropriately provided according to the content of the game, and an out ball opening 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest place.
Most of these members are made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Previous component]
As shown in FIG. 203, the front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 for partitioning the upper outside of the game area 5a and the center member 2500, and an inner rail 1001 for partitioning the side and the lower side of the game area 5a and the center member 2500. It has a frame shape having rails 1002, and a game ball launched from the launch rail 544 passes through the launch passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a or the upper part of the center member 2500. You will be guided.
The front component 1000 is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, and its surface can be seen through when it is installed on the base panel 1110. On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of the other embodiment 1 has the background decoration 820a over the entire front surface, so that the front component 1000 is hardly conspicuous in the state of being camouflaged by the background decoration 820a. All of the front surface of the base panel 1110 appears to be a large gaming area 5a. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine surrounded by the opaque front component, the visual effect as if the entire game panel 1100 is expanded to the game area 5a can be obtained.
In this other form 1, the decoration 820a for the background inside and outside the game area 5a is unified in design (including not only the uniformity of the appearance but also the ideological unity) to visually expand the game area 5a. However, the decoration 820a for the background of the portion corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component 1000 may be made into a different design with no uniformity. In such a case, since the decoration of the front component 1000 can be covered by printing the first decorative surface 819, it is not necessary to decorate the front component 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game panel 1100 of the other form 1 is configured as described above, and is used for a background due to the difference in depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back surface of the game panel 1100. Since the decorations 816 and 20 of the above give a three-dimensional effect of perspective, it is possible to provide a novel game machine.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 is projected from the mounting flange portion 830 having a contour slightly larger than the contour of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 and the back side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to be loosely fitted in the through hole 1112. It has an inner frame portion 831 and an enclosure frame 832 projecting from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a, and the entire frame is a transparent synthetic resin. Is formed of.
A tapered portion 833 that is inclined toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500. In the other embodiment 1, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 196, the tapered portion 833 of at least the portion that can enter the player's field of view during the game (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 of the upper half of the center member 2500) penetrates through the taper portion 833. Conventionally, the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 are set to be shallowly hooked so as to be hooked on the edge of the hole 1112. By doing so, the light that illuminates the inside of the through hole 1112 changes like a prism through the tapered portion 833 of the mounting flange portion 830 and leaks to the outside. Therefore, the light leaking from the through hole 1112 is around the center member 2500. Can be easily and effectively decorated.

Further, the center member 2500 is a plate having an effect region 834 facing the drum 854 described later of the effect unit 814 and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a inside the enclosure frame 832. It has a shape-shaped decorative member 836 and.

[Production area-Light guide plate unit]
A light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of the drum unit 855, which will be described later, is provided in the effect area 834 of the center member 2500. As shown in FIG. 200, the light guide plate unit 837 is obtained by fitting the light guide plate 842 into a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 incorporating a light emitting device 838 and a horizontal frame 840. The light emitting device 838 of the 839 and the horizontal frame 840 irradiates the light guide incident end surface of the light guide plate 842 with light to display a predetermined image in a dramatic manner.
The light guide plate 842 is fitted in a state in which rattling of about several mm (for example, 3 mm) occurs with respect to the display window 841. By doing so, even if the light guide plate 842 is thermally expanded, stress is less likely to be applied, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, for the same purpose, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in a state where a part of four sides is fixed with screws (not shown) or the like and the other sides are non-restraint and movable.

[Decorative members]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate projecting from the inside of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841, and has a game area on the surface. It has a decorative surface 835 having a height that is substantially flush with 5a. As shown in FIG. 201, the decorative surface 835 is consistent with the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (including not only the unification of appearance but also the unification of ideas). 843 for the background with (.) Is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 200, the difference in position and size between the effect area 834 and the through hole 1112 shown by the imaginary line in the figure (marginal). Can be filled in a natural way. That is, the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 naturally bites into the inside of the center member 2500. Further, although the decoration is used for uniformity, the light emitting decoration body may be arranged so as to straddle the outside and the inside of the center member 2500.
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decorative member 836 according to the size of the effect area 834, it is possible to correspond to many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500.
The decoration 843 drawn on the decorative surface 835 of the present other form 1 is drawn with ink having excellent light-shielding property, and therefore, the second decorative surface 822 that can be seen through the non-decorative portion of the transparent decorative member 836. By contrasting with the decoration 816 of, the three-dimensional effect is further increased. Further, the light-shielding property of the decoration 843 also has an advantage that the light illuminated from the inside of the through hole 1112 is indirectly softened.
Further, in the other embodiment 1, a decorative lamp 844H for decoration is provided on the upper front surface of the effect support frame 852 described later and above the drum 854 described later, and overlaps with the decorative lamp 844H of the decorative member 836. A notch 845 for avoiding polymerization is formed at the position. As a result, the light of the decorative lamp 844H is not likely to be reflected by the decorative member 836 and become difficult to see, so that the sharpness of the decorative lamp 844H is improved.

[Auxiliary items attached to the center member]
As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the center member 2500 enters from the stage shelf 2503, which causes the game ball to fall into the game area 5a while moving in the left-right direction, and the game area 5a, below the outside of the enclosure frame 832. It is integrally equipped with a so-called accessory consisting of a warp passage 847 that guides the game ball B to the stage shelf 2503. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly under the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a as described above, and if the game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, a prize can be won with a high probability.

Further, in the upper right outer half portion of the center member 2500 when facing the front of the enclosure frame 832, a discharge portion 848 for guiding the game ball jumping over the upper part of the center member 2500 along the outer rail 1001 to the lower right side of the game area 5a is provided. Has been done. The discharge portion 848 has a size approximately one game ball, and Kamaboko-shaped obstacle ridges 849 are alternately projected at substantially equal pitches on the right inner wall and the left inner wall of the front view in the passage. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 comes into contact with a large number of obstacle ridges 849 and meanders, and for an appropriate amount of time as if it falls while colliding with an obstacle nail in the game area 5a. It is guided to the lower right side of the game area 5a by hanging.

Further, in the lower right outer half of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, a second starting port 2004 in which the winning opening is opened and closed by the rotation of the opening / closing piece 850 is provided, and the second starting port 2004 and the discharging portion are provided. A pass-through type gate portion 2003 is provided in the middle of the 848 in the vertical direction. This gate portion 2003 is installed in an extension portion 830a extending laterally from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500 in a lateral peninsula shape, and the rear portion is aligned with the extension portion 830a of the center member 2500 and the base panel 1110. It is housed in a bay-shaped notch 1112a carved in the through hole 1112 of the above. A gate portion 2003 (the same applies to other winning openings) is installed in the extending portion 830a protruding from the mounting flange portion 830 in a peninsula shape, and the bay-shaped cut portion 1112a is cut into the through hole 1112. Compared to the case where the gate part 2003, etc., which has its own mounting flange part around it in an independent form, is installed separately, the mounting flange part on the center member 2500 side is not required. The area of the veneer plate of the base panel 1110 in the portion where the game ball flows can be increased accordingly. It should be noted that the plywood has features such as easy driving and adjustment of nails and difficulty in pulling out the nails even after long-term use. Therefore, it is preferable to use plywood as much as possible for the portion where the obstacle nail is provided. The game ball that has entered the discharge unit 848 is once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, it is discharged to the area of the veneer plate where the obstacle nail is provided. That's what it means.

[Direction unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and is, for example, a display device 851 capable of displaying the result of a lottery regarding a big hit started by detecting a game ball by the first start port 2002 as game information. A frame-shaped effect support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type using the liquid crystal display device or the like, or an actual operation type capable of displaying the game information by changing the mechanical rotation / stop of a moving object, but the other embodiment. In 1, the latter production type is used.
As shown in FIGS. 206 to 210, the specific production type display device 851 includes a plurality of sets of drum units 855 capable of rotating and moving the drum 854, which is a movable object, in a horizontal row (3 in this other mode 1). Set) They are arranged side by side and their top and bottom are fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856.

[Drum unit]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 208, each drum unit 855 includes a laterally cylindrical drum 854, a rotation drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854 in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure, and a rotation drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854. It is roughly composed of a moving drive device 858 that moves the drum 854 in the vertical direction and a lighting member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and patterns are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the peripheral surface.
The rotation drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854 has a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854, and is arranged at the center of the drum 854 and gradually expands in diameter toward the ring member 860. Further, a cone-shaped cylindrical center member 861 that opens outward on the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the center member 861, and an electric motor that is directly connected to the center member 861. By rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863, which is composed of the motor 863, the central member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 are integrally rotated or stopped.

The rotary drive device 857 is provided with an air cooling means for cooling the inside of the drum 854 by passing air through it. That is, the air-cooling means includes a sirocco fan-shaped intake wing piece 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and a propeller fan-shaped exhaust wing piece 865 formed on the connecting member 862. By rotating in the indicated direction, air is sucked in from the opening of the central member 861 and discharged to the space between the outside of the central member 861 and the inside of the drum 854 in the same way as a sirocco fan, and the air guided to this space is further discharged to the propeller fan. It is discharged to the outside of the drum 854 from between the connecting member 862 and the connecting member 862 in the same manner as described above. Therefore, a U-turn-shaped airflow in which the intake air and the exhaust air are opposite to each other is generated inside and outside the central member 861 of the drum 854, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

The moving drive device 858 that moves the drum 854 together with the rotary drive device 857 in the vertical direction can slide the electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855, the disk-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the lighting member 859, and the support substrate 866 up and down. A guide shaft 867 that supports the guide shaft 867, a male screw-shaped drive shaft 868 that is erected in parallel with the guide shaft 867, an upper and lower bearing base 869 that supports the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing base. It consists of an elevating motor 870 for the drive shaft 868 attached to the upper part of the 869.
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the elevating motor 870, the support substrate 866 rises or falls along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, whereby the drum 854 rises together with the rotation drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 210. Or it descends as shown in the imaginary line in the figure. The drum 854 is normally stopped at a substantially intermediate position in the movable range (hereinafter, referred to as a "reference position"), and all the drums 854 may be moved up and down all at once from this state, or each drum 854 may be moved up and down at the same time. May be moved up and down separately. Further, when the drum 854 is in the highest or lowest position, a part of the drum 854 is removed from the display window 841 and cannot be seen as shown in FIG. 210, but even in that case, the part for displaying the game information is still available. It is designed to exist within the frame of the display window 841.

By the way, the moving drive device 858 of the other embodiment 1 can move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction. For example, another combination of the drive shaft 868, the guide shaft 867, the bearing base 869, and the support substrate 866 is used. Two sets were added to rotate the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 in a horizontal direction, and then incorporated between the original support board 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, added to the original support board 866. Even if the bearing base 869 is fixed side by side, the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are passed sideways, and the electric motor 863 is attached to the new support board 866 supported by the sideways drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. Good. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the production by the drum 854 is remarkably directed, and the members that interfere with the up and down movement are temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. Will also be possible.

Further, the display device 851 of the other embodiment 1 is provided with linear illuminations 871a to 871d in the shape of vertical bars for front view between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855. The linear illuminations 871a to 871d are light emitters such as a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, and are formed so as to be curved in an arc shape (bow shape) toward the front surface (player), but are formed at both ends of the three drums 854. The degree of bending of the positional linear illuminations 871a and 871d is set more gently than the degree of bending of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, and the bending degree of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c between the drums 854 is further set. Are installed so as to protrude toward the player side from the linear lights 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854. As a result, it is possible to give a curved three-dimensional effect to the front surface of the drum 854 with the linear illuminations 871a to 871d lit.

The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear surface side by the effect support frame 852 described in detail below, and all the drums 854 located in the reference position in the front view in the frame of the display window 841 of the center member 2500. Is designed to fit. That is, the vertical width of the display window 841 is larger than the vertical width of the movable drum 854 (diameter of the drum 854), and therefore, the portion showing the game information in front of the stopped drum 854 from the display window 841. (The winning or losing of the lottery result is displayed by the combination of the numbers or symbols in this part.) In addition, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 is visible to the player. By seeing at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 from the display window 841 in this way, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the drum 854 exists in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 as described above, the main control board 1310X determines the winning or losing. Is performed, and the lottery result is a combination of the symbols of the drum 854 stopped in the frame of the display window 841 after a production operation for a certain period of time due to a mechanical change in which the rotation and the vertical movement of the drum 854 are appropriately combined. Is displayed. If the lottery result is a big hit, there is a benefit that a large amount of prizes can be easily entered into the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined condition. Of course, the effect operation of the display device 851 may be any.
In this other form 1, the player should hit right at the timing when a large number of prizes can be entered in the large prize opening 2005 (preferably before the large winning opening 2005 opens), that is, the method of hitting the game ball is strengthened. Instruct that the player should hit the level on the right side of the game area 5a (for example, switch the display panel 2005p shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 190 from OFF to ON and type a character such as "Please hit right". Display or voice guidance such as "Please hit right.") There is a means of instructing how to hit, which maximizes the profits of the player. There is.

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 is in the form of a frame having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851, a back-side decorative member 817 having a second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround the four sides of the display device 851. Further, the effect support frame 852 is provided with a decorative lamp 844H for decoration located above the drum 854 at the upper part of the front surface as described above, but further, the lower side of the drum 854 is provided at the lower part of the front surface of the effect support frame 852. A decorative lamp 844L for decoration located in is provided. By blinking the upper and lower decorative lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, a noteworthy target among a plurality of drums 854 can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851, and is provided with a fan 873 for heat dissipation and a ventilation hole 874 on both side surfaces as shown in FIG. 209. The rear surface is also provided with a ventilation hole 874 for heat dissipation. Further, above and below the rear cover 853, effect lighting 875 that irradiates light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided, and the outline of the drum 854 is illuminated by the illumination from the rear side. There is. At least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 is dark (specifically, black) in order to enhance the effect of the light produced by the effect lighting 875. Further, the effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853, and the light emitting body 876 such as an LED faces the rear cover 853 from there. Further, a half mirror 877 is provided in the portion of the rear cover 853 corresponding to the effect lighting 875 so that the rear surface side of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface in the state where the effect lighting 875 is OFF. As a result, the rear side of the drum 854 is also produced gorgeously.

The above-mentioned other form 1 includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical Thought 1]
A game panel with a game area where the game ball can flow down,
A game machine including a center member having at least an effect area inside an enclosure frame that is attached to a through hole provided in the game panel and can prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area.
A gaming machine characterized in that a decorative member provided with a decorative surface substantially flush with the game area is provided inside the enclosure of the center member.

[Technical Thought 2]
A display device that displays game information by moving movable objects,
A display window that makes it possible to recognize the existence of the display device is provided.
A gaming machine in which a player is made to recognize game information by the movable body that can be recognized through the display window.
The display window is a gaming machine characterized in that, in addition to a portion displaying game information of the movable object, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object is formed so as to be visible to the player.

[Technical Thought 3]
A game machine equipped with a game panel having a game area in which a game ball can flow down.
A first decorative surface formed on the front surface of the game panel for decorating the background, and
A game machine characterized by comprising a second decorative surface for decorating a background formed at a position deeper than the front surface of the game panel.

[Technical Thought 4]
In a game machine provided with an operation medium for game operation on the front surface of a door frame arranged at a position facing the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that a hand cover portion capable of surrounding the vicinity of the outer periphery of the player's hand operating the operation medium is provided on the front surface of the door frame.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 of the other embodiment 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 211 to 215 and the like. Since the basic configuration for adjusting the firing force of the handle unit 180 is almost the same as that described in paragraphs [0247] to [0262] and [FIG. 54], FIGS. 211 to 215 are shown. See FIG. 54 for a description of parts not shown.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100), and the player controls the ball launching device 540 by manually rotating the ball launching device 540 to control the game ball B in the upper plate 201. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 which is an operation medium rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and a front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover, the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184L mounted on the front surface, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. As described above, the handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 and the hand cover portion 195 provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the vicinity of the outer periphery of the player's hand operating the handle 182 are provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end and rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 (see FIG. 54) meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a (FIG. 54) that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. The handle rotation detection sensor 189 (see FIG. 54), which has (see) and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186, is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (the start end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It includes an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 54) that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side is from the left side to the outside in front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181. Detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 (see FIG. 54), which is protruding and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around the axis extending back and forth, and the single-shot button 193. It includes a single-shot button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181.

[Handle base]
The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed inward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the cup-shaped front end 181b provided at the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c (see FIG. 54) that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.
A bowl-shaped screen member 196 colored in a white color is provided around the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in a state of being fixed to the handle mounting portion 102. The light of the full-color LED radiated from the end of the frame right side unit 410 toward the screen member 196 can be reflected in almost the same color.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disk having a diameter and thickness suitable for a player to hold with one hand, and protrudes from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction to a height equal to or more than a height at which one finger can be inserted, and the handle 182. Four finger hooks 182g to 182j protruding at approximately point-symmetrical positions with respect to the center of rotation (shaft member 187), that is, at equal intervals (90 degrees), and a circle centered on the rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. A stop portion 182f (see FIG. 54) is provided.

Further, the handle 182 is integrally provided with a decorative handle 1820, which is a concentric and annular decorative member with the handle 182, on the outside thereof via the finger hook portions 182g to 182j. The front surface of the decorative handle 1820 is covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821, and the outer peripheral surface is covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing portion of the handle touch sensor 192, and is arranged inside a hollow. The large number of light emitting LEDs 1823 and the light emitting LEDs 182L provided in dots on the front surface of the finger hooks 182g to 182j enable an appropriate full-color effect by light.

As an example of the production of light by the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, it should be visually made as if the decorative handle 1820 is rotating clockwise due to the change of the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting LEDs 182L, and now it should be hit right. Instructing that it is the timing, that is, using it as the above-mentioned striking method instruction means can be mentioned. Further, preferably, it is more dynamic to produce a clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3 by using the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3. Can be instructed to hit right. For example, the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, door frame top unit 450, and door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are "lower left → left → upper left → upper left → upper middle → upper right → upper right → middle right → The light is emitted in the order of "lower right" to produce light flowing clockwise (clockwise), and the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 is emitted clockwise in a form that inherits the flow of light. In particular, if the light emitting LED 1823 closest to the full-color LED located at the lowermost part of the door frame right side unit 410 is used to emit light, a more interlocking (integrated) effect can be obtained. In this case, since the method of hitting is instructed by the two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decorative handle 1820, even if one of the LEDs has a problem, the player can hit the ball without any trouble. You can instruct one.
As described above, as an example of the production of light, the one indicating that the timing should be right-handed is shown, but it is needless to say that the timing is not limited to this and can be executed for productions other than the above. .. For example, when a left-handed instruction is given from the right-handed state, a series of effects opposite to the right-handed light effect (for example, the light emitting LED 1823 on the decorative handle 1820 side is decorative counterclockwise. After rotating to, turn the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, door frame top unit 450, and door frame right side unit 410 to the lower right → middle right → upper right → upper right → upper middle → upper left → upper left → middle left → The effect of emitting light in the order of the lower left) is not performed, but instead of the instruction of how to hit, for example, when an effect with a high degree of expectation for a hit is executed, an effect linked to it is executed, or the degree of expectation for a hit is performed. Before the high production is executed, the production linked to it is executed, and so on. Further, the interlocking referred to here is an interlocking of the light effect for instructing the striking method described above, for example, an effect in which the light flows from the upper side to the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 (full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450). The upper left and upper right are made to emit light, then the upper → middle → lower of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 are made to emit light, and finally the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820. To emit light).
Further, when the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820 is used as the striking method instruction means, the light emitting timing may be the same as the lighting of the display panel 2005p, which is another striking method instruction means, or the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). You can make it the same as the displayed right-handed instruction, or before and after them, but it is better to do it at least before it becomes possible to win a large amount of prizes in the big prize opening 2005 (before opening the big winning opening 2005). , Preferred in protecting the interests of the player.

Further, as an example of the effect of the light of the light emitting LED 182L provided in a dot shape on the front surface of the finger hook portions 182g to 182j, it is mentioned that the lighting pattern is changed according to the firing intensity of the ball launching device 540. For example, if the firing intensity is "weak", it is blue, and if the firing intensity is "medium", it is green. In a general pachinko machine 1, the right-handed state in which the firing intensity is set to "strong" is an advantageous gaming state such as during a big hit or during a probability change. Therefore, when the firing strength is set to "strong", psychological excitement is promoted. It should be lit in red, which is said to have an effect.

In the four finger hooks 182g to 182j, when the handle 182 is in the initial rotation position, the two finger hooks 182g and 182i are both horizontal, and the remaining two finger hooks 182h and 182j are both vertical. It is set in a cross shape so that when the player grips the handle 182 in the normal grip style, the right thumb naturally engages under the finger hook 182 g located on the peripheral surface on the left side of the center of rotation. It has become. Therefore, in the present other form 1, the finger hook portion 182 g is a finger hook portion for normal operation. In this normal grip style, the fingers other than the thumb cover the handle 182 in a state of sandwiching the upper finger hook portion 182h.
On the other hand, the finger hook portion 182j provided on the peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle 182 is hardly touched by any finger in the above-mentioned normal grip style, but for example, the gripping hand is the handle 182. If a finger such as the index finger is hooked on the finger hook portion 182j away from the finger, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise in the front view by an irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In this other form 1, as described above, a striking method instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing that the player should strike right is provided, and the striking instruction means should be driven to the right side of the game area. This can be dealt with by applying a force in the direction opposite to the instruction (force in the left direction in the front view) to the finger hook portion 182j of the handle 182.
Of course, the handle 182 may be rotated by a force of pulling the handle 182h and 182i upward or downward by hooking a finger on the finger hooks 182h and 182i other than the finger hooks 182g and 182j.

[Cover pedestal]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes a plurality of mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183a penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees from the initial stop position.

[Handle cap]
The front surface of the handle cap 185 bulges forward in a round shape, and the central portion has translucency. Inside the handle cap 185, a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is provided. The handle cap 185 can be produced by light by appropriately emitting light of the LED 184L on the front surface of the handle decorative substrate 184.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is passed through the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. Rotates. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this other mode 1, when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the firing force of the game ball is set to be stronger.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182 or the finger hooks 182 g to 182j or the touch cover 1822 of the decorative handle 1820, the game is played. The static electricity acting on the person is detected, and the player's contact with the handle 182 or the like is detected. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player is received. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the above, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

[Handle mounting member]
The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily gripped, and the player can perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

[Hand cover]
The substantially tubular hand cover portion 195 that surrounds the vicinity of the outer circumference of the player's hand that operates the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outside of the handle attachment portion 102, and is attached in FIG. 213. As shown in the above, the front opening 195h is substantially aligned with the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820. Further, the hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820 have a joint portion formed by a slidable fit between the joint ring 1824 projecting from the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820 and the annular slit 195a provided on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195. It is connected seamlessly.
The hand cover portion 195 can also be provided on the handle 182 in which the decorative handle 1820 is not provided. In that case, the front opening portion 195h of the hand cover portion 195 is extended to the substantially outer peripheral position of the handle 182. It may be extended and the front opening 195h may be provided with the same decorative means as the decorative handle 1820.

In the hand cover portion 195 of the other embodiment 1, a window opening 195w leading to the outside is provided in a part of the body portion, and the window opening 195w allows moisture, cigarette smoke, or intentional or intentional inside the hand cover portion 195. It prevents the inflow of beverages and the like due to negligence, and also prevents fraudulent activities by improving the visibility inside.
The handle 182 may be detachable as shown in FIG. 215 in order to facilitate cleaning of the inside of the hand cover portion 195 and wiping of the inflowing beverage. Specifically, each of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the handle mounting portion 102 side is provided with a engaging / disengaging means 197 composed of, for example, a combination of a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable receiving piece 197b. By providing the engaging / disengaging means 197 (see the solid line in the enlarged view of FIG. 215) and disengaging (see the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 215), the handle 182 is attached to the handle attachment portion together with the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. 215. It may be removable from the 102 side. By doing so, the handle 182 can be removed from the handle mounting portion 102 to fully open the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the inside can be easily cleaned and the spilled beverage can be wiped off easily. Further, preferably, if the release operation of the engagement / disengagement means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (for example, insertion of a thumbtack type pin) (for example, a thumbtack type pin is inserted), the handle 182 is not likely to be pulled out by mischief or the like.

By providing the hand cover portion 195 on the outside of the handle 182 as described above, it seems that the hand (finger) of the player who operates the handle 182 has entered the inside of the hand cover portion 195, that is, the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 feel more strongly that the pachinko machine 1 is being operated.
Further, if a blowing means (not shown) is connected to the hand cover portion 195 and blown, most of the wind escapes to the outside from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the player's hand is surely blown. Can be done. Therefore, for example, when the expectation for a big hit is high, or when the expectation for an advantageous hit (a hit with a lot of probability changes or a lot of balls) is high, it is advantageous to send wind in a predetermined effect (for example, in a state like an air cannon). When the game is controlled to a certain game state (for example, during probabilistic change, during shortening of time, during latent probabilistic), the wind is sent at a regular timing such as every 5 seconds, or a predetermined lottery is performed before the lottery. You can effectively perform effects such as sending wind when you win. Of course, you may always send the wind.
Further, although not shown, a game speaker (preferably a vibration speaker) may be provided inside the hand cover portion 195. In such a case, since the sound of the speaker is removed from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, the vibration of the sound can be effectively felt by the player's hand.

The other form 1 described above includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical Thought 5]
A ball launcher for driving a game ball into the game area of the game board,
In a game machine provided with a handle for adjusting the firing force of the ball launcher by a manual rotation operation.
The handle
A finger hook for normal operation, which is provided on the peripheral surface on the left side of the center of rotation of the self and can engage with the thumb of the hand operated in the normal grip style,
In addition to the finger hook portion, it has an irregularly operable finger hook portion provided on a peripheral surface below the rotation center of the handle and capable of engaging with at least one finger of the player's hand. A game machine characterized by that.
In addition, in such a game machine
Equipped with a hitting method instruction means for instructing the player how to hit the game ball according to the game situation.
On the other hand, the handle is set so that the firing force becomes stronger when the handle is rotated clockwise in the front view.
When the driving method instructing means instructs that the driving should be performed on the right side of the game area, the operation of applying a force in the left direction in the front view to the finger hook portion for the irregular operation of the handle can be dealt with. It may be.

The other forms of the pachinko machine have been described above, but of course, the other forms can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (reel or a reel) can be used by using a game medal. It can also be applied to slot machines that rotate reels).

Further, in the above embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotary drive device 857 and the elevating motor 870 of the mobile drive device 858 are oriented in different directions. Specifically, the output shaft of the electric motor 863 is horizontal with the same horizontal axis as the rotation axis of the drum 854. On the other hand, the elevating motor 870 has a different orientation such that its output shaft is perpendicular to the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, but the orientation of the electric motor 863 and the elevating motor 870. Can be aligned in the same way. However, when the electric motor 863 and the elevating motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above embodiment, the motor that causes a trouble in either the rotating operation or the elevating operation of the drum 854 is identified and dealt with. It is excellent in that it can be done quickly.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example, but a transparent synthetic resin base panel 1110 may be used.
Further, in the above embodiment, the background decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 are used as patterns for printing or the like, but they may be decorated with a light emitting body such as an LED.

Further, in the above embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 so that the handle 182 rotates between the two, but the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle 182 and rotates integrally with the handle 182. You may try to get it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover portion 195 are combined, but even if the decorative handle 1820 is provided on the outside of the handle 182, the effect of making the handle 182 look large and conspicuous is sufficient. Can be enjoyed.

[Other pachinko machines]
Next, another pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 227. Since the other pachinko machines 1 are mainly those in which the number, arrangement, and structure of the handle units 180 are changed with respect to the pachinko machines 1 shown in FIGS. The explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, the pachinko machine 1 has a handle unit 180, which is an input medium for a game, on both sides of a front bulging structure composed of an upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, an effect operation unit 300, and the like. It has two. In FIG. 216, the right handle unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “right handle unit”) 180 (R) adjusts the striking strength of the ball launching device 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter, also referred to as "left handle unit") 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the above-mentioned player participation type production.

As described above, each of the handle units 180 (L) and (R) includes an operation unit including a handle 182, a decorative handle 1820, and a finger hook portion 182 g to 182 j, and a finger is placed between the handle 182 and the decorative handle 1820. Is put in and rotated (operated).

In each of the handle units 180 (L) and (R), the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed. It is slidably supported by the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, so that the entire unit can move linearly in the front-rear direction within the hand cover portion 195. Further, the handle units 180 (L) and (R) are directed toward the player by the spring 4001 of the handle position control means 4000 described later, which is loaded in the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a compressed state. Always urged.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180 (R) adjusts the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by turning the handle 182 as described above. Under normal conditions, the decorative handle 1820 is the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 221. It is located at a position substantially flush with the front opening 195h (hereinafter, referred to as "front position"), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle position control means of right handle unit]
The handle position control means (hereinafter, also referred to as “right handle position control means”) 4000 of the right handle unit 180 (R) includes a swingable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at the tip and the lock arm 4004. It consists of a solenoid 4005 that changes to a horizontal lock posture (see the solid line in FIG. 221) and a release posture in which the roller 4003 side is flipped up (see the imaginary line in FIG. 221).
Then, when the lock arm 4004 is in the horizontal lock position, it lies between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle mounting member 102 in a rod shape to hold the right handle unit 180 (R). When the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 is pulled up from this state and the lock arm 4004 is swung to the released position, the roller 4003 comes off from the handle base 181 (the support of the lock arm 4004 comes off). The lock of the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) is released, and as shown in FIG. 222, the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) can be linearly moved to the back of the hand cover portion 195 (hereinafter, referred to as “rear position”).
The lock arm 4004 is urged from the release posture to the lock posture by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown). Therefore, the right handle unit 180 (R) is moved forward with the solenoid 4005 turned off. When it returns to the position, it automatically returns to the locked position.

The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as an input means for appropriately detecting an operation of moving the entire unit from the locked state with a sensor and emitting an input signal to the player participation type effect (that is, one). The handle unit 180 can input the striking force of the ball launching device 540 and the player participation type effect.) In the embodiment, the striking force of the ball launching device 540 is adjusted by the operation of moving the entire unit from the stopped state. It is used as a second input means.

Specifically, when the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) is pushed in while the right-hand drive position control means 4000 is unlocked, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is proportional to the linear movement displacement of the handle. It becomes stronger by taking over the hitting force immediately before due to the rotation of 182 (meaning to eliminate the problem that the hitting force temporarily decreases at the point where the operating body switches), and if it is pushed to the rear position as it is, the hitting force of the game ball becomes stronger. The level changes to the right-hand drive (see paragraph [1776]), and the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) is returned from the rear position to the front position (relax the pushing force on the right-hand drive unit 180 (R)). For example, it returns naturally by the urging of the spring 4001) and the striking force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (usually, the striking force at the time of the immediately preceding game).

Alternatively, when the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) is pushed in, a control signal for the striking force is immediately sent so that the striking force of the ball launcher 540 becomes a strong level, and the rotation angle of the immediately preceding handle 182 is increased. The striking force based on the above changes to a strong level at once, and when the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the front position, the striking force due to the rotation of the handle 182 (usually the striking force immediately before) is returned at once. Good.

In short, the right handle unit 180 (R) is provided with two movable elements that can be displaced in different plane directions, and the other is in a state where the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted by the displacement of one movable element. It is possible to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by the displacement of the movable element of the above, and when the striking force adjustment by the other movable element is completed, the striking force adjustment by the one movable element is returned. There are two movable elements, for example, a handle 182 that is rotatably supported and an entire handle unit 180 that is movably supported in a different plane direction, and the ball launcher 540 is displaced by the rotational displacement of the handle 182. When the striking force adjustment of the ball launching device 540 by the moving displacement of the entire handle unit 180 is enabled and the striking force adjustment by the moving displacement of the entire handle unit 182 is completed while the striking force adjustment of the above is being executed. It is designed to return to the striking force adjustment by the handle 182, and as a result, the normal game is performed by the striking force adjustment by one movable element, and the strong striking force required when changing to a special gaming state is obtained. It can be performed in a so-called interrupted state by the displacement of the movable element of the above, while when the special gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be easily and accurately performed simply by ending the striking force adjustment by the other movable element. Can be returned to.

The right handle unit 180 (R) is configured as described above, and is located in the front position of the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 221 during a normal game, and the right handle position control means 4000 is used in the front position. It is locked. Therefore, similarly to the pachinko machine 1 of FIGS. 190 to 215, the handle 182 can be rotated together with the decorative handle 1820 to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special gaming state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right-hand drive position control means 4000 is turned on, and the lock arm 4004 changes to the release posture in which the roller 4003 is flipped up. , The lock of the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) is released. Then, from the above-mentioned striking instruction means of the pachinko machine 1, a character such as "Please push the right handle to the back" is displayed or a voice is played toward the player, and the entire right handle unit 180 (R) is played. An instruction is issued to prompt input by moving. In response to this, when the player pushes the entire unit as it is against the urging of the spring 4001 to the rear position without changing the grip of the handle 182 during operation, the operation is detected and the hitting force so far is applied. The striking force continuously changes to a strong level in the form of adding a new striking force. As a result, the player is in a right-handed state, and the profit of the special game is increased to the player.

Then, when the special gaming state ends, at the same time, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off by the control of the main control unit 1300, and at the same time, the player is given a "right handle" by the above-mentioned striking instruction means. Instructions are given by text display or voice such as "Please bring it back to the front." When the player relaxes the force pushing the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) according to the instruction, the right-hand drive unit 180 (R) returns to the front position by the urging of the spring 4001. Then, the lock arm 4004 changes to a horizontal lock posture due to the urging of a torsion coil spring (not shown), and lies between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle mounting member 102 in a rod shape to lie on the right handle. Lock the unit 180 (R) to the front position.

As a result, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal gaming state, but at this time, the gripping condition (rotation angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player himself in the state immediately before the start of the special game. Therefore, the normal game is restarted with the striking force immediately before the change to the special game state. By the way, in the conventional handle unit, the striking force is adjusted by operating one handle, so when returning from the right-handed state to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to search for the optimum striking force again, and the game ball to be driven in the meantime It may be wasted.

[Left handle unit]
The left handle unit 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type production as described above. The left handle unit 180 (L) has a structure substantially line-symmetrical with respect to the vertical axis passing through the substantially center of the door frame 3 with respect to the right handle unit 180 (R), but the corresponding handle position. The control means 4000 is unique to the cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means (hereinafter, also referred to as “left handle position control means”) 4000 of the left handle unit 180 (L) is based on the cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base portion 181a of the handle base 181. A rotatable follower roller 4007, an elongated hole 4008 formed in a tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted to the outside of the tubular portion 102a. It is roughly composed of a 4009, a cam portion 4010 provided on the cylindrical cam 4009, and a motor (not shown) for transmitting a rotational force to a gear 4011 provided at an end portion of the cylindrical cam 4009.

The cam portion 4010 includes a first cam surface 4012 formed parallel to the end face at a position near the end face (rear end face) on the opposite side of the gear 4011 of the cylindrical cam 4009, and an end face (front end face) on the gear 4011 side. It is composed of a second cam surface 4013 formed parallel to the end surface at a closer position, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012.
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is slidably supported by the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 and is constantly urged toward the player side by the spring 4001 loaded in the tubular portion 102a. However, the position is controlled by the engagement mode between the follower roller 4007 provided on the left handle unit 180 (L) and the cam portion 4010.

That is, the left handle unit 180 (L) is in the rear position in a state where the follower roller 4007 is in contact with the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010 as shown in FIG. 224, and the follower is as shown in FIG. 225. The left handle unit 180 (R) is in the front position in a state where the roller 4007 is in contact with the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010.
Therefore, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 216 while the left handle unit 180 (L) is in the rear position as shown in FIG. 224, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the first cam surface 4012 to the third cam surface 4012. The second cam surface 4013 is reached through the inclination of the cam surface 4014, and the left handle unit 180 (L) moves to the front position together with the follower roller 4007 as shown in FIG. 225. Since the cam portion 4010 has an open space at the rear so that the follower roller 4007 can be freely moved to the rear, the left handle unit 180 (L) located at the front position is springed. When pushed against the urging of 4001, it sinks to the rear position in the hand cover portion 195, and when the force is relaxed, it returns to the front position by the urging of the spring 4001. Therefore, the left steering wheel unit 180 (L) located in the front position can freely move linearly in the front-rear direction by adjusting the force of the player.
Further, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 216 to return to the original state with the left handle unit 180 (L) in the front position, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the second cam surface 4013 to the third cam surface 4013. The left handle unit 180 (L) returns to the rear position as shown in FIG. 224 in this state after returning to the first cam surface 4012 through the cam surface 4014.

The left handle unit 180 (L) is configured as described above, and is located at a rear position in the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 224 during a normal game. The left handle unit 180 (L) located at the rear position is hidden by a front bulging structure composed of the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like, and is inconspicuous to the player. Further, since it is surrounded by the hand cover portion 195 and the protrusion to the outside can be suppressed to the minimum, it is less likely to receive an impact from the outside leading to breakage, and the risk of injury due to contact is reduced. By the way, at present, a large lever or the like is used as an input means for a player in a player participation type production, but if it always protrudes to a position close to the player's hand or knee, it receives an impact that leads to damage. It is easy, and there is a risk that the player may come into contact with it and get injured.

Then, in the scene where the player participation type production is executed from the progress of the game and the input of the player is required, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 is first rotated by the control of the main control unit 1300. Due to the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the urging of the spring 4001, the left handle unit 180 (L) moves linearly toward the player side together with the follower roller 4007 and stops at the front position. In this state, it appears to the player that the left handle unit 180 (L) has appeared, so the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) is seen from the pachinko machine 1 side at a timing that attracts the player's attention. The rotation operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) is requested, and the pushing operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) is requested by display, voice, or the like. Then, when the player rotates the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) or pushes in the left handle unit 180 (L) in response to this, the operation is detected and the effect shifts to the next scene. After that, the production progresses further and ends as appropriate.
In the handle unit 180 of the embodiment, since the gripped hand is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820, there is no risk that the finger will come into contact with the hand cover portion 195 even if the hand is rotated or pushed in. There is less risk of injury. Thus, the decorative handle 1820 that surrounds the gripped hand and can rotate or move with the hand can also be referred to as an "outer ring" capable of substantially protecting the operating fingers.

Next, when the above effect is completed, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 rotates in the reverse direction, and the cam portion 4010 that comes into contact with the follower roller 4007 passes through the second cam surface 4013 to the third cam surface 4014. It changes to 1 cam surface 4012. During that time, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the inclination of the third cam surface 4014, so that the left handle unit 180 (L) retracts from the front position against the urging of the spring 4001 and the follower roller 4007. When the 4007 abuts on the first cam surface 4012, it reaches the rear position. The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180 (L) stands by at the rear position until the next effect is executed.

As is clear from the above description, the left steering wheel unit 180 (L) can perform operation effects and inputs that are substantially the same as those of the effect operation unit 301.
Therefore, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the effect operation unit 301 are operated under the same control and the inputs from both sensors are received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the effect operation unit 301 can be used. ..
In that case, for example, a player who thinks that the operation of operating the effect operation unit 301 is large and embarrassing can operate the left handle unit 180 (L) with the minimum movement that is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type production, which increases the interest.
Further, it is determined in advance whether the operation unit used in the player participation type production is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the production operation unit 301, for example, by providing a selection switch in a part of the front bulging structure. The player may be able to choose.

Although other pachinko machines have been described above, the pachinko machines are not limited to the above. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment may be installed at the installation location of the left handle unit 180 (L), and this may be used as an input means for the player in the player participation type production. Well, and vice versa, a handle unit having the same structure as the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment is installed at the installation location of the right handle unit 180 (R), and the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted. It may be used as an input means for.

Further, although the two handle units 180 are provided in the above, the number of handle units 180 may be one.
Further, although the handle unit 180 is provided with the handle 182 in the above description, the input for the game may be performed only by the linear movement operation of the handle unit 180 without providing the handle 182.

Further, although the pachinko machine is illustrated as the game machine in the above, it can be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (rotating drums or reels) can be used by using a game medal. ) Can also be applied to slot machines that rotate. When applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for player participation type production.

[Other form 2-1]
Next, another form 2-1 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 228 to 232.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the other form 2-1 the above-mentioned door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 can be provided on, for example, the upper part of the game board 5 instead of the door frame 3 (for details, see Since it is described later), the front top unit 4500 is used, and the other configurations are the same as those described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, the configuration of the front top unit 4500 is an appropriate modification of that of the door frame top unit 450 described above, and therefore, the configuration of the door frame top unit 450 is excluded except for those described below as the front top unit 4500. Applies as it is.

The pachinko machine 1 of the other form 2-1 has a window portion that covers the game area 5a in which the game is played so as to be visible from the front (the same as the door window 101a of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 1 closed by the glass plate 162. ) 1010a, and a canopy-shaped front top unit 4500 corresponding to the door frame top unit 450 (see FIGS. 88 to 90) is projected above the window portion 1010a.

The front top unit 4500 has, for example, a top having a shape in which the top top cover 452 and the top bottom cover 465 of FIG. A main body cover 4520 is provided, and a space 4520S is formed inside by eliminating the central speaker box 461 and the door frame top bottom plate 454 of the door frame top unit 450.
Further, the top body cover 4520 is formed with an upward opening 452a that communicates with the space 4520S and is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface thereof, and the opening 452a is aligned with the opening 452a. It is closed by a front top top plate 4680, which is a shape opening / closing lid.

The front top top plate 4680 is swingably attached to the top body cover 4520 with a rotating shaft 4680c provided on the rear end side, and can be freely held in a closed posture (see the broken line in FIG. 231) for closing the opening 452a. It is rotatable in an upright posture (see FIG. 228) in which the end side is flipped up to open the opening 452a and is visible from the outside, and further controls a driving means such as a motor (not shown) and this. By linking with the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to appropriately switch between the closed posture and the standing posture according to the progress of the game or at a predetermined timing determined separately from the progress of the game.
Further, the front top plate 4680 is appropriately decorated (not shown) on the outer surface 4680a facing the outside in the closed posture, while the inner surface 4680b facing the space 4520S in the closed posture has light reflection performance. It is processed into an excellent screen shape.

The front top top plate 4680 has a single panel structure as shown in FIGS. 228 to 231. In addition, the front top top plate 4680 is divided into two parts on the left and right at the center, and the divided pieces are divided into the rotating shafts. It may be connected by 4680c to form a hinge shape, or as shown in FIG. 232, a plurality of elements may be connected by a hinge 4680p to form a flexible folding structure. By adopting the latter folding structure, the front top top plate 4680 can be deployed in an upright posture to effectively decorate the light at a higher place and suitable for the player. In addition, if the first stage of the folding structure is made gate-shaped or transparent so as not to block the rear view, the data display of the island equipment (game provided on the curtain plate above the pachinko machine 1). It is also possible not to interfere with the operation of the progress status (display device showing the number of occurrences of big hit games, etc.).

Further, the front top unit 4500 is provided with a lighting base 8000 on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the player side, and a rod-shaped light emitting means 8002 in which a plurality of light emitting LEDs 8001 are arranged in a horizontal row swings on the lighting base 8000. It is freely attached to the shaft.
The light emitting means 8002 is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 like the front top top plate 4680, and the light irradiation direction and the light emitting pattern can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game. Specifically, when the front top top plate 4680 is in the upright posture, the light emitting means 8002 is turned upward so that the inner surface 4680b facing the player side can be irradiated with light, while the front top top plate 4680 is in the closed posture. In conjunction with the change to, the lower side, that is, the bottom of the top body cover 4520 is switched downward so that light can be irradiated.
In the other form 2-1 because the bottom of the top body cover 4520 is made of a translucent and opaque synthetic resin, only the effect of light by the light emitting means 8002 can be seen by the player. Moreover, since the light emitting means 8002 that irradiates the front top top plate 4680 with light can be used to produce the light, there is almost no extra cost.
Further, the light emitting means 8002 may be an illumination type that irradiates the inner surface 4680b of the front top top plate 4680 with colored light, or a video projection type that projects a character or the like onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top top plate 4680.

[Other form 2-2]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the other form 2-2, as shown in FIG. 233, the front end side of the front top top plate 4680 is swingably attached to the top body cover 4520, and the light emitting means 8002 is attached to the top body cover 4520. It is provided on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the anti-player side, and other configurations are the same as those of the other form 2-1. In this case, the front top top plate 4680 has the same translucency as the top body cover 4520 because it is necessary to transmit the light of the light emitting means 8002 from the inner surface 4680b side (rear side) to the outer surface 4680a side (front side). It is preferably formed of an opaque synthetic resin (eg, a milky white synthetic resin).
According to such a structure, since the front top top plate 4680 stands up at a position close to the player, the player can feel more powerful and can be made more conspicuous to the outside.

Since the pachinko machine 1 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 is configured as described above, the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc. are being executed, or the result of the lottery regarding the big hit or the big hit is being executed. The front top top plate 4680 is swung or the front top top plate 4680 in an upright posture is irradiated with light by the light emitting means 8002, or the front top top plate 4680 is closed and the top body cover is covered by the light emitting means 8002. Various effects can be performed by irradiating the bottom of the 4520 with light.

When the front top top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) of the front top unit 4500 is opened, heat is released upward and outward from the opening 452a, so that heat is unlikely to be trapped inside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for example, with the light emitting means 8002 turned off, the front top top plate 4680 is switched at appropriate intervals to open and close the opening 452a, and when it is in the standing state several times, it suddenly hits the effect display device 1600 and displays a symbol. If the effect pattern to be made is set, the opening / closing operation of the front top top plate 4680 can be incorporated as a part of the game to increase the interest of the player, and heat can be dissipated from the opening 452a without being noticed by the player. it can.
Further, the front top top plate 4680 of the front top unit 4500 opens and closes the opening 452a by switching between the closed posture and the standing posture in a demonstration manner at a predetermined timing unrelated to the progress of the game, that is, regardless of the progress of the game. You may try to do it.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 does not produce the effect of raising the front top top plate 4680, the opening 452a is blocked by the front top top plate 4680 in the closed posture, so that the top body cover 4520 Dust, dust, tobacco tar, etc. do not enter the space 4520S, and even when the front top top plate 4680 is in the upright position, the heated air inside the pachinko machine 1 rises and the front top unit 4500 Since the airflow that escapes from the opening 452a to the outside is generated, it is difficult for dust, dirt, tar, etc. to enter the space 4520S.

Although the pachinko machine 1 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 has been described above, of course, the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the other forms 2-1 and 2-2. For example, in the other forms 2-1, 2-2, a flip-up type is adopted in which the front top top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) can be flipped up on the free end side about the rotation shaft 4680c to open the opening 452a. The front top top plate 4680 may have a sliding shutter structure.
Further, the front top top plates 4680 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 may be provided separately in the front and rear in one pachinko machine 1.
Further, the front top top plate 4680 does not have to be fully opened at all times, and may be opened halfway, for example, and it is desirable that the opening and closing for the purpose of heat dissipation is not easily noticed by the player.
Further, in the other forms 2-1, 2-2, the light emitting means 8002 is formed so as to be swingable, but the light emitting means 8002 may be further raised and lowered to irradiate light from a high place of the pachinko machine 1. ..

Further, in the other forms 2-1, 2-2, the front top unit 4500 is provided on the door frame 3, but instead of the door frame 3, for example, the upper end portion of the game board 5 of FIG. The front top unit 4500 is attached to the mounting portion of the top unit 4500, and the game board 5 provided with the front top unit 4500 is mounted on the main body frame 4, or the game board 5 is shown in FIG. 140. On the other hand, a mounting portion of the front top unit 4500 may be provided on the upper portion of the main body frame 4 and mounted there. In that case, the door frame 3 is integrally provided with a transparent bulging portion that can cover other than the upper surface of the front top unit 4500 that projects upward and forward from the window portion 1010a.

Further, in the other forms 2-1, 2-2, the portion of the front top top plate 4680 decorated with light has a flat shape, but for example, a three-dimensional shape imitating a character or the like may be used. In that case, the light emitting means 8002 can be made into a video projection type, and the three-dimensional shape can be decorated more realistically by the projection mapping method. By doing so, the visual difference between the front top top plate 4680 in the closed posture and the standing posture becomes large, so that it is easy to attract the attention of the surroundings when the front top top plate changes to the standing posture, and the opening is correspondingly large. The crime prevention effect on 452a is also increased.
Further, in the other forms 2-1, 2-2, the front top top plate 4680 and the light emitting means 8002 are separately formed by dividing the positions in the front and rear, but the light emitting means 8002 is incorporated inside the front top top plate 4680. You may.
Further, it is also possible to irradiate the curtain plate of the island equipment with light by using the light emitting means 8002 of the other form 2-1 so that the decoration and effect of the light can be performed in a state of protruding from the pachinko machine 1.
Further, in the other forms 2-1, 2-2, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a game medal is used. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate multiple drums (rotary drums or reels). In this case, the portion provided with the drum or the like that can be seen from the window portion that covers the game machine so as to be visible from the front corresponds to the game area where the game is played.

[Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 234 to 265. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment is a modification of the pachinko machine 1, the description thereof will be omitted except for the changes. Therefore, in FIGS. 234 to 265 and the other figures, the components with the same sign are, in principle, the same or functional components.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 237, the game board 5 of the embodiment includes a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. It comprises a back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 so as to surround the lower part of the back box 3010.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 237, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 having a predetermined thickness, a front component 1000 that surrounds the game area 5a, and a game element group that constitutes the substance of the game (for details). Will be described later.) And.

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 of the embodiment is formed of an opaque plywood plate, and large and small through holes 1112 corresponding to the game element group are provided.
The base panel 1110 may be a transparent synthetic resin plate or an opaque synthetic resin plate in addition to the opaque veneer plate.

[Back box, board holder]
As shown in FIG. 237, the back box 3010 has a box shape with an open front, and is attached so as to cover the rear side of the upper layer game zone 4823, the lower layer game zone 4825, and the right-handed game zone 4824, which will be described later. Further, the substrate holder 1200 is attached so as to cover the lower outer side of the back box 3010.
Further, on the front left side of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the general winning opening 4801 in the upper game zone 4823 and the out guide portion 1003 in the lower game zone 4825 (on the left side when the game board 5 in FIG. 234 is viewed from the front). The back gutter member 1110ta for the left-sided game ball, which can guide the game ball that has entered the out-guidance unit 1003) or the like toward the rear-downstream side and discharge it from the pachinko machine 1, is bent in the front-back and left-right directions. It is installed so that it does not interfere with the cover 4886. On the left side of the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, a predetermined height (in the present embodiment) is set forward at a position corresponding to a plurality of stop holes (not shown) formed in the back gutter member 1110ta for the left game ball. , 6 mm), and mounting boss holes (not shown) are formed so as to project. The back gutter member 1110ta for the left game ball is placed close to the front left side of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010, and the back gutter member 1110ta for the left game ball is covered with a plurality of stop holes to form the bottom plate of the back box 3010. Insert screws (not shown) toward the mounting boss holes formed on the front surface of the base and screw them together.
Further, on the front right side of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010, in the right-handed gaming zone 4824, the electric start winning opening 4871, the first large winning opening 4807, the general winning opening 4801, the V winning opening 4810, and the second large winning opening The game ball that has entered the mouth 4812 and the out-guidance unit 1003 shared with the lower game zone 4825 (out-induction unit 1003 on the right side when the game board 5 in FIG. 234 is viewed from the front) is guided toward the rear downstream side. The back gutter member 1110tb for the right side game ball, which can be ejected from the pachinko machine 1 and is bent in the front-rear and left-right directions, is attached so as not to interfere with the production back cover 4886. On the right side of the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, a plurality of stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five stop holes) formed in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball are designated forward. Mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) having a height (6 mm in this embodiment) are formed so as to project. The back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball is placed close to the front right side of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 and covered with the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball. Screws (not shown) are inserted into the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate, and the screws are fixed to each of the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5.
The upper vibration detection switch 3005 is attached near the upper part of the left side wall of the back box 3010, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a is attached near the lower part of the left side wall of the back box 3010. The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a apply vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to flow down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts of changing the course and entering the ball into various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5, and in particular, a sorting disk provided in the ball turning type sorting device 4843 in the lower game zone 4825. By shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of 4853, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts that vibrate the pachinko machine 1. ..
Further, the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached to the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 and is near the lower part of the right side wall of the back box 3010. When the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached to the front of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 near the lower part of the right side wall of the back box 3010, the upper side and the left side of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b are in the front-back and left-right directions. Although they are arranged in the vicinity of the back gutter member 1110tb for a plurality of bent right game balls, they are arranged so as not to interfere with each other. Similar to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, the lower vibration detection switch 3006b applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to form a section on the game board 5. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts of changing the course of a game ball flowing down the game area 5a and entering the ball into various winning openings or gates provided in the game board 5, and in particular, rotation in the right-handed game zone 4824. The pachinko machine 1 vibrates by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed in the ball receiving member 4808 and entered the V winning opening 4810. It is possible to detect fraudulent activity.
A main control unit having a main control board 1310X (see the block diagram of FIG. 253) that performs various game controls based on the detection status of the game ball in the game area 5a is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. Further, on the rear surface of the back box 3010, a peripheral control unit having a peripheral control board 1510 that controls various effects based on the control signals from the main control board 1310X is attached.
The top plate of the back box 3010 is provided with an interference avoidance portion 3010aa penetrating into the box at a position where it intersects with the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. There is an effect that the height of the top plate of the back box 3010 can be set high by avoiding the interference of the above, that is, it is possible to easily cope with a large effect device or the like.

[Game element group]
The game element group of the embodiment is shown in the front view of FIG. 234 and the block diagram of FIG. 253.
A function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310X and is visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000.
Multiple obstacle nails 2007, which are planted on the base panel 1110 and randomly change the falling direction of the game ball,
A windmill 2008 that rotates by the contact of a game ball,
General winning opening 4801 (in terms of control configuration, <general winning opening sensor 4872> in the block diagram of FIG. 253. Hereinafter <> For the inside, see the block diagram of FIG. 253.)
An electric first shutter plate 4802 <starting port solenoid 4873> that slides in the front-rear direction can switch between entering and not entering a ball (a game ball that receives a game ball that falls in the forward state and falls in the backward state (Non-ball entry) Electric start winning opening 4871 <Electric start opening sensor 4874>,
A plurality of starting gates 4803 <gate sensor 4875> for starting a lottery regarding opening and closing of the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric starting winning opening 4871, and
An effect normal symbol display device 4804 that displays the lottery result of the ordinary figure per lottery, which will be described later, by the start gate 4803 for the effect.
An effect normal symbol hold display device 4805 that displays the number of holds corresponding to the ordinary hold display described later for the effect, and
Similar to the first shutter plate 4802, the electric second shutter plate 4806 <first large winning opening solenoid 4876> can switch between entering and not entering the ball (open the winning opening in the retracted state to enter and advance the ball). (Close the winning opening and do not win the ball) 1st big winning opening 4807 <1st big winning opening sensor 4807a>,
The rotating ball receiving member 4808 <V rotating solenoid 4877> provided in the first prize opening 4807, and
The V winning opening 4810 <V winning opening sensor 4878>, in which only the game ball placed in the ball receiving recess 4809 of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 can enter,
The general winning opening 4801 <general winning opening sensor 4872>, in which the game ball placed on the tapered peripheral surface of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 tilts downward, enters the ball.
Opening and closing plate 4811 <2nd big winning opening solenoid 4879> can be opened and closed in a fan window system that opens upwards to allow many game balls to enter in the open state 2nd big winning opening 4812 <2nd big winning opening sensor 4812a> When,
Fixed start winning opening 4813 <fixed starting opening sensor 4880> provided on the vertical center line of the game area 5a for starting the lottery for opening and closing the first large winning opening 4807.
A first display device 4815 formed of a group of display lamps 4814 for producing and displaying various lottery games associated with entering a ball into the fixed start winning opening 4813 or the electric starting winning opening 4871.
A group (three in the embodiment) of symbol display members 4816 showing the first stage when the results of various lottery games accompanying the entry into the fixed start winning opening 4813 or the electric starting winning opening 4871 are displayed stepwise. The formed second display device 4817 and
The second (final) when the results of various lottery games associated with the entry into the fixed start winning opening 4813 and the electric starting winning opening 4871 are displayed stepwise, which is provided at the upper part on the vertical center line of the game area 5a. ) Third display device 4818 indicating the stage,
The fourth symbol display lamp 4819 that complementarily displays the display of the results of various lottery games associated with the entry into the fixed start winning opening 4813 and the electric starting winning opening 4871, and
A special symbol hold display device 4820 for production that displays the number of reserved balls for production on the first special hold number display and the second special hold number display, which will be described later, and
Decorative light emitting member 4821 provided as appropriate,
Announcement section 4822 that displays message images such as "right-handed",
A plurality of out guidance units 1003 <out ball sensor 4881> that finally collect the game ball on the back of the machine,
Timer Seg 4882 for directing with a segment display that can display 5-digit numbers,
By shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and various prizes are provided on the game board 5. Upper vibration detection switch 3005 and lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b that detect fraudulent acts of entering a ball into a mouth or gate, and
It is roughly composed of. The details of the required game elements will be described later.

Here, the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The fixed start port sensor 4880 and the electric start port sensor 4874 are directly input to the main control board 1310X. The respective detection signals from the fixed start port sensor 4880 and the electric start port sensor 4874 input to the main control board 1310X are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. There is. On the other hand, the gate sensor 4875, the general winning opening sensor 4872, the V winning opening sensor 4878, the dive sensor 4831, the first ball sensor 4870a, the second ball sensor 4870b, and the magnetic sensor 3003, the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration. Various sensors such as the detection switches 3006a and 3006b, the out-ball sensor 4881, the first large winning opening sensor 4807a, and the second large winning opening sensor 4812a are indirectly input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710. Has been done. The detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310X are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The sensor directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310X described above can be appropriately configured as the double sensor described above. The game balls guided rearward by the plurality of out guide units 1003 (three out guide units 1003 in the present embodiment) are respectively discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the corresponding out ports 1008. The game balls collected by these out ports 1008 are detected by the out ball sensor 4881. The out-ball sensor 4881 is composed of the above-mentioned out-port left sensor 1008a and out-port right sensor 1008b, and is detected by either one of the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is detected on the panel. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710. In the present embodiment, since the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 10008b constituting the out ball sensor 4881 are associated with one out guidance unit 1003, three out port guidance units 1003 are associated with three. One out-ball sensor 4881 is associated with each other, and is composed of three out-port left sensors 1008a and three out-port right sensors 1008b.

In the present embodiment, the game ball guided backward by the plurality of out guide units 1003 passes through the corresponding out port 1008, and is composed of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, respectively. Although each is detected by 4881, the out-ball sensor 4881 may be used as one sensor and may be composed of an out-port sensor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball guided backward by the plurality of out guide units 1003 passes through the corresponding out port 1008, and is composed of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, respectively. Although each of them is detected by the 4881, the game balls guided backward by the plurality of out guidance units 1003 may be aggregated and detected by the out ball sensor 4881 through one out ball opening 1008. .. In this case, the out-ball sensor 4881 may be composed of an out-port sensor as one sensor, or may be composed of an out-port left sensor and an out-port right sensor as two sensors.

Each detection signal from the sensor directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310X described above is input by the main control MPU 1310a in the switch processing in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177. Various signals input to the input terminal of the port are read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the above-mentioned input information.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, thereby driving the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with a reset function. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d sends the starting port solenoid 4873, the V rotation solenoid 4877, the first winning opening solenoid 4876, and the second winning opening solenoid 4879 to various solenoids, respectively. With a reset function by outputting the drive signal of the above through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with the reset function. Each drive signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit to various display devices such as the normal symbol display device 4804 for production, the normal symbol hold display device 4805 for production, and the special symbol hold display device 4820 for production, and the fourth symbol display lamp 4819. Output without going through another board, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, so that various distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits described later from the main control output circuit with a reset function can be used. By outputting control signals to various distribution stepping motor drive ICs, each drive signal is transmitted to various stepping motors such as the first distribution motor 4908, the second distribution motor 4909, and the drive motor 4860 via the panel relay board 1710. That is, it outputs indirectly.

Each drive signal output from the main control board 1310X described above is output in the port output process of step S118 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 177, and the main control MPU 1310a has the output information storage area described above. Output information is read from, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on this output information.

The peripheral control unit 1500 can be configured by attaching an air cooling fan FAN. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 includes peripheral control IIC 1510a and the like. Detection signals from various detection sensors and the like provided on the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Each detection signal from various detection sensors and the like input to the peripheral control board 1510 described above is the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 258. Reads various signals input to the input terminals of various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a and determines whether or not detection signals from various sensors are input to detect signals from various sensors. (For example, in-situ history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads various data for outputting drive signals to various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. As a command, the data is transmitted from various serial I / O ports to various boards provided in various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 via the panel drive board 1720. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 emits light on the game board side for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color color LED, or the like provided on various decorative boards of the game board 5. Data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and drives the panel from various serial I / O ports as commands. It transmits to the substrate 1720.

Among the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the display of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 256 is displayed on the various display devices and the various decorative boards of the game board 5. Output is executed in the data output process, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is instructed by a pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. According to the light emission data, the data is output to various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative boards (including the panel drive board 1720) provided on the game board 5. Among the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, for the various drive motors of the game board 5, the motor and solenoid drive process of step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 258. The output is executed in, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 uses the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series to form the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Of these, the electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the motor and solenoid drive process is executed. Update the pointer every time.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to instruct the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to draw drawing data for drawing an image on the liquid crystal display device as a dummy even when the game board 5 is not provided with the liquid crystal display device. When the screen data that defines the screen configuration can be received by generating it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, a V blank signal is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the peripherals shown in FIG. 185 can be received. Peripheral control unit steady processing in the control unit power-on processing may be executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not use the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a when the game board 5 is not provided with the liquid crystal display device, and counts the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 187. Then, when a predetermined value (the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 32 times) is reached, the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185 may be executed. This determination is performed in place of the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185. In this case, of the display data output processing in step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, the processing related to VDP, the display data creation processing in step S1030, and the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing shown in FIG. 186. Etc. are not executed.

Here, an example of the game content by the above game element group will be described.
The function display unit 1400 provided on the upper left of the game board 5 includes, for example, a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs, a second special symbol display composed of another eight LEDs, and the like. In the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, a lottery game (special symbol variation game) in which each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed and displayed is played. The first and second special symbols are symbols for deriving a lottery result showing the results of determination of big hit, small hit, and loss (win lottery). Then, in the present embodiment, in the lottery game, the symbol variation in which each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed and displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is changed. The game is executed as one lottery game from the start to the stop. Hereinafter, the lottery game related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display may be referred to as a "first lottery game", and the lottery game related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display may be referred to as a "first lottery game". It may be referred to as a "second lottery game".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, which of the plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used for the winning lottery when the lottery game is started. Is now selected. Specifically, a lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display is selected based on the game ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813, and is electrically operated. Based on the game ball entering the start winning opening 4871, a lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display is selected. Then, when a winning lottery using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, a symbol that blinks eight LEDs on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the corresponding lottery. Control is performed to start the fluctuation (main control board 1310X). In the symbol fluctuation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the winning lottery, the jackpot symbol (big hit display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the jackpot, and the small hit symbol. In the form of either a small hit symbol (small hit display result), which is a stop mode of a special symbol capable of recognizing a hit, or an out-of-design (disappearance display result), which is a stop mode of a special symbol capable of recognizing a miss. By lighting the eight LEDs on the symbol display in a predetermined combination mode (the symbol fluctuation is stopped), the player can determine whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or lost (lost). You will be able to recognize it. When the jackpot symbol is stopped in the form of appearing, the jackpot game in which the player can acquire the game ball (prize ball) as a prize is executed by the main control board 1310X. The jackpot game is a game that continues until the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second winning opening 4812 is opened / closed 15 times, and many prize balls can be given to the player. Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped in the form of appearing, the small hit game in which the prize ball can be acquired by the player is executed by the main control board 1310X. The small hit game is a game in which a big hit game can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the small hit game alone cannot obtain a prize ball as high as the big hit game.

Here, the small hit game will be described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit symbols are provided, and a plurality of small hit game execution modes to be subsequently executed are performed depending on the type of the small hit symbol determined in the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the winning lottery. It is set to one of the modes. Specifically, the small hit game is a game in which the second shutter plate 4806 of the first large winning opening 4807 is operated to allow a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 4807, and is executed this time. It is set so that the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the execution mode such as the opening time at the time of opening differ depending on which of the plurality of small hit symbols caused by the small hit game is. Therefore, the possibility of the game ball entering the first large winning opening 4807 differs depending on this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small hit game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is retracted for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is easier for the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 4807 than in the execution mode of the small hit game in which the player is retracted.

Next, in the small hit game, all the game balls that have entered the first large winning opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first large winning opening 4807, and the game ball reaches the rotating ball receiving member 4808. When the ball is received by the ball receiving recess 4809, it is guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotational operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808, and the game ball not received by the ball receiving recess 4809 is of the rotating ball receiving member 4808. The ball enters the general winning opening 4801 by rolling on the tapered peripheral surface that tilts downward. Then, when the game ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotational operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters the V winning opening 4810 as described above, the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second large winning opening 4812 is used as a privilege. A big hit game that opens and closes until the maximum number of opening and closing is reached is executed.

The first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818 are described in detail later, but are composed of a display area larger than either the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, and are large hits and small hits. The main purpose is to display the results of the winning lottery, such as winning and losing, in a state that is easier for the player to recognize than the above-mentioned special symbol, and to produce an exciting game. As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or lost (lost) by checking the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, 4818. You will be able to do it.

Although not shown, the function display unit 1400 has a first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball into the fixed start winning opening 4813, and an electric start winning prize. A second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball to the mouth 4871, and a lottery result per drawing determined by the passage of the game ball to the start gate 4803 are displayed. A normal symbol display composed of one LED and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball with respect to the start gate 4803 are provided.

Here, the first special hold number indicator notifies the player of the number of stored lottery winning lottery on the first special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. It is a thing. The first reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins the fixed start winning opening 4813, while is subtracted by "1" when the first lottery game is started. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted in the fixed start winning opening 4813 within the period in which the first lottery game is being performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, this) is added. In the embodiment, it is accumulated up to "4").

In addition, the second special hold number indicator notifies the player of the number of stored lottery winning lottery on the second special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. Is. The second reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins the electric start winning opening 4871, while is subtracted by "1" when the second lottery game is started. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted in the electric start winning opening 4871 within the period in which the second lottery game is being performed, the second reserved memory number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, this) is added. In the embodiment, it is accumulated up to "2").

In addition, in the normal symbol display, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (lottery per normal symbol), a normal symbol variation that fluctuates a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the result of the lottery per normal symbol is performed. Will be. This normal symbol variation is a normal hit symbol (normal hit display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal hit after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the lottery per normal symbol. By stopping in the form of either the normal symbol, which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal deviation, or the normal miss symbol (missing display result), the player wins or loses the normal symbol (normal). You will be able to recognize whether you have lost). When the ball is stopped in the form of a normal hit symbol, the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning opening 4871 advances and is ready to enter the ball.

In addition, the normal hold indicator notifies the player of the number of stored lottery tickets per normal figure (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of stored normal figures) that is held in an unexecuted state. The normal number of reserved symbols is added by "1" when the game ball is accepted by the start gate 4803 arranged on the game board 5, while it is subtracted by "1" when the normal symbol variation is started. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted at the start gate 4803 within the period in which the normal symbol change is performed, the number of reserved symbols is further added, and the predetermined upper limit (the upper limit of the symbols, in the present embodiment) Accumulate up to "4").

Further, in the present embodiment, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured not to be executed at the same time, and when the symbol change using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) is completed. When both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "1" or more, the second lottery game based on the second reserved storage number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (first lottery game or the second lottery game) and the normal symbol variation can be executed at the same time.

Although an example of the game content by the game element group of the embodiment has been described above, various variations such as a big hit, a medium hit, and a small hit may be added from here.

[Details of game area and game element group]
In the game area 5a of the embodiment, the above-mentioned game element groups are arranged in three game zones so that the interest of the game can be maximized.
That is, the game area 5a includes the upper game zone 4823 corresponding to the first game area 5a1 in FIG. 131, the right-handed game zone 4824 corresponding to the second game area 5a2 in FIG. 131, and the third game in FIG. 131. It is divided into a lower game zone 4825 corresponding to the area 5a3.

[Upper game zone]
The upper game zone 4823 includes the above-mentioned obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, a windmill 2008, a general winning opening 4801, a second display device 4817, and a third display device 4818.
At the lower edge of the upper game zone 4823, a shelf plate-shaped boundary rail 4826 is provided between the upper game zone 4823 and the lower game zone 4825 to prevent the game ball from falling into the lower game zone 4825. A diving portion 4827 provided in the middle of the 4826 (on the vertical center line of the game area 5a) communicates with the lower game zone 4825 in the size of one game ball. The details of the diving portion 4827 will be described in the section of the lower game zone 4825.
Further, the boundary rail 4826 is provided with a slope of inclination downward in the left-right direction with the diving portion 4827 as the apex, and out guide portions 1003 are provided at both ends of the descending portion.

Further, at the lower corner of the upper game zone 4823 on the inner rail 1002 side (left side in FIGS. 234 and 235), the out guide portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 passes between the inner rail 1002 and the lower game zone 4825. Even if the upper end of the out-bypass 4828 that leads to the out-bypass 4828 is open and the game balls that exceed the discharge capacity are temporarily concentrated on the out-guide portion 1003 on the inner rail 1002 side of the boundary rail 4826, the overflowing game balls will be out-bypass 4828. It flows through the out guide portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825. The so-called out-ball, which has no possibility of entering the ball, can make the player feel negative emotions, and the player can comfortably play the game by quickly collecting it and shortening the time that the player can see it. Can be made.

[Second display device]
The second display device 4817 is formed of three circular symbol display members 4816 arranged side by side on the rear side of the boundary rail 4826, and as described above, the lottery for entering the ball into the fixed start winning opening 4813 is performed. It indicates the first stage when the result is displayed step by step, and when proceeding to the display by the third display device 4818, all three symbol display members 4816 are marked with a "GO" symbol. If it ends in the first stage, the symbol "x" is displayed on at least one of the three symbol display members 4816.

The second display device 4817 is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 with the front surface of the symbol display member 4816 covering a part of the through hole 1112, and is a transparent cover plate 4883 integrated with the boundary rail 4826. Since it is covered, there is no possibility that the display surface will be scratched even if the game ball frequently passes through the front surface of the symbol display member 4816. In the embodiment, although not shown, an appropriate pattern is printed or sealed on the front surface of the cover plate 4883, and a pattern related to the pattern on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 is applied behind the cover plate 4883. The decorative plates on which the plates are formed are erected at appropriate intervals (preferably within the thickness range of the through holes 1112 of the base panel 1110). By doing so, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the game area 5a, for example, by drawing a plant pattern on the decorative plates on the front and back of the cover plate 4883 to give a visual depth to the background.

[Third display device]
The third display device 4818 is provided at the upper part on the vertical center line of the game area 5a, and displays the result of the lottery accompanying the entry of the ball into the fixed start winning opening 4813 step by step as described above. It indicates the second (final) stage.
The third display device 4818 is roughly composed of a 7-segment type display member 4884 corresponding to a one-digit number and a display frame 4885 serving as a mounting base for the display member 4884, and the whole is penetrated through the base panel 1110. It is mounted on the effect back cover 4886 that covers the rear surface of the hole 1112 so as to be movable up and down, and can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame-shaped center member 2500 that borders the front side of the through hole 1112.

[Display member]
As shown in FIG. 240, the display member 4884 of the third display device 4818 has a tubular segment partition frame 4884a penetrating in the front-rear direction that imitates the outline of each segment of the 7-segment display, and the LED substrate 4884b. A plurality of light emitting elements 4884c are installed in each frame of the segment partition frame 4884a (including the upper and lower two frames surrounded by 7 segments) while being arranged on the front surface, and further, the front opening of the segment partition frame 4884a. A lens 4884d is attached to the part. As a result, effective production can be performed using not only single-digit numbers but also the entire part surrounded by 7 segments. The display member 4884 may be an image display such as a liquid crystal or an organic EL.

[Display frame]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 has a substantially hemispherical frame body 4887 that bulges forward, and an arm that protrudes from both the left and right sides of the center of the frame body 4887 and holds a fist downward. The first movable part of the shape (hereinafter, also referred to as the arm-shaped movable part) 4888 and the lower left and right sides of the frame body 4887 are projected in a direction (angle) of about 7:25. A colored transparent sunglasses-shaped display cover 4890 attached to a display frame 4885 so as to cover a part of the display of the foot-shaped second movable part (hereinafter, also referred to as a foot-shaped movable part) 4889 and the display member 4884. It has a spherical bomb-shaped character shape that is totally anthropomorphic.

[First movable part (arm-shaped movable part)]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is formed by connecting the left and right arm members 4888a, which are resin molded products, with an arm shaft 4888c to which a driven gear 4888b is fixed in the center, and the arm shaft 4888c is attached to the inside of the display frame 4858. The arm member 4888a can rotate in both the hurray direction and the return direction by rotatably attaching to the arm support plate 4891.

[Second movable part (foot-shaped movable part)]
The foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is entirely made of a resin molded product, and the left and right foot members 4889a are axially mounted on the respective joint shaft holes 4889b through the ankle joint shaft 4892 projecting from the display frame 4885. Further, by engaging the fan-shaped gears 4889c provided at the ends of each other, the left and right foot members 4889a swing symmetrically with respect to the vertical center line.

[Arm-shaped movable part + Foot-shaped movable part]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are connected to the inside of the display frame 4885 via an elevating slider 4893 that is vertically elevated and supported so that the respective operations proceed at the same time.
That is, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is provided with the driven gear 4888b of the arm shaft 4888c meshing with the rack gear 4894 formed on the elevating slider 4893, while the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is provided at the upper end of the foot member 4889a on the right side when facing the front. A connecting pin 4895 projecting from the elevating slider 4893 is loosely fitted in the elongated hole 4889d.
Then, in the state of FIG. 243 in which the arm-shaped movable part 4888 holds the fist downward and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 is opened in the direction of about 7:25, the elevating slider 4893 is in the highest position, and the elevating slider 4893 is at the highest position. The ascending position is maintained by the weight (balance) of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Therefore, when an external force that opposes its own weight is applied to forcibly push down the elevating slider 4893 straight down, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 rotates due to the engagement of the driven gear 4888b and the rack gear 4894, and the arm member 4888a changes in the hurray direction. At the same time, the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 has one foot member 4889a having a long hole 4889d rotated about the joint shaft hole 4889b by the downward movement of the connecting pin 4895 of the elevating slider 4893, and is meshed with the fan-shaped gear 4889c together with the foot member 4889a. The other foot member 4889a also rotates around the joint shaft hole 4889b, and as a whole, as shown in FIG. 244, a spherical bomb-shaped character raises his fist and flips both feet in the direction of about 8:20. Changes to. After that, when the external force applied to the elevating slider 4893 is removed, all of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 move in opposite directions to return to the original position (posture) in FIG. 243.

[Display cover]
The sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 is fixedly attached to the frame body 4887 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884 as described above. The color of the display cover portion 4890 is very light, and therefore there is no possibility of interfering with the display of the display member 4884. The color of the display cover 4890 is darkened or made opaque to make a part of the display of the display member 4884 difficult to see, and after the display stops changing, the display cover 4890 is turned upward, for example, with sunglasses. The display of the display member 4884 may be completely displayed by rotating the display member 4884 or electrically switching the display member to transparent. By doing so, a part of the display member 4884 is hidden, for example, first, the player's expectation is raised by making it difficult to know whether the display is "0" or "8", and the display member 4884 is displayed. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by increasing the difference in the result display, such as exploding joy the moment the whole picture is seen.

[Direction back cover]
The effect back cover 4886 covers the rear surface of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 245 and 246, the back cover main body 4896 located in front and the back cover thereof. It is roughly composed of an elevating device 4897 attached to the rear surface of the main body 4896.

[Back cover body]
The back cover main body 4896 is in the form of a front open box that surrounds the rear surface of the through hole 1112 corresponding to the center member 2500, and forms an effect space 4898 communicating with the opening of the center member 2500. The back cover main body 4896 has a curved shape in which the bottom portion descends from the front to the back as shown in the central longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 240 in order to secure a sufficient vertical width (height) in the depth of the production space 4898. It has become. Further, on the bottom of the back cover main body 4896, a plurality of ridges 4899 extending in the front-rear direction are formed side by side. This ridge 4899 is for expressing the waves of the sea. For example, when an employee opens the door frame 3 to deal with a trouble, even if he accidentally drops a game ball in the production space 4898, The game ball can be easily taken out by rolling it along the ridge 4899. By the way, if there is no ridge 4899 (streak-like guide portion for scraping out the game ball) in the front-rear direction at the bottom of the back cover main body 4896, the game ball rolls freely in the lateral direction, so it takes time to capture it. It should be noted that arranging the ridges 4899 in the horizontal direction and arranging the grooves in the horizontal direction are merely differences in expression and are substantially synonymous.

[lift device]
The elevating device 4897 moves the third display device 4818 up and down in the effect back cover 4886, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 245 and 246, the rear surface of the rear wall 4896r of the back cover main body 4896. On the rear surface of the fixed elevating base 4900 attached to the elevating base 4900, the elevating panel 4901 that can be freely attached to the elevating guide shaft 4918 erected between the elevating base 4900 and the back cover main body 4896, and the elevating panel 4901. It is roughly composed of an elevating motor 4904 that engages a pinion gear 4903 with the formed elevating rack gear 4902 to elevate and elevate the elevating panel 4901.

[Third display device and elevating device]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is integrally joined with the elevating panel 4901 of the elevating device 4897. Specifically, the connecting rod 4905 projecting from the rear surface of the display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is screwed to the elevating panel 4901 through the communication port 4896w provided on the rear wall 4896r of the back cover main body 4896. Has been done. Therefore, when the elevating panel 4901 is raised by driving the elevating motor 4904, the third display device 4818 is raised together with the elevating panel 4901 as shown in FIG. 243, and conversely, when the elevating panel 4901 is lowered, as shown in FIG. Descend with. The elevating device 4897 is provided with a tension spring 4906 that pulls the elevating panel 4901 upward, and the weights of the elevating panel 4901 and the third display device 4818 are supported by tensile elasticity to reduce the burden on the elevating motor 4904. It has become like.

The elevating device 4897 also functions as a means for applying an external force necessary for moving the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 245, a key-shaped pressing member 4907 having a fuse-shaped front surface is projected from the upper end of the center toward the front on the elevating base 4900, which is a fixed element of the elevating device 4897. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 240, the lower end of the pressing member 4907 has an appropriate gap at the top of the elevating slider 4893 connected to the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. They are facing each other in the provided state.
Therefore, when the third display device 4818 is raised by the elevating device 4897, both the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are initially set until the top of the elevating slider 4893 comes into contact with the lower end of the holding member 4907, that is, until the elevating device 4897 is raised by the gap. When the top of the elevating slider 4893 abuts on the lower end of the pressing member 4907 to prevent the elevating slider 4893 from further ascending, and the third display device 4818 continues to ascend, the relative Since the elevating slider 4893 is forcibly pushed down, as shown in Fig. 244, a spherical bomb-shaped character jumps with his fist raised in the hurray state and both feet flipped up in the direction of about 8:20. Changes to. In this way, the third display device 4818 is linked to the ascent by the elevating device 4897, and operates as if the fist is raised and at the same time, both legs are opened and jumped up.
On the other hand, when the third display device 4818 rolls down from the ascending position in FIG. 244, the external force applied to the elevating slider 4893 is removed by the descending, so that the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion are in a state of being removed. Due to the weight of 4889, the elevating slider 4893 is relatively raised, and finally the position and orientation of the third display device 4818 returns to the state shown in FIG. 243.

When changing the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 in the stationary state of FIG. 243 to the jumping state of FIG. 244, the elevating slider 4893 in the stationary state is raised and the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion are movable. Since a large force is required to start the swing of the portion 4889 at the same time, in the embodiment, as described above, there is a slight difference between the fuse-type holding member 4907 on the elevating device 4897 side and the top of the elevating slider 4893. First, only the elevating slider 4893 is raised, and a time difference of the gap is provided so that the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are swung. As a result, the load applied to the elevating motor 4904 of the elevating device 4897 can be distributed and reduced.

Furthermore, by providing the rack gear 4894 on the elevating slider 4893 instead of the fixed element of the back cover main body 4896, when the third display device 4818 is fully lowered, the arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 are moved up and down by the reaction. Since it bounces slightly with the slider 4893 (the arms and legs swing slightly a few degrees in appearance), the slight movement caused by the bounce makes the movement of the character, which tends to be mechanical, human. be able to.

Further, the center member 2500 surrounding the third display device 4818 has a warp inlet 2501 which is opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that a game ball in the upper game zone 4823 can enter. The warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2502 are rolled in the left-right direction and then moved to the upper game zone 4823. A releaseable stage shelf 2503 is provided, and a game ball falling from the center of the stage shelf 2503 can enter the diving portion 4827 with a high probability.

[Lower game zone]
As shown in FIGS. 235, 240, 241 and 247 to 250, the lower game zone 4825 includes the above-mentioned first display device 4815, the start gate 4803, and the normal symbol display device 4804 of the game element group. , And a fixed start winning opening 4813, and the game balls entering the lower game zone 4825 from the diving section 4827 of the upper game zone 4823 have a plurality of (three in the embodiment) distribution sections 4829a to 4829c described later. After that, the ball enters the fixed start winning opening 4813, passes through the start gate 4803 and is collected by the out guide unit 1003, or is collected by the out guide unit 1003 without any privilege. Be done.

[Diving part]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 240, the diving portion 4827 includes a diving pocket 4830 that opens upward at the lower part of the upper game zone 4823, a pass-through type diving sensor 4831 provided in the diving pocket 4830, and a diving pocket. A side surface that moves the game ball in the front-back direction from front to back, back to front, and so on, once the game ball that has entered the 4830 is rolled to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then rolled forward to the front position of the game panel 1100. It is composed of a laterally V-shaped front-rear bending passage 4832.

[First sorting section]
The first distribution portion 4829a of the distribution portions 4829a to 4829c has a ball passage 4834 that intersects the end of the front-rear bending passage 4832 in the left-right direction via a step portion 4833 that is substantially one ball, and the step portion. The first electric distribution piece 4835 <first distribution motor 4908>, which is provided on the 4833 and always swings like a wiper, and the game ball that has fallen to the step portion 4833 through the front-rear bending passage 4832 are the first electric distribution. Depending on the swing timing of the piece 4835, the ball passage 4834 is divided into a right course flowing to the right side and a left course flowing to the left side when facing the front. Then, the right path of the ball passage 4834 is directly connected to the third distribution section 4829c described later via the screw passage 4836 that descends spirally, while the left path is indirectly via the second distribution section 4829b. It is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c.

As will be described later, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage in which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813. Therefore, the third distribution unit 4829c is directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c and is distributed to the right course. Is what the player wants. Therefore, the player tries to enter the ball into the diving section 4827 aiming at the timing of being distributed to the right course, but the diving section 4827 with respect to the first sorting section 4829a has the game ball entered into the diving pocket 4830. Since the front-rear bending passage 4832 bends in the front-rear direction to reach the first electric distribution piece 4835, the change in perspective in the front-rear direction is difficult for the player in front to understand, and the timing is adjusted accordingly. It's hard to catch. Therefore, it becomes difficult to match the entry timing of the diving portion 4827 with the movement of the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the elements of luck and unluckiness inherent in the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Second distribution section]
The second distribution portion 4829b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a is a shallow gutter-shaped recessed circular swivel portion 4837 connected to the left end of the ball passage 4834, and the circular swivel portion 4837 thereof. A plurality of (three in the embodiment) ball drop ports 4838 that penetrate the central region of the above, and a forward tilting gutter 4839 that receives the game balls falling from the ball drop ports 4838 and guides them to a substantially front position of the game panel 1100. The second electric distribution piece 4840 <second distribution motor 4909>, which is provided below the front end of the forward tilting gutter 4839 and constantly swings like a wiper, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are tilted to the left in FIG. 235. The game ball, which is composed of the right back passage 4841 that sometimes communicates and the left front passage 4842 that communicates when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stands up, is distributed to the left path by the first distribution unit 4829a. 2 The electric distribution piece 4840 is further divided into a right back passage 4841 and a left front passage 4842 according to the swing timing of the electric distribution piece 4840. The right back passage 4841 is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c, while the left front passage 4842 is connected to the starting gate 4803.

Here, the first electric distribution piece 4835 of the first distribution unit 4829a and the second electric distribution piece 4840 of the second distribution unit 4829b both constantly swing, but both swing at different cycles. Is set to. Specifically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is set to swing slowly with respect to the first electric distribution piece 4835 with a cycle of less than twice, so that the swing timings of the two swing pieces are different from each other. It is set. By doing so, when the first distribution unit 4829a and the second distribution unit 4829b are synchronized and headed from the first distribution unit 4829a to the second distribution unit 4829b, the distribution direction is generally known, that is, the second. It is possible to prevent an adverse effect that the existence value of the distribution unit 4829b is significantly reduced.

[Third sorting section]
The third distribution unit 4829c is a ball-turning type that is located at the lower part of the lower game zone 4825 and is centered on the vertical center line of the game area 5a like the diving unit 4827. It is composed of a sorting device 4843 and a sorting base 4844 provided directly under the sorting device 4843.

[Distributor]
The sorting device 4843 includes a ball rolling member 4845 that vigorously rolls the game ball and turns by inertia, a rotating member 4846 that can rotate about a vertical axis passing through the center of the ball rolling member 4845, and the rotating member 4846. It is roughly composed of a drive device 4847 that supports and rotates at a low speed in a certain direction.

[Ball rolling member]
The ball rolling member 4845 has a bottom wall portion 4849 that gently slopes downward toward the center of the circle like a shallow cup and has a circular hole 4848 in the center, and a short tubular shape that surrounds the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 4849. A peripheral wall portion 4850 and an annular curved sphere flow path are provided, and as shown in FIG. 241, a game ball is inserted into the sphere flow path inside the peripheral wall portion 4850 and in a substantially tangential direction. The input gutters 4851a and 4851b to be obtained are provided at two front and rear positions.
Then, a screw passage 4836 connected to the right path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a is connected to the front throwing gutter 4851a of the ball rolling member 4845, while the rear throwing gutter 4851b is connected to the screw passage 4836. The right back passage 4841 of the second sorting portion 4829b is connected, and therefore, the first sorting portion 4829a is fed to the ball rolling member 4845 from the front throwing gutter 4851a through the right course and the screw passage 4836. The game ball and the game ball thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the rear throwing gutter 4851b through the left course from the first sorting section 4829a and the right back passage 4841 of the second sorting section 4829b are the peripheral wall portion 4850. While applying a centrifugal force toward the side, it inertially turns clockwise on the bottom wall portion 4849 in FIG. 241. Further, since the rotating game ball gradually loses its centrifugal force as the speed decreases, it gradually descends toward the circular hole 4848 side due to the downward inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849.

As described above, the game ball is thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the two throwing gutters 4851a and 4851b, but in the embodiment, the game is thrown from the throwing gutter 4851a connected to the screw passage 4836 having a large head. The ball is faster than the game ball thrown in from the throwing gutter 4851b, and therefore, depending on the throwing timing, one game ball may collide with the other game ball and develop into an unexpected development. In this way, by providing a plurality of throwing gutters on one ball rolling member 4845 and throwing the game balls at different design speeds (distance and angle of inclination), the chance of the game is increased and the interest is effectively increased. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 249, the ball rolling member 4845 of the embodiment comes into contact with the lower side of the center of the game ball mounted on the bottom wall portion 4849 and guides the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall portion 4850. The ball guiding portion 4852 to be obtained is provided. The ball guide portion 4852 has a wedge-shaped protrusion shape in cross section that tilts downward (about 20 ° with respect to the horizon) toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion 4849 of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 250. The inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849 may be steep from the middle.

[Rotating member]
The rotating member 4846 is provided with a distribution disk 4853 having a diameter slightly smaller than the circular hole 4848 of the ball rolling member 4845 and at a height position substantially equal to or slightly lower than the circular hole 4848, and an edge of the distribution disk 4853. A plurality of (four in the embodiment) are provided at positions symmetrical with respect to the center of the distribution disk 4853 (= the center of the bottom wall portion 4849) and the hanging tube portion 4854 projecting downward along the above. A game ball for a game ball and a game ball that enters and falls by covering the lower side of the reception 4855 so as to make one of the reception 4855 a specific reception 4855v are outside the hanging tube portion 4854. A horizontal cross-shaped partition wall 4857 that separates adjacent objects of all the receiving ports 4855 including the specific receiving port 4855v, and a driving shaft 4858 of the driving device 4847 described later are inserted. It is roughly composed of a bearing cylinder 4859.

[Drive]
As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the drive device 4847 includes a drive motor 4860 provided on the lower surface of the distribution base 4844, a drive shaft 4858 protruding upward on the upper surface of the distribution base 4844, and a distribution base. It consists of a gear group 4861 inside the base 4844 that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 4860 to the drive shaft 4858, and the drive shaft 4858 is inserted through the bearing cylinder 4859 of the rotation member 4846 from below to rotate the member 4846. 4846 is rotated in a certain direction (in the embodiment, counterclockwise opposite to the turning direction of the game ball in the ball rolling member 4845) at a low speed.

[Distribution base]
The distribution base 4844 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the lower game zone 4825, and has a pocket-shaped fixed start winning opening 4813 on the front surface thereof as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 240 and directly above the distribution base 4844. A winning passage 4862 leading to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is provided, and an out-of-way passage 4863 leading to the out guide portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 is formed on both sides of the winning passage 4862 on the front surface.
Further, on the upper part of the distribution base 4844, there is an out-of-order sorting aisle 4864 that receives a game ball that has entered the entrance 4855 other than the special entrance 4845v of the rotating member 4846 in the distribution device 4843 and guides it to the out-of-door aisle 4863. The winning sorting passage 4856 that receives the game ball that has entered the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and leads to the winning passage 4862, and the game ball that jumps out of the ball rolling member 4845 in the sorting device 4843 and falls to the game hall side. A drop recovery passage 4866 for recovery is formed.

[Out-of-order sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 247 to 249, the detached sorting passage 4864 projects from the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 to a height close to the hanging cylinder portion 4854 of the rotating member 4846 of the sorting device 4843. It is formed by a substantially U-shaped enclosure frame 4867 in a plan view having a curved portion having a curved portion having substantially the same diameter as the member 4846. It receives the falling game ball and guides it to the detached passage 4863.

[Prize sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 247 to 249, the winning sorting passage 4865 is formed by a corridor gutter 4868 attached to the upper surface of the distribution base 4844 so as to surround the rotating member 4846, and rotates. It enters the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846, receives the game ball laterally fed out of the hanging tube portion 4854 by the lateral feed gutter 4856, and guides it to the front winning passage 4862. When the game ball enters the special reception 4855v at the timing when the special reception 4855v of the rotating member 4846 is located above the winning passage 4862 as shown in FIG. 249 (a), the horizontal feed gutter 4856 It falls directly into the winning passage 4862.

[Fall recovery passage]
The drop recovery passage 4866 is composed of an upper surface of a distribution base 4844 inclined downward downward and a gutter-shaped step portion 4869 provided at the rear portion of the distribution base 4844, and is formed from a ball rolling member 4845 of the distribution device 4843. The game balls that have jumped out and fallen are collected in the gutter-shaped step portion 4869 and collected together with the out balls and the like on the game hall side.

[Countermeasures against slapstick in the sorting device]
For the ball-swivel type sorting device, Dotsukigoto hits the front of the pachinko machine strongly at the timing when the game ball swirling on the bottom wall approaches the specific receiving port, and the impact causes the pachinko machine to vibrate. The trajectory of the pachinko ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by vibration to enter the target specific receiving port.
On the other hand, the ball rolling member 4845 of the distribution device 4843 of the embodiment is slightly separated from the peripheral wall portion 4850 by the ball guiding portion 4852 when the game ball inertially rolls on the bottom wall portion 4489 while being affected by the centrifugal force. Since it is guided to the position, there is a slight gap as shown in FIG. 249 (a) even when the game ball is closest to the peripheral wall portion 4850.
Therefore, a player who plots a dotsukigoto applies an impact to the pachinko machine 1 as shown by arrow F in FIG. 249 (b) to vibrate the ball rolling member 4845 in the front-rear direction, and hits the game ball with the peripheral wall portion 4850. Even if the trajectory is changed in the radial direction, the movement of the peripheral wall portion 4850 is not immediately transmitted to the game ball because there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 4850 and the game ball. Further, the ball guiding portion 4852 in contact with the game ball is obliquely hitting the lower side of the center of the game ball, and sneaks into the lower side of the game ball by vibration to move the game ball as shown by arrow M in FIG. 249 (b). Attempts to move in a direction different from the direction intended by the fraudster. Therefore, it is possible to substantially make it difficult.

[Other]
In addition, in the lower game zone 4825, a passing type first ball sensor 4870a for detecting a game ball passing through the right course in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a and a right back passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b A pass-through type second ball sensor 4870b for detecting a game ball passing through is provided, and a distribution device for a third distribution unit 4829c is provided by detecting the game ball with the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b. The number of balls in 4843 can be managed. Then, the number of balls that have entered the distribution device 4843 and the number of balls detected by the start gate 4803 through the left front passage 4842 of the second distribution unit 4829b are totaled and detected by the diving sensor 4831 of the diving unit 4827. By comparing with the number of balls that entered the lower game zone 4825, it is possible to know the existence of game balls that do not go out while still in the lower game zone 4825, and a warning that some kind of cheating is suspected. Can be sent to the administrator.

Further, in the embodiment, the flow path from the diving portion 4827 to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is long, and the residence time of the game ball is long. It becomes difficult to make a so-called stoppage that temporarily stops the firing of. Therefore, there is an effect that the stoppage that acts disadvantageously for the amusement park can be effectively prevented.

[Right-handed game zone]
The right-handed game zone 4824 includes the above-mentioned obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, the starting gate 4803, the electric starting winning opening 4871, the first large winning opening 4807, and the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the order of the flow of the game balls. , General winning opening 4801, V winning opening 4810, general winning opening 4801, second large winning opening 4812, in which a game ball placed on a tapered peripheral surface tilting downward of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters. The out guidance unit 1003 is shared with the lower game zone 4825.

The right-handed game zone 4824 is connected to the upper game zone 4823 by a connecting passage portion 5a4 through which a game ball launched with a specific strong firing force can pass, as in FIGS. 131 to 139 and 194. The details of the connecting passage portion 5a4 are the same as those described in FIGS. 131 to 139 and 194, and will be omitted.

Further, the right-handed game zone 4824 is provided with a right-handed ball flow path that goes around the above-mentioned game element group.
This right-handed ball flow path
An upper free fall area 4910 formed directly below the exit portion of the connecting passage portion 5a4 and having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a starting gate 4803.
In addition, a first gutter 4911 that opens upward at the lower end of the free fall area 4910 and receives a game ball that has passed through the start gate 4803 and a game ball that has simply passed by the start game gate 4803 without passing through the start game gate 4803.
Four obstacle nails 2007 are planted in a corner post shape continuously at the end of the first gutter 4911, and a branch area 4912 where the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning opening 4871 is located in the direction of falling straight.
The second gutter 4913 which opens to the left side in FIG. 234 of the branching area 4912, bypasses the outside of the electric start winning opening 4871 in a horizontal U shape, and joins the flow path in the straight falling direction of the branching area 4912.
The third gutter 4914, which is continuous from the second gutter 4913 and includes the upper surface of the first shutter plate 4802 of the first grand prize opening 4807 as a part of the flow path,
It is located between the second major winning opening 4812 and directly below the exit portion of the third gutter 4914, and is formed of a lower free fall area 4915 having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a general winning opening 4801.

As shown in FIGS. 234 and 251 of the right-handed game zone 4824, the right-handed ball flow path is located on the inner surface side of the boundary wall 4916 that divides the upper-layer game zone 4823 and the lower-layer game zone 4825. A lighting board 4917 for directing to illuminate from the side is provided. Depending on the position and orientation of the lighting board 4917, the front end surface or the back surface of the board, which is opaque when viewed from the player side, can be seen, and the light of the light emitting LED, which is a light source, is difficult to directly enter the field of view. It is possible to suppress glare while illuminating the light brightly.
Further, in the right-handed game zone 4824, a timer seg 4882 with a segment display capable of displaying a 5-digit number is provided near the end of the third gutter 4914, and a timer for hitting with this timer seg 4882 is provided. It is designed to enhance the interest of the game by giving notices.

The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment has the above configuration, and the outline of the game is as described above. However, to supplement the explanation, the player first hits the game ball into the upper game zone 4823 and jumps into it. Aim to enter the 4827 part. Of course, only a part of the ball enters the diving section 4827 as intended, and some of the balls enter the general winning opening 4801, while others enter the out guidance section 1003 and finish the game as soon as possible.
When the ball enters the diving section 4827 in the upper game zone 4823, enters the lower game zone 4825, and the game ball enters the fixed start winning opening 4801 through the above-mentioned multiple distributions, the first special symbol display is displayed. A lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol is performed in the first lottery game, and in this first lottery game, the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 are stepwise. The effect display makes you expect that you have hit the above-mentioned big hit game or small hit game. That is, based on the progress of the lottery game described above, first, the display lamp 4814 of the first display device 4815 is turned on in order from the bottom to the top, so that the start of the lottery is displayed as if the fire of the fuse is burning. Then, the lottery result of the first stage is displayed with the contents of the three symbols displayed on the second display device 4817 (for example, three "GO" displays are lined up), and finally the final stage is displayed on the third display device 4818. (Specifically, a single-digit number is displayed by a large segment display, and a spherical bomb-shaped character is jumped by a display frame 4885, an arm-shaped movable part 4888, and a foot-shaped movable part 4889). Make the player recognize the hit and miss.

In addition, among the game balls launched in the upper game zone 4823, some of the game balls that entered the diving section 4827 but did not enter the fixed start winning opening 4801 pass through the second distribution section 4829b. It is possible to pass through the start gate 4803, and when the game ball passes through the start gate 4803, the signal is detected by the gate sensor 4875 and the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery regarding the operation of the first shutter plate 4802 is performed.
Then, when a hit (1/10) is reached in the normal symbol lottery, the first shutter plate 4802 of the right-handed game zone 4824 moves forward by the amount corresponding to the lottery result, and it becomes possible to enter the electric start winning opening 4871. Then, when that time elapses, the first shutter plate 4802 retracts and it becomes impossible to enter the electric start winning opening 4871.
The result of the lottery is displayed on the production ordinary symbol display device 4804 (specifically, a one-digit number is displayed by the segment display).

In addition, after the end of the big hit game, the time-saving game state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery is shortened (for example, 1 second) from the fluctuation time in the normal game state (for example, 120 seconds). Mainly the lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display by directly aiming at the start gate 4803 of the right-handed game zone 4824 instead of the diving part 4827. It becomes possible to proceed with the game. The time-saving game state ends under a predetermined end condition (for example, 10 times variable display of a special symbol), and returns to the normal game state.

Although the present invention has been described above with embodiments, the present invention is, of course, not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (reel or a reel) can be used by using a game medal. It can also be applied to slot machines that rotate reels).

Further, in the embodiment, the game area 5a is formed by three game zones, but it may be composed of two game zones or a single game area 5a.
Further, in the embodiment, the ball rolling member 4845 has been described as a part of the sorting device 4843, but the ball rolling member 4845 rolls the game ball in a state visible to the player in the game area 5a. If it is, it is not limited to the sorting device 4843.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine, which is an example of a game machine, a game area surrounded by rails and covered with a window is provided on the game board, and a player can play a game ball above the game area. When a ball is driven and enters a specific entrance or the like in the process of the game ball flowing down, a predetermined number of game balls are provided (released) to the player as a prize for the entry, while entering the specific entrance. The non-balled game balls are collected on the game field side through the out-ball opening.
By the way, some players apply a strong external force (specifically, hitting or pulling the ball plate strongly) to the pachinko machine to vibrate the whole, and the vibration forces the trajectory of the game ball. There is a person who changes the ball to enter a specific entrance and tries to obtain a prize illegally (hereinafter, such a fraudulent act is simply referred to as "dotsukigoto").
For example, as a pachinko machine that is vulnerable to the above-mentioned damage, there is a ball-turning type sorting device that is generally also called a "cruon".
This sorting device is provided with a sphere flow path consisting of a bottom wall portion that gently descends toward the center of a circle like a shallow cup and a peripheral wall portion that surrounds the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion, and the sphere flow. A ball rolling member that swivels on the bottom wall while applying a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall side by throwing a game ball into the road toward the inside of the peripheral wall portion and in a substantially tangential direction, and the bottom wall. A plurality of (for example, 2 to 4) entrances for game balls provided at positions symmetrical with respect to the center of the portion, and one of the entrances, which is one of the entrances, is given a privilege for entering the ball. The game ball, which consists of a specific inlet and a ball that is set so as to be inserted into the ball flow path of the ball rolling member and initially swirls along the peripheral wall due to centrifugal force, gradually loses momentum and is the center of the bottom wall. The element of the game is which of the receptions including the specific reception is finally entered after gradually descending to the side.
The Dotsuki Goto for such a ball-swivel type sorting device applies an external force by hitting the front of the pachinko machine strongly at the timing when the game ball swirling on the bottom wall approaches the specific receiving port, and the impact is applied. The pachinko machine is vibrated, and the trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by the vibration to enter the target specific receiving port.
Therefore, as a conventional measure against such a slapstick, for example, as described in a document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-229209), a vibration sensor is installed in a pachinko machine, and the vibration detected by the vibration sensor causes the slapstick. It was decided that whether or not it was, and the amusement park side would take necessary measures based on the judgment result.
The conventional vibration sensor countermeasures against slapstick are only presumed that the slapstick was done by detecting the abnormal vibration of the pachinko machine, and even if the ball enters the specific reception immediately after the abnormal vibration, the ball enters. It was difficult to prove the causal relationship between and abnormal vibration, and it was not possible to prevent the actual damage caused by Dotsukigoto.

[How to attach the vibration detection switch and the back gutter member for the game ball]
As described above, the back gutter member 1110ta for the left game ball is attached to the left side of the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, and above the upper part of the left wall of the back box 3010 as described above. The vibration detection switch 3005 is attached, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a is attached near the lower part of the left side wall of the back box 3010 as described above. Further, as described above, the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball is attached to the front right side of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is located near the lower part of the right wall of the back box 3010. It is attached. Stop holes are formed in the back gutter member 1110ta for the left game ball and the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball, respectively, and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 corresponds to these multiple stop holes. Mounting boss holes having a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) are formed at the positions to be mounted forward. Here, the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a cross-sectional view in which the back box is partially bent and cut in the left-right direction along the vertical direction, and is a schematic view (a) showing a method of attaching the vibration detection switch and the back gutter member for a game ball. , A modification (b) thereof. The back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball in FIG. 252 enters the electric starting winning opening 4871, the first large winning opening 4807, the general winning opening 4801, the V winning opening 4810, the second large winning opening 4812, and the like. The gutter part for guiding the game ball to the rear downstream side is omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

The back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball has stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five stop holes) for attaching the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball to the front right side of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), it is not formed at all except for the region where the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached. Specifically, the stop holes 1110tba1, 1110tba2, 1110tba3 are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stop holes 1110tba3 and the stop holes 1110tba4, 1110tba5 are in the vertical direction of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. They are arranged so as to be separated from the center point of the above by the same vertical distance dimension.

On the right side of the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, a plurality of stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five stop holes) formed in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball are positioned forwardly. Since the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) having a height (6 mm in the present embodiment) are formed so as to project, the mounting boss holes 3010ab1, 3010ab2, 3010ab3 have the same vertical distance dimensions. The mounting boss holes 3010ab3 and the mounting boss holes 3010ab4 and 3010ab5 are arranged apart from each other by the same vertical distance dimension from the vertical center point of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. ing.

As described above, in a state where the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball is attached to the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the above-mentioned predetermined height formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010. With mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) having (6 mm in the present embodiment), between the back surface of the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010. A space having a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) is formed in the space. As a result, when the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached to the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 near the lower part of the right wall of the back box 3010, the upper side and the left side of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b are front and back. Even if the ball is arranged in the vicinity of the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball that is bent in the left-right direction, the game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball is the ball guidance path BS. Since the vibration generated when the ball collides with the guide wall can be released by using this space, the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball is passed through the back surface to the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010. It can contribute to prevent transmission. As a result, the vibration generated when the game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed in the back gutter member 1110 tb for the right game ball collides with the guide wall of the ball guide path BS can be released by using the above-mentioned space. Since it is possible to make it difficult to transmit to the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b due to this vibration.

Further, of the plurality of stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five stop holes) formed in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball, the stop holes 1110tba1, 1110tba2, 1110tba3 are separated from each other at equal intervals in the vertical direction. In addition to being arranged, the stop holes 1110tba3 and the stop holes 1110tba4 and 1110tba5 are arranged apart from the vertical center point of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b by substantially the same vertical distance dimension. Then, among the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 so as to correspond to these stop holes 1110tba1 to 1110tba5 (five fixing holes). The mounting boss holes 3010ab1, 3010ab2, 3010ab3 are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the mounting boss holes 3010ab3 and the mounting boss holes 3010ab4, 3010ab5 are the vertical centers of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. They are arranged so as to be separated from the points by the same vertical distance dimension. As a result, the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 are formed with five stop holes in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball, and the back box 3010. By limiting the area to five mounting boss holes formed on the front surface of the base, which is the bottom plate of the ball, the ball guide path BS formed on the back gutter member 1110 tb for the right game ball can be formed. It is possible to contribute to prevent the vibration generated when the passing game ball collides with the guide wall of the ball taxiway BS from being transmitted to the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 via the mounting surface. Regarding this point as well, it is difficult for the vibration generated when the game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed in the back gutter member 1110 tb for the right game ball collides with the guide wall of the ball guide path BS to be transmitted to the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b due to this vibration.

Further, the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 are formed with five stop holes in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball, and the back box 3010. By limiting to the five mounting boss holes formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate, the game ball passing through the ball taxiway BS formed on the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball is the ball taxiway BS. The vibration path generated when the taxiway collides with the guide wall can be limited to the mounting surface.

In order to achieve such an effect, a stop hole is formed in each of the back gutter members 1110ta for the left game ball, and these multiple stop holes are formed on the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010. Mounting boss holes having a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) are formed at corresponding positions toward the front.

The front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010 causes vibration generated when the game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed in the back gutter member 1110 tb for the right game ball collides with the guide wall of the ball guide path BS. As a configuration capable of preventing transmission to the right side game ball, a notch having a larger distance dimension than the vertical distance dimension of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is provided on the back gutter member 1110tb for the right side game ball. It can also be configured to be formed on the back surface side of the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball at a position corresponding to 3006b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 252 (b), a notch portion 1110tbb having a distance dimension larger than that in the vertical direction of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is placed below the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball. It is formed on the back surface side of the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball at a position corresponding to the vibration detection switch 3006b. The difference from FIGS. 252 (a) and 252 (b) is that the mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 in FIG. The mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 in FIG. 252 (b) have a predetermined height (6 mm in the present embodiment) toward the rear while being formed on the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the box 3010. The point is that it is formed on the rear surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 so as to project, and the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball in FIG. 252 (a) is on the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010. Right side by mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (five mounting boss holes) having the above-mentioned predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) formed on the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 in the mounted state. While a space of a predetermined height (6 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the back gutter member 1110 tb for the game ball and the front surface of the base serving as the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the figure is shown in the figure. When the back gutter member 1110tb for the right game ball in 252 (b) is attached to the front surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010, the back surface of the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010 and the base which is the bottom plate of the back box 3010. Has the same height as the notch portion 1110tbb (mounting boss holes 3010ab1 to 3010ab5 (6 mm in this embodiment)) formed in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right side game ball. Except for.), The point is that they are in surface contact. As a result, the vibration generated when the game ball passing through the ball guide path BS formed in the back gutter member 1110 tb for the right game ball collides with the guide wall of the ball guide path BS is generated in the back gutter member 1110 tb for the right game ball. Since it can be escaped by utilizing the space of the cutout portion 1110tbb formed, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit to the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b due to this vibration. The cutout portion 1110tbb formed in the back gutter member 1110tb for the right side game ball may be formed in the back gutter member 1110ta for the left side game ball.

[Angle position of D-cut surface formed on the rotation axis of the stepping motor]
Next, with the rotation shaft of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 that swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a constant wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right side). , The second electric distribution piece 4840 is always in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the standing (hereinafter referred to as "vertically inverted") mechanical end). The rotational shafts of the swinging second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the angular positions of the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotating shafts of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 will be described. FIG. 254 is a diagram showing a D-cut angle position formed on the rotation axis of the first and second distribution stepping motors. Here, since the method of arranging the angular positions of the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotation axes of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is the same, the rotation axes of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 In the description of the method of arranging the angular position of the D-cut surface formed in the above, the reference numerals relating to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the reference numerals relating to the second sorting stepping motor 4909 are shown in parentheses.

The first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are unipolar stepping motors having phases of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2, and the rotation shaft is press-fitted into the rotor. The first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described in detail later, but the rotation shaft is press-fitted into the rotor so that the rotation position of the rotation shaft is determined according to the number of steps from the reference excitation phase. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the rotating shaft can be substantially grasped without providing a rotating angle sensor such as a rotary encoder for accurately measuring the angle of the rotating shaft.

As shown in FIG. 254 (a), the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) has mounting holes 4908b (4909b) formed on the left and right sides of its rotating shaft 4908a (4909a), respectively. The left side mounting hole 4908b (4909b), the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a), and the right side mounting hole 4908b (4909b) are arranged on the same straight line and serve as the horizontal center line of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). ing. A straight line that intersects the center line in the horizontal direction perpendicularly and passes through the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) is the center line in the vertical direction of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). The diameter of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is 4 mm (φ4).

The rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) has a D-cut surface formed in advance, and this D is in a state where φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). It is press-fitted into the rotor so that the cut surface is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the center line in the horizontal direction. As a result, in the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is horizontal. The position is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the center line in the direction, and the D-cut angle position is the absolute position.

The first electric distribution piece 4835 in the first distribution unit 4829a swings like a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, it is distributed to the right course flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and is distributed to the right course and spirally descends through the screw passage 4836. While connected to the distribution unit 4829c, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, it is distributed to the left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and the second It is connected to the distribution unit 4829b of. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position. In the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 that swings like a wiper when φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) is the mechanical end on the left side. It is determined by the position of or the position of the mechanical end on the right side. A detailed description of this point will be described later.

The second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution unit 4829b connected to the left course of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. It swings like a moving wiper. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, it is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842, whereas the second electric distribution piece 4840 When it swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, it is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position. In the second distribution stepping motor 4909, the rotation position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 that swings like a wiper when φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) is the mechanical end on the left side. It is determined by the position of or the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. A detailed description of this point will be described later.

As described above, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage in which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to the position of the mechanical end on the left side. When it reaches, it is distributed to the right path flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the screw passage 4836 that descends spirally. The distribution to the right course directly connected to the portion 4829c is desired by the player, and is distributed to an area that is advantageous to the player. Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution portion 4829b connected to the left course of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the right back passage 4841 is opened. Since it is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the third distribution unit 4829c, the distribution connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is desired by the player, and the area is advantageous to the player. It is a distribution.

On the other hand, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, it is distributed to the left path flowing to the left side toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. Therefore, in the second distribution unit 4829b, although it is possible to obtain an opportunity for distribution connected to the third distribution unit 4829c, it is possible to obtain a right course directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c described above. By comparison, the connection to the third distribution unit 4829c is intervened by the distribution by the second distribution unit 4829b, and the probability of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is reduced, which is advantageous for the player. It is hard to say that it is distributed to. Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, it is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842. It is not connected to the distribution unit 4829c at all, and the distribution to the area advantageous to the player is not performed.

The connector 4908c (4909c) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is provided at a position rotated clockwise by 135 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line, as shown in FIG. 254 (b). As shown, pin 1 is assigned / φ2, pin 2 is assigned / φ1, pin 3 is assigned φ2C (common), pin 4 is assigned φ1C (common), and pin 5 is assigned. Φ2 is assigned to the pin, and φ1 is assigned to the sixth pin. Various voltages (operating voltage described later, stopping voltage described later) are applied to φ2C (common) assigned to the 3rd pin, and toward φ2 assigned to the 1st pin or φ2 assigned to the 5th pin. Current flows. Various voltages (operating voltage described later, stopping voltage described later) are applied to φ1C (common) assigned to the 4th pin, and toward φ1 assigned to the 2nd pin or φ1 assigned to the 6th pin. Current flows.

The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 according to the rotational state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a). Has been done.

In this way, in the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is changed. The position is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the center line in the horizontal direction, and is the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, eight phases (φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2) described later are used as a combination of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). (Except for those that do not excite all), and the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined by the combination of excitation of each of these eight phases. It has become.

In this way, the combination of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end). When the correspondence between the above and the above is not formed at all, for example, a sensor is provided so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is detected at the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the rotation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is performed. The shaft 4908a is rotated to push the first electric distribution piece 4835 to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and when detected by the sensor, the exciting phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the first electric distribution are performed. There is a drawback that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence with the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the piece 4835, and a sensor is provided so that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is detected in the state of the position of the mechanical end on the left side. The rotation shaft 4909a of the 2-distribution stepping motor 4909 is rotated to push the second electric distribution piece 4840 to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and when detected by the sensor, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is excited. There is a drawback that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence between the phase and the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the second electric distribution piece 4840.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), as described above, when φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) ) Is structurally determined so that the angle of the D-cut surface is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line to be the D-cut angle position. , 8 combinations of excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end), and Since the correspondence between the above is electrically determined, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) (of each mechanical end) without performing the above-mentioned pushing operation at all. The position is excluded.), And it is possible to determine.

Further, in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the first excitation to rotate the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840). Even if the position is different from the expected rotation position, the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) can be adjusted to the intended rotation position by controlling the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) by the next excitation. Therefore, recovery can be easily performed. This can be applied even when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is out of step due to this excitation, and the first electric distribution is controlled by controlling the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) by the next excitation. Since the rotation position of the piece 4835 (4840) can be adjusted to the intended rotation position, the step-out recovery of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) can be easily performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as an electric drive source that constantly swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). An electric drive that uses a stepping motor and constantly swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction). The reason for adopting a stepping motor as a source will be briefly explained.

The first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 distribute the game balls according to the distribution ratio, and accuracy is required. For this reason, when a solenoid is used as the electrical drive source, there is a difference between the plunger moving speed when the solenoid's excitation drive is started and the plunger moving speed which returns due to the restoring force of the spring when the solenoid's excitation drive is stopped. .. Further, since the plunger returns due to the restoring force of the spring, the plunger moving speed is not always constant, and the plunger moving speed due to the variation of the spring also differs depending on the solenoid. Further, as described above, the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 constantly swing in a wiper shape. Therefore, when a solenoid is used as an electric drive source, the solenoid is not durable. Due to the aged deterioration of the spring, it is difficult to continue the sorting operation by the first electric sorting piece 4835 and the second electric sorting piece 4840 according to the sorting ratio set at the time of design. As described above, when the solenoid is used as the electric drive source, it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation by the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the distribution operation is finely controlled. Is difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electric drive is durable, has little deterioration over time, has a small variation in performance between individuals, can accurately control the distribution operation, and can finely control the distribution operation. As a source, a first distribution stepping motor 4908, which is a stepping motor, was adopted for the first electric distribution piece 4835, and a second distribution stepping motor 4909, which is a stepping motor, was adopted for the second electric distribution piece 4840.

In the present embodiment, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is formed on the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON) as described above. The angle of the D-cut surface to be formed is structurally determined to be the D-cut angle position at a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line, and further, the first Correspondence between eight combinations of excitations of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) for φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 and the rotation position of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Is electrically determined, so the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) without performing the above-mentioned pushing operation at all. ), But such a mechanism can be used for other production devices provided with a movable body operated by a stepping motor. Such other effect devices may be provided in the game board 5 or in the door frame 3. When the other effect device is controlled by the main control board 1310X, the stepping motor that operates the movable body is driven and controlled by the main control board 1310X, and when the other effect device is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, it is movable. The stepping motor that operates the body is driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable effect body (movable body) is driven by a drive motor (stepping motor) on the front surface of a liquid crystal display that displays various images according to various effects (stepping motor). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194 (paragraph [0039], paragraph [0045] to paragraph [0051], FIGS. 2 to 4). A photo sensor is placed at the original position of the movable effect body (movable body), and the presence of the movable effect body (movable body) can be grasped by being detected by the photo sensor. It has become. However, since the gaming machine described in this document is configured to specify the original position of the movable effect body (movable body) based on the detection signal from the photo sensor, the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, when the original position of the movable effect body (movable body) cannot be specified in the case where the electric power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the exciting phase to the drive motor (stepping motor) and the movable body effect There was a problem that the position of the (movable body) could not be specified.

[Voltage switching circuit]
Next, depending on the rotational state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), the working voltage and the stopping voltage are mutually excited as excitations to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2. A voltage switching circuit that can be switched to will be described. FIG. 255 is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit.

The first distribution stepping motor 4908 constantly swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in the shape of a wiper, and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 constantly swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 in the shape of a wiper. , It is necessary to constantly drive the second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. However, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are constantly driven, the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 generate excessive heat, which causes a problem in the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. Or failure may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are constantly driven.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to swing the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840 in a wiper shape, an operating voltage is used. On the other hand, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to stop the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840, the voltage switching circuit that uses the stop voltage is controlled. It has been realized.

First, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 1310X can switch between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage as the voltage applied to the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. It includes two distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, and first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q capable of driving the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909.

Here, since the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p have the same circuit configuration and the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q have the same circuit configuration, the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q have the same circuit configuration. In the description of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, and the description of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, the code relating to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is followed by the code relating to the second distribution stepping motor 4909. Is expressed in parentheses.

The first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly comprises a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. Has been done. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and electrically to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is a first electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 2), which is not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 1. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop). The input terminal of the first electric distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop (the second electric distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop) is the output for the first electric distribution piece voltage switching of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (output terminal for switching the voltage of the second electric distribution piece).

The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). .. The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The other end of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD51 and MD52 (MD61, MD62), respectively, and supplies power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) + 12V-. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) as a power supply line U (+ 12V-D).

The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) contains four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN-type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is Electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66) and is the base of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is a terminal and electricity of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the connector 1310z (D / φ1 line) as a U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which a current for exciting / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. (See FIG. 256), the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal, and the Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. ), Which is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256), and the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor has a current that excites / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) as a flowing U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line).

The other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, is PD0 (PD4) that instructs the start or stop of excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 with respect to φ1. ) Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 D type flip-flop for φ1 (not shown) of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 D type flip-flop for φ1 (not shown) as a line for transmitting the signal. There is. The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the φ1 D-type flip flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is the input terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (φ1 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, indicates the start or stop of excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 with respect to / φ1 (PD1). Electrically with the output terminal of the 1st sorting stepping motor 4908 / φ1 D type flip-flop (not shown 2nd sorting stepping motor 4909 / φ1 D type flip-flop) as a line for transmitting the signal PD5). It is connected. The input terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 / φ1 D type flip flop (the second distribution stepping motor 4909 / φ1 D type flip flop) is the first distribution stepping motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the 4908 / φ1 output terminal (the / φ1 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, instructs PD2 (PD6) to start or stop excitation of φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. ) Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 D-type flip-flop for φ2 (not shown) of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 D-type flip-flop for φ2 (not shown) as a line for transmitting the signal. There is. The input terminal of the φ2 D type flip flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the φ2 D type flip flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is the input terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (φ2 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor, indicates the start or stop of excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 with respect to / φ2 (PD3). Electrically with the output terminal of the 1st sorting stepping motor 4908 / φ2 D type flip-flop (not shown 2nd sorting stepping motor 4909 / φ2 D type flip-flop) as a line for transmitting the signal PD7). It is connected. The input terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 / φ2 D type flip flop (second distribution stepping motor 4909 / φ2 D type flip flop) is the first distribution stepping motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the 4908 / φ2 output terminal (the / φ2 output terminal of the second distribution stepping motor 4909).

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four diodes built-in, and the first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in a package, and the third and fourth diodes are paired. It is placed in the package.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been done. The cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been done. The cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

The first to fourth diodes convert the counter electromotive force generated when the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 is stopped into heat and remove it. This protects the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors.

A power supply line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is a first distribution stepping motor via a terminal of connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and a wiring (not shown). The connector 4908 (4909) is electrically connected to φ2C (common) of the third pin and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin of the 4908c (4909c). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which the current that excites φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (see FIG. 256) via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to φ1 of the 6th pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the 4909). The U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which the current for exciting / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to / φ1 of the second pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current that excites φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (see FIG. 256) via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to φ2 of the fifth pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of 4909). The U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which the current for exciting / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 256) and a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to / φ2 of the first pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909).

PD0 to PD3 instructing the start and stop of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. When the swing drive data PD0 to PD7, which is 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 instructing the start and stop of the above, is output from the main control MPU1310a, the corresponding D-type flipflop described above and each resistor are used. Is input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q, respectively. The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) receives the operating voltage or the operating voltage by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) according to the swing drive data PD0 to PD3 (PD4 to PD7) from the main control MPU 1310a. A current that excites φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is passed by the voltage switched to the stop voltage.

Here, the operation of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. When the signal logic of the voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the operating voltage logic. , The transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off, and the voltage of the power supply line + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is raised to the + 12V side by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60). As a result, + 12V is supplied as an operating voltage to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). It should be noted that the power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) is not supplied to the +5 power supply line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

On the other hand, when the signal logic of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as a stopping voltage logic that is the reverse of the working voltage logic logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned on. Then, when + 12V is cut off by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60), the voltage of the power supply line + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is the diode MD50 (MD60). By being pulled up to the + 5V side via the above, + 5V is supplied as a stop voltage to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). Will be done.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stopping voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V × voltage V ÷ resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage + 12V is 144 / resistance R, and the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage + 5V is 25 / resistance R. Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage + 12V is 5 times or more (5.76 = 144/25) as compared with the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage + 5V, so that the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. It becomes. This also applies to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

That is, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem in the independent (continuous) driving by the operating voltage of + 12V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by the driving by the stopping voltage of + 5V.

The package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) includes heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). It absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the counter electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) into heat, and uses the absorbed heat as the outside air. It escapes to (around the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island equipment in the game hall is lined up in a row with other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment in the game hall is high due to the heat generated from the power supply board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC1310n (1310q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first distribution stepping motor drive is performed. Around the IC1310n (1310q), that is, when the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so that heat is stored in the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC1310n (1310q). It will be. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN type Darlington The transistor may fail.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is driven to rotate the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) in CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first By exciting the sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 as continuously as possible, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) can be excited to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2. The number of times the excitation is stopped is reduced, and the countercurrent force generated when the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 is stopped is the first to fourth. It is possible to reduce the number of times that the diode converts it into heat and removes it. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a small value, which can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors from failing due to heat.

In the present embodiment, the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) does not use a relay, but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60). This is because a time lag occurs in the relay and there is a large variation in performance between individuals, so that it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable effect body is driven by a drive motor (stepping motor) on the front surface of a liquid crystal display that displays various images according to various effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194 (paragraph [0039], paragraph [0045] to paragraph [0049], FIGS. 2, 3)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, when the movable effect body is started to operate by the drive motor (stepping motor) and stopped at the effect position, the drive motor (stepping motor) is excited to produce the movable effect body. Since it is necessary not to move from the position, there is a problem that the drive motor (stepping motor) generates excessive heat when the drive motor (stepping motor) is constantly excited.
[Poly switch]

Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. FIG. 256 is a schematic view showing the arrangement of polyswitches.

The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). In the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat. When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns, and by using this, the current flowing to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is a load, is limited and the load, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). ) Can be protected. A fuse can be mentioned as a device that limits the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by blowing it when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, it is necessary to prevent a person who obtains an illegal game ball by illegally modifying the important main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game, such as the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 256, the main control board 1310X is housed in the main control board box 1320 composed of the transparent cover body 1301 and the transparent base body 1302, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Is crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303. The caulking portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of the caulking portions 1303. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Needs to destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, the fuse must be mounted on the main control board 1310X, and if the fuse blows, the caulking portion 1303 must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the crimped portion 1303 of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is played. It will be in a state where it cannot be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting the overcurrent, similar to the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the current flowing to the load can be limited to protect the load by identifying the polyswitch. That is, unlike the fuse, the polyswitch itself is not destroyed by overcurrent, there is no need to replace it, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is a load, can be protected, and the caulking portion 1303 needs to be destroyed. There is no.

The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a rectangular parallelepiped shape as a main body, and is a reed linear in which two leads project downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity and causes a current. When it is shut off and the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), by arranging the two leads of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) in the vertical direction, the thickness of the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can be increased. The smaller surface can be in the vertical direction, and the heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can be easily convected upward.

Further, since a large current flows through the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60), the terminal for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and each phase (φ1, / φ1) of the power supply first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). , Φ2, / φ2) are arranged in the vicinity of the connector 1310z having a terminal for exciting the magnet. As a result, it is possible to contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) with respect to other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310X.

Further, since the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), it is possible to protect the overheating of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909).

In the present embodiment, one poly switch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310X for the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. The poly switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the collector terminals 2 of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q Even if it is configured to provide one poly switch exclusively between 4, 9 and 11 and the terminals of the connectors 4908c and 4909c of the corresponding first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, one poly switch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310X for the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. The poly switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, it is supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. A common poly switch may be provided exclusively for each of the + 12V and + 5V motor power supplies, or the voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p of the first and second distribution stepping motors are supplied, respectively. One common polyswitch may be provided exclusively for the + 12V motor power supply.

Further, for example, when another stepping motor is driven together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven by the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n, and the other stepping motor is another stepping motor drive IC. (When driven by), the motor power supply supplied to the other stepping motor together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be switched by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, the common polyswitch for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the other stepping motor is the polyswitch MPS50, and the motor power supply of + 12V or + 5V is used for other stepping together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 via the polyswitch MPS50. It is supplied to each motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the unipolar type stepping motor is used as the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909, but a bipolar type stepping motor may be used instead. In this case, one poly switch is provided exclusively for each terminal to which the motor power of + 12V and + 5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature) such as a polymer-based PTC (abbreviation for Positive Temperature Temperature) thermistor.
Although it is an element (abbreviation of Coefficient), the same effect as the above-mentioned polyswitch can be obtained even if a ceramic PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) element or bimetal is used as the resettable fuse.

Incidentally, conventionally, a board box is provided in which a game control board (control board) is housed in a storage member (cover body) in a base member (base body), and the base member and the storage member are fixed by a caulking portion (fixing means). A game machine to be provided has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234125 (paragraph [0017], paragraph [0027], FIG. 7)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, when a fuse is provided on a game control board (control board) housed in a board box as a countermeasure against overcurrent, when the fuse blows, it is stored with a base member (base body). Since the member (cover body) is fixed by the caulking portion (fixing means), there is a problem that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game control board (control board) cannot be used.

[Drive management block for 1st and 2nd distribution stepping motors]
Next, the drive management blocks of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described. FIG. 257 is a table for explaining the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and FIG. 258 is a table for explaining the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909.

In the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6, the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 The values are set to be different based on the relationship with the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the electric drive source, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are disadvantageous to the player. It is preset so that the stop time is different from that of. This means that if the stop times of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840, which are advantageous for the player, are set to be different, the probability can be increased by slightly changing the time that is advantageous for the player. This is because it changes drastically.

Further, in the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6, in the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the set value 1, the set value 2, and the setting The excitation times of the value 3 are mutually changed, and the excitation times of the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are mutually changed in the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. This is to determine which of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is changed by separately performing the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 in which the excitation time is changed. This is because it can be difficult for the player to detect it.

Here, a drive management block preset in the set value 1 among the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 will be described. The drive management blocks of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a, in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), according to the drive management block, the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908, The swing drive data PD0 to PD7 are output to the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q as the drive control of the 4909, and the first and first as the voltage switching control of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. Two distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m, 1310p output signals of voltage switching 1 and 2 whose logic is set.

In the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909, as described above, when φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotating shafts 4908a and 4909a The angle is rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the center line in the horizontal direction, which is the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, there are eight ways (φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2) described later as a combination of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. (Except for those that do not excite all the phases), and the rotation positions of the rotation shafts 4908a and 4909a can be determined by the combination of the excitation of each of the eight phases.

In the present embodiment, the eight combinations of excitation of each phase of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 of φ1, φ2, / φ1 and / φ2 include combination 1: φ1 and φ2 excitation (ON). Combination 2: Only φ2 is excited (ON), Combination 3: φ2 / / φ1 excitation (ON), Combination 4: / φ1 only excitation (ON), Combination 5: / φ1, / φ2 excitation (ON), Combination 7: / Excitation (ON) exists only for φ2, and combination 8: / φ2, φ1 excitation (ON) exists.

In the present embodiment, the rotation direction and the rotation position of the rotation shafts 4908a and 4909a are defined as a drive management block composed of eight combinations of excitation of each phase, and according to this drive management block, the main control board 1310X PD0 to PD3 in which the main control MPU 1310a instructs the start and stop of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and φ1, / φ1, φ2, and φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. Of the swing drive data PD0 to PD7, which is 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 instructing the start and stop of excitation for / φ2, PD0 to PD3 are output to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC1310n. Then, PD4 to PD7 are output to the second distribution stepping motor drive IC1310q. At this time, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X sets and outputs the voltage switching 1 signal logic for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m according to the drive management block, and outputs the second distribution stepping motor voltage. By setting the logic of the signal called voltage switching 2 for the switching circuit 1310p and outputting it, the voltage switched to the operating voltage or the stopping voltage is used for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 φ1, / φ1, φ2, and A current that excites / φ2 is applied to rotate the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 clockwise, counterclockwise, or stop the rotation, and φ1 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. , / Φ1, φ2, and / φ2 are passed to rotate the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 clockwise, counterclockwise, or stop the rotation. As a result, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 to constantly swing in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right side). Along with the movement, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 to constantly move in a wiper shape (a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction). Swing in a shape).

[Drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor]
As shown in FIG. 257, the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a control number (No.), a rotation direction, the number of steps, a pulse width (milliseconds (ms)), and an excitation time (milliseconds) of the drive management block. It consists of seconds (ms)), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. The management number is No. 1-No. Up to 20 are specified.

Control number No. 1 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none (“-” symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none (“-” symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2. Phase, voltage (V): +12 (Operating voltage, described as "12" in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (In the figure, the phase to be excited is marked with "○", the same shall apply hereinafter) It is stipulated. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 1, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is distributed to the left path flowing to the left side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is distributed to the second distribution. Connected to section 4829b.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is counterclockwise from the horizontal center line as described above. The position is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the first electric distribution piece is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. While 4835 is the position of the mechanical end on the left side, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). By doing so, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side.

Control number No. 2 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 2, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. It is transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835 via FIG. 247 and FIG. 248, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 moves from the position of the mechanical end on the right side toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (see FIG. 247 and FIG. 248). That is, it rotates CCW (counterclockwise). Control number No. From 1 to the control number No. When proceeding to 2, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 3, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 3, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIGS. 247 and 248), the first electric sorting piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 2 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 3, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. 4 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 4, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIG. 247 and FIG. 248), the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 3 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 4, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 5, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 ( Operating voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 5, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIG. 247 and FIG. 248), the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 is a position in the middle of the range from the position of the mechanical end on the left side to the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction. It will be in a state of doing. Control number No. From 4 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 5, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. In No. 5, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) is defined. This is because when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small, so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in an inverted state in the vertical direction. Immediately before, by weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the control number No. This is to prevent the first electric distribution piece 4835 from rotating further than the position defined by 5, and to ensure the followability.

Specifically, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by measurement with a high-speed camera, the control number No. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the conditions specified in 9, the result is that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the control number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. It was confirmed that the correspondence with the rotation position of was broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in an inverted state in the vertical direction, that is, the control number No. By defining the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) in 5 and weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, it is possible to prevent the correspondence between the control number and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from being broken. I came up with the technology that can be done.

Control number No. 6 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 6, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIG. 247 and FIG. 248), the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 5 to the control number No. Proceeding to step 6, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 7, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 7, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIGS. 247 and 248), the first electric sorting piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 6 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 6 to the control number No. Proceeding to 7, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from the 1st phase to the 2nd phase.

Control number No. 8 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 8, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIG. 247 and FIG. 248), the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 7 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 8, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 9, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 9, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240, FIG. (See FIG. 247 and FIG. 248), the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 8 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, is distributed to the right course flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is distributed to the right course that spirally descends to the third distribution through the screw passage 4836. It is connected to unit 4829c. Control number No. From 8 to the control number No. Proceeding to 9, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the first electric distribution piece is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. While 4835 is the position of the mechanical end on the left side, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). By doing so, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side. Control number No. From 8 to the control number No. By proceeding to 9, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. ) Is the rotated position, which is the D-cut angle position.

Control number No. In 10, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 10, the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is maintained in a stopped state, and is distributed to the right path flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and spirally descends through the screw passage 4836. The state of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is maintained. Control number No. From 9 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 10, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases.

Control number No. In 11, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 11, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. From the position of the left mechanical end, which is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 10 (control number No. 9), toward the position of the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). )Rotate. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 11 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 8. Control number No. From 10 to the control number No. Proceeding to 11, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 12, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 12, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 11 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7. Control number No. From 11 to the control number No. Proceeding to 12, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. In 13, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 13, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 13 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 6. Control number No. From 12 to the control number No. Proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 14, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12. (Operating voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 14, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 13 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 14 is the control number No. It is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5, and is a position in the middle of the range from the position of the mechanical end on the right side to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction. It will be in a state of doing. Control number No. From 13 to the control number No. Proceeding to 14, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. In 14, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) is defined. This is because when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side, the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small, so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in an inverted state in the vertical direction. Immediately before, by weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is assigned the control number No. This is to prevent further rotation from the position defined by 14, and to ensure followability.

Specifically, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by measurement with a high-speed camera, the control number No. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the conditions specified in 18, the result is that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and the control number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. It was confirmed that the correspondence with the rotation position of was broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in an inverted state in the vertical direction, that is, the control number No. By defining the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) in 14 and weakening the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, it is possible to prevent the correspondence between the control number and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from being broken. I came up with the technology that can be done.

Control number No. In 15, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 15, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 14 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 15 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4. Control number No. From 14 to the control number No. Proceeding to 15, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 16, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 16, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 15 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 16 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3. Control number No. From 15 to the control number No. Proceeding to 16, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. In 17, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 17, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 16 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 17 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2. Control number No. From 16 to the control number No. Proceeding to 17, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 18, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 18, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 240). , FIG. 247, and FIG. 248) and transmitted to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 17 toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 1. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is distributed to the left course flowing to the left side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. Control number No. From 17 to the control number No. Proceeding to 18, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the first electric distribution piece is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. While 4835 is the position of the mechanical end on the left side, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). By doing so, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side. Control number No. From 17 to the control number No. By proceeding to 18, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and the control number No. It becomes the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 1.

Control number No. In 19, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 19, the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side and is maintained in a stopped state, is distributed to the left path flowing to the left side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution unit 4829b. State is maintained. Control number No. From 18 to the control number No. Proceeding to 19, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases.

Control number No. In 20, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 324, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 20, the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 19 (control number No. 18) is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side and is maintained in a stopped state, is distributed to the left path flowing to the left side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution unit 4829b. State is maintained. Control number No. From 19 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 20, the excitation mode of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from the operating voltage of + 12V to the stopping voltage of + 5V.

Control number No. In 20, the control number No. Rotation direction in 19: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operating voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the control number No. In 19, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. At 20, the excitation time (ms) is 324. That is, the control number No. In 20, the control number No. The voltage specified in 19 is as small as about 42%, the excitation time is 27 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the first distribution stepping motor 4908 from excessively generating heat, so that the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has a problem or failure. It can be prevented from occurring.

Here, the above-mentioned control number No. in the set value 1. In 20, the excitation time (ms): 324 is preset. On the other hand, the control number No. in the set value 2 is set. In 20, the excitation time (ms): 320 is set in advance, and the control number No. 3 in the set value 3 is set. In 20, the excitation time (ms): 316 is set in advance, and the control number No. 2 in the set value 4 is set. In 20, the excitation time (ms): 316 is set in advance, and the control number No. 2 in the set value 5 is set. In 20, the excitation time (ms): 316 is set in advance, and the control number No. 6 in the set value 6 is set. In 20, the excitation time (ms): 316 is preset.

The control number No. Following 20, the control number No. 2 again. Return to No. 1 and control number No. 1-Management number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven according to each condition specified in 20, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings like a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end. Move. Then, the time for the first electric distribution piece 4835 to stop at the position of the mechanical end on the right side of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is the control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 19: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 20: 324, and control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 348 ms in addition to 12, whereas the time to stop at the position of the mechanical end on the left side is the control number No. 1. The excitation time (ms) specified in 10 is only 8 and is 8 ms. The stop time is different at the left and right mechanical end positions, and the voltage is high at the left mechanical end position where the stop time is long. It has been switched from the operating voltage of + 12V to the stopping voltage of + 5V.

Further, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (that is, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), and the control number No. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 19 and control number No. Two phases are defined for the excitation mode of 20, and the control number No. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 19 and control number No. Φ1 and φ2 are specified for the excitation phase designation of 20, and the control number No. 1. Management number No. 10 and control number No. + 12V is specified for the voltage of 19, and the control number No. + 5V is specified for the voltage of 20. That is, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), the excitation mode is always two-phase, regardless of the magnitude of the voltage. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven with φ1 and φ2 as designations.

Further, in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the control number No. 1-Management number No. Of 20, the control number No. which is the control number defined as the rotation direction: stop. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 19 and control number No. Except for 20, the control number No. starts from one control number. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven toward 20 one by one according to the conditions specified in the control number. Then, the control number No. Following 20, control number No. 1. Management number No. 2, ..., The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to each condition specified in the control number immediately before one control number, and the control number No. 1-Management number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven according to each condition specified in 20. The "one control number" may be predetermined as an initial value (default), or a random number is acquired at the time of power recovery, and a predetermined operation is performed according to the acquired random number or by using the acquired random number. It may be determined based on the result obtained by execution, or it may be determined based on the extracted ID code obtained by extracting the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

The management number immediately before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including a power failure and a momentary power failure) may be included in the above-mentioned game backup information. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads a control number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts driving the first distribution stepping motor 4908 according to the conditions specified in the read control number.

In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is rotating CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), φ1, φ2, / φ1, / of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 The excitation to φ2 was performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, but it may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), if excitation is performed in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, the first to fourth distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n As for the diodes, the order of converting the counter electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 into heat is the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth diode. It becomes a diode of. As a result, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired can alternately generate heat. , The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors from failing due to heat.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the respective mechanical ends overlap in the exciting phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835, but the positions of the respective mechanical ends. The excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 may be determined so as not to overlap with each other. For example, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven, as described above, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is first driven via a gear mechanism (see FIGS. 240, 247, and 248). Since it is configured to be transmitted to the electric distribution piece 4835, in this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the present embodiment described above is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the positions of the mechanical ends do not overlap. In addition, the range in which the first electric distribution piece 4835 constantly swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end) is excited by the first distribution stepping motor 4908. The phase and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined, and the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be defined.

[Drive management block for the second distribution stepping motor]
As shown in FIG. 258, the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 includes a control number (No.), a rotation direction, the number of steps, a pulse width (milliseconds (ms)), and an excitation time (milliseconds) of the drive management block. It consists of seconds (ms)), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. The management number is No. 1-No. Up to 21 are specified.

Control number No. 1 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none (“-” symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none (“-” symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2. Phase, voltage (V): +12 (Operating voltage, described as "12" in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (In the figure, the phase to be excited is marked with "○", the same shall apply hereinafter) It is stipulated. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 1, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842. As a result, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is closed.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is counterclockwise from the horizontal center line as described above. The position is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the exciting phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the second electric distribution piece is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. While 4840 is the position of the mechanical end on the left side, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By being (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction.

Control number No. 2 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 2, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and from the position of the mechanical end in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is vertically inverted, toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Clockwise)) Rotate. Control number No. From 1 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 2, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 3, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 3, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 2 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 3, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. 4 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 4, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 3 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 4, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 5, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 5, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 4 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 5, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. 6 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 6, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 5 to the control number No. Proceeding to step 6, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 7, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 7, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 6 to the control number No. Proceeding to 7, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. 8 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 8, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. From 7 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 8, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 9, the rotation direction: CW (clockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage). ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 9, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CW (clockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241. (Refer to), it is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 8 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841. That is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is opened. Control number No. From 8 to the control number No. Proceeding to 9, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line as described above. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the exciting phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the second electric distribution piece is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. While 4840 is the position of the mechanical end on the left side, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By being (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. Control number No. From 8 to the control number No. By proceeding to 9, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. ) Is the rotated position, which is the D-cut angle position.

Control number No. In 10, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 10, the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the third distribution unit 4829c). The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is opened) state is maintained. Control number No. From 9 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 10, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

Control number No. In 11, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 32, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 11, the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 10 (control number No. 9) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the third distribution unit 4829c). The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is opened) state is maintained. Control number No. From 10 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 11, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from the operating voltage of + 12V to the stopping voltage of + 5V.

Control number No. In No. 11, the control number No. Rotation direction in No. 10: Stop, Excitation mode: Two phases are maintained, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operating voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the control number No. In No. 10, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. In 11, the excitation time (ms) is 32. That is, the control number No. In No. 11, the control number No. The voltage specified in 10 is as small as about 42%, the excitation time is about 2.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the second distribution stepping motor 4909 from excessively generating heat, so that the second distribution stepping motor 4909 has a problem or failure. It can be prevented from occurring.

Control number No. In 12, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 12, the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 11 (control number No. 10 and control number No. 9) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the third distribution unit 4829c). The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is opened) state is maintained. Control number No. From 11 to the control number No. Proceeding to 12, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched again from + 5V, which is the stopping voltage, to + 12V, which is the operating voltage.

The reason why the voltage is switched again from + 5V, which is the stopping voltage, to + 12V, which is the operating voltage, is that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is larger in size and has a larger inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835. A strong torque is required when starting the rotation of the second electric distribution piece 4840 from the position of the left mechanical end (that is, the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is tilted diagonally) toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. This is because the control number No. In No. 12, the voltage is switched from the stop voltage of + 5 V to the operating voltage of + 12 V in preparation for the change.

Control number No. In 13, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 8, the excitation time (ms): 8, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 13, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). Is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the left mechanical end, which is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12, toward the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 is the control number No. Management number No. 8 instead of 8. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7. Control number No. From 12 to the control number No. Proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

This is because, as described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 has a larger size and a larger inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is placed at the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is,). This is because a strong torque is required when starting rotation from the second electric distribution piece 4840 (in a state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is tilted diagonally) toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. From 12 to the control number No. Proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and a strong torque can be obtained when the rotation starts. Then, the control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 8: 4, and control number No. The excitation time (ms): 8 specified in 7 is added to the excitation time (ms): 4, and the control number No. By defining it as 13, the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 is the control number No. Management number No. 8 instead of 8. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7.

Control number No. In 14, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 8, the excitation time (ms): 8, the excitation mode: 1 phase, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 14, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 14 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6. Control number No. From 13 to the control number No. Proceeding to 14, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 14, the excitation time (ms): 8 is specified, which means that the second electric distribution piece 4840 gradually rotates from the slanted tilted state toward the vertically inverted mechanical end position. By creating, the state of being connected to the third distribution section 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution section 4829c is opened) is gradually closed. This is because it is possible to realize a mode of shifting to the above state.

Control number No. In 15, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 8, the excitation time (ms): 8, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 15, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 14, toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 15 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5. Control number No. From 14 to the control number No. Proceeding to 15, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. In No. 15, the control number No. The same excitation time (ms): 8 specified in 14 is specified, which is the position of the mechanical end in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is vertically inverted from the obliquely inclined state as described above. By creating an aspect that gradually rotates toward, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is opened. This is because it is possible to realize a mode in which the state (to be) gradually shifts to a closed state.

Control number No. In 16, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 16, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 15 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 16 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4. Control number No. From 15 to the control number No. Proceeding to 16, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 17, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 17, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 16 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 17 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3. Control number No. From 16 to the control number No. Proceeding to 17, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

Control number No. In 18, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 18, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 17 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 18 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2. Control number No. From 17 to the control number No. Proceeding to 18, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

Control number No. In 19, the rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), the number of steps: 1, the pulse width (ms): 4, the excitation time (ms): 4, the excitation mode: 2 phases, the voltage (V): +12 (for operation). Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 19, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 becomes a CCW (counterclockwise) rotation position by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is a gear mechanism (FIG. 241). It is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via (see), and the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 18 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842. That is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is closed. Control number No. From 18 to the control number No. Proceeding to 19, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line as described above. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is in the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ±). It is designed in advance so that it becomes a position rotated by 3 °) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the exciting phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the second electric distribution piece is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set in the reference excitation phase. While 4840 is the position of the mechanical end on the left side, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By being (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. Control number No. From 18 to the control number No. By proceeding to 19, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, and the control number No. It becomes the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1.

Control number No. In 20, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 20, the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842 (that is, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is closed) state is maintained. Control number No. From 19 to the control number No. When the process proceeds to 20, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

Control number No. 21 has rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 428, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase. Designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 21, the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 20 (control number No. 19) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left hand passage 4842 (that is, the third The right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is closed) state is maintained. Control number No. From 20 to the control number No. When proceeding to 21, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from the operating voltage of + 12V to the stopping voltage of + 5V.

Control number No. In No. 21, the control number No. Rotation direction at 20: Stop, Excitation mode: Two phases are maintained, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operating voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the control number No. In 20, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. 20 is used. At 21, the excitation time (ms) is 428. That is, the control number No. In No. 21, the control number No. The voltage specified in 20 is as small as about 42%, the excitation time is about 35.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the second distribution stepping motor 4909 from excessively generating heat, so that the second distribution stepping motor 4909 has a problem or failure. It can be prevented from occurring.

Here, the above-mentioned control number No. in the set value 1. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 428 is preset. On the other hand, the control number No. in the set value 2 is set. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 428 is set in advance, and the control number No. 2 in the set value 3 is set. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 428 is set in advance, and the control number No. 2 in the set value 4 is set. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 420 is set in advance, and the control number No. 2 in the set value 5 is set. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 416 is set in advance, and the control number No. 2 in the set value 6 is set. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 412 is preset.

The control number No. Following 21, the control number No. 2 is again. Return to No. 1 and control number No. 1-Management number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven according to each condition specified in 21, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction. It swings like a rock. Then, the time for the second electric distribution piece 4840 to stop at the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction is set to the control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 20: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 21: 428, and control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 452 ms including 12 and the voltage is switched from the operating voltage of + 12 V to the stop voltage of + 5 V and stops at the mechanical end position on the left side. The time is the control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 10: 12, control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 11 is 32, and the control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 12 is 48 ms by adding 4, and the voltage is switched from the operating voltage of + 12 V to the stop voltage of + 5 V. In this way, although the stop time at the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the stop time at the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction are different, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops, the voltage is always the operating voltage. It has been switched from a certain + 12V to a stop voltage of + 5V.

Further, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (that is, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), and the control number No. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 11. Management number No. 12, control number No. 20 and control number No. Two phases are defined for the excitation mode of 21, and the control number No. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 11. Management number No. 12, control number No. 20 and control number No. Φ1 and φ2 are specified for the excitation phase designation of 21, and the control number No. 21 is specified. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 12, and control number No. + 12V is specified for the voltage of 20, and the control number No. 11. And control number No. + 5V is specified for the voltage of 21. That is, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (when the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), the excitation mode is always two-phase, regardless of the magnitude of the voltage. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven with φ1 and φ2 as designations.

Further, in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the control number No. 1-Management number No. Of 21, the control number No. which is the control number defined as the rotation direction: stop. 1. Management number No. 10. Management number No. 11. Management number No. 12. Management number No. 20 and control number No. Except for 21, the control number No. starts from one control number. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven toward 21 one by one according to the conditions specified in the control number. Then, the control number No. Following 21, the control number No. 1. Management number No. 2, ..., The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to each condition specified in the control number immediately before the one control number, and the control number No. 1-Management number No. The second distribution stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven according to each condition specified in 21. The "one control number" may be predetermined as an initial value (default), or a random number is acquired at the time of power recovery, and a predetermined operation is performed according to the acquired random number or by using the acquired random number. It may be determined based on the result obtained by execution, or it may be determined based on the extracted ID code obtained by extracting the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

The management number immediately before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including a power failure and a momentary power failure) may be included in the above-mentioned game backup information. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads a control number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts driving the second distribution stepping motor 4909 according to the conditions specified in the read control number.

In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is rotating CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), φ1, φ2, / φ1, / of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 Excitation to φ2 was performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, but may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), if excitation is performed in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, the first to fourth of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC1310q. As for the diodes, the order of converting the counter electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 into heat is the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth diode. It becomes a diode of. As a result, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired can alternately generate heat. , The second distribution stepping motor drive IC1310q can contribute to the reduction of the temperature rise of the package. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors from failing due to heat.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the respective mechanical ends overlap in the exciting phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840, but the positions of the respective mechanical ends. The excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotation position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 may be determined so as not to overlap with each other. For example, when the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven, as described above, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the gear mechanism (see FIG. 241). In this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the present embodiment described above is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the positions of the mechanical ends do not overlap. The range in which the 4840 is constantly swung in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction) is defined by the exciting phase of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 and the second The rotation position of the two electric distribution pieces 4840 can be determined, and the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 can be defined.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a distribution device for driving a solenoid to distribute a game ball to a specific region by a distribution member has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-0363378 (paragraph [0029], FIG. 4)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the distribution member is driven by a solenoid, but the solenoid is driven by the moving speed of the distribution member when it is driven and the restoring force of the spring after being released from the drive. There is a difference between the moving speed of the sorting member returning to the position of, and there is also an individual difference of the solenoid, so that the sorting ratio cannot be stabilized by the sorting device and the sorting ratio cannot be finely adjusted. There was a problem.

[Mounting method of field effect transistor]
Next, a method of arranging the field effect transistor MF50 of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m and the field effect transistor MF60 of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p will be briefly described. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram of a mounting method of the field effect transistor.

As shown in FIG. 259, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and houses the main control board 1310X. In the state where the main control board 1310X is housed in the main control board box 1320 in this way, the distance dimension from the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X in the present embodiment to the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301 is 15.0 mm. Therefore, it is necessary to mount various electronic components on the main control board 1310X within this distance dimension.

However, the packages of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60 adopted in the present embodiment are of the so-called TO system, and the height of the main bodies of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60 is large and protrudes from the main bodies of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60. When the various terminals are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X as they are, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310X is placed in the main control board box 1320. Cannot be accommodated in.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the various terminals of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are bent at a predetermined angle using a predetermined jig, and then mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main bodies of the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control substrate 1310X while maintaining a predetermined distance dimension d from each other, so that the field-effect transistors MF50 and MF60 can be mounted. The main body does not interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310X can be housed in the main control board box 1320. The resistors MR52 and MR53 (including the part number attached to the mounting surface), which are electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, can be visually recognized through the transparent cover body 1301, and the field-effect transistor is in an obliquely tilted state. The transistors MR62 and MR63 (including the part number attached to the mounting surface), which are electronic components mounted below the main body of the MF60, are arranged while maintaining a predetermined distance dimension d, and are in an obliquely tilted state. Effect It can be visually recognized through the transparent cover body 1301 from between the main bodies of the transistors MF50 and MF60.

[Countermeasures against slapstick]
Next, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 and provided on the game board 5. A circuit for detecting fraudulent acts (called "dotsukigoto") of entering a ball into various winning openings and gates will be described. FIG. 260 is a circuit showing a vibration detection circuit.

The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b are arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, respectively (see FIG. 237). A circuit capable of setting the sensitivity for detecting vibration is provided on the panel relay board 1710. As shown in FIG. 260, the panel relay board 1710 determines the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, which can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005. It is provided with a sensitivity setting circuit 1710 zb for a lower vibration detection switch that can be set, a sensitivity setting circuit 1710 zc for a lower vibration detection switch that can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, and the like.

The upper vibration detection switch 3005 is attached near the upper part of the left side wall of the back box 3010 as described above, and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a is attached near the lower part of the left side wall of the back box 3010 as described above. There is. As described above, the lower vibration detection switch 3006a is attached to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. By shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and various prizes are provided on the game board 5. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts of entering a ball into a mouth or a gate, and in particular, a game ball enters toward a specific receiving port 4855v of a distribution disk 4853 provided in a ball swivel type distribution device 4843 in the lower game zone 4825. By shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that it can be balled, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of vibrating the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, in the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, as described above, the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is attached to the front surface of the base which is near the lower part of the right side wall of the back box 3010 and is the bottom plate of the back box 3010. .. As described above, the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, like the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, applies vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, and the gaming board 5 It is possible to detect fraudulent acts of changing the course of a game ball flowing down a game area 5a formed in a section to enter various winning openings and gates provided in the game board 5, and in particular, right-handed hitting. By placing the game ball toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed in the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the game zone 4824 and shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the ball can enter the V winning opening 4810. It is possible to detect fraudulent acts that vibrate the pachinko machine 1.

Here, since the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch, the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb for the lower vibration detection switch, and the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zc for the lower vibration detection switch have the same circuit configuration, the sensitivity setting for the upper vibration detection switch In the description of the circuit 1710za, the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb for the lower vibration detection switch, and the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zc for the lower vibration detection switch, the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb for the lower vibration detection switch follows the code relating to the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch. Then, the reference numerals relating to the sensitivity setting circuit 1710 zc for the lower vibration detection switch are shown in parentheses.

The upper vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor 1, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, vibrate as a wired or connected signal on the panel relay board 1710. It is transmitted to the main control board 1310X as the detection sensor 1 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b described above. Further, the lower vibration detection sensor 2, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, is transmitted to the main control board 1310X as the vibration detection sensor 2 on the panel relay board 1710, and is transmitted to the main control board 1310X via the above-mentioned main control side input circuit 1310b. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a has a vibration detection sensor 1 which is a wired or connected signal in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). Each of the vibration detection sensors 2 was read, and in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the large winning opening, which will be described later in the fraud detection process in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The presence or absence of slapstick is determined based on the vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal, and the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting device described later in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177). In the above, the presence or absence of slapstick is determined based on the read vibration detection sensor 2 (in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the large winning opening and the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting device, when the slapstick is detected, a fraudulent act is performed. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to detect fraud, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 as no fraud is detected when no slapstick is detected.), FIG. 177. In the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, this determination result (presence or absence of slapstick) is output to the above-mentioned external terminal board 558, and the step in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of S120, a command for transmitting the determination result that the interrupt is being performed is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

+ 35V is supplied from the main control board 1310X to the panel relay board 1710, which is the same ground (GND) as the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310X. The ground (GND) to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the panel relay board 1710.

The sensitivity setting circuit 1710za (1710zb, 1710zc) for the upper vibration detection switch mainly consists of a shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90), resistors MR70 to MR73 (MR80 to MR83, MR90 to MR93), a Zener diode MD70 (MD80, MD90), It is composed of electrolytic capacitors MC70 (MC80, MC90). The shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90) has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a regulated power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage with respect to the load.

The other end of the resistor MR70 (MR80, MR90), one end of which is electrically connected to the + 35V power supply line, is the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD70 (MD80, MD90) whose anode terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected and is electrically connected to one end of the resistors MR71 (MR81, MR91). The other end of the resistor MR71 (MR81, MR91) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR72 (resistors MR82, MR82) and electrically connected to the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90). It is connected and supplied to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 (3006a, 3006b) as a vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2, vibration detection power supply 3). In the line for supplying the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2, vibration detection power supply 3), the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80, MC90) whose negative terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) is electric. The ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) of the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2, vibration detection power supply 3) are removed and smoothed. The electrolytic capacitors MC70 (MC80, MC90) also play a role as a low-pass filter.

The other end of the resistor MR72 (MR82, MR92) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR73 (MR83, MR93), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, It is electrically connected to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the MIC90). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80, MIC90), is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The vibration detection power supply 1 is determined by 2.5 V × (MR72 + MR73) ÷ MR73 according to the resistance values of the resistors MR72 and MR73. The vibration detection power supply 2 is determined by 2.5V × (MR82 + MR83) ÷ MR83 according to the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83, similarly to the vibration detection power supply 1.

The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b can change the sensitivity of vibration detection by the supplied power supply, and the sensitivity setting circuit 1710za for the upper vibration detection switch and the lower vibration detection switch. The sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb and the sensitivity setting circuit 1710zc for the lower vibration detection switch can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a are mounted on the panel relay board 1710 as described above. It is wired or connected and transmitted to the main control board 1310X as a vibration detection sensor 1, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit. This is because either one or both of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a do not react at all, depending on the mode (striking position, striking angle, striking strength, etc.). This is because one or both of them may react excessively, so that the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the lower vibration detection switch 3006a are mutually compensated.

Further, as described above, the lower vibration detection sensor 2, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b, is transmitted to the main control board 1310X as the vibration detection sensor 2 on the panel relay board 1710, and causes the main control side input circuit 1310b. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via. This is because the lower vibration detection switch 3006b may not react at all or may react excessively depending on the mode (striking position, hitting angle, hitting strength, etc.) of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. This is so that the sensitivity of vibration detection can be adjusted.

By various tests, the resistances of the resistors MR72 and MR73, the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83, and the resistance values of the resistors MR92 and MR93 are selected, respectively, and the sensitivity of the vibration detection of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration. The vibration detection sensitivity of the detection switch 3006a and the vibration detection sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch 3006b are set respectively.

In the present embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a are the panel relay boards as described above. In 1710, it was wired or connected and transmitted to the main control board 1310X as a vibration detection sensor 1, and was input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b, but it was not wired or connected in the panel relay board 1710. , It may be independently transmitted to the main control board 1310X as it is, and may be input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. In this way, the upper vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor 1, which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, are used in combination to mainly use the mode of Dotsukigoto. The control MPU 1310 can determine and transmit the signal to the outside (the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) from the external terminal plate 558).

As the mode of the dotsukigoto, for example, when both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a do not respond, the 0th (zero) tapping mode in which the dotsukigoto is not performed and the upper vibration detection switch 3005 react. If the lower vibration detection switch 3006a does not respond, there is a possibility that the lower vibration detection switch 3006a is slamming. If the upper vibration detection switch 3005 does not respond and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a responds, the slapstick is performed. When both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a react in the second tapping mode, which may be the case, the third tapping mode in which the rattling is performed can be mentioned.

[Abnormal notification of various distribution units]
Next, the abnormality notification of the first, second, and third distribution units 4829a, 4829b, and 4829c will be briefly described. As described above, the first distribution unit 4829a is configured to be divided into a right path flowing to the right and a left path flowing to the left when facing the front of the ball passage 4834 according to the swing timing of the first electric distribution piece 4835. Has been done. As described above, the first electric distribution piece 4835 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end) and swings. An optical first electric wiper sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the wiper is used is provided in the first sort unit 4829a. As described above, the second distribution unit 4829b is configured to be distributed into the right back passage 4841 and the left hand passage 4842 according to the swing timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. As described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 constantly swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction). An optical second electric distribution piece sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the vehicle is swinging is provided in the second distribution unit 4829b. As described above, the third distribution unit 4829c is configured such that the rotating member 4846 of the ball-swirl type distribution device 4843 is constantly rotated, and is an optical rotating member (not shown) that detects whether or not the rotating member 4846 is rotating. A sensor is provided in the third distribution unit 4829c.

The detection signals from the first and second electric sorting piece sensors and the rotating member sensor are input to the main control board 1310X, and are input to the main control MPU 1310a via the above-mentioned main control side input circuit 1310b. The main control MPU 1310a is used for the first and second electric distribution pieces in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). The detection signals from the sensor and the sensor for the rotating member are read, and in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. A swing abnormality or a rotation abnormality is discriminated based on the detection signal from the rotating member sensor, and in the port output processing of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, this discrimination result (first electric distribution piece) Whether or not the 4835 swinging operation abnormality has occurred, whether or not the second electric distribution piece 4840 has a swinging operation abnormality, or whether or not the rotating member 4846 has a rotational movement abnormality) is provided on the game board 5 for each corresponding decorative lamp. On the other hand, lighting signals are individually output, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A command for transmitting a swing operation abnormality occurrence of the second electric distribution piece 4840 or a rotation operation abnormality occurrence of the rotating member 4846) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a), when the swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 occurs, the corresponding decoration lamp for the first electric distribution piece provided on the game board 5 lights up in a red light emitting mode. Then, when the swing operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840 occurs, the corresponding decorative lamp for the second electric distribution piece provided on the game board 5 lights up in green, and the rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846 occurs. Then, the corresponding decorative lamp for the rotating member provided on the game board 5 lights up in a blue light emitting mode. In addition, using one full-color LED, the red LED element is associated with the presence or absence of the swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and notified, and the green LED element is the swing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. It is also possible to associate and notify the presence or absence of an operation abnormality, and to notify the blue LED element as the presence or absence of a rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846.

The peripheral control board 1510 is a command for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of an abnormal swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or the occurrence of an abnormal rotation operation of the rotating member 4846 from the main control board 1310X. Is received, based on the command, if there is an abnormal swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece is controlled to be played from various speakers, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 When a swinging operation abnormality occurs, control is performed to play a second electric sorting piece notification sound different from the first electric sorting piece notification sound from various speakers, and when a rotation operation abnormality occurs in the rotating member 4846. Control is performed to play a notification sound for a rotating member different from the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece and the notification sound for the second electric distribution piece from various speakers. The first electric distribution piece notification sound, the second electric distribution piece notification sound, and the rotating member notification sound have different tones.

In this way, by notifying the occurrence of the swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the swing operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846, the presence or absence of the abnormality is detected. It is possible to promptly inform the clerk and staff of the game hall. Further, even if a fraudulent act of stopping the operation of the first electric sorting piece 4835, the second electric sorting piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 with a wire or a string is performed, the area is advantageous to the fraudster. It is possible to promptly inform the clerk or staff of the game hall of the state of distribution.

Further, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) may output a signal transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 when a swing operation abnormality occurs in the first electric distribution piece 4835. If a swing operation abnormality occurs in the second electric distribution piece 4840, a signal transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the external terminal plate 558, or if a rotation operation abnormality occurs in the rotating member 4846, it is external. A signal transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the terminal board 558. Such signals can be individually output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558, but any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 When an abnormality occurs (that is, the target at which the abnormality has occurred cannot be identified), a signal may be output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. ..

Further, when the game board 5 is provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control board 1510 causes an abnormality in the swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from the main control board 1310X, and the second electric distribution piece. When a command for notifying the occurrence of a swing operation abnormality of the 4840 or the occurrence of a rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846 is received, if there is a swing operation abnormality occurrence of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the fact is notified based on the command. The message may be controlled to be displayed on the display device, or if there is an abnormality in the swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, a message to that effect is displayed on the display device. Alternatively, if there is an abnormality in the rotation operation of the rotating member 4846, control may be performed to display a message to that effect on the display device. The peripheral control board 1510 is used when an abnormality occurs in any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 from the main control board 1310X (that is, the abnormality). (Although it is not possible to identify the target in which the occurrence occurred), control may be performed to display a message notifying the occurrence of the abnormality on the display device.

[How to monitor Dotsukigoto]
Next, a method of monitoring Dotsukigoto will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 264. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing an example of vibration detection effective timer processing for a sorting device, FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal vibration two-stage notification processing for a sorting device, and FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal vibration two-stage notification processing for a large winning opening. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing an example of the notification process, and FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing an example of the vibration discrimination process. The vibration detection effective timer processing for the sorting device, the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for the sorting device, and the abnormal vibration two-step notification processing for the large winning opening are invalid in step S112 in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 177. It is performed as one of the action detection processes.

As described above, the presence or absence of the slingshot is determined by the pachinko machine so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distribution disk 4853 provided in the ball swivel type distribution device 4843 in the lower game zone 4825. Detection signals from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, which can detect fraudulent acts that add vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting 1, and a rotating ball in the right-handed gaming zone 4824. The pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed in the receiving member 4808 and entered the V winning opening 4810. Based on the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b that can detect the fraudulent activity to be added, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X performs the operation.

In the lower game zone 4825, as described above, a passing type first ball sensor 4870a for detecting a game ball passing through the right course in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a and a right side of the second distribution unit 4829b. A pass-through type second ball sensor 4870b for detecting a game ball passing through the back passage 4841 is provided, and the main control MPU 1310a is the first by detecting the game ball with the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b. It is possible to manage the number of balls that have entered the distribution device 4843 of the distribution unit 4829c of 3.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a shakes the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distribution disk 4853 provided in the ball swivel type distribution device 4843 in the lower game zone 4825. , Illegal in step S112 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The vibration detection effective timer process for the sorting device in the action detection process is performed, and then the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device is performed to notify the pachinko machine.

When the vibration detection effective timer process for the sorting device in the fraud detection process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the ball has passed through the sorting device as shown in FIG. 261 (step S420). In this determination, in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, a passage that detects a game ball passing through the right path in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a in the lower game zone 4825. The detection signal from the first ball sensor 4870a of the mold and the detection signal from the second ball sensor 4870b of the passing type that detects the game ball passing through the right back passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b are read and read. This routine is terminated as it is when it is determined that the ball has not passed, while the start of the effective timer VT1 is set when it is determined that the ball has passed based on one of the detection signals. (Step S422), this routine is terminated. This effective timer VT1 is preset to 30,000 milliseconds (30 seconds), and is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. Since the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms), the value of the effective timer VT1 is subtracted by 4 in the timer subtraction process in step S102, and the value is 0 (zero). Seconds), it means that the effective timer VT1 has elapsed.

Since the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S422 each time this routine is performed, the effective timer VT1 is repeatedly started and set every time the ball passes through the sorting device, thereby 30,000. Milliseconds (30 seconds) will be reset.

Subsequently, when the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the effective timer VT1 has elapsed 30,000 milliseconds (30 seconds) as shown in FIG. 262. (Step S430). This determination is performed depending on whether or not the value of the effective timer VT1 is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 and has a value of 0 (zero seconds), and the value of the effective timer VT1 is determined. When the value is 0 (zero seconds), it is determined that 30,000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have elapsed, while when the value of the effective timer VT1 is not the value 0 (zero seconds), 30,000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have elapsed. Judge that there is no.

In the determination in step S430, the main control MPU1310a terminates this routine as it is when it determines that the value of the effective timer VT1 is 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 30,000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have elapsed. When the value of the effective timer VT1 is not 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 30,000 milliseconds (30 seconds) have not elapsed, the vibration discrimination process is performed (step S432). The detailed description of this vibration discrimination process will be described later, but the vibration detection read in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). The upper vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor 1, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, process the vibration detection sensor 1, which is a wired or connected signal, as effective. In this case, each time the switch input process of step S104 is performed, the vibration counter VC counts the number of times when the read logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 is the dotsukigoto detection logic. In the present embodiment, the vibration counter VC reads each time the switch input process of step S104 is performed when the vibration detection sensor 2 which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b is processed as valid. However, since the number of times when the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 is the dotsukigoto detection logic is also counted, it is a common counter.

Following step S432, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is abnormal vibration (step S434). This determination is performed based on the value of the vibration counter VC counted in the vibration discrimination process of step S430, and when the value of the vibration counter VC reaches the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), it is determined that there is abnormal vibration. On the other hand, when the value of the vibration counter VC does not reach the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), it is determined that there is no abnormal vibration.

In the determination in step S434, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has not reached the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is 0 (zero). It is determined whether or not there is (step S436). The abnormal vibration counter AVC counts the number of times it is determined to be abnormal vibration, and is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. The abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset to the initial value (value 0 (zero)) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored after a power failure, or when the jackpot game state ends (instantaneously). When the power is restored after a momentary power failure, the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not reset if the momentary power failure period is short (for example, within a few seconds), and the momentary power failure period is long, if not a power failure. In some cases (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset). When the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is 0 (zero) at the time of determination in step S434, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the number of times of determination of abnormal vibration is zero and that the player is not slamming.

In the determination in step S436, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is 0 (zero), the main control MPU1310a ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S434, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has reached the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), the value 1 is added to the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC. (Increment and step S438), and determine whether or not the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold value TH (step S440). This threshold value TH is set to a value 5, and the notification method can be changed depending on whether the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH or not. ..

In the determination in step S440, the main control MPU1310a determines when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold value TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC does not exceed the threshold value TH, or in the determination in step S436. In the main control MPU 1310a, when it is determined that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not a value 0 (zero), the first notification mode is set as a weak notification (step S442), and this routine is terminated.

In this first notification mode, in the early stage when the door is detected, the pachinko machine 1 performing the door and the player playing the game with the adjacent pachinko machine are not uncomfortable. When a clerk or a clerk passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 that is doing a slapstick, it can notify that fact. For example, in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are set to emit light in which they blink red for 5 minutes. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the other various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 are in a light emitting mode according to the progress of the production. There is.

When such a light emitting mode is performed for 5 minutes, the content (light emitting mode) that follows the progress of the original effect is restored, but while the light emitting mode according to the first notification mode is progressing, the original effect is actually produced. Since the content (light emission mode) along with the progress is also progressing, the content (light emission mode) that is 5 minutes ahead of the original effect without returning to the original effect content (light emission mode) immediately before switching to the first notification mode (light emission mode). Aspect) and switch.

The main control MPU 1310a creates a weak notification command that is classified into a notification display that is the first notification mode, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, and uses this transmission information as main peripheral serial data for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process in step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, and when the analyzed command includes a weak notification command, The light emission mode generation schedule data and the like set for the weak notification are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Of the light emitting data arranged in time series, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A according to the light emitting data indicated by the pointer. The light emitting mode is such that a plurality of LEDs mounted on the substrate 456 blink red for 5 minutes.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S440, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not equal to or less than the threshold value TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH, the main control MPU1310a is subjected to a strong notification. 2 The notification mode is set (step S444).

This second notification mode is stronger than the first notification mode described above, and is capable of promptly rushing to the pachinko machine 1 in which a clerk or a clerk who patrols the game hall is performing the dotsukigoto. For example, various decorative substrates in the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the plate upper right decoration unit 275, the plate lower left decoration unit 280, the plate lower right decoration unit 285, and the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top unit 450 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 in the door frame top unit 450 each blink red for 5 minutes. At the same time, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to emit white blinking for 5 minutes, and in addition to the warning sound for strong notification, "vibration is detected". The strong notification announcement "was done" was set to a sound mode in which the sound mode was set to flow for 90 seconds from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.) at the maximum volume, and further, the external appearance shown in FIG. A signal is output to the hall computer of the game hall via the terminal plate 558 to inform that the slapstick is being performed, and further, an unauthorized player who is slapstick is prevented from playing any more games. In order to stop the game, a value 1 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG that can prevent the game ball from being launched toward the game area 5a. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 are in a light emitting mode according to the progress of the effect.

When such a light emitting mode is performed for 5 minutes, the content (light emitting mode) that follows the progress of the original effect is restored, but while the light emitting mode according to the second notification mode is progressing, the original effect is actually produced. Since the content (light emission mode) along with the progress is also progressing, the content (light emission mode) that is 5 minutes ahead of the original effect without returning to the original effect content (light emission mode) immediately before switching to the second notification mode (light emission mode). Aspect) and switch. Similarly, regarding the sound mode, when the sound mode is performed for 90 seconds, the content (sounds such as voice, sound effect, music, etc.) is returned to the original progress of the production, but the sound mode according to the second notification mode progresses. During this time, since the content (sound) is actually progressing along with the progress of the original production, the content (sound) of the original production immediately before switching to the second notification mode is not returned, and this original production is performed. The content (sound) is advanced for 90 seconds and then switched. When switching from this original effect to the content (sound) advanced by 90 seconds, the sound mode according to the second notification mode is turned off, and the volume of this sound is gradually increased toward the set volume. The switching is done by fading in so that the player is not surprised by the difference in volume due to the switching.

The main control MPU 1310a creates a strong notification command that is classified into a notification display, which is the second notification mode, stores the transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and informs the hall computer that the transmission information is being performed. The output of penetration to be transmitted is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, and uses this transmission information as main peripheral serial data for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process in step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, and when the analyzed command includes the Dotsukigoto strong notification command, The light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, etc., which are set in the strong notification, are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Among the light emission data arranged in the time series, according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer, the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the plate upper right decoration unit 275, the plate lower left decoration unit 280, and the plate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the lower right decorative unit 285 and the effect operation unit 300, and mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 in the door frame top unit 450, respectively. The plurality of LEDs are flashing red for 5 minutes, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450 are flashing white for 5 minutes. In the sound data output process of step S1018 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Among them, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in which the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a according to the sound command data indicated by the pointer, reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and is strong according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Incorporate the warning sound for notification and the sound data of the announcement for strong notification that "vibration has been detected", set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and set various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center) from the set output channel. Output to speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.).

Further, the main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and the main control MPU 1310a is determined based on the output information. From the output terminal of the output port, a signal for transmitting to the hall computer that the interrupt is being performed is output to the external terminal board 558.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a firing permission signal because the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 in the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. As the logic of, it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on this output information, the main control MPU 1310a determines a predetermined output port. The output terminal outputs the game ball to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b makes it impossible to launch the game ball toward the game area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that the illegal player who plays the game cannot play any more games.

Following step S444, the main control MPU1310a sets the fraud detection flag FD-FLG to a value of 1 (step S446), and ends this routine. As described above, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is a flag for notifying the presence or absence of fraud, and the value 0 is set when the fraud is not detected, and the value is set when the fraud is detected. 1 is set.

In step S446, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, thereby setting the firing permission signal in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. It is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on this output information, the main control MPU 1310a determines a predetermined output port. The output terminal outputs the game ball to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b makes it impossible to launch the game ball toward the game area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that the illegal player who plays the game cannot play any more games.

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is a small hit determined by the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the winning lottery in the special symbol in step S114 in the main control timer interrupt processing and the special electric accessory control processing shown in FIG. 177. Depending on the type of symbol, the execution mode of the small hit game to be executed subsequently is set to one of a plurality of modes. Specifically, in the small hit game, the second shutter plate 4806 of the first special winning opening 4807 in the right-handed game zone 4824 is operated to allow the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 4807. It is a game, and depending on which of the plurality of small hit symbols is caused by the small hit game executed this time, the opening / closing pattern of the entry ball opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the opening time when opening are executed. The modes are set to be different, and the possibility of the game ball entering the first grand prize opening 4807 differs depending on this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small hit game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is retracted for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is easier for the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 4807 than in the execution mode of the small hit game in which the player is retracted. In the small hit game, all the game balls that have entered the first large winning opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first large winning opening 4807, and the game ball receives the ball of the rotating ball receiving member 4808. When it is received by the recess 4809, it is guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotational operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808, and the game ball that is not received by the ball receiving recess 4809 is lowered backward of the rotating ball receiving member 4808. It rolls on the inclined tapered peripheral surface and enters the general winning opening 4801. When the game ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotational operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters the V winning opening 4810, the main control MPU 1310a maximizes the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second large winning opening 4812 as a privilege. Perform a jackpot game that opens and closes until the number of times of opening and closing is reached.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is a pachinko machine so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 formed in the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the right-handed game zone 4824 and entered the V winning opening 4810. The main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, in which the determination of fraudulent acts (presence or absence of slapstick) that vibrates the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting 1 is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). In the fraud detection process of step S112 in the above step S112, the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the winning opening is performed to notify the player.

When the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the large winning opening in the fraud detection process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (step S460). This determination is made based on whether or not the small hit game state is generated in the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in step S114 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177.

In the determination of step S460, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that the small hit game state is not generated, and when it is determined that the small hit game state is generated, the first major control MPU1310a is generated. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the winning opening 4807 (step S462). In this determination, in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, the first large winning opening sensor 4807a that detects that the ball has entered the first large winning opening 4807 in the right-handed game zone 4824 The detection signal is read, and the process is performed based on the read detection signal.

In the determination of step S462, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first large winning opening 4807, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, and has entered the first large winning opening 4807. When the determination is made, vibration discrimination processing is performed (step S464). The detailed description of this vibration discrimination process will be described later, but the lower vibration read in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). When the vibration detection sensor 2 which is the detection signal from the detection switch 3006b is processed as valid, every time the switch input process of step S104 is performed, the logic of the read vibration detection sensor 2 is the dotsukigoto detection logic. The number of times is counted by the vibration counter VC. In the present embodiment, the vibration counter VC is wired or connected to the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. When the vibration detection sensor 1 which is the signal is processed as valid, the number of times when the read logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 is the dotsukigoto detection logic is also counted every time the switch input process of step S104 is performed. Therefore, it is a shared counter.

Following step S464, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is abnormal vibration (step S466). This determination is performed based on the value of the vibration counter VC counted in the vibration discrimination process of step S462, and when the value of the vibration counter VC reaches the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), it is determined that there is abnormal vibration. On the other hand, when the value of the vibration counter VC does not reach the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), it is determined that there is no abnormal vibration.

In the determination in step S466, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has not reached the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is 0 (zero). It is determined whether or not there is (step S468). This abnormal vibration counter AVC is a variable shared with that in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device shown in FIG. 262 (that is, it is changed in this routine and the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device, respectively). As described above, it counts the number of times it is determined to be abnormal vibration, and is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. The abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset to the initial value (value 0 (zero)) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored after a power failure, or when the jackpot game state ends (instantaneously). When the power is restored after a momentary power failure, the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not reset if the momentary power failure period is short (for example, within a few seconds), and the momentary power failure period is long, if not a power failure. In some cases (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the abnormal vibration counter AVC is reset). When the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is 0 (zero) at the time of determination in step S468, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the number of times of determination of abnormal vibration is zero and that the player is not slamming.

In the determination in step S468, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is 0 (zero), the main control MPU1310a ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S466, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the value of the vibration counter VC has reached the determination value (value 4 in this embodiment), the value 1 is added to the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC. (Increment and step S470), and determine whether or not the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold value TH (step S472). This threshold value TH is a constant that is the same as that in the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting device shown in FIG. 262 (that is, it is the same in this routine and the abnormal vibration two-step notification process for the sorting device, respectively). (The value of is a set constant), as described above, is set to a value of 5, and is notified when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH and when it does not exceed the threshold value TH. You can change the method.

In the determination in step S472, the main control MPU1310a determines when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold value TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC does not exceed the threshold value TH, or in the determination in step S468. In the main control MPU 1310a, when it is determined that the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not a value 0 (zero), the first notification mode is set as a weak notification (step S474), and this routine is terminated. This first notification mode is the same as that in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device shown in FIG. 262, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S472, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not equal to or less than the threshold value TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH, the main control MPU1310a is called a strong notification. 2 The notification mode is set (step S476). This second notification mode is the same as that in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device shown in FIG. 262, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Following step S476, the main control MPU1310a sets the fraud detection flag FD-FLG to a value of 1 (step S478), and ends this routine. As described above, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is a flag for notifying the presence or absence of fraud, and the value 0 is set when the fraud is not detected, and the value is set when the fraud is detected. 1 is set.

In step S478, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, thereby setting the firing permission signal in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. It is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on this output information, the main control MPU 1310a determines a predetermined output port. The output terminal outputs the game ball to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b makes it impossible to launch the game ball toward the game area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that the illegal player who plays the game cannot play any more games.

Next, vibration discrimination performed as the process of step S432 in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device shown in FIG. 262 and the process of step S464 in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 263, respectively. The processing will be described.

When this vibration discrimination process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not vibration is occurring, as shown in FIG. 264 (step S480). In this determination, the detection from the upper vibration detection sensor and the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, which are the detection signals from the vibration detection switch 3005, read in the switch input process in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. This is performed based on the logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal to which the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a signal is wired or connected, and the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b. The main control MPU 1310a determines that there is vibration when either or both of the logic of the vibration detection sensor 1 and the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 is the slapstick detection logic, while the vibration detection sensor 1 determines that there is vibration. When both the logic of and the logic of the vibration detection sensor 2 are the logic of non-detection of vibration detection, which is the reverse of the logic of detection of vibration, it is determined that there is no vibration without determining abnormal vibration.

In the determination of step S480, the main control MPU1310a terminates this routine as it is when it is determined that there is no vibration, while when it is determined that there is vibration, the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is activated (starting). Whether or not it is determined (step S482). The vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is a vibration detection signal in which the upper vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor 1, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, are wired or connected. It defines the time for processing the sensor 1 and the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b as invalid, and in the present embodiment, 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds). Is preset to. When the start of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is set, the value 1 is set in the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag, and the value is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. Since the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms), the value of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is subtracted by 4 in the timer subtraction process in step S102, and the value is 0. When it becomes (zero seconds), it means that the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT has elapsed. Along with this, the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag is set to the initial value 0 as a state in which the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is not activated (including the completion of activation). The value of the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU1310a, and is set to the initial value 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure. Will be done. When the power is restored after a momentary power failure, if the momentary power failure period is short (for example, within a few seconds), the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag is not set to the initial value, resulting in a power failure. If the momentary power failure period is long (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag is set to the initial value.

In the determination in step S482, the main control MPU1310a activates the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET when the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is not running. It is determined whether or not it is in the operating state (starting) (step S484). The vibration discrimination effective timer VDET is a vibration detection signal in which the upper vibration detection sensor, which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor 1, which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a, are wired or connected. It defines the time for processing the sensor 1 and the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b as effective, and in the present embodiment, it is 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds). Is preset to. When the start of the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is set, the value 1 is set in the vibration discrimination valid timer flag, and the value is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. Since the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms), the value of the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is subtracted by 4 in the timer subtraction process in step S102, and the value is 0. When it becomes (zero seconds), it means that the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET has elapsed. Along with this, the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is set to the initial value 0 as a state in which the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is not activated (including the completion of activation). The value of the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU1310a, and is set to the initial value 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure. Will be done. When the power is restored after a momentary power failure, if the momentary power failure period is short (for example, within a few seconds), the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is not set to the initial value, resulting in a power failure. If the momentary power failure period is long (for example, in the case of a period of several tens of seconds), the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is set to the initial value.

In the determination in step S484, the main control MPU 1310a starts the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET when the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is not running. Is set (step S486). The main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 in the vibration discrimination effective timer flag by setting the start of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET. When this routine ends, the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET starts subtraction in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177.

Following step S486, the main control MPU 1310a adds a value of 1 to the vibration counter VC (increments, step S488), and ends this routine. The vibration counter VC counts the number of times it is determined that there is vibration in the determination in step S480 described above during the activation of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET. When this routine ends, the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET starts subtraction in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. Therefore, the value of the vibration counter VC is set by the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET. The value 1 is added before it is subtracted. As a result, the value of the vibration counter VC becomes a value of 4 when the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET reaches a value of 0 (zero seconds). This value 4 is a determination value used for the determination of step S434 in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the sorting device shown in FIG. 262, and is also the determination value used in the determination in step S434 in the abnormal vibration two-stage notification process for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 263. It is a determination value used for the determination in step S466.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S484, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the vibration discrimination valid timer flag has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is running, the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is 12 milliseconds. It is determined whether or not (0.012 seconds) has elapsed (step S490). This determination is performed depending on whether or not the value of the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 and has a value of 0 (zero seconds), and the vibration discrimination is valid. When the value of the timer VDET is 0 (zero seconds), it is determined that 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) have elapsed, while when the value of the timer VDET for which vibration discrimination is valid is not the value 0 (zero seconds), it is 12 milliseconds. It is determined that (0.012 seconds) has not elapsed.

In the determination in step S490, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is not a value 0 (zero seconds), that is, 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) has not elapsed, the above-mentioned description is performed. In step S488, the value 1 is added (incremented, step S488) to the vibration counter VC, and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S490, the main control MPU1310a vibrates when the value of the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) have elapsed. As a state in which the discrimination valid timer VDET is not activated (including the completion of activation), the vibration discrimination valid timer flag is set to the initial value 0, and the start of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is set (step S492). End the routine. The main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag by setting the start of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT. When this routine ends, the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT starts subtraction in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S482, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is running, the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is set to 1020 milliseconds. It is determined whether or not (1.020 seconds) has elapsed (step S494). This determination is performed depending on whether or not the value of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is subtracted in the timer subtraction process of step S102 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 and has a value of 0 (zero seconds), and the vibration discrimination is invalid. When the value of the timer VDDT is 0 (zero seconds), it is determined that 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) have elapsed, while when the value of the timer VDDT for which vibration discrimination is invalid is not the value 0 (zero seconds), 1020 milliseconds has passed. It is determined that (1.020 seconds) has not elapsed.

In the determination of step S494, when the value of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is not 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) have not elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a is used as it is. While terminating the routine, when the value of the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is 0 (zero seconds), that is, when it is determined that 1020 milliseconds (1.020 seconds) have elapsed, the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT is activated. The value 0, which is the initial value, is set in the vibration discrimination invalid timer flag, and the value is reset by setting the value 0 (zero) in the value of the vibration counter VC (step S496). End this routine. By resetting the value of the vibration counter VC in step S496, it is possible to accurately count the number of times it is determined that there is vibration in the determination in step S480 described above while the vibration discrimination valid timer VDET is running next time.

In this way, the vibration counter VC can be updated while the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET of 12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds) is running, while when the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET elapses, 1020 milliseconds (1. The vibration counter VC cannot be updated while the vibration discrimination invalid timer VDDT (020 seconds) is running. That is, only during the limited period in which the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET is being activated, the number of times that vibration is determined in the determination in step S480 described above can be accurately counted using the vibration counter VC. It has become. Thereby, for example, vibration generated when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, vibration generated when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. The player operated the vibration generated when the door frame 3 was closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 300. Even if vibration or the like that occurs occasionally is detected, it is possible to prevent erroneous notification as a door.

In the above-described embodiment, the vibration counter VC is wired or connected to the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a. It was a shared counter in the case where the vibration detection sensor 1 which is the signal was processed as valid and when the vibration detection sensor 2 which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b was processed as valid. However, the upper vibration detection sensor which is a detection signal from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor 1 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006a are effective as a vibration detection sensor 1 which is a wired or connected signal. When processing as a thing, the first vibration counter is used, and when processing the vibration detection sensor 2 which is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006b as effective, the second vibration counter is used. It may be configured and counted individually.

In this case, the weak notification based on the first vibration counter and the weak notification based on the second vibration counter may have the same mode or different modes. In the case of different modes, it is possible to understand which of the weak notification based on the first vibration counter and the weak notification based on the second vibration counter, so that the weak notification based on the first vibration counter may be used. For example, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distribution disk 4853 provided in the ball swivel type distribution device 4843 in the lower game zone 4825. It is possible to grasp that a fraudulent act of applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, and if it is a weak notification based on the second vibration counter, it is formed on the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the right-handed game zone 4824. A fraudulent act of adding vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 and entered the V winning opening 4810 is performed. You can know that you are there. Further, the strong notification based on the first vibration counter and the strong notification based on the second vibration counter may have the same mode or different modes. In the case of different modes, it is possible to understand which of the strong notification based on the first vibration counter and the strong notification based on the second vibration counter, so that the strong notification based on the first vibration counter may be used. For example, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can enter the specific receiving port 4855v of the distribution disk 4853 provided in the ball swivel type distribution device 4843 in the lower game zone 4825. It is possible to grasp that a fraudulent act of applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, and if it is a strong notification based on the second vibration counter, it is formed on the rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the right-handed game zone 4824. A fraudulent act of adding vibration to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball can be placed toward the ball receiving recess 4809 and entered the V winning opening 4810 is performed. You can know that you are there.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the weak notification and the strong notification are performed by a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate whose light emitting mode is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, but the light emitting mode is performed by the main control board 1310X. May be done by a single or multiple LEDs controlled by.

Incidentally, a game machine has been proposed in which a vibration sensor (vibration detection unit) for detecting the vibration of the game board is provided to detect fraudulent acts such as hitting the game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-0426889 (paragraph [paragraph [paragraph] 0026] and Fig. 2)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the vibration sensor is arranged in the vicinity of the ball guide path (ball trough portion) passing through the game ball, and the vibration sensor and the ball guide portion are attached to the same mounting member. In this case, the vibration of the game ball passing through the ball guiding portion may be transmitted to the vibration sensor via the mounting member and erroneously notified as abnormal vibration.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 256. ing. The main control board box 1320 is formed in a box shape from the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 256 and the transparent base body 1302 of FIG. 256, and by breaking the crimped portion 1303 of FIG. 256 which is a fixing portion. The fixed state between the transparent cover body 1301 and the transparent base body 1302 can be released. The main control board 1310X includes the polyswitch MPS50 of FIG. 255, which is a resettable fuse. In this polyswitch MPS50, heat is generated by an overcurrent to the first distribution stepping motor 4908, so that the conductivity is lowered to cut off the current, and then it is cooled to restore the conductivity. is there.

In this way, when an overcurrent flows through the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the current is cut off by the polyswitch MPS50 and cooled so that the current to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be automatically restored. Therefore, it is not necessary to destroy the crimped portion 1303, which is a fixed portion, due to an overcurrent to the first sorting stepping motor 4908, and it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310X from becoming unusable. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310X from becoming unusable due to an overcurrent.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247 is provided, and the game board 5 of FIG. 234 is provided. A right course and a ball passage 4834 that are provided and flow the game ball entered from the diving portion 4827 of FIG. 235, which is a ball entering portion, to the right side of the ball passage 4834 of FIG. 235, which is a plurality of ball releasing portions. The first distribution unit 4829a of FIG. 235, which is a distribution device capable of distributing by controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, is provided in the left path flowing to the left side when facing the front surface of the above. The first distribution unit 4829a may discharge to a region of the right course flowing to the right side of the ball passage 4834 and the left course flowing to the left side of the ball passage 4834, which is advantageous to the player. It has a right course that flows to the right side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, which is a specific ball emitting portion that can be formed. The main control board 1310X has a time allocated to the right course flowing to the right side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834 and a left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834 which is another ball discharging part excluding the specific ball emitting part. The excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be controlled so that the distribution time differs from the distribution time.

Specifically, the time for the first electric distribution piece 4835 to stop at the position of the mechanical end on the right side is the control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 19: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 20: 324, and control number No. The excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 348 ms in addition to 12, whereas the time to stop at the position of the mechanical end on the left side is the control number No. 1. The excitation time (ms) specified in 10 is only 8, which is 8 ms, and the stop time at the positions of the mechanical ends on the left and right sides is different, and the stop time is longer.

In this way, by controlling the first distribution unit 4829a by the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the time allocated to the right path flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball passage 4834, which is the specific ball emission unit, and the specific ball emission unit can be set. It is possible to finely adjust the time to be distributed to the left path flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, which is the other ball emitting unit, and to stabilize the distribution ratio by the first distribution unit 4829a. it can. Therefore, the distribution ratio by the first distribution unit 4829a can be stabilized, and the distribution ratio can be finely adjusted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 includes the main control board 1310X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247. The first electric distribution piece 4835 of FIG. 235, which is a movable body capable of moving within a predetermined range by controlling excitation, is provided. The exciting phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the position of the movable first electric distribution piece 4835 are associated with each other in advance without overlapping. At the time of power recovery, the main control board 1310X becomes the exciting phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 which is associated with any position of the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body in a predetermined range. On the other hand, it can be controlled.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X follows the drive management block in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). The swing drive data is output to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n as the drive control of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and the logic is connected to the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m as the voltage switching control of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. Outputs the set voltage switching 1 signal. Further, in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven according to each condition defined in the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908.

In this way, at the time of power recovery, the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body by controlling the exciting phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 which is associated with any position in the predetermined range in advance. It is possible to specify the position of. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, the exciting phase to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body can be specified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 255 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 247 is provided, and the game board 5 of FIG. 234 is provided. By controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first electric distribution piece 4835 of FIG. 235 reciprocates within a predetermined range, and the diving portion 4827 of FIG. The game balls entered from the ball can be distributed into a right course flowing to the right side of the ball passage 4834 in FIG. 235 and a left course flowing to the left side of the ball passage 4834, which are a plurality of ball emitting parts. It is provided with the first distribution unit 4829a of FIG. 235, which is an apparatus. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is formed by the first electric distribution piece 4835 shown in FIG. 235 swinging in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right side). It is possible to move back and forth within a predetermined range. The main control board 1310X constantly controls the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 after the power is restored, and stops the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in a state where the first electric distribution piece 4835 reciprocates within a predetermined range. A voltage that can switch between + 5V, which is the stop voltage used during operation, and + 12V, which is a voltage higher than this stop voltage and is used during operation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908. The first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310 m of FIG. 255, which is a switching unit, is provided.

In this way, in the state where the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is excited by constant control after the power is restored, the operating voltage is higher than the stopping voltage, so that the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped. By switching between the stopping voltage used during the operation and the operating voltage used during the operation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be stopped while the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped. It is possible to suppress heat generation. Therefore, the heat generation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided as a reception port provided in the game area 5a as a fixed start winning opening of FIG. 235. The main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 is provided as a game control means capable of advancing the game based on entering the ball into the 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting changing board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as a selection means, and a setting switch provided on the setting changing board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as a determining means. It is equipped with 1311a. The setting switching button 1311b selects one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting values that are advantageous for the player, and uses the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b as the selection signal. As one transmission path, the signal can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern or the like in which a signal from the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 is transmitted. The setting switch 1311a determines the set value selected by the setting changeover button 1311b and uses the signal of the determination key ON from the setting switch 1311a as the determination signal as the main control of FIG. 256 as the second transmission path different from the first transmission path. The signal from the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300 can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern in which a signal is transmitted. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are arranged so as to be separated from each other.

Specifically, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switch 1311a. The wiring pattern in which the OFF signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted on the main control board 1310X. The wiring pattern to be transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and the OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a are transmitted. The wiring pattern) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted. The routing with the wiring pattern to be performed is also formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other).

In this way, when any one of the plurality of set values (setting values 1 to 6) that is advantageous to the player is selected and the set value is determined, the determined set value is used. By advancing the game based on the game, it is possible to provide the player with a game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, by arranging the first transmission path and the second transmission path so as to be separated from each other, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided as a reception port provided in the gaming area 5a as a fixed start winning opening of FIG. 235. The game can be advanced based on entering the ball into the 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, a setting switching button 1311b provided on a setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as a selection means, and a main control of FIG. 253 as a storage means. The main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the board 1310X, the setting change switch 1311a provided on the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as the selection display setting means and the determination means, and the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as the display means. The setting display 1310g provided for the main control board 1310X is provided. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b can select any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting switch 1311a can set the selection permission of the setting value by the setting switching button 1311b or the display permission of the setting value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, and can determine the setting value. Is. The setting display 1310g can display the set value.

When the power switch 630a turns on the pachinko machine 1 after the setting value selection permission is set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting value selected by the setting switching button 1311b is displayed on the setting display 1310g and the setting switch. It is determined by 1311a, and the determined set value is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. When the setting switch 1311a sets the display permission of the set value after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a, the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. It has become like.

Specifically, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key cylinder is clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating the setting switch by 60 degrees toward. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and the maximum When the set value 6 which is a value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. Subsequently, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off, and then 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM.

When confirming the currently set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key is inserted clockwise 60. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a to the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a has the current set value (set value 1 to set when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM. The set value among the values 6) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

In this way, the set value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6) that is advantageous for the player is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, by proceeding with the game based on this set value, it is possible to provide the player with the game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, since the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310 g, the set value stored and held in the main control built-in RAM can be confirmed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided as a reception port provided in the game area 5a as a fixed start winning opening of FIG. 235. The main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 is provided as a game control means capable of advancing the game based on entering the ball into the 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, a setting switching button 1311b provided on a setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as a selection means, a selection permission setting means, and a determination means. A setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 is provided. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b mainly controls the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b as a selection signal by selecting one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. It can be output to the substrate 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can output a signal of turning on the setting key 1311a as a selection permission signal for permitting the selection of the set value by the setting changeover button 1311b to the main control board 1310X, and the setting changeover button 1311b. The setting value selected by is determined and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a can be output to the main control board 1310X as the determination signal.

The detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, is transmitted to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as another control means provided separately from the main control board 1310X. It is supposed to be entered.

The main control board 1310X is predetermined as a storage means in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X of FIG. 253, and as a signal effective control means in the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. A process of setting a value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A after determining that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, and a step in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 as a signal invalidation control means. In the determination of S18, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, and the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 0 in step S20B. The main control side of FIG. 175 as the setting change control means. The setting change process of step 37 in the power-on process is included. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. In the determination in step S18 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, which is the signal effective control means, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20A. The process of setting the value 1 can enable the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal. In the determination of step S18 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the signal invalidation control means, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, and the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set in step S20B. The process of setting the value 0 can invalidate the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal. The setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the setting change control means, is predetermined in the determination of step S18 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 175, which is the signal effective control means. The process of determining that the set value change permission condition is satisfied and setting the value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A is a selection signal, that is, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and a determination signal. When the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is enabled, the set value can be stored and held in the main control built-in RAM.

Before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a, the pachinko machine 1 is preset by the power switch 630a so that the setting key ON signal, which is the selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, can be input. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (specifically, first, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) is confirmed, and then the main body with respect to the outer frame 2 The work of opening the frame 4 is performed, then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the following procedure, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1), and the setting key ON, which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, is turned on. When a signal is input, it is determined in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, which is a signal valid control means, that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and setting change permission is permitted in step S20A. By the process of setting the value 1 to the flag CS-FLG, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal, are enabled and set. When the set value selected by the changeover button 1311b is determined by the setting switch 1311a, the determined set value is determined by the setting change process of step 37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the setting change control means. It is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a, the pachinko machine 1 is preset by the power switch 630a so that the setting key ON signal, which is a selection permission signal from the setting switch 1311a, cannot be input. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (specifically, first, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) is confirmed, and then the main body with respect to the outer frame 2 The work of opening the frame 4 is performed, then the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without performing the procedure of turning on the setting key 1311a at all.) Is not input, and it is determined in step S18 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, which is the signal invalidation control means, that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, and the setting is made in step S20B. By the process of setting the value 0 to the change permission flag CS-FLG, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b, which is a selection signal, and the decision key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a, which is a determination signal, are invalidated. It has become.

In this way, the set value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6) that is advantageous for the player is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, by proceeding with the game based on this set value, it is possible to provide the player with the game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided as a reception port provided in the game area 5a, such as the fixed start winning opening 4813 of FIG. 235. The game progresses based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, etc., which are drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. It can be performed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 and a setting changeover button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 as the first operation unit. The RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 253 as the second operation unit, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X of FIG. 253 as the storage means, and the information storage control means. As the information erasure control means, the process of step S38 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side of FIG. 175 is provided. The setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b can accept the first operation capable of changing the setting of the set value. The RAM clear switch 1310f is separate from the setting switch 1311a and the setting changeover button 1311b, and can accept a second operation capable of clearing other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. .. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 can control to store and hold the set value which is the first information in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, it is possible to control to erase the game backup information which is the second information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It can be done.

When the setting switch 1311a and the setting changeover button 1311b receive the first operation during the period in which the first operation can be received, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 identifies the main control built-in RAM. After controlling to store and retain the set value which is the first information in the area, the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 stores and retains the set value in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is possible to control the deletion of the game backup information, which is the second information to be performed.

Specifically, when performing the first operation that can change the setting of the set value, first, before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is inserted into the setting key of the cylinder. Is inserted, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed, so that the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the processes of steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). That is, the "period during which the first operation can be accepted" is the steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. It is the period until the processing of. Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and is maximum. When the set value 6 which is the value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the set value is controlled to be displayed on the setting display 1310 g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). The process of ~ S222 is repeated.). Subsequently, in order to determine the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned OFF, and then rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the game backup information is initialized).

When the RAM clear switch 1310f accepts the second operation during the period in which the second operation can be accepted, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is the first in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The second process in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is stored and retained in an area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, without performing control to store and retain the set value which is information. It is possible to control the deletion of the game backup information, which is information.

Specifically, when performing a second operation capable of clearing an area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, first, the power switch 630a is pressed while the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the main control MPU 1310a (the processes of steps S14 and S16A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). That is, the “period during which the second operation can be accepted” is the steps S14 and S16A in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 after the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. It is the period until the processing of. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the game backup information is initialized).

In this way, the game backup information, which is the second information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, is received by the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, or by the RAM clear switch 1310f. Since it can be deleted by accepting the second operation, it is possible to give a variation to the method of erasing the game backup information which is the second information by the staff such as the clerk of the game hall. Therefore, it is possible to have variations in the erasing method.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided as a reception port provided in the gaming area 5a as a fixed start winning opening of FIG. 235. A game is played based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, etc., which are drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. Can proceed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as an operating means, a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, and a main control of FIG. 256 as a selection means. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information storage control means, and the step in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information erasure control means. The main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 is provided as the process of S38 and the start execution control means. The RAM clear switch 1310f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b is one of a set value 1 to a set value 6 in the mode of changing the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM as a plurality of start-up operation setting information that can be executed when the game machine is started. The set value can be selected.

As described as the mode of setting the change of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM (modification example (1) by the common hardware configuration described above), the movable body (accessory) to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "all operations (operation of a movable body (role), lighting of a light emitting body)" is assigned as a setting value 1 to the operation and lighting of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. As the setting value 2, the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "the operation of the movable body (accessory)" is assigned, and as the setting value 3, the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitting body" is assigned, and the set value. As 4, "Detailed movement of the movable body (feature) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, interference check with other structures and other movable bodies (features), other movable bodies (features)" ) Is assigned to the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "operation order, etc.)", and as the setting value 5, "light emitter 1 port unit (main control MPU 1310a predetermined output port unit (that is, for each output port)" is assigned. The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter according to)" is assigned, and the actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "no operation" is assigned as the setting value 6.

The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting switch 1311a can allow the selection of the set value which is the start-up operation setting information by the setting changeover button 1311b, and can determine the set value which is the start-up operation setting information. .. The setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 controls to store and hold the set value, which is the start-up operation setting information determined by the setting switch 1311a, in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It is something that can be done. The process of step S38 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side in FIG. 175 can control to erase the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The timer interrupt process on the main control side of FIG. 177 can control the start-up of the game machine based on the set value which is the start-up operation setting information stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. is there.

When the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after the setting switch 1311a allows the selection of the set value which is the start-up operation setting information, the start-up operation setting selected by the setting changeover button 1311b The set value which is the information is determined by the setting switch 1311a, and the set value which is the operation setting information at startup is stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM by the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. The information that is retained and stored in an area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 and stored in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The pachinko machine 1 is started by the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 177 based on the set value which is the held start-up operation setting information.

Specifically, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key cylinder is clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating the setting switch by 60 degrees toward. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the processes of steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and is maximum. When the set value 6 which is the value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). ~ S222 is repeated). Subsequently, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off, and then 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (performs the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175), and the main control side power supply in FIG. 175. In the process of step S40 of the on-time processing, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the initial setting, and the game proceeds based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without allowing the setting value to be selected, which is the operation setting information at startup, by the setting switch 1311a, and the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period. When the unit is operated, the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, and the main control built-in RAM The pachinko machine 1 is started by the timer interrupt process on the main control side of FIG. 177 based on the set value which is the operation setting information at the time of starting which is stored in the specific area.

Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. When the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310a is in a predetermined period from the start of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175 to the processing of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, after that, in the process of step S38 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175. Clear the areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, set the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the initial setting in the process of step S40 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, and set the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of.

In this way, the setting value which is the startup operation setting information selected from any one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is the plurality of startup operation setting information that can be executed at the time of starting the pachinko machine 1. Is stored in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, so that the operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175, the information is stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The pachinko machine 1 can be started based on the set value which is the operation setting information at the time of starting. Therefore, it is possible to have variations in the activation method.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as a launching means is provided as a reception port provided in the gaming area 5a as a fixed start winning opening of FIG. 235. The game can be advanced based on entering the ball into the 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A as an operating means, a power switch 630a of FIG. 7 as a power-on means, and a main control of FIG. 256 as a selection means. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X of FIG. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information storage control means, and the step in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175 as the information erasure control means. It includes the processing of S38. The RAM clear switch 1310f has a pressing operation unit as an operation unit. The power switch 630a can turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The setting switching button 1311b can select any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting information advantageous to the player. The main control built-in RAM can store and retain various information even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The setting switch 1311a can allow the setting value to be selected by the setting switching button 1311b, and can determine the setting value. The setting change processing in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 can control the setting information determined by the setting switch 1311a to be stored and held in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The process of step S38 in the process of turning on the power of the main control side in FIG. 175 can control to erase the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the power switch 630a turns on the pachinko machine 1 after the setting switch 1311a allows the selection of the set value, the setting switch 1311a determines the set value selected by the setting changeover button 1311b. The determined set value is stored and held in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the information stored and held in a region other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 in step S38. It is designed to be erased by processing.

Specifically, when changing the setting of the set value, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting key cylinder is clockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating the setting switch by 60 degrees toward. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the processes of steps S18 and S20A in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 are performed). Subsequently, when the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting changing board 1310Y is input from the setting changing board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a increases by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y, and is maximum. When the set value 6 which is the value is reached, the value returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g (step S216 in the setting change process of FIG. 178). ~ S222 is repeated). Subsequently, when determining the set value, the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off, and then 60 degrees counterclockwise. The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (rotated). This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X (the process of step S222 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area (set value dedicated area) of the main control built-in RAM (the process of step S224 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 is performed). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a clears other areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the processing of step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 is performed).

When the power switch 630a turns on the pachinko machine 1 without allowing the setting information to be selected by the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated within a predetermined period, the main The information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the control built-in RAM is erased by the process of step S38 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 175.

Specifically, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is not rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175. When the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175 is started, the main control MPU 1310a is in a predetermined period from the start of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175 to the processing of step S14. It is determined whether or not the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, and when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, after that, in the process of step S38 of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175. Clears areas other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this way, the set value determined by selecting any one of the plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6) that is advantageous for the player is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, by proceeding with the game based on this set value, it is possible to provide the player with the game for each set value. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, after the setting switch 1311a enables the selection of the setting information, the power switch 630a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting switch 1311a determines the setting information selected by the setting switching button 1311b. Based on the information stored and held in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175 in step S38. The pachinko machine 1 is turned on by the power switch 630a without being allowed to select the setting information by the setting switch 1311a and the "information erasing due to the setting change" that is deleted by the process, and within a predetermined period. Based on the operation of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the information stored and held in the area other than the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 175. It is possible to erase the information of either one of the "information erasure accompanying the operation of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f" that is erased by the process of.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, etc., which are drawn by the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means, etc. From the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b and the lower vibration detection switch 3006b of FIG. 237 as the vibration detection unit capable of detecting the vibration. The main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 253 are provided as control means capable of monitoring the detection signal of the above and controlling various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. 91A as a game effect device. There is. Since the main control board 1310X can transmit various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 can control various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board With the 1510, it is possible to control various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 which is a game effect device.

Of the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board 1310X detects vibration during activation (12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds)) of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET as a predetermined period during which the game progresses. Based on the detection signals from the switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b, the situation where a fraudulent act of giving vibration to the pachinko machine 1 is performed is stepwise by controlling various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3. It is possible to notify to.

Specifically, as a case of stepwise notification, the main control MPU 1310a sets the first notification mode as weak notification when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is equal to or less than the threshold value TH. This first notification is provided by a clerk in the game hall so as not to make the player who is playing the game on the pachinko machine 1 adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 playing the door uncomfortable at an early stage when the door is detected. When a staff member or a staff member passes through the front of the pachinko machine 1 that is performing a slapstick, it is possible to notify that fact. For example, the door in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are set to emit light in which they blink red for 5 minutes.

The main control MPU 1310a creates a weak notification command that is classified into a notification display that is the first notification mode, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, and uses this transmission information as main peripheral serial data for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process in step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, and when the analyzed command includes a weak notification command, The light emission mode generation schedule data and the like set for the weak notification are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Of the light emitting data arranged in time series, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration in the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A according to the light emitting data indicated by the pointer. The light emitting mode is such that a plurality of LEDs mounted on the substrate 456 blink red for 5 minutes.

Then, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC is not equal to or less than the threshold value TH, that is, when the value of the abnormal vibration counter AVC exceeds the threshold value TH, the main control MPU 1310a sets the second notification mode as a strong notification. Do. This second notification is stronger than the first notification mode described above, and it is possible for a clerk or a clerk who patrols the game hall to rush to the pachinko machine 1 where the slapstick is being performed. For example, various decorative substrates in the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the plate upper right decoration unit 275, the plate lower left decoration unit 280, the plate lower right decoration unit 285, and the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top unit 450 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 in the door frame top unit 450 each blink red for 5 minutes. At the same time, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to emit white blinking for 5 minutes, and in addition to the warning sound for strong notification, "vibration is detected". The strong notification announcement "was done" was set to a sound mode in which the sound mode was set to flow for 90 seconds from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.) at the maximum volume, and further, the external appearance shown in FIG. A signal is output to the hall computer of the game hall via the terminal plate 558 to inform that the slapstick is being performed, and further, an unauthorized player who is slapstick is prevented from playing any more games. In order to stop the game, a value 1 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG that can prevent the game ball from being launched toward the game area 5a.

The main control MPU 1310a creates a strong notification command that is classified into a notification display, which is the second notification mode, stores the transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and informs the hall computer that the transmission information is being performed. The output of penetration to be transmitted is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, and uses this transmission information as main peripheral serial data for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command analysis process in step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, and when the analyzed command includes the Dotsukigoto strong notification command, The light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, etc., which are set in the strong notification, are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 configures the light emission mode generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Among the light emission data arranged in the time series, according to the light emission data indicated by the pointer, the plate upper left decoration unit 270, the plate upper right decoration unit 275, the plate lower left decoration unit 280, and the plate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91A. A plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards in the lower right decorative unit 285 and the effect operation unit 300, and mounted on the door frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 in the door frame top unit 450, respectively. The plurality of LEDs are flashing red for 5 minutes, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450 are flashing white for 5 minutes. In the sound data output process of step S1018 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 185, the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data already set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Among them, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in which the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a according to the sound command data indicated by the pointer, reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and is strong according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Incorporate the warning sound for notification and the sound data of the announcement for strong notification that "vibration has been detected", set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, and set various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center) from the set output channel. Output to speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.).

Further, the main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and the main control MPU 1310a is determined based on the output information. From the output terminal of the output port, a signal for transmitting to the hall computer that the interrupt is being performed is output to the external terminal board 558.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a firing permission signal because the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 in the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. As the logic of, it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The main control MPU 1310a reads output information from the output information storage area described above in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and based on this output information, the main control MPU 1310a determines a predetermined output port. The output terminal outputs the game ball to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the launch control unit 633b makes it impossible to launch the game ball toward the game area 5a. As a result, the game is stopped so that the illegal player who plays the game cannot play any more games.

In this way, detection from the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b during the activation (12 milliseconds (0.012 seconds)) of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET, which is a predetermined period during which the game progresses. Based on the signal, it is possible to control various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 to gradually notify the situation where a fraudulent act of vibrating the pachinko machine 1 is being performed. Even if the vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b detect the vibration generated when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 of FIG. 10, which is in a situation where the game cannot proceed, the main control Of the board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board 1310X does not determine that it is a fraudulent act of giving vibration to the pachinko machine 1, and does not erroneously notify the vibration generated when the pachinko machine 1 is opened as an abnormal vibration. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous notification as abnormal vibration.

In the above embodiments, the following solutions are included as technical ideas for the following background technologies and solutions.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a vibration sensor (vibration detection unit) for detecting the vibration of the game board is provided to detect fraudulent acts such as hitting the game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42689 (paragraph). [0026] and FIG. 2)).

[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional game machine, when the vibration sensor detects the vibration generated when the glass frame (door frame) is opened from the front frame (main body frame) in which the game cannot proceed, it is falsely reported as an abnormal vibration. There was a risk of knowing.

[Means to solve problems]
(Solution I)
A game machine capable of advancing a game based on a lottery result by a lottery means, a vibration detection unit capable of detecting vibration, a detection signal from the vibration detection unit, and a game production device. The control means includes a control means capable of controlling, and the control means performs a fraudulent act of giving vibration to the game machine based on a detection signal from the vibration detection unit during a predetermined period in which the game progresses. A game machine characterized in that the game effect device is controlled to notify the situation in a stepwise manner.

In this game machine, the game can proceed based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the vibration detection unit capable of detecting the vibration and the detection signal from the vibration detection unit are monitored and the game effect is produced. It is provided with a control means capable of controlling the device.

The control means controls the game production device step by step to control the situation in which a fraudulent act of giving vibration to the game machine is performed based on the detection signal from the vibration detection unit during a predetermined period in which the game progresses. It can be notified.

In this way, based on the detection signal from the vibration detection unit during the predetermined period in which the game progresses, the situation in which a fraudulent act of giving vibration to the game machine is performed is stepwise controlled by the game production device. Since it is possible to notify, for example, even if the vibration detection unit detects the vibration generated when the door frame is opened from the main body frame in which the game cannot proceed, the control means can be used. It is not judged to be a fraudulent act that gives vibration to the game machine, and the vibration generated at the time of opening is not erroneously notified as an abnormal vibration. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous notification as abnormal vibration.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 corresponds to the “lottery result by the lottery means”, and is shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 corresponds to a game machine, the vibration detection switch 3005 in FIG. 237, and the lower vibration detection switches 3006a and 3006b correspond to a vibration detection unit, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 in FIG. 91A serve as a game production device. Correspondingly, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 253 correspond to the control means, and "during the activation of the vibration discrimination effective timer VDET" corresponds to "a predetermined period in which the game proceeds", and the first The notification and the second notification correspond to "stepwise notification".

(Solution II)
The gaming machine according to the solution I, wherein the gaming machine is a rotating body type gaming machine.

Since the gaming machine is a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, the action and effect of the solution I can be obtained in the rotating cylinder type gaming machine. As a basic configuration of the rotating drum type game machine, after displaying a symbol information string composed of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel sequences with a plurality of symbol information) in a variable manner, the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed. The variable display means is provided, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the starting lever), and based on the operation of the stopping operating means (for example, the stop button) or the passage of a predetermined time. And stop the variable display of the symbol information. Then, a profit-giving state generating means for generating a profit-giving state (big hit game state) is provided on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and a medal is used as a game medium to generate a profit-giving state. It is configured so that a large number of medals are sometimes paid out.

(Solution III)
The gaming machine according to the solution I, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a rotating body type gaming machine are fused.

Since the gaming machine is a fusion gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, the action and effect of the solution I is effective in the fusion gaming machine that is a fusion of the pachinko gaming machine and the rotating cylinder type gaming machine. can get. As a basic configuration of a fusion game machine that combines a pachinko game machine and a rotating body type game machine, a symbol information sequence consisting of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel sequences with a plurality of symbols) is displayed in a variable manner. Later, a variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information is provided, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operating means (for example, the starting lever), and the stopping operating means (for example, stopping) is started. The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the button) or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, a profit-giving state generating means for generating a profit-giving state (big hit game state) is provided on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and a game ball is used as a game medium, and the profit-giving state is provided. It is configured so that a large amount of game balls are paid out when it occurs.
In the gaming machines of the above-mentioned solutions I to III, false alarm can be prevented as abnormal vibration.

In addition, the above embodiments also include the following technical ideas.
"A game machine in which a ball rolling member for rolling a game ball is provided in a game area visible to the player.
The ball rolling member is
A ball flow path having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion and curved in an annular shape or an arc shape so that a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall portion is applied to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall portion.
A ball guiding portion provided in the ball flow path and capable of guiding the game ball to a position slightly distant from the peripheral wall by coming into contact with the lower side of the center of the game ball rolling on the bottom wall is provided. Game machine. "
According to such a technical idea, it is possible to provide a game machine provided with a ball rolling member capable of preventing actual damage caused by slapstick.
In addition, in order to ensure that the ball guiding portion is submerged under the game ball by vibration, the shape of the ball guiding portion is a wedge-shaped cross section that tilts downward toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion of the game ball. Is good.

Further, from the above, the embodiment includes the following technical ideas.
"A game machine that plays a predetermined game using a game medium and is provided with a display device for production in the game area.
The display device (third display device) is
Display members that can variably display characters, figures, images, etc.
It has a display frame that supports the display member, and has.
The display frame is
A frame body variably mounted within the game area,
A gaming machine including a movable part variably attached to the frame body. "
In such a game machine, the position or posture of the display member is changed by changing the frame body within the game area while producing an effect by an image or the like by the display member of the display device, and the movable part is further changed with respect to the frame body. By moving it, the effect of the display member can be effectively enhanced.

Although the present invention has been described above with respect to the embodiment, in the embodiment, regarding the third display device 4818 which is an example of the display device, the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 are raised and lowered by the third display device 4818. Although it is changed by 4897, a drive source different from the elevating device 4897 may be provided so that the operations of the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 are made independent. By doing so, a more complicated production can be performed.

Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (reel or a reel) can be used by using a game medal. It can also be applied to slot machines that rotate reels). Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 265, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002, and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310X is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are displayed. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a game machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310X, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310X. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

In the main control board 1310X, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310X generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal insertion slot 6008 becomes the ball insertion slot 6008', and in the main control board 1310X, a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball insertion slot 6008' as a game medium, and the start lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310X generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the saucer 6026.

The above description includes the following technical ideas a.
(Technical Thought A)
A plurality of game machines provided with game control means capable of advancing the game based on the game balls launched by the launching means entering the entrance provided in the game area, which is advantageous for the player. The selection means capable of selecting any one of the setting information of the above and outputting the selection signal to the game control means via the first transmission path and the setting information selected by the selection means are determined. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are mutually provided with a determination means capable of outputting a determination signal to the game control means via a second transmission path different from the first transmission path. A game machine characterized in that it is arranged apart from each other.

This game machine is provided with a game control means capable of advancing the game based on the ball launched by the launching means entering the entrance provided in the game area.

This game machine is provided with selection means and determination means. The selection means can select any one of a plurality of setting information that is advantageous to the player and output the selection signal to the game control means via the first transmission path. The determination means can determine the setting information selected by the selection means and output the determination signal to the game control means via a second transmission path different from the first transmission path. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are arranged so as to be separated from each other.

In this way, when any one of the plurality of setting information that is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting information is determined, the game based on the determined setting information is advanced, so that each setting information is determined. The game can be provided to the player. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Further, by arranging the first transmission path and the second transmission path so as to be separated from each other, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification.

In the present embodiment, for example, the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 corresponds to the launching means, and the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the fixed starting winning port 4813 of FIG. 235, and the electric starting winning port 4871 of FIG. 131 correspond to the launching means. Corresponds to the inlet, the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X of FIG. 151, the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X of FIG. Correspondingly, the setting values 1 to 6 correspond to a plurality of setting information, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b corresponds to the selection signal, and the setting switching provided for the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A. The wiring pattern in which the signal from the button 1311b is transmitted (the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b provided in the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 256 is transmitted) corresponds to the first transmission path. The setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting changing board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting changing board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256 correspond to the selection means, and the setting switch by the setting key K1. The signal of the decision key ON from 1311a corresponds to the decision signal, and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A is transmitted (the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 256). The wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is transmitted) corresponds to the second transmission path, and the setting switches 1311a and 256 provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 144A. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 corresponds to the determination means, and "the wiring pattern to the setting switch 1311a and the wiring pattern to the setting changeover button 1311b are routed to each other on the setting change board 1310Y. In addition to being formed so as not to be present (separated from each other), the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also formed so as not to be separated, and the main control board 1310X is formed. Also, do not allow the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern in which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted to be close to each other. It is formed (separated from each other), and the wiring pattern with which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). The description corresponds to the point that "the first transmission path and the second transmission path are arranged so as to be separated from each other".

[Security structure other than the above in the game settings]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the above embodiment, the change operation means provided in the main control unit 1310 is targeted as the security structure of the game setting, but in addition to that, the security measures of the game setting are used by using the structure of the pachinko machine 1. May be done. Such a security structure will be described below.

[Game setting change device]
As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the embodiment has a frame-shaped outer frame 2 or a box-shaped main body portion that is fixedly attached to the gaming machine installation portion (island equipment) in the facility (game hall). A fixed portion such as 6004 (hereinafter, will be described with reference to the outer frame 2), a door frame 3 formed so as to cover the front surface of the outer frame 2 and rotate in a single-sided manner, and the door frame 3 It has a main body frame 4 which is located on the rear side and is formed so as to be able to rotate in a one-sided manner with respect to the door frame 3 and the outer frame 2, and a game setting of a winning probability by lottery is determined. It is equipped with a game setting change device that can be changed within the range of.
This game setting changing device changes the winning probability of the lottery that determines the winning / losing performed by the main control unit 1310, and pushes or pushes the setting key switch 131Xa that turns ON / OFF with the dedicated setting key. Is a change consisting of a setting switching unit 131Xb that changes the set value of the hit probability by an operation such as rotation, a setting display unit 131Xc that displays the set value of the hit probability, and a power switch 630a of the power supply unit 620c of the pachinko machine 1. It is equipped with an operating means. It should be noted that the element of the change operation means can be arbitrarily set. For example, the power switch 630a may be excluded from the component, or an input key for inputting a password may be added to the component. ..

[How to change the set value by the change operation method]
Next, a method of changing the set value of the hit probability by the changing operation means of the game setting changing device will be described. As a premise for operating the changing operation means, an unlocking step of rotating the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is required, and the operation of the changing operating means including such an unlocking step will be described later.

First, the setting key for changing the setting is inserted into the setting key switch 131Xa, and the power is turned off by the power switch 630a in that state.
Next, the setting key of the setting key switch 131Xa is turned to switch from OFF to ON, and in that state, the power is turned on by the power switch 630a. As a result, the main control unit 1310 switches to the setting change mode, and the current set value of the hit probability is visually displayed on the setting display unit 131Xc by lighting the 7-segment display or the LED. The winning probabilities of the game settings are, for example, "setting 1 = 1 / 20.0", "setting 2 = 1 / 19.8", "setting 3 = 1 / 19.6", and "setting 4 = 1/19". It is set in stages such as ".4", "setting 5 = 1 / 19.2", and "setting 6 = 1 / 19.0".
Next, while looking at the setting display unit 131Xc, operate the setting switching unit 131Xb to change the set value of the hit probability, and when the set value to be changed is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is returned to OFF and extracted. As a result, the set value of the hit probability is fixed, the display of the set value by the setting display unit 131Xc disappears, the setting change mode ends, and the game becomes possible.
To check the current setting value, turn on the setting key switch 131Xa with the setting key for changing the setting while the power is on. After checking, turn off the setting key switch 131Xa and exit the setting key. If so, the display of the set value by the setting display unit 131Xc disappears.
Of course, the procedure of the above-mentioned change method is an example, and may be changed as appropriate according to the combination of elements of the change operation means.

[Specific example of change operation means]
Next, a specific example of the changing operation means of the game setting changing device will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 234, 236, and 266 to 269.

[Specific example 1]
All of the changing operation means of the game setting changing device shown in FIGS. 234 and 236 are installed in the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a of the game board 5.
That is, the changing operation means of the specific example 1 includes a setting display unit 131Xc that is also used by the function display unit 1400, and a setting key switch 131Xa that is arranged diagonally above the vicinity of the function display unit 1400 along the game area 5a. Similarly, the power switch 630a is arranged diagonally above the setting key switch 131Xa, and the operation rod type setting switching unit 131Xb is also arranged diagonally above the power switch 630a.
The game board 5 is detachably attached to the front surface of the main body frame 4, and substantially constitutes a part of the main body frame 4. Therefore, in the game setting changing device shown in FIGS. 234 and 236, all of the changing operation means for changing the set value are provided on the front side of the main body frame 4.
Further, the power switch 630a is a relocation of the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c, and the function of turning the power on and off does not change.

A procedure for changing the set value of the game setting changing device by the changing operation means of the specific example 1 will be described.
First, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked by the locking unit 650 attached to the main body frame 4 as described above, and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are locked. The frame 3 is locked to the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4.
Therefore, before operating the changing operation means, the setting key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 and rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) to lock the door frame 3. After unlocking and rotating only the door frame 3 in the opening direction, the employee stands in front of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) while looking at the opened door frame 3 on the left side (unlocking process).
Then, in that state, the setting value is changed by the changing operation means of the game setting changing device according to the procedure described above, and then the door frame 3 is returned to the original position and locked.
In all the specific examples of the game setting changing device, the door frame opening switch 4a (see FIG. 269) is provided on the door frame 3 to detect the opening of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is opened to enter the setting change mode. When the switch is made, a loud "setting changing" voice is played from the main body frame speaker 622 or the like, and a setting changing signal is transmitted from the external terminal board 558. As a result, the setting change operation of the game setting change device is clearly transmitted to the surrounding persons and the administrator, so that it is difficult for the setting change to be performed illegally. Further, depending on the opening degree of the door frame 3, a voice indicating that the setting is being changed from the main body frame speaker 622 is emitted, for example, when the opening of the door frame 3 is small, the volume is loud, while the opening of the door frame 3 is external. When the angle is larger than an angle that can be easily confirmed (for example, an opening angle of 80 degrees or more), the volume may be set to a medium volume or less, and so on. By doing so, when the door frame 3 has a small opening, it is possible to detect fraud mainly by voice, and when the door frame 3 has a large opening, it is possible to detect fraud mainly by visual inspection, and the door frame 3 is made large. It is possible to reduce the stress caused by sound for the regular setting change work that is performed by opening.

The operation means for changing the game setting changing device of the specific example 1 described above is provided in the upper left corner corresponding to the outside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, but other than that, although not shown, the upper right outside the game area 5a is not shown. It may be provided in a corner, also in the lower left corner, and also in the lower right corner. Further, as shown in FIGS. 266 (a) and 266 (b), the main frame 4 may be provided below the game board 5.
In this case, the change operation means is used against the fraudulent act of a malicious person who opens the door frame 3 to steal the eyes of an employee who is dealing with a trouble such as a ball jam and secretly try to operate the change operation means. At least one element (preferably, a setting switching unit 131Xb for directly inputting a set value) is provided in either the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the game board 5, or a plurality of elements are distributed to both (for example). The setting key switch 131Xa is referred to as the upper right corner, and the setting switching unit 131Xb is referred to as the upper left corner). If there is a change operation means in these positions, it is far from the player sitting in the chair, and the gesture of reaching up is unnatural and there is a high risk that the employee will notice it, so I think of cheating. This can be a psychological pressure to stop. For this reason, since it is difficult for the player to see because the field of view is obstructed by the employee who is located farthest from the player sitting on the chair and works, all of the changing operation means or the upper left corner of the game board 5 is used. It is best to provide a part (preferably a part that is the key to the conversion operation).
On the contrary, when the changing operation means is provided below the game board 5 of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIGS. 266 (a) and 266 (b), it may be disadvantageous in crime prevention because it is close to the player at a low position. However, in response to such a security issue, a stepped portion is formed in the main body frame 4 so as to avoid the open door frame 3 and to form a hidden area 131Xd that is difficult to see from an oblique direction. 131Xe may be provided, and all or part of the changing operation means may be provided in the hidden area 131Xd. In FIGS. 266 (a) and 266 (b), the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe is shaded from the above-mentioned viewpoint (for example, a viewpoint viewed obliquely from the open side (anti-hinge side) of the door frame 3 opened in response to ball clogging). In addition, as shown in the flat or enlarged view of FIG. 266 (a), a recess is further provided and a setting display unit 131Xc by LED is provided, and even if the door frame 3 is unavoidably opened during business hours, the player The set value is almost invisible from. Of course, it is most advantageous in terms of crime prevention measures if all of the changing operation means are provided on the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe, but even if only a part of the changing operating means is provided on the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe, fraud is illegal. It is effective as a crime prevention measure because it becomes difficult to do. In particular, the setting display unit 131Xc of the change operation means can be installed if there is a small step portion 131Xe for arranging the LEDs in a row, so that it is easy to secure an installation place.

[Specific example 2]
The changing operation means of the specific example 2 is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 as shown in FIG. 267. Each element constituting the change operation means is as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.
When the change operation means is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is opened in response to the trouble as described above, the change operation means is eventually located near the player's hand. There is a risk of unauthorized operation by piercing the gap of a member, but in Specific Example 2, unauthorized operation can be easily performed by providing a cover body 131Xg that can be opened and closed on the rear side of the door frame 3 to cover the changing operation means. Cannot be done.
The cover body 131Xg can be rotated in a one-sided opening shape by providing a hinge portion 131Xh on one side, but by providing the hinge portion 131Xh on the free end side of the door frame 3, as shown by the imaginary line of FIG. 267. In addition, the change operation means is hidden from the player by forming a hinge in the open state. Such a cover body 131Xg can also be applied to the specific example 1, and it goes without saying that the changing operation means can be protected in the closed state by providing the hinge portion between the changing operation means and the player. , The change operation means can be hidden from the player's point of view by standing in a tsuitate in the open state.

In Specific Examples 1 and 2, a hole is made in the door frame 3 made of synthetic resin with a heated rod or the like, and the changing operation means may be illegally operated from the hole. It is advisable to provide a protective plate (for example, a metal plate) having excellent heat resistance and rigidity. Of course, by forming the cover body 131Xg with a material having excellent heat resistance and rigidity, an opening / closing type protective plate may be used.

[Specific example 3]
The change operation means of the specific example 3 is such that a part of the change operation means of the specific example 1 or 2 is provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4 and / or on the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the main body frame 4 in the closed state. It was done.
For example, the changing operation means of the specific example 3 includes a power switch 630a integrated with the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 7 in one element, and includes other elements in the specific example 1. Similar to 2 and 2, it is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 and the front side of the main body frame 4. For example, the power switch 630a, which is one element of the changing operation means, may be provided inside the outer frame 2 (fixed portion).
When changing the set value of the game setting changing device by the changing operation means of the specific example 3, the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 as an unlocking step, and the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 130 in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise in front view). After rotating and unlocking the outer frame 2 of the main body frame 4, the key inserted into the cylinder lock 130 is rotated in the reverse direction to unlock the main body frame 4 of the door frame 3 in that state. Each change operation means may be operated as described above. Similar to the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 is also provided with a main body frame opening switch 4b (see FIG. 269) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4, and both the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened and set. When the mode is switched to the change mode, a loud "setting changing" voice is played from the main body frame speaker 622 or the like, and a setting changing signal is transmitted from the external terminal board 558.

As described above, in the change operation means of the specific example 3, since it is necessary to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 in order to execute the change operation, it takes time illegally. If it takes a long time for fraud, the risk of being discovered increases, so it is difficult for the fraudster to recognize it as a model that is difficult to capture, and it becomes difficult to be targeted. Of course, the longer the time required for fraud, the higher the detection rate.

[Setting auxiliary device for change operation means]
FIG. 268 is a perspective view showing a setting assisting device 131Xi that can correspond to any of the changing operation means of Specific Examples 1 to 3.
The setting auxiliary device 131Xi is a portable size device case 131Xj, a setting key 131Xk for setting change that at least matches the setting key switch 131Xa, an auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl for operating the setting switching unit 131Xb, and a game setting changing device. Auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm, which acquires and visually displays the setting information of the above, is provided.

The setting key 131Xk corresponding to the setting key switch 131Xa protrudes to the rear side of the device case 131Xj, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the auxiliary key lever 131Xn protruding to the front side of the device case 131Xj.

The auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl that operates the setting switching unit 131Xb manually operates (rotates), for example, the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo (hexagon wrench) protruding to the rear side of the device case 131Xj and the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo. It is composed of an auxiliary input unit 131Xp for the purpose. The game setting changing device on the pachinko machine 1 side has a structure in which the setting switching unit 131Xb can be rotated by a hexagon wrench of the same standard as the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo in accordance with the auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl. If the setting switching unit 131Xb and the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo of the game setting changing device are set to a combination of special standards, the setting switching unit 131Xb cannot be changed unless the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo is used. , Security performance is improved.

The auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm that acquires the setting information of the game setting changing device and displays it visually converts the round-axis optical sensor 131Xq and the light signal acquired by the optical sensor 131Xq into a visible display. It is composed of an auxiliary setting display means 131Xr to be displayed. The setting display unit 131Xc of the game setting changing device has a round hole shape into which the optical sensor 131Xq can be fitted, and the set value is unilaterally set by invisible means such as blinking light in the back of the round hole. The blinking of the light is acquired by the optical sensor 131Xq and converted into a visible display by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. Therefore, since the set value of the game setting changing device can be viewed only through the auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm, the security performance is improved because the set value is not known to a person who does not have the setting auxiliary device 131Xi.

According to the setting assisting device 131Xi, when changing the setting value of the changing operation means in the above manner, after the unlocking step of opening the door frame 3, the setting key 131Xk of the setting assisting device 131Xi is firmly inserted all the way to the root. The auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo (hexagon wrench) of the auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl fits into the setting switching unit 131Xb in the order of length, and the optical sensor 131Xq of the auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm fits into the round hole of the setting display unit 131Xc. If the optical sensor 131Xq is settled at the end while being guided by the setting key 131Xk and the auxiliary setting connecting portion 131Xo in this way, damage to the delicate optical sensor 131Xq can be prevented.

Next, with the setting auxiliary device 131Xi set as described above, the power of the power switch 630a (see Specific Examples 1 to 3 for the position of each power switch 630a), which is one element of the changing operation means, is turned off to assist. When the setting key 131Xk is turned with the key lever 131Xn to switch the setting key switch 131Xa to ON, and the power switch 630a is turned ON in that state, the mode is switched to the setting change mode. Then, the setting information emitted as a one-sided light signal behind the round hole of the setting display unit 131Xc is read by the optical sensor 131Xq and visually displayed by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. While visually checking with the means 131Xr, the auxiliary input unit 131Xp is manually rotated to change the set value.
Then, when the planned set value is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is returned to OFF, the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is removed from the pachinko machine 1, and the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is locked to complete the setting work.

The illustrated setting auxiliary device 131Xi is provided with a schedule display unit 131Xs for displaying the set value to be changed, in addition to the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr for displaying the current set value. The set value to be changed is input in advance to the internal data of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi together with the individual number of the pachinko machine 1.
On the other hand, the setting display unit 131Xc of the game setting changing device of the pachinko machine 1 transmits its own individual number as an optical signal together with the current setting value, and reads it with the optical sensor 131Xq of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi. As a result, the set value of the target pachinko machine 1 to be changed is displayed.
Therefore, the person who changes the setting is the auxiliary input unit of the auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl until the setting value of the change schedule displayed on the schedule display unit 131Xs and the display of the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr indicating the current setting value match. Since 131Xp may be rotated, the setting work can be performed efficiently, and setting mistakes are unlikely to occur.

Further, the auxiliary input unit 131Xp of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is driven by an electric means (not shown), and in the setting change mode, at least the schedule display unit 131Xs indicating the set value to be changed is hidden and the auxiliary input unit 131Xp is automatically operated. If it is rotated and the completion of the setting change is displayed by, for example, the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr being lit all at once, the person who performs the setting work does not know the set value of the hit probability, so the employee can tell the hit probability. There is no risk of information leaking from the high-priced pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between concrete examples and technical ideas]
The game setting changing devices of Specific Examples 1 and 2 correspond to the following embodiments of the technical idea.
"A frame or box-shaped fixed part that is fixedly attached to the game machine installation part in the facility,
A door frame formed so as to cover the front surface of the fixed portion and rotate in a single-sided manner.
A gaming machine having a main body frame that is located on the rear side of the door frame and is formed so as to be able to rotate in a one-sided manner with respect to the door frame and the fixed portion.
It is equipped with a game setting change device that can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range.
A game machine characterized in that all of the changing operation means for changing the set value of the game setting changing device are provided on the rear side of the door frame and / or on the front side of the main body frame. "
According to such a game machine, when changing the setting of the hit probability with the game setting changing device, it is sufficient to rotate the door frame mainly provided with the production parts, so that there is a risk of disconnection when rotating. And even if the door frame is rotated, the inside of the island equipment is blocked by the main body frame, so the risk of damage to the ball circulation equipment due to dropping foreign matter such as tools is small, and employees As a result, the risk of fraudulent parts being placed on the back side of the game machine is small. In addition, since there is almost no risk that the counter settings of the out ball and safe ball will shift even if the door frame is rotated, there is almost no risk of data failure due to the deviation of the counter settings, and the door frame is equipped with a ball tank. Since it is lighter than the door, it has the effect of reducing the physical burden of changing settings.

The game setting changing device of the specific example 3 corresponds to the following embodiment of the technical idea.
[Technical Thought of Specific Example 3]
"A frame or box-shaped fixed part that is fixedly attached to the game machine installation part in the facility,
A door frame formed so as to cover the front surface of the fixed portion and rotate in a single-sided manner with respect to the fixed portion.
A gaming machine having a main body frame that is located on the rear side of the door frame and is formed so as to be able to rotate in a one-sided manner with respect to the door frame and the fixed portion.
It is equipped with a game setting change device that can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range.
A part of the changing operation means for changing the set value of the game setting changing device is provided on the rear side of the door frame and / or the front side of the main body frame, and another part of the changing operating means is provided after the main body frame. A gaming machine provided on the fixed portion on the side and / or on the rear side of the main body frame in a closed state. "
According to such a game machine, since it is necessary to unlock the door frame and the main body frame in order to execute the change operation, it takes time illegally. If it takes a long time for fraud, the risk of being discovered increases, so it is difficult for the person who plans the fraud to recognize it as a model that is difficult to capture, and it becomes difficult for it to be targeted.

The security structure of the game setting using the structure of the pachinko machine 1 has been described above. In addition to the above, for example, the main control unit 1310 automatically clears the internal RAM by switching to the setting change mode. However, a RAM clear switch for manually clearing the RAM of the main control unit 1310 may be provided near the change operation means so that the maintenance of the gaming machine including the change of the hit probability can be efficiently performed.

Further, in the above, the game setting changing device can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range, but as already explained, to a specific entrance (for example, fixed start winning opening 4813). It may be possible to change the ball entry probability (character lottery).
Specifically, the control number No. of FIG. 257. The excitation time (ms) of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in No. 20 was set to "setting 1 = 324", "setting 2 = 320", and "setting 3 to setting 6 = 316", and the control number No. of FIG. 258 was set. Even if the excitation time (ms) of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 in 21 is set to "setting 1 to setting 3 = 428", "setting 4 = 420", "setting 5 = 416", and "setting 6 = 412". Good. By doing so, the time when the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are stopped at a disadvantage to the player changes, so that the probability of entering a specific receiving port changes. The target of change in settings 1 to 3 is the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the target of change in settings 4 to 6 is the second electric distribution piece 4840, so that the places where the change in movement appears are dispersed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to detect the change due to the setting change.

Further, in the above, the pachinko machine is illustrated as the game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine, an arrange ball machine, and the fusion machine, and further, a plurality of drums using a game medal. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate (rotary drums or reels).

1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine)
3 ... Door frame (opening and closing part)
5a ... Game area 101a ... Door window (window)
420… Placement area (predetermined part)
450… Door frame top unit (front decoration)

Claims (1)

While proceeding with the game based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
A decorative board on which multiple electronic components are mounted,
It is a game machine equipped with
Among the decorative substrates, a multicolor light emitter capable of emitting light in multiple colors is mounted on the surface mounting surface of the specific decorative substrate.
The surface mounting surface of the specific decorative substrate has a specific notation portion in which a white coating film is formed on substantially the entire surface and is formed in yellow on the white coating film so that the multicolor light emitter can be specified. However, only electronic components with a white exterior are mounted.
A specific electronic component having an exterior color different from white is mounted on the back mounting surface of the specific decorative substrate on which the multicolor light emitter is not mounted.
The multicolor light emitter associated with the specific notation portion formed in yellow increases the emission brightness of the multicolor light emitter by operating an operation unit arranged on the front side of the game machine. The emission brightness can be adjusted by using the means or the emission brightness lowering means for lowering the emission brightness of the multicolor light emitter.
A game machine characterized by that.